Download deflt (f5)

Stonex®R9
TechnicalReferenceManual
Version1.0
Introduction
Purchase
CongratulationsonthepurchaseofaR9instrument.

Tousetheproductinapermittedmanner,pleaserefertothedetailedsafetydirectionsinthe
UserManual.
Productidentification
Symbols
Thetypeandtheserialnumberofyourproductareindicatedonthetypeplate.
Enterthetypeandserialnumberinyourmanualandalwaysrefertothisinformationwhenyou
needtocontactyouragencyorStonex®authorizedserviceworkshop.
Type:
_________________________
SerialNo.:
_________________________
Thesymbolsusedinthismanualhavethefollowingmeanings:
Type

Trademarks
Description
Importantparagraphswhichmustbeadheredtoinpracticeastheyenablethe
producttobeusedinatechnicallycorrectandefficientmanner.
• Stonex®andtheStonex®logoaretrademarksofStonex®Limited
• CompactFlashandCFaretrademarksofSanDiskCorporation
• BluetoothisaregisteredtrademarkofBluetoothSIG,Inc
Allothertrademarksarethepropertyoftheirrespectiveowners.
Introduction
R9|2
Validityofthismanual
ThismanualappliestoStonex®fieldsoftwarerunningonR9instruments.
Duetothedifferentinstrumentsandequipment,somepartsofthemanualmaynotbevalid.
Wheretherearedifferencesbetweentheinstrumentstheyareclearlydescribed.
Introduction
R9|3
TableofContents
Inthismanual
Chapter
Page
1
InstrumentProtectionwithPIN
16
2
USERKey
21
3
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
23
3.1
3.2
3.3
Overview
QUICKSETChangeSettingsto:
QuickSettingFunctions
3.3.1
OrientationWithCompass
3.3.2
PositioningHz/V
3.3.3
MovebyJoystick
3.3.4
CheckRecordedPoint/BacksightPoint
3.3.5
Robotic
3.4
Workingexamples
3.4.1
WorkingExample1‐iLock
3.4.2
WorkingExample2‐Robotic
3.4.3
WorkingExample3‐LossofRobotic
UserInterface
23
24
27
27
30
32
34
37
38
38
39
40
42
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
42
44
46
48
54
4
Keyboard
Screen
OperatingPrinciples
Icons
Symbols
TableofContents
R9|4
5
MainMenu
55
6
5.1
MainMenuFunctions
5.2
Survey
5.3
Programs...
5.4
Manage...
5.5
Convert...
5.6
Config...
5.7
Tools...
Manage...\Jobs
55
57
58
59
61
62
63
64
7
6.1
Overview
6.2
AccessingJobManagement
6.3
CreatingaNewJob
6.4
EditingaJob
6.5
ManagingJobCodes
Manage...\Data
64
65
67
71
74
78
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Overview
AccessingDataManagement
PointManagement
7.3.1
Terminology
7.3.2
CreatingaNewPoint
7.3.3
EditingaPoint
7.3.4
MeanPage
Line/AreaManagement
7.4.1
Overview
7.4.2
CreatingaNewLine/Area
7.4.3
EditingaLine/Area
7.4.4
WorkingExample
TableofContents
78
79
84
84
92
95
99
105
105
106
110
113
R9|5
7.5
7.6
8
9
DataLog
PointSortingandFilters
7.6.1
SortingandFiltersforPoints,LinesandAreas
7.6.2
Point,LineandAreaCodeFilter
7.6.3
StakeoutFilter
Manage...\Codelists
116
118
118
126
128
130
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Terminology
Overview
AccessingCodelistManagement
Creating/EditingaCodelist
ManagingCodes
8.5.1
AccessingMANAGECodes
8.5.2
CreatingaNewCode
8.5.3
EditingaCode
ManagingCodeGroups
130
137
138
140
141
141
144
147
148
150
Overview
ThematicalCoding
9.2.1
ThematicalCodingwithCodelist
9.2.2
ThematicalCodingwithoutCodelist
FreeCoding
9.3.1
FreeCodingUsingaCodelist
9.3.2
FreeCodingwithDirectInput
QuickCoding
SmartCodes
9.5.1
Overview
9.5.2
ConfiguringSmartCodes
150
153
153
157
159
159
163
164
168
168
169
8.6
Coding
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
TableofContents
R9|6
10
9.5.3
CodeBlock
9.5.4
UsingSmartCodes
9.6
CodeandAttributeMismatch
9.6.1
CodeMismatch
9.6.2
AttributeMismatch
Linework
173
176
178
178
180
182
11
10.1
Overview
10.2
PerformingLinework
10.3
CombiningLineworkandCoding
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
182
183
188
193
12
11.1
Overview
11.2
AccessingConfigurationSetManagement
11.3
CreatingaNewConfigurationSet
11.4
EditingaConfigurationSet
Manage...\Reflectors
193
194
196
198
200
13
12.1
Overview
12.2
AccessingReflectorManagement
12.3
CreatingaNewReflector
12.4
EditingaReflector
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
200
201
203
204
205
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
205
206
207
210
212
Overview
AccessingtheDataExportFunctionality
ExportingDatafromaJobtoaCustomASCIIFormat
ExportingDatafromaJobtoanotherDevice
ExportingDatainDXFFormat
TableofContents
R9|7
14
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
214
15
14.1
Overview
14.2
AccessingtheDataImportFunctionality
14.3
ImportingDatainASCIIFormat
14.4
ImportingDatainGSIFormat
14.5
ImportingDatainDXFFormat
Config...\SurveySettings...
214
218
219
221
223
225
15.1
IDTemplates
15.1.1
OverviewofTemplates
15.1.2
AccessingIDTemplateConfiguration
15.1.3
CreatingaNewIDTemplate
15.1.4
EditinganIDTemplate
15.1.5
DeletinganIDTemplate
15.1.6
WorkingExample
15.2
DisplaySettings
15.3
Coding&LineworkSettings
15.4
Offsets
15.5
TargetCheck
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
225
225
228
230
234
236
237
240
247
253
256
258
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
258
264
266
268
273
275
277
16
EDM&iLockSettings
SearchWindows
AutomaticPrismSearch
TPSCorrections
Compensator
InstrumentID
TelescopeAccessories
TableofContents
R9|8
17
Config...\GeneralSettings...
280
18
17.1
Units&Formats
17.2
WizardMode
17.3
UserMenu
17.4
Language
17.5
Lights,Display,Beeps,Text
17.6
StartUp&PowerDown
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
280
289
291
293
294
300
305
18.1
18.2
19
OverallConcept
Interfaces
18.2.1
OverviewofInterfaces
18.2.2
AccessingCONFIGUREInterfaces
18.3
Ports
18.4
Devices
18.4.1
OverviewofDevices
18.4.2
AccessingCONFIGUREDevices
18.4.3
CreatingaNewDevice
18.4.4
EditingaDevice
18.4.5
Device‐RadiosforRemoteControl
18.4.6
Device‐RS232
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
305
309
309
310
312
313
313
314
317
319
320
321
322
20
19.1
GSIOutput
19.2
GeoCOMMode
19.3
ExportJob
Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice
322
330
332
334
20.1
334
RadiosforRemoteControl
TableofContents
R9|9
21
20.2
RS232
Tools...\FormatMemoryDevice
336
337
22
Tools...\TransferObjects...
339
23
Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
341
24
23.1
ApplicationPrograms
23.2
SystemLanguages
23.3
InstrumentFirmware
Tools...\Calculator
341
343
345
347
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
25
Overview
347
AccessingtheCalculator
348
ConfiguringtheCalculator
349
UsingtheCalculator
351
24.4.1
RPNMode
351
24.4.2
StandardMode
354
24.4.3
DescriptionofSoftkeys
358
24.4.4
CallingandClosingtheCalculatorfromanInputFieldforNumeric
Characters
364
Tools...\FileViewer
366
26
Tools...\LicenceKeys
369
27
Tools...\Check&Adjust
371
27.1
27.2
27.3
27.4
371
374
379
381
Overview
DetailsonInstrumentErrors
AccessingCheck&AdjustMenu
ConfigureCheck&Adjust
TableofContents
R9|10
28
27.5
27.6
27.7
27.8
27.9
27.10
27.11
27.12
STATUS
29
28.1
STATUSFunctions
28.2
STATUS:StationInformation
28.3
STATUS:Battery&Memory
28.4
STATUS:SystemInformation
28.5
STATUS:Interfaces...
28.6
STATUS:Bluetooth
28.7
STATUS:Level&LaserPlummet
Functions
406
408
410
413
415
416
417
419
29.1
29.2
EDM
PrismSearchMethods
29.2.1
iLock
29.3
Robotic
29.4
SureBeam
29.5
Illumination
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
419
422
422
426
428
430
431
30.1
30.2
30.3
431
433
436
30
CombinedAdjustment(l,t,i,candiLock)
TiltingAxisAdjustment(a)
CompensatorAdjustment(l,t)
CurrentInstrumentErrors
AdjustingtheCircularLeveloftheInstrumentandTribrach
AdjustingtheCircularLevelofthePrismPole
InspectingtheLaserPlummetoftheInstrument
ServicingtheTripod
Overview
AccessingMapView
ConfiguringMapView
TableofContents
384
390
395
399
400
402
403
405
406
R9|11
30.4
31
MapViewComponents
30.4.1
Softkeys
30.4.2
ScreenArea
30.4.3
Toolbar
30.4.4
PointSymbols
30.5
MapMode
30.5.1
MapViewinMapMode
30.5.2
SelectingPoints,LinesandAreas
30.6
PlotMode‐MapViewScreenArea
30.7
SurveyMode
30.7.1
MapViewinSurveyMode
30.7.2
MapViewinStakingOutSurveyMode
30.7.3
SelectingLinesandAreas
ApplicationPrograms‐General
441
441
443
445
446
447
447
449
453
456
456
458
461
463
Overview
AccessingtheProgramsMenu
32
31.1
31.2
COGO
463
464
465
32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
Overview
AccessingCOGO
ConfiguringCOGO
COGOCalculation‐InverseMethod
32.4.1
Overview
32.4.2
InverseBetweenTwoKnownPoints(Pt‐Pt)
32.4.3
InverseBetweenaKnownPointandaLine(Pt‐Line)
32.4.4
InverseBetweenaKnownPointandanArc(Pt‐Arc)
COGOCalculation‐TraverseMethod
32.5.1
Overview
465
467
474
480
480
482
484
486
489
489
32.5
TableofContents
R9|12
32.6
32.7
32.8
32.9
32.10
32.11
32.12
32.13
32.5.2
TraversewithAzimuth/Bearing
32.5.3
TraversewithAngleRight
COGOCalculation‐IntersectionsMethod
32.6.1
IntersectionwithBearing‐Bearing
32.6.2
IntersectionwithBearing‐Distance
32.6.3
IntersectionwithDistance‐Distance
32.6.4
IntersectionwithByPoints
32.6.5
IntersectionwithTPSObservation‐TPSObservation
COGOCalculation‐LineCalculationsMethod
32.7.1
LineCalculation‐BasePoint
32.7.2
LineCalculation‐OffsetPoint
32.7.3
LineCalculation‐Segmentation
COGOCalculation‐ArcCalculationsMethod
32.8.1
ArcCalculation‐ArcCentre
32.8.2
ArcCalculation‐BasePoint
32.8.3
ArcCalculation‐OffsetPoint
32.8.4
ArcCalculation‐Segmentation
COGOCalculation‐Shift,Rotate&Scale(Manual)
Method
COGOCalculation‐Shift,Rotate&Scale(MatchPts)Method
AreaDivision
32.11.1 Overview
32.11.2 ChoosinganAreatobeDivided
32.11.3 DividinganArea
32.11.4 ResultsoftheAreaDivision
32.11.5 WorkingExample
SelectingaResultfromPreviousCOGOInverseCalculations
ModifyingValuesforAzimuths,DistancesandOffsets
TableofContents
491
496
498
498
504
509
511
515
519
519
526
528
532
532
538
541
543
544
558
564
564
571
576
581
584
588
590
R9|13
33
Setup
33.1
33.2
33.3
33.4
33.5
34
33.6
Stakeout
34.1
34.2
34.3
34.4
594
Overview
AccessingSetup
ConfiguringSetup
SetupMethods
33.4.1
SetupReminder
33.4.2
SetAzimuth
33.4.3
KnownBacksightPoint
33.4.4
OrientationandHeightTransfer
33.4.5
Resection/ResectionHelmert
33.4.6
LocalResection
SetupResults
33.5.1
LeastSquareandRobustCalculation
33.5.2
AdditionalInformation
33.5.3
LocalResectionCalculation
FindingaTargetPoint
594
595
598
607
607
609
617
622
626
627
631
631
637
640
643
646
Overview
AccessingStakeout
ConfiguringStakeout
StakingOut
34.4.1
ElementsoftheGraphicalDisplayintheStakeout
34.4.2
ManualEntryofPointstobeStaked
34.4.3
StakingOutinOrthogonalMode
34.4.4
StakingOutinPolarMode
34.4.5
StakeoutDifferenceLimitExceeded
646
650
653
663
663
665
667
675
679
TableofContents
R9|14
35
Survey‐General
682
36
35.1
AccessingSurvey
35.2
SurveyingPoints
Survey‐AutoPoints
682
684
689
36.1
36.2
36.3
36.4
689
691
699
704
704
707
712
716
37
Overview
ConfiguringAutoPoints
AutoPoints
OffsetPointsofAutoPoints
36.4.1
Overview
36.4.2
ConfiguringOffsetPoints
36.4.3
WorkingExample
Survey‐RemotePoint
37.1
37.2
37.3
37.4
Overview
AccessingRemotePoint
ConfiguringRemotePoint
WorkingExample
AppendixA
716
718
721
723
MenuTree724
AppendixB
MemoryTypes728
AppendixC
DirectoryStructureoftheMemoryDevice729
Index
731
TableofContents
R9|15
1 InstrumentProtectionwithPIN
Description
• TheinstrumentcanbeprotectedbyaPersonalIdentificationNumber.
• IfthePINprotectionisactivated,theinstrumentwillalwayspromptforaPINcodeentry
afterstartingupandbeforeR9MainMenucomesup.
• IfawrongPINhasbeentypedinfivetimes,aPersonalUnblocKingcodeisrequired.
• Referto"17.6StartUp&PowerDown"forinformationonactivatingPINprotection.
• ThischapterexplainstheworkflowofenteringPINandPUK.
Access
• R9EnterSecurityPINCodeisautomaticallyaccessedduringstartinguptheinstrument
when<UsePIN:Yes>inCONFIGUREStartUp&PowerDown,PINCodepageandaPIN
hasbeendefinedbefore.Referto"17.6StartUp&PowerDown".
• R9EnterSecurityPUKCodeisautomaticallyaccessedduringstartinguptheinstrument
whenawrongPINcodehasbeentypedinfivetimes.
R9
EnterSecurityPINCode
OK(F4)
ToacceptthePINcodeandtocontinuewiththe
subsequentscreen.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)
Toturnofftheinstrument.
InstrumentProtectionwithPIN
R9|16
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
PINCode
Userinput
ThePINcodeaspreviouslydefinedinCONFIGURE
StartUp&PowerDown,PINCodepage.Thecorrect
PINcodemustbetypedinwithinfiveattemptsorthe
PUKcodeisrequired.
Nextstep
IFthePINcode
enteredis
THEN
correct
R9MainMenuisdisplayed.Referto"5MainMenu".
wrong
refertoparagraph"R9EnterSecurityPINCodeError:479".
wrongthefifthtime
thePUKcodeisrequired.Refertoparagraph"R9EnterSecurityPIN
CodeError:478".
InstrumentProtectionwithPIN
R9|17
R9
EnterSecurityPINCode
Error:479
OK(F4)
ToreturntoR9EnterSecurityPINCodewhere
aPINcodecanbetypedinagain.
Nextstep
IFthePINcode
enteredis
THEN
correct
R9MainMenuisdisplayed.Referto"5MainMenu".
wrongthefifthtime
thePUKcodeisrequired.Refertoparagraph"R9EnterSecurityPIN
CodeError:478".
InstrumentProtectionwithPIN
R9|18
R9
EnterSecurityPINCode
Error:478
OK(F4)
Tocontinuewiththesubsequentscreen.
Nextstep
OK(F4)toaccessR9EnterSecurityPUKCode.
R9
EnterSecurityPUKCode
OK(F4)
ToacceptthePUKcodeandtocontinuewiththe
subsequentscreen.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)
Toturnofftheinstrument.
InstrumentProtectionwithPIN
R9|19
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
PUKCode
Userinput
ThePUKcodeasgeneratedbyStonex®.ThePUKcode
comeswiththeinstrument.
SerialNo.
Output
Theserialnumberoftheinstrument.Thisisneededto
obtainPUKfromStonex®.
Nextstep
IFthePUKcode
enteredis
THEN
correct
theoldPINcodeisclearedandthePINprotectionisdeactivated.
R9MainMenuisdisplayed.Referto"5MainMenu".
wrong
R9keepsaskingforthecorrectPUKcode.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)toturnofftheinstrument.
InstrumentProtectionwithPIN
R9|20
2 USERKey
Description
TheUSERkeyopenstheuserdefinedmenu.
Userdefinedmenu
Theuserdefinedmenucanbeconfiguredtocontainthemostusedfunctionsorapplication
programs.TheuserdefinedmenucannotbeaccessedwhileinaCONFIGUREXXscreen.Refer
to"17.3UserMenu"fortheconfigurationoftheuserdefinedmenu.
Functionalityoftheuser
definedmenu
Selectinganoptioninthemenucarriesoutthefunctionorstartstheapplicationprogram
assignedtotheoption.
Access
PressUSERtoaccessR9UserMenu:JobName.
R9
UserMenu:JobName
Thisisanexampleofwhatauserdefinedmenucanlooklike.Thesoftkeysandtheirorderis
fixed.Thefunctionsandapplicationprogramswhichareassignedtotheindividualplacesinthe
userdefinedmenucandifferdependingontheconfiguration.
CONT(F1)
Toexecutetheselectedfunction.
CONF(F2)
Toconfiguretheusermenu.
STAT(F3)
ToaccesstheStatusMenu.
USERKey
R9|21
Defineusermenustep‐
by‐step
Thisstep‐by‐stepdescriptionshowshowtoassigntheCONFIGURECoding&Lineworkscreen
tothefirstlineofR9UserMenu:JobName.
Step
Description
1.
SelectMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...\UserMenu.
2.
CONFIGUREUserMenu
SelectUserMenu:<1:CONFCoding&LineworkSettings>.
3.
CONT(F1)
4.
PressUSERand1toaccessCONFIGURECoding&Linework.
USERKey
R9|22
3 QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
3.1 Overview
Description
Frequentlyusedsettingscanbeaccessedquicklyandchangedwiththreekeystrokes.For
examplepressSHIFTUSERand1toturntheiLockonoroff.Thechangeisimmediatelyapplied
andthescreenwhereQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:wasaccessedfromopens.Theworkflow
isnotinterrupted.
Thisscreendisplaysthepossiblesettingstochangeto.Allpossiblesettingshavetwostatesand
allowveryquicksettingchanges.HighlightafieldandpressENTERtochangetothedisplayed
settingorpressthenumbernexttothefunction.

ChangesmadeontheQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:screenarestoredintheactiveconfigu‐
rationset.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|23
3.2 QUICKSETChangeSettingsto:
Access
PressSHIFTUSER.
QUICKSET
ChangeSettingsTo:
Referto"29Functions"forinformationonfunctionsandto"16Config...\InstrumentSettings..."
forinformationoninstrumentsettings.
COMPS(F1)
Toturntheinstrumentusingcompassreadings.
Hz/V(F2)
Toturntheinstrumenttoaspecificentered
position.
JSTCK(F3)
Toturntheinstrumentusingthearrowkeys.
CHKPT(F4)
Tocheckapointortheinstrumentorientation.
R.GO(F5)orR.INT(F5)
R.GO(F5)tostartaniLocksearch,toset<Auto‐
mation:iLock>andtolockontothereflector.
R.INT(F5)tointerruptRobotic.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
iLock
TurnON
ToactivateiLock,<Automation:iLock>.
TurnOFF
TodeactivateiLock,<Automation:None>.
TurnON
ToactivateRobotic,<Automation:Robotic>.
TurnOFF
TodeactivateRobotic,<Automation:None>.
Robotic
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|24
Field
Option
Description
EDMType
ChangetoIR
Toactivatemeasurementstoreflectors,<EDM
Type:Reflector(IR)>.
ChangetoRL
Toactivatereflectorlessmeasurements,<EDM
Type:Reflctrless(RL)>.DeactivatesiLockand
Robotic,<Automation:None>.
ChangetoTRK
Toactivatetrackingwithcontinuousmeasure‐
ments,<EDMMode:Tracking>.
ChangetoSTD
Toactivatesinglemeasurements,<EDMMode:
Standard>.
Hold
Thedisplayedvaluefortheverticalangleisheld
afterDIST(F2)anduntilREC(F3)ispressed,
<V‐Angle:HoldafterDIST>.
Running
Thedisplayedvaluefortheverticalangleis
updatedafterDIST(F2)ispressed,<V‐Angle:
Running>.
Beawarethatafterrestartingtheinstru‐
mentthissettingremainsandisnot
changed.
EDMMode
V‐Angle

ChangeFace
nochoices
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
Tochangethefaceofthetelescope.
R9|25
Nextstep
IF
THEN
asettingistobe
changed
typetheselectionnumberinfrontoftheitemorhighlighttheitemand
pressENTER.
theinstrumentisto COMPS(F1),Hz/V(F2)orJSTCK(F3)toaccessthesubsequentscreen.
beautomatically
Referto"3.3QuickSettingFunctions".
turnedtoaspecific
position
apointortheinstru‐ CHKPT(F4)toaccesstheQUICKSETCheckRecordedPt/Backsight
mentorientationisto Ptscreen.Referto"3.3QuickSettingFunctions".
bechecked
prismistobelocked pressR.GO(F5)toactivateRoboticandstartaniLocksearch.Referto
onto
"3.3.5Robotic".
Roboticistobeinter‐ pressR.INT(F5)tointerruptRobotic.Referto"3.3.5Robotic".
rupted
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|26
3.3 QuickSettingFunctions
3.3.1 OrientationWithCompass
Description
Access

Orientationwith
compassstep‐by‐step
Byusingaconventionalmagneticcompasswhileremotelycontrollingtheinstrument,itis
possibletodeterminethegeneraldirectiontowardswhichtheinstrumentshouldturninorder
toperformatargetsearchtolocatetheprism.
PressCOMPS(F1)intheQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:screen.Referto"3.2QUICKSET
ChangeSettingsto:".
Theinstrumentmustbeconnectedtoaradiotoberemotecontrolledwithacontroller.
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
ON.SelectSetupapplicationprogramtosetuptheinstrument.
33
2.
MainMenu:Survey
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurveyBegin.
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.Turnthetelescope
until<Hz:0.0000g>.
4.
Lookthroughthetelescopewith<Hz:0.0000g>toselectanobject
whichiseasilyrecognisable.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|27
Step
5.
Description
Referto
chapter
Standingattheinstrumentpointthecompasstotheselectedobjectand
turntherotatingdialuntilthe"N"linesupwiththenorthendofthe
compassneedle.
Thecompassdialmustnotbeturnedoncethe"N"islinedup
withthenorthendofthecompassneedle.

6.
Gotothereflector.
7.
SHIFTUSERtoaccessQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:.
8.
QUICKSETChangeSettingsto:
3.3.1
COMPS(F1)toaccessQUICKSETOrientationWithCompass.
9.
QUICKSETOrientationWithCompass
Fromthereflectoraimthe"N"ofthecompasstowardstheinstrument.
Readthehorizontalangleaspointedtobythenorthendofthecompass
needle.
<Hz‐Compass:>Thehorizontalanglereadfromthecompasswhile
aimingtotheinstrument.
<V‐Compass:>Ifthecompassworksasaclinometer,thosevaluescan
alsobeused.

10.
Thehorizontalandverticalanglereadsfromthecompassare
alwaysdisplayedindegreeregardlessofthesystemsettings.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.Theinstrumentturns
tothereflector.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|28
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
For<Automation:iLock>aniLockmeasurementisperformed.Ifno
prismwasfound,theinstrumentturnstothepositiontypedinfor<Hz‐
Compass:>and<V‐Compass:>.
For<Automation:Robotic>theinstrumentlocksontheprismandthe
Roboticiconisdisplayed.Ifnoprismwasfound,theinstrumentturnsto
thepositiontypedinfor<Hz‐Compass:>and<V‐Compass:>.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|29
3.3.2 PositioningHz/V
Description
Access
Hz/Vpositioningstep‐
by‐step
TheQUICKSETPositioningHz/Vscreenisusedwhentheinstrumentisremotecontrolledand
thetelescopeshouldbeturnedtoacertaindirection.
OntheAbsolutepage,angularvaluesfor<Hz‐Angle:>and<V‐Angle:>relatedtothesetorien‐
tationcanbetypedin.
OntheRelativepage,angulardifferencevaluesfor<∆Hz:>and<∆V:>relativetothecurrent
telescopepositioncanbetypedin.Thesevaluesareaddedtothecurrenttelescopepositionto
calculatethenewdirectionforthetelescopetoturnto.
PressHz/V(F2)intheQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:screen.Referto"3.2QUICKSET
ChangeSettingsto:".
Step
Description
1.
QUICKSETChangeSettingsto:
2.
Hz/V(F2)toaccessQUICKSETPositioningHz/V,Absolutepage.
3.
• TopositionwithabsoluteHz/Vanglescontinuewithstep4.
• TopositionwithrelativeHz/Vanglescontinuewithstep6.
4.
QUICKSETPositioningHz/V,Absolutepage
<Hz‐Angle:>Orientedhorizontaldirectionfortheinstrumenttoturnto.
<V‐Angle:>Verticaldirectionfortheinstrumenttoturnto>.
5.
Continuewithstep8.
6.
PAGE(F6)toaccessQUICKSETPositioningHz/V,Relativepage.
7.
QUICKSETPositioningHz/V,Relativepage
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|30
Step
Description
<∆Hz:>Angulardifferenceforthehorizontalangletoturnto.
<∆V:>Angulardifferencefortheverticalangletoturnto.
8.
CONT(F1).Theinstrumentturnstothereflector.
For<Automation:iLock>aniLockmeasurementisperformed.Ifnoprismwas
found,theinstrumentturnstothepositiontypedinfor<Hz‐Angle:>and<V‐Angle:>
or<∆Hz:>and<∆V:>.
For<Automation:Robotic>theinstrumentlocksontheprismandtheRoboticicon
isdisplayed.Ifnoprismwasfound,theinstrumentturnstothepositiontypedinfor
<Hz‐Angle:>and<V‐Angle:>or<∆Hz:>and<∆V:>.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|31
3.3.3 MovebyJoystick
Description
Access
InQUICKSETMovebyJoysticktheinstrumentcanbeturnedusingthearrowkeysonthe
keyboardoftheinstrumentorthearrowkeysdisplayedonthetouchscreen.
WhenQUICKSETMovebyJoystickisaccessed,theSureBeamisturnedonautomatically.
Whenleavingthescreen,theSureBeamisturnedoff.
PressJSTCK(F3)ontheQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:screen.Referto"3.2QUICKSET
ChangeSettingsto:".
QUICKSET
MovebyJoystick
CONT(F1)
ToexitQUICKSETMovebyJoystick.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|32
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
Speed
Output
Displaystherotatingspeedoftheinstrument.Press
thesamearrowkeytochangethespeedfrom‐‐‐‐‐to
slowtomediumtofast.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)toexittheQUICKSETMovebyJoystickscreen.
Movebyjoystickstep‐
by‐step
Step
Description
1.
QUICKSETChangeSettingsto:
2.
JSTCK(F3)toaccessQUICKSETMovebyJoystick.
3.
QUICKSETMovebyJoystick
Usethearrowkeystostartthetelescopemovement.

Pressanarrowkeyagaintospeedupthemovement.Pressanyoftheotherarrow
keyswhiletheinstrumentturnstostopthemovement.
Thebehaviourofthetouchscreenwhenworkingwithacontrollerissimilar.Addi‐
tionaltothearrowkeysastopkeyisdisplayedasaroundkeyinthemiddleofthe
arrowkeys.Pressthestopkeytostoptheinstrumentmovement.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|33
3.3.4 CheckRecordedPoint/BacksightPoint
Description
• TheQUICKSETCheckRecordedPt/BacksightPtscreenistocheckifameasuredpointis
identicaltoapointalreadystoredinthejoboriftheinstrumentsorientationtoabacksight
pointisstillcorrect.
Access
PressSHIFTUSERandCHKPT(F4).
OR
PressUSER.
Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
QUICKSET
CheckRecorded
Pt/BacksightPt
STORE(F1)
ToexitQUICKSETCheckRecordedPt/Back‐
sightPt.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureadistance.
SETBS(F3)
Tosetthestationandorientationoftheinstru‐
mentbytakingasinglemeasurementtoaknown
backsightpoint.Referto"33.4.3KnownBack‐
sightPoint".
MORE(F5)
Todisplayadditionalinformation.
LAST(F6)
Torecall<PointID:>ofthelastcheckedpoint.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|34
SHIFTPOSIT(F4)
Topositiontotheselectedpoint.
For<Automation:iLock>,theinstrumentdoes
aniLocksearch.
For<Automation:Robotic>theinstrument
triestolockontoareflector.
Nextstep
Refertoparagraph"Checkpointstep‐by‐step"forinformationonhowtocheckarecorded
point.
Checkpointstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
QUICKSETChangeSettingsto:
2.
CHKPT(F4)toaccessQUICKSETCheckRecordedPt/BacksightPt.
3.
QUICKSETCheckRecordedPt/BacksightPt
<PointID:>PointIDtobechecked.
<CalculatedAz:>Calculatedazimuthbetweenstationandbacksightpoint.
<CurrentAz:>Currentorientation.
<∆Az:>Differencebetweencalculatedazimuthandcurrentorientation.
4.
POSIT(F5)topositiontothepoint.
5.
DIST(F2)tomeasureadistance.

SETBS(F3)tosetthestationandorientationoftheinstrumentbytakingasingle
measurementtoaknownbacksightpoint.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|35
Step
6.

Description
CONT(F1)toreturntothescreenQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:wasaccessed
from.
Ifastoredpointwaschecked,the<PointID:>forthatpointisrememberedandrecalledwhen
LAST(F6)ispressed.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|36
3.3.5 Robotic
R.GO(F5)

R.INT(F5)


WhenR.GO(F5)ispressed,aniLocksearchisperformed,theinstrumentlocksontothe
reflectorwithoutameasurement.<Automation:Robotic>isset.
R.GO(F5)canbeusedtolockontoaprismlocatedonanunstablesurfaceforexampleonaboat
orneartotheinstrument.
WhentheinstrumentislockedontotheprismthislockcanbeinterruptedwithpressingR.INT
(F5).
R.INT(F5)canbeusedtointerrupttheinstrumentfrombeinglockedontothereflector,for
example,tomarkagroundpoint.
Distancestosideshotpointscannotbemeasuredwhilethelockmodeisinterruptedwith
<Automation:Robotic>.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|37
3.4 Workingexamples
3.4.1 WorkingExample1‐iLock
Description
Application:
MeasurepointswithiLock.
Workingtechnique:
ApplicationprogramSurvey.
Goal:
FindprismwithiLock.
Requirement
<Automation:iLock>.
PrismsearchwithiLock
step‐by‐step
Step
1.
2.
Description
PressALL(F1)inSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
PressDIST(F2)tomeasureadistance.

TheinstrumentsearchesfortheprismwithiLocksearchintheiLockwindow.
3.
Ifaprismwasfound
• Distanceandanglesaremeasuredandstored.
• Theinstrumentpointsinthedirectionoftheprismanddoesnotfollowthe
prismwhenitismoving.
4.
Ifnoprismwasfound
• TheinstrumentturnstothestartingpositionoftheiLocksearch.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|38
3.4.2 WorkingExample2‐Robotic
Description
Application:
MeasurepointswithRobotic.
Workingtechnique:
ApplicationprogramSurvey.
Goal:
FindprismwithRoboticactivated.
Requirement
<Automation:Robotic>.
Prismsearchwith
Roboticstep‐by‐step
Step
1.
2.
Description
PressALL(F1)inSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
PressDIST(F2)tomeasureadistance.
PressR.GO(F5)tolockontothereflectorwithoutmeasurement.


TheinstrumentsearchesfortheprismwithiLocksearchintheAimwindow.
3.
Ifaprismwasfound
• Distanceandanglesaremeasuredandstored.
• Theinstrumentlocksontotheprismandfollowsitsmovements.TheRobotic
iconisdisplayed.
4.
Ifnoprismwasfound
• TheinstrumentturnstothestartingpositionoftheiLocksearch.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|39
3.4.3 WorkingExample3‐LossofRobotic
Description
Requirements
Application:
PointsweremeasuredwithRoboticuntillossoflock.
Workingtechnique:
ApplicationprogramSurvey.
Goal:
Prismsearchafterlossoflock.
•
•
•
•
<Automation:Robotic>
Theinstrumentislockedontotheprism.
Theinstrumentisremotelycontrolled.
<Predictfor:3s>
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|40
Prismsearchafterloss
ofRoboticstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Movetheprismbehindanobjecttomaketheinstrumentloselock.
2.
Theprismpathispredictedforthreeseconds.Theinstrumentturnswiththecalcu‐
latedvelocityanddirectionofthelostprismduringthistime.
3.
Ifaprismwasfoundduringprediction,
• theinstrumentlocksontotheprismandfollowsitsmovements.TheRoboticicon
isdisplayed.
4.
Ifnoprismwasfoundduringprediction,asearchisstarteddependingonthesetting
of<Searchwith:>inCONFIGUREAutomaticPrismSearch
• For<Searchwith:NoSearch>:Nosearchisstarted.
• For<Searchwith:iLock>:AniLocksearchisstartedinadynamicAimwindow
whichiscalculateddependingonthevelocityoftheprism.
• For<Searchwith:LastPoint>and<Automation:Robotic>:Theinstrument
turnsbacktothelaststoredpoint.
5.
Ifprismwasnotfoundwith<Searchwith:>,
• Theinstrumenttelescopestaysattheendpositionofprediction.
• TheSureBeamisactivated.

Referto"3.4.2WorkingExample2‐Robotic"forinformationonhowtoenablelock.
QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER
R9|41
4 UserInterface
4.1 Keyboard
Keys
Key
Description
Alphanumerickeys
• Totypelettersandnumbers.
CE
• Clearsallentryatthebeginningofuserinput.
• Clearsthelastcharacterduringuserinput.
ESC
• Leavesthecurrentmenuordialogwithoutstoringchangesmade.
USER
• Callstheuserdefinedmenu.
ON
• Iftheinstrumentisoff:toturntheinstrumenton.
• Iftheinstrumentison:toaccesstheProgramsmenu.
ENTER
• Selectsthehighlightedlineandleadstothenextlogical
dialog/menu.
• Startstheeditmodeforeditfields.
• Opensalistbox.
SHIFT
• Changesbetweenthefirstandthesecondleveloffunctionkeys.
Arrowkeys
• Movethefocusonthescreen.
FunctionkeysF1‐F6
• Correspondtothesixsoftkeysthatappearonthebottomofthe
screenwhenthescreenisactivated.
UserInterface
R9|42
Keycombinations
Keys
Description
ONplusUSER
Turnstheinstrumentoff,wheninR9MainMenu.
SHIFTUSER
CallsQUICKSETChangeSettingsto.
SHIFT
Pagesup.
SHIFT
Pagesdown.
UserInterface
R9|43
4.2 Screen
Screen
f
a
b
c
g
d
h
i
j
e
k
Elementsofthescreen
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Time
Caption
Title
Screenarea
Messageline
Icons
ESC
CAPS
SHIFTicon
Quickcodingicon
Softkeys
Element
Description
Time
Thecurrentlocaltimeisshown.
Caption
ShowslocationeitherinMainMenu,underONkeyorUSERkey.
Title
Nameofthescreenisshown.
Screenarea
Theworkingareaofthescreen.
Messageline
Messagesareshownfor10s.
Icons
Showsthecurrentstatusinformationoftheinstrument.Referto"4.4
Icons".Canbeusedwithtouchscreen.
ESC
Canbeusedwithtouchscreen.SamefunctionalityasthefixedkeyESC.
Thelastoperationwillbeundone.
UserInterface
R9|44
Element
Description
CAPS
Thecapsmodeforuppercaselettersisactive.Thecapsmodeisacti‐
vatedanddeactivatedbypressingUPPER(F5)orLOWER(F5)insome
screens.
SHIFTicon
ShowsthestatusoftheSHIFTkey;eitherfirstorsecondlevelof
softkeysisselected.Canbeusedwithtouchscreenandhasthesame
functionalityasthefixedkeySHIFT.
Quickcodingicon
Showsthequickcodingconfiguration.Canbeusedwithtouchscreento
turnquickcodingonandoff.
Softkeys
CommandscanbeexecutedusingF1‐F6keys.Thecommandsassigned
tothesoftkeysarescreendependent.Canbeuseddirectlywithtouch
screen.
Scrollbar
Scrollsthescreenareaupanddown.
UserInterface
R9|45
4.3 OperatingPrinciples
Keyboardandtouch
screen
Theuserinterfaceisoperatedeitherbythekeyboardorbythetouchscreenwithsupplied
stylus.Theworkflowisthesameforkeyboardandtouchscreenentry,theonlydifferencelies
inthewayinformationisselectedandentered.
Operationbykeyboard
Informationisselectedandenteredusingthekeys.Referto"4.1Keyboard"forfurtherdetails
ofthekeysonthekeyboardandtheirfunction.
Operationbytouchscreen
Informationisselectedandenteredonthescreenusingthesuppliedstylus.
Operation
Description
Toselectanitem
Tapontheitem.
Tostarttheeditmodeininputfields
Tapontheinputfield.
Tohighlightanitemorpartsofitforediting
Dragthesuppliedstylusfromthelefttothe
right.
Toacceptdataenteredintoaninputfieldand Tapsomewhereelseonthescreenoutsideof
exittheeditmode
theinputfield.
Turninstrumenton
PressandholdONfor2s.
UserInterface
R9|46
Turninstrumentoff
step‐by‐step
Lock/Unlockkeyboard
Step

Description
TheinstrumentcanonlybeturnedoffinR9MainMenu.
1.
PressandholdbothUSERandONsimultaneously.
2.
PressYES(F6)tocontinueorNO(F4)tocancel.
Option
Description
Lock
TolockthekeyboardpressandholdSHIFTfor3s.Themessage’Keyboardlocked’
ismomentarilydisplayedontheMessageLine.
Unlock
TounlockthekeyboardpressandholdSHIFTfor3s.Themessage’Keyboard
unlocked’ismomentarilydisplayedontheMessageLine.
UserInterface
R9|47
4.4 Icons
Description
Thescreeniconsdisplaythecurrentstatusinformationoftheinstrument.
Allocationoficons
a b c d
e
f g h
i
j
iLock/Robotic
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
iLock/Robotic
Reflector
EDM
Compensator/faceI&II
Bluetooth
Line/area
CompactFlashcard
Battery
SHIFT
Quickcoding
TappingtheiconleadstoQUICKSETChangeSettingsto.
Icon
Description
iLockactive.
LowVisibilitymodeisactive.
ShortRangemodeisactive.
Roboticactive.
UserInterface
R9|48
Icon
Description
Roboticactive.Prismbeingfollowed.
Roboticactive.Prismlost.Instrumentlocksontoreflectorifinfieldofview.
iLockSearching.
Prediction.
Reflector
TappingtheiconleadstoMANAGEReflectors.
Icon
Description
360°Prism.
Reflectorless.
Userdefinedprism.
UserInterface
R9|49
EDM
TappingtheiconleadstoCONFIGUREEDM&iLockSettings.
Icon
Description
EDMtype:ReflectorIR,possiblemodesare:STD‐Standard,FAST‐Fast,TRK‐
Tracking,AVG‐Averaging,SYNC‐SynchroTrack
Redlaseristurnedon.
EDMtype:ReflectorlessRL,possiblemodesare:STD‐Standard,TRK‐Tracking,
AVG‐Averaging
EDMtype:LongRangeLO,possiblemodesare:STD‐Standard,AVG‐Averaging
Autopointsarebeingrecordedbytime.
Autopointsarebeingrecordedbydistanceorheight.
Autopointsarebeingrecordedbystop&go.
UserInterface
R9|50
Compensator/
faceI&II
TappingtheiconleadstoCONFIGURECompensator.
Icon
Description
Compensatoristurnedoff.
Compensatoristurnedon,butisoutofrange.
Thecurrentfaceoftheinstrumentisshown,ifthecompensatorandtheHz‐
correctionareturnedon.
Bluetooth
TappingtheiconleadstoSTATUSBluetooth.
Icon
Description
TheInstrumentisBluetoothcapable.
TheBluetoothconnectiononPort3isestablishedandisreadytobeused.
TheBluetoothconnectiononPort3isestablished,activeandiscommunicating
data.
Line/area
TappingtheiconleadstoMANAGEData:JobName.
Icon
Description
Thenumberoflinesandareaswhicharecurrentlyopenintheactivejobis
shown.
UserInterface
R9|51
CompactFlashcard
• Thecapacityofusedspaceisshowninsevenlevels.
• TappingtheiconleadstoSTATUSBattery&Memory.
Icon
Description
TheCompactFlashcardisinsertedandcanberemoved.
TheCompactFlashcardisinsertedandcannotberemoved.
ItisstronglyrecommendednottoremovetheCompactFlashcardtoavoidloss
ofdata.
Noicon
Battery
NoCompactFlashcardisinserted.
• Thestatusandsourceofthebatteryisdisplayed.Ifanexternalbatteryisconnectedandan
internalbatteryisinserted,thentheinternalbatteryisused.
• TappingtheiconleadstoSTATUSBattery&Memory.
Icon
Description
Aninternalbatteryisinsertedandinuse.
Anexternalbatteryisconnectedandinuse.
SHIFT
• Tappingtheiconshowsadditionalsoftkeys.
Icon
Description
Additionalsoftkeysareavailableinthecurrentlyvisiblescreen.
TheSHIFTkeyhasbeenpressed.
UserInterface
R9|52
Quickcoding
• Thequickcodingisdisplayed.VisibleduringSurveyandotherapplicationprogramswhere
itispossibletomeasureapointwithquickcodes.
• Tappingtheiconturnsthequickcodingonoroff.
Icon
Description
Quickcodingisturnedon.Quickcodeswithone/two/threedigitareusedfrom
theactivecodelist.
Quickcodingforquickcodeswithone/two/thredigitisturnedoff.
UserInterface
R9|53
4.5 Symbols
Description
Filter
Thesymbolsprovideinformationregardingsettings.
Symbol
Description
Example
ThefiltersymbolisshownonthePoints,Lines,AreaorMap
pageifapoint,lineorareafilterisactive.
Attributes
Symbol
Description
Example
TheattributesymbolisdisplayedinMANAGECodestoindicate
codesthathaveattributesattached.
Limits
Symbol
Description
Example
Indicatesadefinedlimithasbeenexceeded.
Stakedout
Symbol
Description
Example
ThissymbolisusedinMANAGEData:JobNametoindicate
pointswhichhavebeenstakedout.Thestakedoutflagcanbe
resetinMANAGEStakeoutFilter.
UserInterface
R9|54
5 MainMenu
5.1 MainMenuFunctions
Description

Themainmenuisnormallythefirstscreendisplayedwhentheinstrumentisswitchedon.
IfthePINprotectionisactive,R9EnterSecurityPINCodeisdisplayedfirst.Aftertypinginthe
correctPINcode,themainmenuisdisplayed.
Ifdesired,theinstrumentcanbeconfiguredtostartupwithauserdefinedscreen.Referto"17.6
StartUp&PowerDown".
MainMenu
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
Descriptionofthemain
menufunctions
Mainmenufunction Description
Referto
chapter
Survey
• Tostartmeasuring.
5.2
Programs...
• Toselectandstartapplicationprograms.
5.3
MainMenu
R9|55
Mainmenufunction Description
Referto
chapter
Manage...
• Tomanagejobs,data,codelists,configurationssets 5.4
andreflectors.
Convert...
• Toexportdatafromajobontheinstrumenttoafile 5.5
ontheCompactFlashcardinacustomisedASCII
formatorinDXFformat.
• ToimportASCII,GSIorDXFdatafromafileonthe
CompactFlashcardtoajobontheinstrument.
Config...
• Toaccessallconfigurationparametersrelatedtoa 5.6
survey,theinstrumentandtheinterfaces.
Tools...
• Toformatthememorydevice.
5.7
• Touploadfilesrelevantfortheinstrumentfunction‐
ality,forexample,firmwareandlanguagefiles.
• Totransfernondatarelatedfilesbetweeninstru‐
mentandCompactFlashcard.
• Toperformarithmeticoperationssuchasaddition,
subtraction,multiplication,division,statisticalfunc‐
tions,trigonometricfunctions,conversionsorroots.
• ToviewfilesontheCompactFlashcard.
• Totypeinorloadalicencekey.
• Tocalibratetheinstrument.
MainMenu
R9|56
5.2 Survey
Access
SelectMainMenu:Survey.
Description
Surveyprovidesthefunctionalityusedtoperformthesurvey.
SURVEY
SurveyBegin
CONT(F1)
Toacceptsettingsandtocontinuewithscreen
SURVEYSurvey:JobName.
CONF(F2)
Toconfigureautopointandremotepointmeas‐
urementsfunctionality.
SETUP(F3)
Tosetupstation.AccessesSETUPStation
Setup.
Nextstep
ForMainMenu:Survey
MainMenu
Refertochapter35
R9|57
5.3 Programs...
Access
SelectMainMenu:Programs....
OR
PressON.
Description
Programs...accessestheapplicationprogramsmenu.Thescreenoftheapplicationprograms
menuiscalledR9Programs.
R9
Programs
TheapplicationprogramsmenucontainsallloadedapplicationprogramsincludingSurveyand
Setup.Theyarelistedintheorderinwhichtheywereloaded.
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
Nextstep
ForMainMenu:Programs...\Survey
ForMainMenu:Programs...\Setup
ForMainMenu:Programs...\COGO
ForMainMenu:Programs...\Stakeout
MainMenu
Refertochapter35
Refertochapter33
Refertochapter32
Refertochapter34
R9|58
5.4 Manage...
Access
SelectMainMenu:Manage....
Description
Manage...isusedtomanagethefollowing:
•
•
•
•
•
jobs.
data.
codelists.
configurationsets.
reflectors.
Managementfunctionsincludecreating,selecting,editinganddeleting.
R9
Management
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
MainMenu
R9|59
Nextstep
ForMainMenu:Manage...\Jobs
ForMainMenu:Manage...\Data
ForMainMenu:Manage...\Codelists
ForMainMenu:Manage...\ConfigurationSets
ForMainMenu:Manage...\Reflectors
MainMenu
Refertochapter6.
Refertochapter7.
Refertochapter8.
Refertochapter11.
Refertochapter12.
R9|60
5.5 Convert...
Access
SelectMainMenu:Convert....
Description
Convert...providesaccesstodataexchangeoptions.
R9
ConvertData
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
Nextstep
ForMainMenu:Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
ForMainMenu:Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
MainMenu
Refertochapter13.
Refertochapter14.
R9|61
5.6 Config...
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config....
OR
PressUSERandthenCONF(F2).
Description
Config...accessesallconfigurationparametersrelatedtoasurvey,theinstrumentandtheinter‐
faces.Anychangesmadearestoredintheconfigurationset.
R9
Configuration:
ConfigurationSet
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
Nextstep
ForMainMenu:Config...\SurveySettings...
ForMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...
ForMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...
ForMainMenu:Config...\Interfaces...
MainMenu
Refertochapter15
Refertochapter16
Refertochapter17
Refertochapter19
R9|62
5.7 Tools...
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools....
Description
Tools...providesfunctionalitywhichisnotdirectlyrelatedtosurveyingdata.
ToolsMenu
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
Nextstep
ForMainMenu:Tools...\FormatMemoryDevice
ForMainMenu:Tools...\TransferObjects...
ForMainMenu:Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
ForMainMenu:Tools...\Calculator
ForMainMenu:Tools...\FileViewer
ForMainMenu:Tools...\LicenceKeys
ForMainMenu:Tools...\Check&Adjust...
MainMenu
Refertochapter21
Refertochapter22
Refertochapter23
Refertochapter24.
Refertochapter25.
Refertochapter26
Refertochapter27
R9|63
6 Manage...\Jobs
6.1 Overview
Description
Jobs
• structuresurveyingprojects.
• containallpoints,lines,areasandcodesthatarerecordedandstored.
• canbeusedinStonex®Tools.
• maybestoredontheCompactFlashcard.
Typeofjobs
• Datajobs.Explainedinthischapter.
• Roadjobs.
Defaultjob
AjobcalledDefaultisavailableontheinstrumentafterformattingthememorydevice,
insertingapreviouslyformattedCompactFlashcardordeletingalljobsfromMANAGEJobs
(Device).
Activejob
Theactivejobistheonedataisstoredto.Onejobisalwaysconsideredtheactivejob.After
formattingthememorydevice,thejobDefaultisuseduntilauserdefinedjobiscreatedand
selected.
Whenajobbecomesactive,thenthesortandfiltersettingsofthisjobaresavedinthe
SystemRAM.IftheCompactFlashcardisformattedthentheselastusedsortandfiltersettings
areusedforthejobDefault.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|64
6.2 AccessingJobManagement
Access
SelectMainMenu:Manage...\Jobs.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Fromachoicelistinsomescreens,forexampletheXXBeginscreenofapplicationprograms.
MANAGE
Jobs(Device)
ListedarealljobsstoredontheCompactFlashcard.
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedjobandtoreturntothe
screenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateajob.Referto"6.3CreatingaNewJob".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedjob.Referto"6.4Editing
aJob".
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedjob.
DATA(F5)
Toview,editanddeletepoints,linesandareas
storedwiththejob.Points,linesandareasare
shownonseparatepages.Selectedsortandfilter
settingsapply.Referto"7.3PointManagement".
Manage...\Jobs
R9|65
Nextstep
IFajob
THEN
istobeselected
highlightthedesiredjob.CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnsto
thescreenfromwhereMANAGEJobs(Device)wasaccessed.
istobecreated
NEW(F2).Referto"6.3CreatingaNewJob".
istobeedited
highlightthejobandEDIT(F3).Referto"6.4EditingaJob".
Manage...\Jobs
R9|66
6.3 CreatingaNewJob
Access
Referto"6.2AccessingJobManagement"toaccessMANAGEJobs(Device).
Createjobstep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
InMANAGEJobs(Device)highlightajob.Thesettingsofthisjob,
includingsortandfiltersettings,areappliedtothenewjob.
6.2
2.
NEW(F2)toaccessMANAGENewJob.
STORE(F1)
Tostorethesettingsandtoreturntothescreen
fromwhereMANAGENewJobwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|67
Step
3.
Description
Referto
chapter
MANAGENewJob,Generalpage
<Name:>Auniquenameforthenewjob.Thenamemaybeupto16
characterslongandmayincludespaces.Inputrequired.
<Description:>Twolinesforadetaileddescriptionofthejob.Thiscan
beforexample,worktobeperformedortheclassescontainedinthe
job.Inputoptional.
<Creator:>Theperson’snamewhoiscreatingthenewjob.Input
optional.
<Device:>Thedeviceonwhichthenewjobwillbestored.Depending
ontheinstrumentoptions,thismaybeanoutputfield.
4.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodelistpage.
5.
MANAGENewJob,Codelistpage
9
<Codelist:>Choosingacodelistcopiesthecodestothejob.
6.
PAGE(F6)changestotheAvgepage.
7.
MANAGENewJob,Avgepage
Inordertocheckmeasurements,thesamepointcanbemeasuredmore 7.3.4
thanonce.Ifactivated,anaverageoranabsolutedifferenceiscalcu‐
lated.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|68
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
<AveragingMode:>Definestheaveragingprinciplesformultiple
measuredpoints.<AveragingMode:Average>computestheaverage
forthepositionandtheheight.Pointsexceedingthedefinedlimitsare
markedwith inMANAGEEditPoint,Meanpage.<AveragingMode:
AbsoluteDiffs>computestheabsolutedifferencesbetweentwopoints
selectedfromalistofmeasuredpointswhichareallstoredwiththe
samepointID.Theselectiondeterminestheavailabilityofthesubse‐
quentfieldsforsettingtheacceptableaveraginglimitsorabsolute
differences.
• For<AveragingMode:Average>:
<Method:>Themethodusedforcomputingtheaverage.<Method:
Weighted>calculatesaweightedaveragewhile<Method:No
Weighting>iscalculatinganarithmeticaverage.
<PointstoUse:>Thetypeofpointswhichwillbetakenintoaccount
foraveraging.
<AvgeLimitPos:>and<AvgeLimitHt:>Theacceptabledifference
forthepositionandheightcomponents.
• For<AveragingMode:AbsoluteDiffs>:
<PointstoUse:>Thetypeofpointswhichwillbetakenintoaccount
forabsolutedifferences.
From<Easting:>to<CartesianZ:>Theacceptableabsolutediffer‐
encesforeachcoordinatecomponent.
• For<AveragingMode:Off>:
Manage...\Jobs
R9|69
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
Nootherfieldsareavailable.
8.
STORE(F1)createsthenewjobandreturnstoMANAGEJobs
(Device).
Manage...\Jobs
R9|70
6.4 EditingaJob
Access
Referto"6.2AccessingJobManagement"toaccessMANAGEJobs(Device).
Editjobstep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
InMANAGEJobs(Device)highlightajobtobeedited.
2.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditJob:JobName,Generalpage.
3.
MANAGEEditJob:JobName,Generalpage
Referto
chapter
<Name:>Renamethejob.
<Device:>Cannotbeedited.


Theremainingfunctionalityonthispageisidenticalwiththecreationof 6.3
anewjob.
DATA(F5)accessesMANAGEData:JobName.Toview,editanddelete 7.2
points,linesandareasstoredwiththejob.Points,linesandareasare
shownonseparatepages.Selectedsortandfiltersettingsapply.
SHIFTLOG(F5)accessesMANAGEDataLog:JobName.Toview,edit 7.5
anddeletepoints,linesandareasstoredwiththejob.Points,linesand
areasaresortedbytimeinonelist.
4.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodelistpage.
5.
Arecodesstoredinthejob?
• Ifno,continuewithstep6.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|71
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
• Ifyes,continuewithstep8.
6.
Nocodesarestoredinthejob.
9
MANAGEEditJob:JobName,Codelistpage
<Codelist:<None>>Thisdefaultsettingcanbechanged.Choosinga
codelistcopiesthecodestothejob.AllcodelistsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Codelistscanbeselected.
7.
PAGE(F6)changestotheAvgepage.Continuewithstep10.
8.
Codesarestoredinthejob.
MANAGEEditJob:JobName,Codelistpage



9.
10.
<Codelist:>IfcodeshadbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelist,the
nameofthecodelistisdisplayed.Ifcodeshavebeentypedin,thenthe
nameoftheactivejobisdisplayed.
IMPRT(F2)addsadditionalcodesfromanewcodelisttothejob.The 8
nameofthiscodelistiscopiedtothejob.
SHIFTEXPRT(F2)copiescodesfromthejobtoanexistingornew
codelist.
8
CODES(F4)viewscodescurrentlystoredinthejob.
6.5
PAGE(F6)changestotheAvgepage.
MANAGEEditJob:JobName,Avgepage
Thefunctionalityonthispageisidenticalwiththecreationofanewjob. 6.3
Manage...\Jobs
R9|72
Step


11.
Description
Referto
chapter
DATA(F5)accessesMANAGEData:JobName.Toview,editanddelete 7.2
points,linesandareasstoredwiththejob.Points,linesandareasare
shownonseparatepages.Selectedsortandfiltersettingsapply.
SHIFTLOG(F5)accessesMANAGEDataLog:JobName.Toview,edit 7.5
anddeletepoints,linesandareasstoredwiththejob.Points,linesand
areasaresortedbytimeinonelist.
STORE(F1)storesthechangesandreturnstothescreenfromwhere
MANAGEEditJob:JobNamewasaccessed.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|73
6.5 ManagingJobCodes
Description
Toview,edit,groupandsortallcodescurrentlystoredinthejob.Thefunctionalityofthisscreen
ismainlythesameasforMANAGECodes.Forsimplicity,thefunctionalitywhichisdifferent
fromMANAGECodesisexplainedhere.Referto"8.5ManagingCodes"forinformationon
MANAGECodes.
Accessstep‐by‐step
Availableforjobswhichhaveacodelistattached.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"6.2AccessingJobManagement"toaccessMANAGEJobs(Device).
2.
InMANAGEJobs(Device)highlightajobtobeedited.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditJob:JobName.
4.
InMANAGEEditJob:JobName,PAGE(F6)untiltheCodelistpageisactive.
5.
CODES(F4)toaccessMANAGEJobCodes.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|74
MANAGE
JobCodes
CONT(F1)
ToreturntoMANAGEEditJob:JobName,
Codelistpage.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateanewcode.Referto"8.5.2Creatinga
NewCode".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedcode.AccessesMANAGE
EditCodewherenewattributescanbeaddedto
acodeandlinestylescanbechanged.Referto
paragraph"MANAGEEditCode".
DEL(F4)
Todeleteanexistingcode.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodegroup,the
codetype,thecodedescriptionandthequick
codesifavailable.
SHIFTGROUP(F4)
ToaccessMANAGECodeGroups.Toview,
create,activateanddeactivatecodegroups.
Referto"8.6ManagingCodeGroups".
SHIFTSORT(F5)
ToaccessMANAGESortCodes.Tosortcodesby
codename,codedescription,quickcodeorlast
used.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|75
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thejobcodesdonot CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstothescreenfromwhere
needtobechanged
MANAGEJobCodeswasaccessed.
anewjobcodeistobe NEW(F2).Referto"8.5.2CreatingaNewCode".
created
anexistingjobcodeis highlightthejobcodeandEDIT(F3).Refertoparagraph"MANAGE
tobeedited
EditCode".
MANAGE
EditCode
STORE(F1)
Tostorethecodeincludinganynewlycreated
attributesandtoreturntothescreenfrom
whereMANAGEEditCodewasaccessed.
NEW‐A(F2)
Toaddanewattributetoacode.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattribute
namecanbetypedin.Tohighlight<Attribute
n:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.Thename
of<Attributen:>canbeeditedandanattribute
valuecanbetypedin.
Thebehaviourofthisscreenvarieswiththetypeofcodetobeedited.Thedifferencesare
explainedinthetable.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|76
Typeofcode
Description
Pointcodes
and
Freecodes
• NewattributescanbeaddedwithNEW‐A(F2).
Linecodes
and
Areacodes
• NewattributescanbeaddedwithNEW‐A(F2).
• Thelinestylecanbechanged.Thisnewlinestyleisstoredtothe
code.Itcanbedecidedwhetherornottoupdatethelinestyleofall
previouslystoredlines/areaswiththiscodeinthisjob.
Manage...\Jobs
R9|77
7 Manage...\Data
7.1 Overview
Description
• Dataisagenerictermforpoints,linesandareas.
• Datamanagementistheadministrationofdatastoredintheactivejob.Thisincludes
• viewingdatawiththeirrelatedinformation.
• editingdata.
• creatingnewdata.
• deletingexistingdata.
• filteringexistingdata.
Objects
• Objects
• arepoints,linesandareas.
• haveauniqueidentificationID.ThisisthepointID,thelineIDandtheareaID.
• mayormaynothaveacodeattached.Thisiseitherapointcode,alinecodeoranarea
codedependingonthetypeofobject.Referto"9Coding"forinformationoncoding.
Manage...\Data
R9|78
7.2 AccessingDataManagement
Access
SelectMainMenu:Manage...\Data.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Fromachoicelistinsomescreensforexampleinapplicationprograms.
OR
Taptheline/areaicon.

Theobjectslistedonthepagesbelongtothecurrentlyactivejob.Theobjectslistedandtheir
orderdependontheactivesortandfiltersettings.Anactivefilterforapageisindicatedby totherightofthenameofthepage.Referto"7.6PointSortingandFilters"forinformationabout
sortandfiltersettings.
MANAGE
Data:JobName,
Pointspage
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateapoint.
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedpoint.
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedpoint.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodesifstored
withanypoint,thetimeandthedateofwhenthe
pointwasstored,the3Dcoordinatequality,the
classandtheflagforLinework.
Manage...\Data
R9|79
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTLOG(F4)
Toviewpoints,lines,areasandfreecodesstored
withthejobsortedbytime.Referto"7.5Data
Log".
SHIFTFILT(F5)
Todefinesortandfiltersettings.Referto"7.6
PointSortingandFilters".
Nextstep
IF
THEN
apointistobe
created
highlightthepointandNEW(F2).Referto"7.3.2CreatingaNewPoint".
apointistobeedited highlightthepointandEDIT(F3).Referto"7.3.3EditingaPoint".
aline/areaistobe
managed
MANAGE
Data:JobName,
Lines(X)page;
MANAGE
Data:JobName,
Areas(X)page
PAGE(F6)changestotheLines(X)andAreas(X)page.Refertopara‐
graph"MANAGEData:JobName,Lines(X)page;MANAGEData:Job
Name,Areas(X)page".
Theexplanationsforthesoftkeysgivenbelowarevalidforbothpages.
Thenumberinbracketsnexttothenameofthepageindicatethenumberofopenlines/areas.
Example:Lines(2)/Areas(2)meansthattwolines/areasareopen.
Manage...\Data
R9|80
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreatealine/area.Afterstoringthenewline,
allexistinglinesandareaswhichareopenare
closed.
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedline/area.
CLOSE(F4)andOPEN(F4)
TochangebetweentheoptionsintheOpen
columnofthehighlightedline/area.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodesifstored
withanyline/area,thestarttime,theendtimeof
whenthelastpointwasaddedtotheline/area,
thelengthoftheline,theperimeterandthearea
ofthearea.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTDEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedline/area.
SHIFTFILT(F5)
Todefinesortandfiltersettings.Referto"7.6
PointSortingandFilters".
Manage...\Data
R9|81
Descriptionofcolumns
Column
Description
LineorArea
Thelistedlines/areasalreadystoredintheactivejob.
Open
Thestatusofaline/area.
• Yes
Theline/areaisopen.Measuredpointsareassignedtotheline/area.
• No
Theline/areaisclosed.Measuredpointsarenotassignedtothe
line/area.
CLOSE(F4)andOPEN(F4)changebetweentheoptions.
Manage...\Data
R9|82
Nextstep
IFtheline/area
THEN
managementis
completed
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstothescreenfromwherethis
screenwasaccessed.
istobeopened
highlighttheline/areaandOPEN(F4).
istobeclosed
highlighttheline/areaandCLOSE(F4)
istobecreated
NEW(F2).Referto"7.4.2CreatingaNewLine/Area".
istobeedited
highlighttheline/areaandEDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditLine:
LineIDorMANAGEEditArea:AreaID.Referto"7.4.3Editinga
Line/Area".
istobeviewed
PAGE(F6)untiltheMappageisactive.Referto"30.5MapMode"for
informationaboutthefunctionalityandsoftkeysavailableontheMap
page.
Manage...\Data
R9|83
7.3 PointManagement
7.3.1 Terminology
Description
• Thischapterdescribestechnicaltermsrelatedtodatamanagement.
Coordinatetriplet
• Ameasuredpointconsistsofthreecoordinatecomponents‐twohorizontalcomponentsand
oneverticalcomponent.Thegenerictermforthethreecoordinatecomponentsiscoordinate
triplet.
• Dependingontheclass,apointIDcancontainmorethanonecoordinatetripletofthesame
and/orofdifferentclasses.
Class
Theclassdescribesthetypeofcoordinatetriplet.
Descriptionofclasses
Thefollowingtableshowstheclassesindescendinghierarchicalorder.
Class
Characteristic
Description
CTRL
Type
Controlpoints.Automaticallyassignedtoentered
points.
Instrumentsource
TPSorStonex®Tools
Numberoftriplets
One.
Type
StationpointsetbySetupapplicationprogram.
Instrumentsource
TPSorStonex®Tools
Numberoftriplets
One.
REF
Manage...\Data
R9|84
Class
Characteristic
Description
AVGE
Type
Averagedpointcalculatedwhenmorethanonecoor‐
dinatetripletofclassMEASexistforthesamepointID
unless<AveragingMode:Off>.
Instrumentsource
TPS
Numberoftriplets
One.
Type
• Measuredpointswithanglesanddistances.
MEAS
• Calculatedfromsomeapplicationprograms.
NONE
Instrumentsource
TPSorStonex®Tools
Numberoftriplets
Multiple.Withmorethanonemeasuredcoordinate
triplet,theaverageforthepositionandtheheightcan
becomputed.
Type
Measuredpointswithangles.
Instrumentsource
TPS.
Possiblenumberof
triplets
Unlimited.
Manage...\Data
R9|85
Subclass
Thesubclassdescribescertainclassesindetail.Itindicatesthestatusofthepositionwhena
coordinatetripletwasmeasuredandhowthecoordinatesweredetermined.
Subclass
Description
COGO
IndirectcoordinatedeterminationwithapplicationprogramCOGO.
NONE
Directionisavailablebutnocoordinates.
Heightisavailablebutnopositioncoordinates.
TPS
Measuredwithdistancesandangles.
Fixed(Height)
Manuallyenteredandfixedinheight.
Fixed(Position)
Manuallyenteredandfixedinposition.
Fixed(Pos&Ht)
Manuallyenteredandfixedinpositionandheight.
Manage...\Data
R9|86
Source
Thesourcedescribestheapplicationprogramorfunctionalitythatgeneratedacoordinate
tripletandthemethodwithwhichitwascreated.
Source
Originated
fromapplicationprogram/functionality
ASCIIFile
ConvertData,ImportASCII/GSIDatatoJob
ArcBasePt
COGO,ArcCalculation‐BasePoint
ArcCentrePt
COGO,ArcCalculation‐CentrePoint
ArcOffsetPt
COGO,ArcCalculation‐OffsetPoint
ArcSegmtPt
COGO,ArcCalculation‐Segmentation
COGOAreaDivsn.
COGOAreaDivision
COGOShift/Rtn
COGO,Shift,Rotate&Scale(Manual)
COGO,Shift,Rotate&Scale(MatchPts)
COGOTraverse
COGO,Traverse
GSIFile
ConvertData,ImportASCII/GSIDatatoJob
Intsct(BrgBrg)
COGO,Intersection‐Bearing‐Bearing
Intsct(BrgDst)
COGO,Intersection‐Bearing‐Distance
Intsct(DstDst)
COGO,Intersection‐Distance‐Distance
Intsct(4Pts)
COGO,Intersection‐Bypoints
LineBasePt
COGO,LineCalculation‐BasePoint
LineOffsetPt
COGO,LineCalculation‐OffsetPoint
LineSegmtPt
COGO,LineCalculation‐Segmentation
None
Noinformationonthesourceisavailable
Manage...\Data
R9|87
Instrumentsource
Source
Originated
fromapplicationprogram/functionality
Setup(KnownBS)
Setup,KnownBacksightPoint
Setup(LocRsct)
Setup,LocalResection
Setup(Ori&Ht)
Setup,OrientationandHeightTransfer
Setup(Resect)
Setup,Resection
Setup(ResectH)
Setup,ResectionHelmert
Setup(SetAz)
Setup,SetAzimuth
SrvyAutoOffset
SurveyAutoPoints,automaticallyrecordedwithoffsets
Stakeout
Stakeout
Survey
Survey,measured
Survey(Auto)
SurveyAutoPoints,automaticallyrecorded
Survey(RemPt)
Survey,RemotePoint
Unknown
‐
UserEntered
Manuallyenteredpoint
Theinstrumentsourcedescribeswherethecoordinatetripletwasmeasuredorentered.The
optionsareTPS,Stonex®ToolsorLevel.
Manage...\Data
R9|88
Coordinatequality
Description
TheCoordinateQualityisanindicatorfortheestimatedqualityofthepointcoordinates.The
coordinatequalityofthemeasurementsisusedinpointaveraging.
Column
Description
Est3DCQ
Estimated3Dcoordinatequalityofcomputedposition.
Est2DCQ
Estimatedplancoordinatequalityofcomputedposition.
Est1DCQ
Estimatedheightcoordinatequalityofcomputedposition.
VerticalanglesarealwaysassumingZenithanglesandnotelevationangles.Standarddeviations
ofcirclereadingsrelatetoonefacemeasurements.
200
π
Standarddeviationofcirclereading
ρ=
σ Hz, V rad
σHz, V gon
=
ρ
Manage...\Data
σHz,V
StandarddeviationofcirclereadingifσHz=
σV.
σHz:Standarddeviationofhorizontalcircle
reading.
σV:Standarddeviationofverticalcircle
reading.
R9|89
Standarddeviationofdistancemeasurement
σD = cD + ppm * D
σD
cD
ppm
D
Standarddeviationofdistancemeasure‐
ment.
ConstantpartofEDMaccuracy.
ppmpartofEDMaccuracy.
SlopeDistance.
1Destimatedcoordinatequality
1D CQ = σ2D * cos2 V + σ2Hz, V * D2 * sin2 V
1DCQ Estimatedcoordinatequalityoftheheight.
V
Zenithangle.
2Destimatedcoordinatequality
2D CQ =
σ2D * sin2 V + σ2Hz, V * D2
2DCQ Estimatedhorizontalcoordinatequality.
3Destimatedcoordinatequality
3D CQ =
σ2D + σ2Hz, V * D2 * (1 + sin2 V)
3DCQ Estimatedspatialcoordinatequality.
Manage...\Data
R9|90
WorkingExample1
Instrument:
Angularaccuracy:
EDMaccuracy:
Slopedistance:
Hz:
V:
R92"
2"=6.1728*10‐4gon=>σHz,V=2"*
2mm+2ppmforanIRmeasurement
150m
210gon
83gon
1DCQ=0.00207m 2.1mm
2DCQ=0.00303m 3.0mm
3DCQ=0.00367m 3.7mm
WorkingExample2
Instrument:
Angularaccuracy:
EDMaccuracy:
Slopedistance:
Hz:
V:
R92"
2"=6.1728*10‐4gon=>σHz,V=2"*
2mm+2ppmforanIRmeasurement
7000m
210gon
83gon
1DCQ=0.0927m
2DCQ=0.0972m
3DCQ=0.1343m
Manage...\Data
R9|91
7.3.2 CreatingaNewPoint
Access
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement"toaccessMANAGEData:JobName.
Createpoint
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
MANAGEData:JobName,Pointspage
2.
NEW(F2)toaccessMANAGENewPoint.
3.
MANAGENewPoint,Coordspage
Referto
chapter
<PointID:>Thenameofthenewpoint.TheconfiguredpointID
templateisused.TheIDcanbechanged.
• TostartanewsequenceofpointID’sovertypethepointID.
• ForanindividualnameindependentoftheIDtemplateSHIFT
INDIV(F5).SHIFTRUN(F5)changesbacktothenextIDfromthe
configuredIDtemplate.
EnterapointIDandthecoordinates.
4.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
5.
MANAGENewPoint,Codepage
15.3
Thesettingfor<ThematcCodes:>inCONFIGURECodingSettings
determinestheavailabilityofthesubsequentfieldsandsoftkeys.
Manage...\Data
R9|92
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
• For<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>:
Thecodesfromthejobcodelistareused.
<PointCode:>Allpointcodesofthejobcodelistcanbeselected.
Thedescriptionofthecodeisshownasanoutputfield.
Theattributesareshownasoutput,inputorchoicelistfields
dependingontheirdefinition.
• For<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>:
Codesforpointscanbetypedinbutnotselectedfromacodelist.
<PointCode:>Thecodetobestoredwiththepoint.Acheckis
performedtoseeifapointcodeofthisnamealreadyexistsinthejob.
Ifso,theaccordingattributesareshown.
<Attributen:>Uptoeightattributevaluesareavailable.
6.
Is<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>?
• Ifyes,continuewiththenextrow.


• Ifno,continuewithstep7.
NEW‐A(F2)allowsadditionalattributestobecreatedforthispoint
code.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattributenamecanbetypedin.
Tohighlight<Attributen:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.The
nameof<Attributen:>canbeeditedandanattributevaluecanbe
typedin.
Manage...\Data
R9|93
Step


7.
Description
Referto
chapter
LAST(F4)recallsthelastusedattributevalueswhichwerestoredwith
thispointcode.
DEFLT(F5)recallsthedefaultattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
STORE(F1)storesthenewpointenteredandallassociatedinforma‐
tionandreturnstoMANAGEData:JobName,Pointspage.
Thepropertiesstoredwiththepointare:

Class:CTRL
Subclass:Fixed(Pos&Ht)
Source:UserEntered
Instrumentsource:TPS
ItmayhappenthatapointwiththesamepointIDexistsinthejob.Ifthe 9.6
codesand/orattributevaluesofthenewandtheexistingpointdonot
match,ascreenopenswheretheycanbecorrected.
Manage...\Data
R9|94
7.3.3 EditingaPoint
Access
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement"toaccessMANAGEData:JobName.
Editpointstep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
InMANAGEData:JobName,Pointspagehighlightapointtobeedited.
2.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditPoint:PointID.
Thevisiblepagesonthisscreendependonthepropertiesofthe
pointbeingedited.
3.
Referto
chapter

MANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Coordspage
ItispossibletoeditthepointIDandforpointsof<Class:CTRL>.Other 7.3.1
pointrelateddataisshowninoutputfields.



Pointsof<Class:REF>cannotberenamed.
ChangingthepointIDforapointofanyclassappliesthisnew
pointIDtoallotherpointswiththesameoriginalname,regard‐
lessofclass.
MORE(F5)displaysinformationaboutclass,subclass,estimated3D 7.3.1
coordinatequality,timeanddateofwhenpointwasstored,instrument
sourceandsource.
Changingtheheighttypedoesnoteditthepoint.
4.
Is<Class:MEAS>?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep5.
Manage...\Data
R9|95
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
• Ifno,continuewithstep7.
5.
Theeditedpointis<Class:MEAS>.
PAGE(F6)changestotheObspage.
6.
MANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Obspage
Itispossibletoeditthereflectorheight.
Thestationfromwherethepointwasmeasuredisshowninanoutput
field.

Thereflectorheightisshownandmaybeedited.Changingthe
reflectorheightrecalculatesthepointheight.
Thereflectortypeisshowninanoutputfield.

Thedistancevariables∆Hz,∆V,∆SlopDistareshowninanoutputfield,
wheneverameasurementhasbeentakeninbothfaces.
MORE(F5)displaysthehorizontalangleortheazimuthfromthepoint
totheinstrument.
7.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
8.
MANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Codepage
9.2and9.3
Thepointcodecanbeedited.Allpointcodesinthejobcanbeselected.
Thedescriptionofthecodeisshownasanoutputfield.
Theattributesareshownasoutput,inputorchoicelistfieldsdepending
ontheirdefinition.
Manage...\Data
R9|96
Step




9.
Description
Referto
chapter
Theattributevaluesshowndependon<Attributes:>inCONFIGURE
Coding&Linework.<Attributes:LastUsed>showsthelastused
attributevalueswhicharestoredforthispointcodeintheactive
codelist.<Attributes:DefaultValues>showsthedefaultattribute
valuesforthispointcodeifexisting.
NEW‐A(F2)allowsadditionalattributestobecreatedforthispoint
code.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattributenamecanbetypedin.
Tohighlight<Attributen:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.The
nameof<Attributen:>canbeeditedandanattributevaluecanbe
typedin.
LAST(F4)recallsthelastusedattributevalueswhichwerestoredwith
thispointcode.
DEFLT(F5)recallsthedefaultattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
Is<Class:MEAS>andnooffsetpoint?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep11.
• Ifno,continuewithstep10.
10.
Is<Class:AVGE>?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep13.
• Ifno,continuewithstep15.
11.
Theeditedpointis<Class:MEAS>andnooffsetpoint.
Manage...\Data
R9|97
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
PAGE(F6)changestotheAnnotspage.
12.
MANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Annotspage
Thecommentstobestoredwiththepointcanbeedited.
Continuewithstep15.
13.
Theeditedpointis<Class:AVGE>.
PAGE(F6)changestotheMeanpage.
14.
MANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Meanpage
7.3.4
Allpointsof<Class:MEAS>ofthesamepointIDarelistedsortedby
time.ThesettingsintheUsecolumncanbeedited.
Allfunctionalityandkeysareexplainedinaseparatesection.
15.
STORE(F1)storesthechangesandreturnstoMANAGEData:Job
Name.



Aneditedpointretainsthecreationvaluefor<Time:>.
Changingcoordinatesofapointwhichhasbeenpreviouslyused
inotherapplicationprograms,forexampleCOGO,doesnot
updatetheapplicationresults.
ItmayhappenthatapointwiththesamepointIDexistsinthejob.Ifthe 9.6
codesand/orattributevaluesofthenewandtheexistingpointdonot
match,ascreenopenswheretheycanbecorrected.
Manage...\Data
R9|98
7.3.4 MeanPage
Description
• Inordertocheckmeasurements,thesamepointcanbemeasuredmorethanonce.These
measuredpointsareassignedtheclassMEAS.Thevariousmeasuredcoordinatetripletsfor
onepointcanberecordedusingthesamepointID.Iftheaveragingmodeisactivated,an
averageiscalculatedwhenmorethanonemeasuredcoordinatetripletisavailableforthe
samepointID.
• TheaveragedpointisgiventheclassAVGE.Itischeckedifthedeviationsofeachsinglepoint
arewithinthelimitsconfiguredinMANAGENewJob,AvgepageorinMANAGEEditJob:
JobName,Avgepage.
• Afteraveraging,theMeanpagebecomesavailableinMANAGEEditPoint:PointIDand
accessiblefromtheSurveyapplicationprogramSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Surveypage.
• AvailablefunctionalityontheMeanpagedependsontheselectedaveragingmode.
Averaging
AveragingMode
Theaveragingmodedefinesthecheckswhichareperformedwhenmorethanonesetofmeas‐
uredcoordinatesarerecordedforthesamepoint.Theselectedaveragingmodealsoaffectsthe
behaviouroftheinstrumentwheneditingapointandcalculatingaverages.
Definingtheaveragingmodeandconfiguringthelimits
TheaveragingmodeandthelimitsareconfiguredinMANAGENewJob,Avgepageorin
MANAGEEditJob:JobName,Avgepage.Referto"6.3CreatingaNewJob"andto"6.4Editing
aJob".
Manage...\Data
R9|99
Descriptionofaveragingmodes
Averaging
mode
Description
Average
Whenmorethanonemeasuredcoordinatetripletisrecordedforthesame
point,theaverageforthepositionandtheheightiscomputed.Dependingon
theselectedaveragingmethod,theaveragewillbecomputedweightedor
arithmetic(noweighting).TheclassAVGEisassignedtotheaveragedpoint.
Thehorizontalandheightdistancesfromthemeasuredpointstotheaverage
arecomputedanddisplayedontheMeanpage.
Acheckisperformedthatthedifferencesforthepositionandheightcompo‐
nentsbetweentheaveragedpointandthepointbeingstoreddoesnot
exceedthedefinedlimits.
AbsoluteDiffs
WhatisdescribedaboveforAverageappliesforAbsoluteDiffs.
Additionally,theabsolutedifferencebetweentwopointsselectedfroma
listofmeasuredpointswhichareallstoredwiththesamepointIDare
computedandcheckedforbeingwithinthedefinedlimits.
Off
Averagingfunctionalityisturnedoff.
Withmorethanonemeasuredcoordinatetripletrecordedforthesame
point,noaverageforthepositionandtheheightiscomputed.
Averagingwithpositiononlyorheightonlypoints
Positiononlypoints,heightonlypointsandpointswithfullcoordinatetripletsarehandledin
theaveraging.
Manage...\Data
R9|100
Accessstep‐by‐step
TheMeanpagecanbeaccessedif
<AveragingMode:Average>or<AveragingMode:AbsoluteDiffs>isconfiguredin
MANAGENewJob,AvgepageorinMANAGEEditJob:JobName,Avgepage.
AND
morethanonemeasuredcoordinatetripletisrecordedforthesamepointusingthesame
pointID.
Accesswithindatamanagement
Step
Description
1.
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement"toaccessMANAGEData:JobName.
2.
InMANAGEData:JobName,Pointspagehighlightapointtobeedited.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Meanpage.
AccesswithinSurvey
Step
Description
1.
MainMenu:SurveytoaccessSURVEYSurveyBegin.
2.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Surveypage.
3.
SHIFTAVGE(F2)orSHIFTABS(F2)toaccessSURVEYEditPoint:PointID,Mean
page.
Manage...\Data
R9|101
MANAGE
EditPoint:PointID,
Meanpage
AllmeasuredcoordinatetripletsrecordedusingthesamepointIDareshown.
STORE(F1)
Tostorethechangesandtoreturntothescreen
fromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
USE(F2)
TochangebetweentheoptionsintheUse
columnforthehighlightedcoordinatetriplet.To
includeorexcludethistripletinorfromthe
calculationoftheaverage.Referto"Description
ofcolumns"below.
EDIT(F3)
Toviewandeditthehighlightedmeasuredcoor‐
dinatetriplet.ItispossibletoeditthepointID
andthereflectorheightwithoutimpactonall
otherclassesofthepointwiththesameoriginal
name.Thecoordinatesareupdated.Codes
cannotbechanged.Theaveragepointhasthe
higherpriority.Achangeincodesmustbean
overallchangefortheaveragepoint.
Example:Oneofthemeasuredcoordinate
tripletshasawrongpointIDandshouldnotbe
includedintheaverage.ByeditingthepointID,
thepointisrenamedandnolongercontributes
totheaverage.
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedcoordinatetriplet.The
averageisrecomputed.
MORE(F5)
Tochangebetweentimeanddateofwhenthe
pointwasstoredandthe3Dcoordinatequality.
Manage...\Data
R9|102
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTDIFFS(F5)
Availablefor<AveragingMode:Absolute
Diffs>andYesissetintheUsecolumnfor
exactlytwomeasurements.Todisplaytheabso‐
lutecoordinatedifferences.Differences
exceedingthedefinedlimitareindicatedby .
Descriptionofcolumns
Column
Description
Use
Theuseofameasuredcoordinatetripletintheaveraging.
• Auto
Thecoordinatetripletisincludedintheaveragingcomputationifwithin
theaveraginglimitdefinedinMANAGENewJob,Avgepageorin
MANAGEEditJob:JobName,Avgepage.
• Yes
Thecoordinatetripletisalwaysincludedintheaveragingcomputation
evenifitwouldfalloutsidetheaveraginglimitdefinedinMANAGENew
Job,AvgepageorinMANAGEEditJob:JobName,Avgepage.
• No
Thecoordinatetripletisneverincludedintheaveragingcomputation.
• ‐‐‐‐‐
Thecoordinatetripletcannotbeincludedintheaveragingcomputation.
Automaticallysetbythesystem.
Manage...\Data
R9|103
Column
Description
USE(F2)changesbetweentheoptions.
Time
Thetimethemeasuredcoordinatetripletwasstored.
Date
Thedatethemeasuredcoordinatetripletwasstored.Theformatisas
definedinCONFIGUREUnits&Formats,Timepage.
dPos
Thehorizontaldistancefromthemeasuredcoordinatetriplettotheaverage.
<dPos:‐‐‐‐‐>indicatesunavailableinformation,forexampleforaheightonly
point.
dHt
Theheightdistancefromthemeasuredcoordinatetriplettotheaverage.
<dHt:‐‐‐‐‐>indicatesunavailableinformation,forexampleforaposition
onlypoint.
AvailableformeasuredcoordinatetripletswithAutoorYesintheUse
columnif<AveragingMode:Average>.Indicatesanexceedingofthelimits.
Nextstep
IFameasuredcoor‐ THEN
dinatetriplet
isnottobeviewed
STORE(F1)storesthechangesandreturnstoMANAGEData:Job
Name.
istobeviewed
highlightameasuredcoordinatetripletandEDIT(F3).
Manage...\Data
R9|104
7.4 Line/AreaManagement
7.4.1 Overview
Description
Aline/areaconsistsofpointsandcanbecreated/editedinMANAGEData:JobName.Theindi‐
vidualpointsaremeasuredwithinanyapplicationprogram.Thesecanbeallpoints.Pointscan
besimultaneouslyassignedtooneormorelinesand/orareas.
Aline/areacanhave
• astylefordisplayinMapView.
• acodeindependentofthepointcodeofthepointscomprisingtheline/area.

Pointsareassignedtoaline/areawhentheline/areaisopen.Referto"7.2AccessingData
Management"forinformationonhowtoopenaline/area.
Manage...\Data
R9|105
7.4.2 CreatingaNewLine/Area

Access
Createlinestep‐by‐step
Thefunctionalityofallscreensandfieldsaresimilarforthecreationofbothlinesandareas.The
step‐by‐stepinstructionsforcreatinganewlinecanbeappliedforareas.
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement"toaccessMANAGEData:JobName.
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
MANAGEData:JobName
2.
PAGE(F6)untiltheLines(X)pageisactive.
3.
MANAGEData:JobName,Lines(X)page
4.
NEW(F2)toaccessMANAGENewLine.
5.
MANAGENewLine,Generalpage
Referto
chapter
<LineID:>Thenameofthenewline.TheconfiguredIDtemplatefor
linesisused.TheIDcanbechanged.
• TostartanewsequenceoflineID’sovertypethelineID.
• ForanindividualnameindependentoftheIDtemplateSHIFT
INDIV(F5).SHIFTRUN(F5)changesbacktothenextIDfromthe
configuredIDtemplate.
<PtstoStore:>Thetypeofpointswhichareusedtoformtheline
36.1,36.4
duringasurvey.Selectbetweenallpoints,measuredpoints,autopoints
andoffsetpointsoftype1or2.
Manage...\Data
R9|106
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
<LineStyle:>Thisisthelinestyleinwhichlines/areasarerepresented
inMapViewandStonex®Tools.For<LineCode:<None>>ontheCode
pagealinestylecanbeselectedfromachoicelist.Otherwisetheline
styleasdefinedfortheselectedlinecodeisshown.
Typeinanumberfortheline,selectthepointstobestoredwiththeline
andselectalinestyleifnecessary.
6.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
7.
MANAGENewLine,Codepage
15.3
Thesettingfor<ThematcCodes:>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework
determinestheavailabilityofthesubsequentfieldsandsoftkeys.
• For<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>:
Thecodesfromthejobcodelistareused.
<LineCode:>Alllinecodesofthejobcodelistcanbeselected.
Thedescriptionofthecodeisshownasanoutputfield.
Thelinestyleisshownasdefinedfortheselectedlinecode.Itisthe
styleinwhichlines/areasarerepresentedinMapViewandStonex®
Tools.For<LineCode:<None>>,itcanbechanged.
Theattributesareshownasoutput,inputorchoicelistfields
dependingontheirdefinition.
Manage...\Data
R9|107
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
• For<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>:
Codesforlinescanbetypedinbutnotselectedfromacodelist.
<LineCode:>Thelinecodetobestoredwiththepoint.Acheckis
performedtoseeifalinecodeofthisnamealreadyexistsinthejob.
Ifso,theaccordingattributesaredisplayed.
<Attributen:>Uptoeightattributevaluesareavailable.
Typeinacode.
8.
Is<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>?
• Ifyes,continuewiththenextrow.




9.
• Ifno,continuewithstep9.
NEW‐A(F2)allowsadditionalattributestobecreatedforthislinecode.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattributenamecanbetypedin.
Tohighlight<Attributen:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.The
nameof<Attributen:>canbeeditedandanattributevaluecanbe
typedin.
LAST(F4)recallsthelastusedattributevalueswhichwerestoredwith
thislinecode.
DEFLT(F5)recallsthedefaultattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
STORE(F1)storesthenewlineenteredandallassociatedinformation
andreturnstoMANAGEData:JobName,Lines(X)page.
Manage...\Data
R9|108
Step

Creatinglines/areas
mostefficiently
Description
Referto
chapter
Thevaluefor<StartTime:>withwhichthelineisstoredisthetime 7.4.3
whenSTORE(F1)waspressed.Thesamevalueisassignedtothevalue
for<EndTime:>untilapointisaddedtotheline.
Anyexistinglinesandareaswhichareopenareclosed.
IFthetaskisto
create
THEN
multiplelines/areas usetheusermenufunctionFUNCCreateNewLine(Quick)/FUNC
withsubsequent
CreateNewArea(Quick).Selectingthefunctionfromtheusermenu
line/areaID’s
createsandimmediatelystoresthenewline/area.Fortheline/areaID,
theline/areaIDtemplateasdefinedinCONFIGUREIDTemplatesis
used.Thecodeandattributesaretakenoverfromthelastcreated
line/area.
lines/areaswith
certaincodes
usequickcoding.Thejobcodelistmustcontainquickcodesfor
lines/areas.Bytyingthequickcodeanewline/areaiscreatedand
immediatelystoredwiththatline/areacodeandattributes.Forthe
line/areaID,theline/areaIDtemplateasdefinedinCONFIGUREID
Templatesisused.
Manage...\Data
R9|109
7.4.3 EditingaLine/Area

Thefunctionalityofallscreensandfieldsaresimilarfortheeditingofbothlinesandareas.The
step‐by‐stepinstructionsforeditinganewlinecanbeappliedforareas.
Access
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement"toaccessMANAGEData:JobName.
Editlinestep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
MANAGEData:JobName
2.
PAGE(F6)untiltheLinespageisactive.
3.
InMANAGEData:JobName,Linespagehighlightalinetobeedited.
4.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditLine:LineID.
5.
MANAGEEditLine:LineID,Generalpage
Referto
chapter
ThelineIDandthetypeofpointswhichareusedtoformthelineduring
asurveycanbeedited.Otherlinerelateddataisshowninoutputfields.
<No.ofPts:>Thenumberofpointscontainedwithintheline.
<Length:>Thesumofthedistancesbetweenthepointsinthesequen‐
tialorderinwhichtheyarestoredfortheline.
<StartTime:>and<StartDate:>Thetime/datewhenthelinewas
created.

AlinecannotberenamedtoanalreadyexistinglineID.
Manage...\Data
R9|110
Step

Description
MORE(F5)displays<EndTime:>and<EndDate:>.Thisisthe
time/datewhenthelastpointwasaddedtotheline.Thiscanbe
differenttothetimethepointwascreated.Thevaluesdonotchange
afterdeletingthelastaddedpointoraftereditingunlessanadditional
pointisaddedtotheline.
6.
PAGE(F6)changestothePointspage.
7.
MANAGEEditLine:LineID,Pointspage




Referto
chapter
Allpointsbelongingtothelinearelisted.Thepointthatwasaddedlast
tothelineisatthetopofthelist.
ADD(F2)AccessesMANAGESelectPointwiththePointsandMap 7.2.
page.Toaddanexistingpointfromtheactivejobtotheline.Anewpoint
isaddedabovethepointwhichwashighlightedwhenADD(F2)was
pressed.
EDIT(F3)editsthehighlightedpoint.
7.3.3.
REMOV(F4)removesthehighlightedpointfromtheline.Thepoint
itselfisnotdeleted.
MORE(F5)displaysinformationaboutthepointcodesifstoredwith 7.3.1
theline,thetimeandthedateofwhenthelinewasstored,the3Dcoor‐
dinatequality,theclassandtheflagforLinework.
8.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
9.
MANAGEEditLine:LineID,Codepage
Manage...\Data
9
R9|111
Step




10.

Description
Referto
chapter
Thelinecodecanbeedited.Alllinecodescanbeselected.For<Line
Code:<None>>,thelinestylecanbechanged.
Thedescriptionofthecodeisshownasanoutputfield.
Theattributesareshownasoutput,inputorchoicelistfieldsdepending
ontheirdefinition.
NEW‐A(F2)allowsadditionalattributestobecreatedforthislinecode.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattributenamecanbetypedin.
Tohighlight<Attributen:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.The
nameof<Attributen:>canbeeditedandanattributevaluecanbe
typedin.
LAST(F4)recallsthelastusedattributevalueswhichwerestoredwith
thislinecode.
DEFLT(F5)recallsthedefaultattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
STORE(F1)storesthechangesandreturnstoMANAGEData:Job
Name,Linespage.
Aneditedlineretainsthecreationvaluefor<StartTime:>.Thevalue
for<EndTime:>changeswhenapointwasaddedtotheline.
Manage...\Data
R9|112
7.4.4 WorkingExample
Description
Application:
Pickuppointsalongfencelineswithagate.Thegatecanalsobe
representedasaline.
Somepointsbelongtomorethanoneline.
Setting:
F7isconfiguredtoaccesstheMANAGEData:JobNamescreen.
Referto"2USERKey"onhowtoconfigurehotkeys.
Goal:
Eachpointistobepickeduponce.
Diagram
F3
F2
F1
F4
G1
P1
Fieldprocedure
step‐by‐step
P2
P1
P2
F1
F2
F3
F4
G1
Gatepost
Gatepost
Firstfenceline
Secondfenceline
Thirdfenceline
Fourthfenceline
Gate
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
CreatethelinesF1,F2andG1.
7.4.2
2.
StartSurveyapplicationprogram.
35.1
Manage...\Data
R9|113
Step
Description
3.
PressF7.
4.
MANAGEData:JobName,Lines(X)page
Referto
chapter
ThelineF1mustbeopen,thelinesF2andG1mustbeclosed.
Toopen/closealine,highlightthelineandCLOSE(F4)andOPEN(F4).
5.
CONT(F1)
6.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName

MeasurepointsalongfencelineF1untilthelastpointbeforeP1.These
pointsareautomaticallyaddedtolineF1.
Pointscanbecodedseparately.
7.
PressF7.
8.
MANAGEData:JobName,Lines(X)page
HighlightthelineF2.
OPEN(F4)toopentheline.
9.

HighlightthelineG1.
OPEN(F4)toopentheline.
LineF1staysopen.
10.
CONT(F1)
11.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName
35.1
MeasureP1.Thispointisautomaticallyaddedtoallthreelinesopenat
thattime.
Manage...\Data
R9|114
Step
Description
12.
PressF7.
13.
MANAGEData:JobName,Lines(X)page
Referto
chapter
HighlightthelineF1.
CLOSE(F4)toclosetheline.
14.

HighlightthelineF2.
CLOSE(F4)toclosetheline.
LineG1staysopen.
15.
CONT(F1)
16.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName
35.1
MeasurepointsalonggateG1.Thesepointsareautomaticallyaddedto
lineG1.
17.
Afterfinishingthesurvey,importthedataintoaCADpackage.
IfthelinecodesrequiredbytheCADpackagewereused,thelinesare
automaticallyconnectedandthepointsymbolsareautomaticallyset.
Manage...\Data
R9|115
7.5 DataLog
Description
Alistofallobjectsandfreecodesintheactivejobisdisplayedinorderoftime.
Accessstep‐by‐step
Accesswithindatamanagement
Step
Description
1.
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement"toaccessMANAGEData:JobName.
2.
InMANAGEData:JobNameonthePointspage,SHIFTLOG(F4)toaccessMANAGE
DataLog:JobName.
Accesswithinjobmanagement
Step
Description
1.
MainMenu:Manage...\JobstoaccessMANAGEJobs(Device).
Referto"6.2AccessingJobManagement"forfurtheroptionstoaccessthisscreen.
2.
InMANAGEJobs(Device)highlightajobtobeedited.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditJob:JobName.
4.
SHIFTLOG(F5)toaccessMANAGEDataLog:JobName.
Accessbyuserdefinedmenu
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
MANAGE
DataLog:JobName
InthecolumnDataRecord,allpoints,linesandareasaswellasfreecodesstoredwithinthe
activejobaredisplayed.Theyarealwayssortedbytimewiththemostrecentrecordatthetop.
Forlinesandareas,thevaluefor<StartTime:>isrelevant.
Manage...\Data
R9|116
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Toinsertafreecodebelow,thismeanstimewise
before,thecurrentlyhighlightedobjector
record.Thefunctionalityofinsertingafreecode
isidenticaltothefunctionalityofenteringafree
codeduringasurvey.Referto"9.3FreeCoding".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedobjectorfreecode.Refer
to"7.3.3EditingaPoint","7.4.3Editinga
Line/Area".Thefunctionalityofeditingafree
codeisidenticaltothefunctionalityofenteringa
freecodeduringasurvey.Referto"9.3Free
Coding".
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedobjectorfreecode.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthetypeofdata
recorded,thetimeandthedateofwhenitwas
storedorforlinesandareaswhentheywere
createdandthecodesifstoredwithanyobject.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereMANAGEDataLog:JobNamewasaccessed.
Manage...\Data
R9|117
7.6 PointSortingandFilters
7.6.1 SortingandFiltersforPoints,LinesandAreas
Description
Thesortsettingsdefinetheorderoftheobjectsintheactivejob.Thefiltersettingsdefinethe
objectstobeviewed.

Threetypesoffiltersareavailable:
Pointfilter:
Linefilter:
Areafilter:
AnactivepointfiltershowsselectedpointsinMANAGEData:JobName,
Pointspage.
AnactivelinefiltershowsselectedlinesinMANAGEData:JobName,Lines
(X)page.
AnactiveareafiltershowsselectedareasinMANAGEData:JobName,Areas
(X)page.
Thesortandfiltersettingsarestoredinthejob.Theyarerememberedafterturningoffthe
instrumentandarecopiedtoanewjob.
Whenajobbecomesactive,thenthesortandfiltersettingsofthisjobaresavedinthe
SystemRAM.IftheCompactFlashcardisformattedthentheselastusedsortandfiltersettings
areusedforthejobDefault.


Changingtheactivejobdoesinfluencethesortsettingsfortheobjects.Thefiltersettingsareset
tothoseoftheselectedjob.
AnactivefilterforanobjectisindicatedinMANAGEData:JobNameby locatedontheright
handsideofthepagename.
Manage...\Data
R9|118
Accessstep‐by‐step
MANAGE
Sorts&Filters,
Pointspage
Step
Description
1.
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement"toaccessMANAGEData:JobName.
2.
InMANAGEData:JobNameonthePoints,LinesorAreaspage,SHIFTFILT(F5)to
accessMANAGESorts&Filters.
3.
MANAGESorts&Filters

Thisscreenconsistsofthreepages,oneforeachtypeofobject.Thepageforan
objectisdisplayedwhentheequivalentpageisdisplayedinMANAGEData:
JobName.
Theavailablefieldsonthisscreendependontheselectedsettingfor<Filter:>.
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.Theselected
sortandfiltersettingsareapplied.
CODES(F4)
Availablefor<Filter:PointCode>.Toselectthe
linecodestobeused.
STAKE(F5)
TofilterpointsfortheStakeoutapplication
program.Referto"7.6.3StakeoutFilter".
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Manage...\Data
R9|119
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Sort:>
AscendPointID,
DescendPointID,
ForwardTimeor
BackwardTime
Alwaysavailable.Themethodpointsaresorted
by.
<Filter:>
Alwaysavailable.Themethodthepointsare
filteredby.
NoFilter
Showsallpoints.
HighestClass
Showspointsofhighestclass.
RangeofPtID's
ShowspointswithpointID’sbetweenthe
enteredstartandendID.Thepointsareleft
alignedandsortedbythefirstdigit.
PtIDWildcard
ShowspointswithpointID’smatchingthewild‐
card.
Time
Showspointswhichwererecordedwithina
definedtimewindow.
Class
Showspointsoftheselectedclass.
PointCode
Showspointswithselectedcodesattached.
Referto"7.6.2Point,LineandAreaCodeFilter".
RadiusFromPt
Showspointswithinthedefinedradiusfroma
particularpoint.Theradiusisthehorizontal
distance.
Manage...\Data
R9|120
Field
Option
Description
IndividualLine
Showspointsformingaselectedline.Thismay
forexamplebeusefulduringstakeout.
IndividualArea
Showspointsformingaselectedarea.Thismay
forexamplebeusefulduringstakeout.
<StartID:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:RangeofPtID's>.The
firstpointtobedisplayed.
<EndID:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:RangeofPtID's>.The
lastpointtobedisplayed.
<Wildcard:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:PtIDWildcard>.*and?
aresupported.*indicatesanundefinednumber
ofunknowncharacters.?indicatesasingle
unknowncharacter.
<StartDate:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:Time>.Thedateofthe
firstpointtobedisplayed.
<StartTime:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:Time>.Thetimeofthe
firstpointtobedisplayed.
<EndDate:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:Time>.Thedateofthelast
pointtobedisplayed.
<EndTime:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:Time>.Thetimeofthe
lastpointtobedisplayed.
Manage...\Data
R9|121
Field
Option
Description
<CTRL:>,<ADJ:>,
<REF:>,<AVGE:>,
<MEAS:>,<EST:>,
<NONE:>
ShoworHide
Availablefor<Filter:Class>.Definedclasses
areshownorhidden.
<View:>
Availablefor<Filter:Class>.
HighestTriplet
Thecoordinatetripletsofthehighestclassare
shown.
AllTriplets
Allclassesforonecoordinatetripletareshown.
<PointID:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Filter:RadiusFromPt>.The
pointtowhichtheradiusisapplied.Openingthe
choicelistopensMANAGEData:JobName.
Referto"7.2AccessingDataManagement".
<Radius:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Filter:RadiusFromPt>.The
radiusofthecirclewithinwhichthepointsare
shown.
<LineID:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Filter:IndividualLine>.
OpeningthechoicelistopensMANAGEData:
JobName.Referto"7.2AccessingDataManage‐
ment".
<AreaID:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Filter:IndividualArea>.
OpeningthechoicelistopensMANAGEData:
JobName.Referto"7.2AccessingDataManage‐
ment".
Manage...\Data
R9|122
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheLinespage.Refertoparagraph"MANAGESorts&Filters,Linespage".
MANAGE
Sorts&Filters,
Linespage
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.Theselected
sortandfiltersettingsareappliedandthelistsin
MANAGEDATA:JobNameareupdated.
CODES(F4)
Availablefor<Filter:Code/CodeGroup>.To
selectthelinecodestobeused.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Sort:>
AscendLineID,
DescendLineID,
FwrdStartTime,
BwrdStartTime,
FwrdEndTimeor
BwrdEndTime
Alwaysavailable.Themethodthelinesare
sortedby.
<Filter:>
Alwaysavailable.Themethodbywhichthelines
arefiltered.
NoFilter
Manage...\Data
Showsalllines.
R9|123
Field
Option
Description
Code/CodeGroup
Showslineswithselectedcodesattached.Refer
to"7.6.2Point,LineandAreaCodeFilter"since
thefunctionalityisidenticaltothepointcode
filter.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheAreaspage.Refertoparagraph"MANAGESorts&Filters,Areas
page".
MANAGE
Sorts&Filters,
Areaspage
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.Theselected
sortandfiltersettingsareappliedandthelistsin
MANAGEDATA:JobNameareupdated.
CODES(F4)
Availablefor<Filter:Code/CodeGroup>.To
selecttheareacodestobeused.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
ThefunctionalityofsettingthefiltersisidenticaltothoseontheLinespage.Refertoparagraph
"MANAGESorts&Filters,Linespage".
Manage...\Data
R9|124
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereMANAGESorts&Filterswasaccessed.
Manage...\Data
R9|125
7.6.2 Point,LineandAreaCodeFilter

Accessstep‐by‐step
MANAGE
PointCodeFilter
Foreachobject,acodefilterexists.Thepoint,lineandareacodefiltersareindependentfrom
eachother.Thefunctionalityisidentical.Forsimplicity,thepointcodefilterisexplained.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"7.6.1SortingandFiltersforPoints,LinesandAreas"toaccessMANAGE
Sorts&Filters.
2.
Select<Filter:PointCode>.
3.
CODES(F4)toaccessMANAGEPointCodeFilter.
Thisscreenshowsthepointcodesfromtheactivejobandcodescurrentlyusedasfilter.Point
codesaresortedaccordingtothesettingsinMANAGESortCodes.
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
GROUP(F4)
Toactivateanddeactivatecodegroups.Accesses
MANAGECodeGroups.Anycodegroupthat
havebeenpreviouslydeactivatedaredisplayed
asdeactivatedhere.Codesbelongingtoadeacti‐
vatedcodegrouparenotdisplayedinMANAGE
CodeFilter.Referto"8.6ManagingCode
Groups".
USE(F5)
Toactivateanddeactivatethefilterforthehigh‐
lightedcode.
Manage...\Data
R9|126
NONE(F6)orALL(F6)
Todeactivateoractivateallpointcodes.
SHIFTSORT(F5)
Todefinetheorderofthecodes.Accesses
MANAGESortCodes.
Manage...\Data
R9|127
7.6.3 StakeoutFilter
Description

Accessstep‐by‐step
ThesettingsonthisscreendefineafilterfortheStakeoutapplicationprogram,forexampleto
showpointswhicharealreadystakedorpointsthatarestilltobestaked.
ThestakeoutfilteractsinadditiontoanyotherfiltersetinMANAGESorts&Filters.
Forexample,pointsstilltobestakedoutwithaparticularcodecanbefiltered.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"7.6.1SortingandFiltersforPoints,LinesandAreas"toaccessMANAGE
Sorts&Filters.
2.
InMANAGESorts&Filters,PAGE(F6)untilthePointspageisactive.
3.
STAKE(F5)toaccessMANAGEStakeoutFilter.
MANAGE
StakeoutFilter
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
RESET(F4)
Toresetthestakedflagforallpointsofthe
currentlyactivejob.
Manage...\Data
R9|128
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<View:>
All
Showsallpoints.
Ptsto
Stakeout
Showspointsnotyetstakedout.
StakedPoints Showspointswhicharealreadystakedout.
Manage...\Data
R9|129
8 Manage...\Codelists
8.1 Terminology
Description
Thischapterdescribestechnicaltermsrelatedtocodesandcodelists.

Thevaluesforcodegroups,codesandattributesarecasesensitive.Forexamplethecodegroup
TreeisnotthesameasthecodegroupTREE.
Object
Forcoding,points,linesandareashavethesamebehaviour.Inthischapter,objectisusedas
generictermforpoints,linesandareas.
Codegroup
Acodegroupallowscodesbelongingtothesamethemetobegroupedtogether.Individual
groupscanbeactivatedordeactivated.Thecodesbelongingtoadeactivatedcodegroupcannot
beselectedfromthechoicelistforcodeselection.
Code
Description
Acodeisadescriptionwhichcanbestoredwithanobjectoralone.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|130
Structureofcodes
Codes
Thematicalcodes:
Objectrelatedinformationrecorded
togetherwiththeactualobjectinthefield.
Freecodes:
Timerelatedinformationrecorded
betweenobjectsinthefield.Atimestamp
isrecordedwitheachfreecode.Itallowsto
exportfreecodesandobjectsinachrono‐
logicalordertobeusedforthirdparty
mappingsoftware.
Codetype:
PointcodeLinecodeAreacode
Codetype:
Freecode
Optional:
Quickcode
Optional:
Quickcode
Manage...\Codelists
R9|131
Codetypes
Thecodetypedefineshowandforwhichobjectsacodecanbeused.Itispossibletocreatea
codeofthesamenamebutofdifferentcodetypesbothontheinstrumentandinStonex®Tools.
Example:ThecodeOakcanexistwithcodetypepointcodeandwithcodetypelinecode.
Pointcode:
Linecode:
Areacode:
Freecode:
Quickcode:
Attribute
Torecordacodedirectlywithapoint.Thisisthematicalpointcoding.
Torecordacodedirectlywithaline.Thisisthematicallinecoding.
Torecordacodedirectlywithanarea.Thisisthematicalareacoding.
Torecordacodebasedontimeinbetweenobjects.
Tostartapointmeasurementandstorethecodebytypinginone,twoor
threepredefineddigits.
Description
Theuseofattributesallowsadditionalinformationtobestoredwiththecode.Uptotwenty
attributescanberelatedtoonecode.Attributesarenotcompulsory.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|132
Structureofattributes
Attributes
Attributetype:
NormalMandatoryFixed
Attributevaluetype:
Text
Attributevalueregion:
NoneChoicelist
Manage...\Codelists
RealInteger
Attributevalueregion:
NoneChoicelistRange
R9|133
Attributetypes
Theattributetypedefinestheinputrequirementsfortheattribute.
Normal:
Mandatory:
Fixed:
Aninputfortheattributeisoptional.Theattributevaluecanbetypedinin
thefield.NewattributeswiththisattributetypecanbecreatedinStonex®
Toolsorontheinstrument.
Aninputfortheattributeiscompulsory.Theattributevaluemustbetyped
inthefield.Newattributeswiththisattributetypecanbecreatedin
Stonex®Tools.
Theattributevalueisapredefineddefaultwhichisdisplayedbutcannot
bechangedinthefield.Thisattributevalueisautomaticallyattachedtothe
code.NewattributeswiththisattributetypecanbecreatedinStonex®
Tools.
Attributevaluetypes
Theattributevaluetypedefineswhichvaluesareacceptedasinput.
Text:
Real:
Integer:
Anyinputfortheattributeisinterpretedastext.Newattributeswiththis
attributevaluetypecanbecreatedinStonex®Toolsorontheinstrument.
Aninputfortheattributemustbearealnumber,forexample1.23.New
attributeswiththisattributevaluetypecanbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Aninputfortheattributemustbeanintegernumber,forexample5.New
attributeswiththisattributevaluetypecanbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Attributevalueregions
Theattributevalueregiondefinesiftheattributevaluesmustbeselectedfromapredefinedlist.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|134
None:
Aninputfortheattributemustbetypedin.Newattributeswiththis
attributevalueregioncanbecreatedinStonex®Toolsorontheinstru‐
ment.
Aninputfortheattributemustfallwithinapredefinedrange.New
attributeswiththisattributevalueregioncanbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Aninputfortheattributeisselectedfromapredefinedlist.Newattributes
withthisattributevalueregioncanbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Range:
Choicelist:
Example
Codelist
Code
Attributes
Attributevalue
type
Attributevalue Exampleforthe
region
attributevalueregion
Birch
Height
Real
Range
0.5‐3.0
Condition
Text
Choicelist
Good,Dead,Damaged
Remark
Text
None
‐
Description
Acodelistisacollectionofcodesthatcanbeusedtodescribesurveyedobjectsinthefield.
Elementsofacodelist
• Codegroup
• Code
Manage...\Codelists
• Attributes
R9|135
Structureofacodelist
Structure
Example
Codelist
|
|——Codegroup1
|
|
|——Code1.1
|
|
|
|
|——Attribute1.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|——Attribute...
|
|
|
|
|
|——Attribute1.1.20
|
|
|
|——Code1.2
|
|
|
|
|——Attribute1.2.1
|
|
|
|
|
|——Attribute...
|
|
|
|
|
|——Attribute1.2.20
|
|
|
|——Code...
|
|
|——Codegroup2
|
|
|——Code2.1
|
|
|
|
|——Attribute2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|——...
|
|
|
Codelist
|
|——Trees
|
|
|——Birch
|
|
|
|
|——Height
|
|
|
|
|
|——Condition
|
|
|
|
|
|——Remark
|
|
|
|——Oak
|
|
|
|
|——Circumference
|
|
|
|
|
|——Condition
|
|
|
|
|
|——...
|
|
|
|——...
|
|
|——Infrastructure
|
|
|——Road
|
|
|
|
|——Material
|
|
|
|
|
|——...
|
|
|
Codelisttypes
SystemRAMcodelist:
Jobcodelist:
AcodeliststoredintheSystemRAMoftheinstrument.
Thecollectionofcodescontainedwithinthecurrentlyactivejob.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|136
8.2 Overview

Stepsfromcreatingto
usingacodelist
ItisrecommendedtocreateacodelistinStonex®Tools.Acodelistcanbetransferredfrom
Stonex®ToolstotheSystemRAMoftheinstrumentusingtheCompactFlashcard.
Instrument
Codelist
Management:
Create
codelist
Stonex®Tools
Serial
upload
Tools:Transfer
Compact‐
Flashcard
SystemRAM:SystemRAMcodelist
Selectingcodelist(s)forajob:
Copyofcodes
Job:Jobcodelist
Thecreating,editingandmanagingofcodelistsisexplainedinthischapter.
Inordertouseacodelistontheinstrument,itmustbetransferredfromtheCompactFlashcard
totheSystemRAM.Referto"22Tools...\TransferObjects...".
Manage...\Codelists
R9|137
8.3 AccessingCodelistManagement
Access
SelectMainMenu:Manage...\Codelists.
OR
Fromachoicelistinsomescreens,forexampleMANAGENewJob,Codelistpage.
MANAGE
Codelists
ListedareallcodelistsstoredintheSystemRAM.
CONT(F1)
Toreturntothescreenfromwherethisscreen
wasaccessed.Ifthisscreenwasaccessedfroma
choicelist,thecodesfromthehighlighted
codelistarecopiedtotheactivejob.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateacodelist.Referto"8.4
Creating/EditingaCodelist".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedcodelist.Referto"8.4
Creating/EditingaCodelist".
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedcodelist.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecreatorandthe
dateofwhenthecodelistwascreated.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|138
Nextstep
IFacodelist
THEN
istobeselected
highlightthedesiredcodelist.
CONT(F1)copiesthecodesofthecodelisttotheactivejob,closesthe
screenandreturnstothescreenfromwhereMANAGECodelistswas
accessed.
istobecreated
NEW(F2).Referto"8.4Creating/EditingaCodelist".
istobeedited
highlightthecodelistandEDIT(F3).Referto"8.4Creating/Editinga
Codelist".
Manage...\Codelists
R9|139
8.4 Creating/EditingaCodelist
Access
Referto"8.3AccessingCodelistManagement"toaccessMANAGECodelists.
Create/editacodelist
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
MANAGECodelists
8.3
NEW(F2)orEDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEXXCodelist.
2.
MANAGENewCodelistorMANAGEEditCodelist
<Name:>Auniquenameforthecodelist.Thenamemaybeupto16
characterslongandmayincludespaces.Inputrequired.
<Description:>Adetaileddescriptionofthecodelist.Thiscanbefor
example,worktobeperformed.Inputoptional.
<Creator:>Theperson’snamewhoiscreatingthenewcodelist.Input
optional.

CODES(F4)accessesMANAGECodeswherecodescanbecreated,
editedordeletedandcodegroupscanbeaccessed.
3.
STORE(F1)storesthecodelistandreturnstoMANAGECodelists.
Manage...\Codelists
8.5.2,8.5.3
or8.6
R9|140
8.5 ManagingCodes
8.5.1 AccessingMANAGECodes
Description
Accessstep‐by‐step
MANAGE
Codes
Managingcodesincludes
• creatingnewcodes
• viewingcodeswiththeirrelatedinformation
• editingcodes.
• deletingexistingcodes.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"8.3AccessingCodelistManagement"toaccessMANAGECodelists.
2.
InMANAGECodelistshighlightthecodelistofwhichcodesaretobemanaged.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditCodelist.
4.
CODES(F4)toaccessMANAGECodes.Thisscreenisdescribedbelow.
Codesfromcurrentlyactivecodegroupsareshown.
Thelistedcodegroupsbelongto
theselectedSystemRAMcodelistwhenthisscreenwasaccessedthroughMainMenu:
Manage...\Codelists.
OR
tothejobcodelistwhenMANAGECodeswasaccessedfromanapplicationprogram,
MANAGENewJoborMANAGEEditJob.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|141
The indicatescodeswhichhaveattributesattached.
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateanewcode.Referto"8.5.2Creatinga
NewCode".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedcode.Referto"8.5.3
EditingaCode".
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedcode.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodedescrip‐
tion,thequickcodesifavailable,thecodegroups
andthecodetype.
SHIFTGROUP(F4)
Toview,create,delete,activateanddeactivate
codegroups.Referto"8.6ManagingCode
Groups".
SHIFTSORT(F5)
Tosortcodesbycodename,codedescription,
quickcodeorthelastuse.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|142
Nextstep
IF
THEN
acodeistobecreated NEW(F2).Referto"8.5.2CreatingaNewCode".
acodeistobeedited highlightthecodeandEDIT(F3).Referto"8.5.3EditingaCode".
codegroupsaretobe SHIFTGROUP(F4).Referto"8.6ManagingCodeGroups".
accessed
Manage...\Codelists
R9|143
8.5.2 CreatingaNewCode
Createanewcodestep‐
by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"8.5.1AccessingMANAGECodes"toaccessMANAGECodes.
2.
NEW(F2)toaccessMANAGENewCode.
3.
MANAGENewCode
Referto
chapter
<Code:>Auniquenameforthenewcode.Thenamemaybeupto16
characterslongandmayincludespaces.Inputrequired.
<CodeDesc:>Adetaileddescriptionofthecode.Inputoptional.
<Group:>Thecodegrouptowhichthecodeistobeassigned.Allcode
groupsfromMANAGECodeGroupscanbeselected.
<CodeType:>Thisfieldcontainsachoicelist,wherethecodetype
(Thematicalcode‐Point,Line,AreaorFreecode‐Free)canbeselected.
Theselectedoptionwilldefinehowthecodewillbeused.
Selectingacodetypeallowsacodetoremainunique.<Code:>canhave
thesamevaluebutwithadifferent<CodeType:>withinthesame
codelist.
<Linework:>Availablefor<CodeType:Point>only.Thisfield
containsachoicelist,toallowanewlineornewareatobeopened
wheneverthepointcodeisnewlyselected.Thisfunctionalityisalso
availablewhencreatingcodelistswithStonex®ToolsCodelistManage‐
ment.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|144
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
• None:Selectthisoptiontodisablethefunctionality.Allothercode
settingsontheinstrumentarenotaffectedwhenthisoptionisset.
• BeginLine:Whenapointcodeisnewlyselected,anewlineis
openedandthepointbeingstoredisaddedtotheline.Whenthe
samepointcoderemainsselected,anewlineisnotopened.The
pointbeingstoredissimplyaddedtothecurrentline.
• BeginArea:Thebehaviourforopeninganewareaisthesameasthe
behaviourforopeninganewline,asmentionedabove.
<LineStyle:>Notavailablefor<CodeType:Free>.Thestyleinwhich 8.1
linesandareasarerepresentedinMapViewandStonex®Tools.
4.



5.
NEW‐A(F2)adds<Attribute1:>asnewinputfieldforanattributeof
attributetypenormalandofvaluetypetext.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattributenamecanbetypedin.
Tohighlight<Attribute1:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.The
nameof<Attribute1:>canbeeditedandtheattributevaluetobeused
asthedefaultattributevaluecanbetypedin.
Attributesofattributetypemandatoryorfixedandofvaluetyperealor
integermustbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Uptotwentyattributescanbecreated.
Isanotherattributetobecreated?
• Ifyes,repeatstep4.
• Ifno,continuewithstep6.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|145
Step
6.

Description
Referto
chapter
STORE(F1)addsthenewcodeandanyassociatedattributestothe
SystemRAMcodelistandreturnstothescreenfromwherethisscreen
wasaccessed.
Anewcodecanalsobecreatedwithinanapplicationprogram.Inthis
case,thenewcodeisaddedtothejobcodelist.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|146
8.5.3 EditingaCode
Accessstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Referto"8.5.1AccessingMANAGECodes"toaccessMANAGECodes.
2.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditCode.
3.
Allfollowingstepsareidenticalwiththecreationofanewcode.

Referto"8.5.2CreatingaNewCode".Followtheinstructionsinparagraph"Createa
newcodestep‐by‐step"fromstep3.onwards.
Attributenamesthathavealreadybeentypedincannotbeeditedinajobcodelist.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|147
8.6 ManagingCodeGroups
Accessstep‐by‐step
MANAGE
CodeGroups
Step
Description
1.
Referto"8.5.1AccessingMANAGECodes"toaccessMANAGECodes.
2.
SHIFTGROUP(F4)toaccessMANAGECodeGroups.
Thelistedcodegroupsbelongto
theselectedSystemRAMcodelistwhenthisscreenwasaccessedthroughMainMenu:
Manage...\Codelists.
OR
tothejobcodelistwhenMANAGECodeswasaccessedfromanapplicationprogram,
MANAGENewJoborMANAGEEditJob.
CONT(F1)
Toclosethescreenandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateanewcodegroup.
EDIT(F3)
AvailableforSystemRAMcodelists.Toeditthe
highlightedcodegroup.
DEL(F4)
AvailableforSystemRAMcodelists.Todelete
thehighlightedcodegroup.
USE(F5)
Toactivateanddeactivatethehighlightedcode
group.Codesbelongingtoadeactivatedcode
grouparenotdisplayedinMANAGECodes.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|148
NONE(F6)orALL(F6)
Todeactivateoractivateallcodegroups.
Descriptionofcolumns
Column
Description
CodeGroup
Thenameofthecodegroup.
Activated
Usecodegroupornot.TheoptionsareYesandNo.Thecodesbelongingtoa
deactivatedcodegroupcannotbeselectedfromthechoicelistforcodeselec‐
tion.USE(F5)changesbetweentheoptions.
Nextstep
IFacodegroup
THEN
istobecreated
NEW(F2).InMANAGENewCodeGrouptypeinauniquenamefor
<Group:>.STORE(F1)storesthenewcodegrouptypedinandreturns
toMANAGECodeGroups.
istobeedited
highlightthecodegroupandEDIT(F3).InMANAGEEditCodeGroup
typeinthechangesfor<Group:>.STORE(F1)storesthechangesand
returnstoMANAGECodeGroups.
Manage...\Codelists
R9|149
9 Coding
9.1 Overview
Description

Codingmethods
Acodeisadescriptionwhichcanbestoredwithapoint,line,areaoralone.
CodingonR9isveryflexiblewiththematical,freeandquickcodingbeingavailable.Thematical
andfreecodingispossiblebyselectingcodesfromacodelistorbydirectlytypingincodes.
SmartCodesareaquickwayforacodetobestoredwithapointtobeselectedandtobemeas‐
ured.
Forcoding,points,linesandareashavethesamebehaviour.Inthischapter,thewordobjectis
usedasagenerictermforpoints,linesandareas.
Coding
method
Characteristic
Description
Thematical
Use
Tostoreadescriptiontogetherwithanobjectinside
anapplicationprogramorinMainMenu:
Manage...\Data.
Selectionofthecodes
• Forthematicalcodingwithcodelist:
Onaconfigureddisplaymask,codesareselected
fromthejobcodelistinachoicelist.Thejobcodelist
mustcontainthematicalcodes.
• Forthematicalcodingwithoutcodelist:
Onaconfigureddisplaymask,codesaretypedin.
Recordingofthecodes Togetherwiththeobjects.
Coding
R9|150
Coding
method
Characteristic
Description
Free
Use
Tostoreadescriptionindependentofanobjectatany
time.Afreecodecanbeusedtostoreadescription
relatedtoanobjectortostoreadditionaldescriptions
suchasthejobnameorthetemperature.
Selectionofthecodes
• Forfreecodingusingacodelist:
Pressingtheconfiguredhotkeyopensachoicelist
withthefreecodesofthejobcodelist.
• Forfreecodingwithdirectinput:
Pressingtheconfiguredhotkeyopensascreenfor
alphanumericinput.
Recordingofthecodes Storedastimerelatedinformation.Atimestampis
storedwitheachfreecode.Accordingtotherequire‐
mentsoftheCADpackageused,freecodescanbe
configuredtobestoredbeforeoraftertheobject.
Quick
Use
Quickcodingisthestoringofanobjectplusathemat‐
icalorfreecodeusingaminimumnumberof
keystrokes.
Selectionofthecodes
Shortcutsmustbeassignedtocodesinthejobcodelist.
<QuickCode:On>mustbesetinCONFIGURECoding
&Linework.Typingtheshortcutsearchesforthe
assignedcodeandinitiatesameasurement.
Recordingofthecodes • Forthematicalcodes:
Togetherwiththeobjects.
Coding
R9|151
Coding
method
Characteristic


ConfigureCoding
Description
• Forfreecodes:
Storedastimerelatedinformationbeforeorafter
thepoints.Atimestampisstoredwitheachfree
code.
QuickcodesmustbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Charactersthatcanbeassignedtoquickcodesare:
• 0to9
• AtoZ,notcasesensitive
• atoz,notcasesensitive
Referto"15.3Coding&LineworkSettings"forinformationonconfiguringcoding.
Coding
R9|152
9.2 ThematicalCoding
9.2.1 ThematicalCodingwithCodelist

Requirements
Thematicalcodingofpointswithacodelistisexplainedinthischapter.Referto"7.4Line/Area
Management"forinformationoncodinglines/areas.
• Thejobcodelistcontainsthematicalcodes.
• <ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework.
• Adisplaymaskwithaninputfieldforpointcodesmustbeconfigured.
Access
Openthechoicelistfor<Code:>inadisplaymaskofanapplicationprogram.
OR
Openthechoicelistfor<Code:>/<PointCode:>inMANAGENewPoint,Codepageindata
management.
OR
Openthechoicelistfor<PointCode:>inMANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Codepageindata
management.
OR
Openthechoicelistfor<AutoPtCode:>inSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Autopage,ifconfig‐
ured.
Coding
R9|153
MANAGE
SelectCode
CONT(F1)
Toreturntothescreenfromwherethisscreen
wasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateanewcode.Referto"8.5.2Creatinga
NewCode".
ATRIB(F3)
AvailableunlessaccessedfromMANAGENew
Point/Line/AreaorMANAGEEdit
Point/Line/Area.Totypeinattributevaluesfor
theselectedcodeand/oraddnewattributesfor
theselectedcode.
LAST(F4)
Availableifacodehasbeenpreviouslyusedin
theactivejob.Toselectfromalistoflastused
codes.Thecodesaresortedbytimewiththe
mostrecentlyusedcodeatthetopofthelist.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodedescrip‐
tion,thecodegroup,thecodetypeandthequick
codeifcodeswithquickcodesexistinthejob.
SHIFTGROUP(F4)
Toview,create,delete,activateanddeactivate
codegroups.Referto"8.6ManagingCode
Groups".
SHIFTSORT(F5)
Tosortcodesbycodename,codedescription,
quickcodeorthelastused.
Coding
R9|154
Thematicalcodingwith
codeliststep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
Refertoparagraph"Access"toaccessXXSelectPointCode.
2.
MANAGESelectPointCode
Allpointcodesfromthejobcodelistwhichbelongtotheactivecode
groupsareavailableforselection.Pointcodesmarkedwith have
attributesattached.
3.
Highlightthedesiredcode.
4.
ATRIB(F3)toaccessXXEnterAttributes.
5.
XXEnterAttributes
Referto
chapter
8.6
<PointCode:>Thenameoftheselectedcodeforwhichattributevalues
aretobetypedin.
<CodeDesc:>Thedetaileddescriptionoftheselectedcode.
Ifconfiguredfortheselectedcode,inputfieldsforattributevaluesare
available.Typeintheattributevalues.Attributevaluesforattributesof
type
• normalcanbetypedin.

• fixedcannotbeedited.
NEW‐A(F2)toaddanewattributeoftypenormalandofvaluetype
text.
Coding
R9|155
Step





6.


Description
Referto
chapter
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattributenamecanbetypedin.
Tohighlight<Attributen:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.
Attributesoftypemandatoryorfixedandofvaluetyperealorinteger onlinehelp
inStonex®
mustbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Tools.
Uptotwentyattributescanbeadded.
LAST(F4)recallsthelastusedattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
DEFLT(F5)recallsthedefaultattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereXXSelectPointCodewas
accessed.
Thepointcodeandanyassociatedattributevaluesarestoredwhenthe
pointisstored.
IfapointwiththesamepointIDexistsinthejob,thecodes,theattribute 9.6
namesandtheattributevaluesofthenewandtheexistingpointmust
beidentical.Shouldtheynotbeidentical,ascreenopenswherethecode
orattributemismatchcanbecorrected.
Coding
R9|156
9.2.2 ThematicalCodingwithoutCodelist

Thematicalcodingwithoutcodelistforpointsisexplainedinthischapter.Referto"7.4
Line/AreaManagement"forinformationoncodinglines/areas.
Requirements
• <ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework.
• Adisplaymaskwithaninputfieldforpointcodesmustbeconfigured.
Access
Athematicalcodeistypedinthefield
<Code:>inadisplaymaskofanapplicationprogram.
OR
<Code:>/<PointCode:>inMANAGENewPoint,Codepageindatamanagement.The
procedureissimilarforlinesandareas.
OR
<PointCode:>inMANAGEEditPoint:PointID,Codepageindatamanagement.The
procedureissimilarforlinesandareas.
OR
inthefield<AutoPtCode:>inSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Autopage,ifconfigured.
Coding
R9|157
Thematicalcoding
withoutcodeliststep‐by‐
step
Step

1.
Description
ThematicalcodingintheSurveyapplicationprogramisexplainedinthisstep‐by‐step
instruction.AtypicalconfigurationsetwithadisplaymaskforcodingcalledCodeis
used.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName,Codepage
<PointID:>Theidentifierforthepointforwhichcodesandattributevaluesareto
betypedin.
<PointCode:>Thenameforthecode.
<Attributen:>Theattributevaluesforthecode.

Typeinacodeandattributevalues.
Uptoeightattributescanbeadded.Thisisconfiguredinthedisplaymask.
2.
ALL(F1)tomeasureanglesanddistance.
OR
PAGE(F6)tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Coding
R9|158
9.3 FreeCoding
9.3.1 FreeCodingUsingaCodelist

Requirements
Access
Inthischapter,freecodingusingacodelistisexplainedforpoints.Referto"7.4Line/Area
Management"forinformationoncodinglines/areas.
• Thejobcodelistcontainsfreecodes.
• TheuserdefinedmenuisconfiguredtodisplaytheoptionSelectFreeCode.
PressUSERandselectSelectFreeCodetoaccessthescreenFREECODESelectFreeCode.
Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
FREECODE
SelectFreeCode
STORE(F1)
Tostorethefreecodeandanyassociated
attributevaluesandtoreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateanewcode.Referto"8.5.2Creatinga
NewCode".
ATRIB(F3)
Totypeinattributevaluesand/oraddnew
attributesfortheselectedfreecode.
Coding
R9|159
LAST(F4)
Availableifafreecodehasbeenpreviouslyused
intheactivejob.Toselectfromalistoflastused
freecodes.Thefreecodesaresortedbytime
withthemostrecentlyusedcodeatthetopofthe
list.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodedescrip‐
tion,thecodegroupandthequickcodeifcodes
withquickcodesexistinthejob.
SHIFTGROUP(F4)
Toview,create,delete,activateanddeactivate
codegroups.Referto"8.6ManagingCode
Groups".
SHIFTSORT(F5)
Tosortcodesbycodename,codedescription,
quickcodeorthelastused.
Freecodingusinga
codeliststep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
Refertoparagraph"Access"toaccessFREECODESelectFreeCode.
9.3
2.
FREECODESelectFreeCode
Allfreecodesfromthejobcodelistwhichbelongtotheactivecode
groupsareavailableforselection.Freecodesmarkedwith have
attributesattached.
Coding
8.6
R9|160
Step
Description
3.
Highlightthedesiredcode.
4.
ATRIB(F3)toaccessFREECODEEnterAttributes.
5.
FREECODEEnterAttributes
Referto
chapter
<FreeCode:>Thenameoftheselectedcodeforwhichattributevalues
aretobetypedin.






<CodeDesc:>Thedetaileddescriptionoftheselectedcode.
Ifconfiguredfortheselectedcode,inputfieldsforattributevaluesare
available.Typeintheattributevalues.Attributevaluesforattributesof
type
• normalcanbetypedin.
• fixedcannotbeedited.
NEW‐A(F2)toaddanewattributeoftypenormalandofvaluetype
text.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availableforattributesforwhichanattributenamecanbetypedin.
Tohighlight<Attributen:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.
Attributesoftypemandatoryorfixedandofvaluetyperealorinteger onlinehelp
inStonex®
mustbecreatedinStonex®Tools.
Tools.
Uptotwentyattributescanbeadded.
LAST(F4)recallsthelastusedattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
DEFLT(F5)recallsthedefaultattributevaluesfortheselectedcode.
Coding
R9|161
Step
6.
Description
Referto
chapter
FREECODEEnterAttributes
STORE(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereFREECODESelectFree
Codewasaccessedandstoresthefreecode,anyassociatedattribute
valuesandtimerelatedinformation.
Coding
R9|162
9.3.2 FreeCodingwithDirectInput

Inthischapter,freecodingwithdirectinputisexplainedforpoints.Referto"7.4Line/Area
Management"forinformationoncodinglines/areas.
Requirements
TheuserdefinedmenuisconfiguredtodisplaytheoptionEnterFreeCode.
Access
Freecodingwithdirect
inputstep‐by‐step
PressUSERandselectEnterFreeCodetoaccessthescreenFREECODEEnterFreeCode&
Attributes.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
Step
Description
1.
Refertoparagraph"Access"toaccessFREECODEEnterFreeCode&Attributes.
2.
FREECODEEnterFreeCode&Attributes
<FreeCode:>Thenameforthefreecode.
<Attributen:>Theattributevaluesforthefreecode.



3.
Typeinacodeandattributevalues.
Assoonasafreecodeistypedin,acodelistiscreatedwithinthejob.
Uptoeightattributescanbeadded.
LAST(F4)
Availableifafreecodehasbeenpreviouslyusedintheactivejob.AccessesFREE‐
CODELastUsedFreeCodes.Toselectfromalistoflastusedfreecodes.Thefree
codesaresortedbytimewiththemostrecentlyusedcodeatthetopofthelist.
InFREECODELastUsedFreeCodespressATRIB(F3)totypeinattributevalues.
STORE(F1)storesthefreecode,anyassociatedattributevaluesandtimerelated
information.
Coding
R9|163
9.4 QuickCoding
Requirements
• Thejobcodelistcontainsquickcodesforpoints,linesand/orareas.
• AccordingtotherequirementsoftheusedCADpackage,set<RecFreeCode:BeforePoint>
or<RecFreeCode:AfterPoint>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework.
Activatequickcoding
Thecurrentsettingfor<QuickCode:>inCONFIGURECoding&Lineworkdetermineshow
quickcodingisactivated.Quickcodingcanbeactivatedatanytime.
• For<QuickCode:On>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework
Quickcodingisactiveandcanbeused.
• For<QuickCode:Off>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
TapthequickcodingiconvisibleduringSurveyandotherapplicationprogramswhereit
ispossibletomeasureapointwithquickcodes.
OR
AccessCONFIGURECoding&Lineworkandchangethesetting.Referto"15.3Coding&
LineworkSettings".
• For<QuickCode:Never>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework
AccessCONFIGURECodingSettingsandchangethesetting.Referto"15.3Coding&Line‐
workSettings".
Quickcodingforpoints
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Coding
R9|164
Step
1.

2.


3.
Description
Referto
chapter
Refertoparagraph"Activatequickcoding"toactivatequickcoding.
Ascreenmustbeactivewherepointscanbemeasured.ALL(F1)must
bevisible.ForexampleSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
Typeintheone,twoorthreedigitsofthequickcode.
15.3
Thecurrentsettingfor<Digits:>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework
determinesbyhowmanykeystrokesquickcodingisexecuted.
ENTERtoexecutequickcodingalreadyafteroneortwokeystrokes.
Availablefor<Digits:2>and<Digits:3>inCONFIGURECoding&
Linework.
ESCclearsdigitsfromtheentry.
Whatisthecodetypeofthequickcodes?
• Forpointcodescontinuewiththenextrow.


• Forfreecodescontinuewithstep5.
Thepointcodeassignedtothequickcodeissearchedforinthejob
codelistandinitiatesmeasurements.
Attributevaluesforattributesoftype
• normalcannotbetypedin.Dependingonthesettingfor
<Attributes:>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework,thedefaultor
thelastusedattributevaluesarestored.
• fixedcannotbeedited.
Coding
R9|165
Step


IfapointwiththesamepointIDexistsinthejob,thecodes,theattribute 9.6
namesandtheattributevaluesofthenewandtheexistingpointmust
beidentical.Shouldtheynotbeidentical,ascreenopenswherethecode
orattributemismatchcanbecorrected.
Quickcodingforapointcodeisfinished.
5.
Quickcodingforfreecodescontinuesfromhere.

6.
Referto
chapter
Thepointcodeandanyassociatedattributevaluesarestoredwiththe
point.
4.


Quickcodingfor
lines/areasstep‐by‐step
Description
Thefreecodeassignedtothequickcodeissearchedforinthejob
codelistandinitiatesmeasurements.
Attributevaluesforattributesoftype
• normalcannotbetypedin.Dependingonthesettingfor
<Attributes:>inCONFIGURECodingSettings,thedefaultorthe
lastusedattributevaluesarestored.
• fixedcannotbeedited.
Thefreecode,associatedattributevaluesandtimerelatedinformation
arestored.Thesettingfor<RecFreeCode:>inCONFIGURECoding&
Lineworkdeterminesifthefreecodeisstoredbeforeorafterthepoint.
Quickcodingforafreecodeisfinished.
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Coding
R9|166
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
Refertoparagraph"Activatequickcoding"toactivatequickcoding.
2.
Typeintheone,twoorthreedigitsofthequickcode.
15.3
Thecurrentsettingfor<Digits:>inCONFIGURECoding&Linework
determinesbyhowmanykeystrokesquickcodingisexecuted.





3.
ENTERtoexecutequickcodingalreadyafteroneortwokeystrokes.
Availablefor<Digits:2>and<Digits:3>inCONFIGURECoding&
Linework.
ESCclearsdigitsfromtheentry.
Theline/areacodeassignedtothequickcodeissearchedforinthejob
codelist.
Anewline/areaiscreatedandimmediatelystoredwiththatline/area
codeandattributes.Fortheline/areaID,theline/areaIDtemplateas
definedinCONFIGUREIDTemplatesisused.
Thesystemasksformandatoryattributevalues.
Quickcodingforaline/areaisfinished.
Coding
R9|167
9.5 SmartCodes
9.5.1 Overview
Description
SmartCodesisbasicallyaquickwayforcodetobeselectedandpointtobemeasured.All
existingcoding,linework,andpointmeasurementfunctionalityisretained.
Coding
R9|168
9.5.2 ConfiguringSmartCodes
Access
SelectMainMenu:Survey.InSURVEYSurveyBeginpressCONF(F2)toaccessSURVEY
Configuration.
OR
InSURVEYSurvey:JobNamepressSHIFTCONF(F2)toaccessSURVEYConfiguration.
SURVEY
Configuration,
SCodepage
ThesettingsonthispageactivatetheusingofSmartCodesanddefinethemethod.Allsettingsin
thispanelarestoredwithinthecurrentlyactiveconfigurationset.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<UseSCodes:>
Yes
ActivatesusingofSmartCodes.
Allotherfieldsonthescreenareactiveandcan
beedited.
Coding

R9|169
Field
Option
Description
No
DeactivatesusingofSmartCodesandallfieldsonthis
screen.
<ShowInfo:>
Informationshowninline8ofSURVEYSurvey:Job
name,SCodepage.
Notused
Nodisplaymaskelementisshown.
PointID
Theidentifierforthemeasuredpoints.Theconfigured
pointIDtemplateisused.
Referto"35.2SurveyingPoints".
3DCQ
Coding

Thecurrent3Dcoordinatequalityofthemeasured
point.
2DCQ
Thecurrent2Dcoordinatequalityofthemeasured
point.
1DCQ
Thecurrentheightcoordinatequalityofthemeasured
point.
ReflectorHt
Theheightofthereflectorthatisbeingused.Changing
thereflectorheightheredoesnotupdatethedefault
reflectorheightasdefinedintheactiveconfiguration
set.
Hz
Thecurrenthorizontalangleofthemeasuredpoint.
V
Thecurrentverticalangleofthemeasuredpoint.
HorizDist
Thecurrenthorizontaldistanceofthemeasuredpoint.
SlopeDist
Thecurrentslopedistanceofthemeasuredpoint.
R9|170
Field
Option
Description
HtDiff
Thecurrentheightdifferencebetweenthestationand
themeasuredpoint.
Linework
Thelineworkflagtobestoredwiththepoint.The
optionsavailabledependonwhetheraline/areais
currentlyopen.Referto"10.2PerformingLinework"
foranexplanationoftheoptionsthatbecomeavailable
inSURVEYSurvey:Jobname,SCodepage.
<MeasurePoint:>
YesorNo
IfoneofthecodeboxesistappedinSURVEYSurvey:
Jobname,SCodepagethenthatcodeisselectedand
thepointismeasuredfor<MeasurePoint:Yes>.
<StringAttrib:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<ShowCodes:AllCodes>.
Whenthisfieldisactive,surveyedpointsthathavethe
samecodeattachedarestrungtooneline.
Referto"15.3Coding&LineworkSettings".

<Method:>
Coding
Methodbywhichsubsequentcodeboxisselectedafter
apointisstored.
Notused
<Direction:>and<No.Elements:>areinvisibleand
thenumberofcodesboxesshowninSURVEYSurvey:
Jobname,SCodepageisnine.
Zig‐Zag
Eachnewcodeblockisstartedatthesameendas
wherethepreviouscodeblockfinished.
Samedirec‐
tion
Eachnewcodeblockisstartedatthesameendas
wherethepreviouscodeblockstarted.
R9|171
Field
Option
<Direction:>
<No.Elements:>
Coding
Description
Thewayofusingthecodeboxes.Thisinfluencesin
whichorderthecodeboxeswillbeapplied.
Forward
Thecodeboxesareusedinthesamewayasdefinedin
SURVEYSurvey:Jobname,SCodepage.
Backward
Thecodeboxesareusedinthereversewayasdefined
inSURVEYSurvey:Jobname,SCodepage.
1,2,3,4,5,6, NumberofcodeboxesshowninSURVEYSurvey:Job
7,8or9
name,SCodepage.
R9|172
9.5.3 CodeBlock
Requirements
• <UseSCodes:Yes>inSURVEYConfiguration,SCodepage.
SURVEY
Survey:JobName,SCode
page
CreatingaCodeBlock
step‐by‐step
ALL(F1)
Tomeasureandstoredistancesandangles.
CODES(F3)
ToselectacodefromMANAGESelectCode
panel.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toactivate/deactivate/configureSmartCodes.
SHIFT2FACE(F4)
TotakeameasurementinFaceIandFaceII.The
pointstoredisanaverageofthetwomeasure‐
ments.
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
Refertoparagraph"AccessingSurvey"toaccessSURVEYSurvey
Begin.
35.1
2.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
3.
PAGE(F6)untiltheSCodepageisvisible.
Coding
R9|173
Step
4.
Withthefocuson<CodeBlock:1>pressentertoaccessSURVEY
ManageCodeBlockspanel.
5.
NEW(F2)tocreateanewcodeblock.

6.
Assigningcodestoa
CodeBlockstep‐by‐step
Description
Referto
chapter
CodeblockscanonlybecreatedordeletedinSURVEYManageCode
Blockspanel.
CONT(F1)toreturntoSURVEYSurvey:JobName,SCodepage.
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
Refertoparagraph"CreatingaCodeBlockstep‐by‐step"toaccess
SURVEYSurvey:JobName,SCodepage.
2.
Movethefocusonacodebox.
3.
CODES(F4)toselectacodetobeassignedtothehighlightedcode
block.

Tocreateanewcodetobeassignedreferto"CreatingaNewCode".
Coding
Referto
chapter
8.5.2
R9|174
CopyingaCodeBlockto
anewjobstep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description

Codeblocksarestoredinthejob.
1.

2.


Refertoparagraph"AccessingJobManagement"toaccessMANAGE
EditJob:JobName,Codelistpage.
6.2
<Codelist:>IfcodeshadbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelist,the
nameofthecodelistisdisplayed.Ifcodeshavebeentypedin,thenthe
nameoftheactivejobisdisplayed.
SHIFTEXPRT(F2)copiescodesandcodeblocksfromthejobtoan
existingornewcodelist.
Tocreateanewcodelistreferto"Creating/EditingaCodelist".
8.4
Copyingcodeblockstoanexistingcodelistoverwritesthecodeblocks
oftheexistingcodelist.
3.
STORE(F1)tosavethecurrentlyactivejobandreturntoMANAGEJob
(Device).
4.
Createanewjobandassigntherelatedcodelisttothejob.


Referto
chapter
SmartCodesfromthecodelistarenowavailablewithinthenewjob.
Tocreateanewjobreferto"CreatingaNewJob".
Coding
6.3
R9|175
9.5.4 UsingSmartCodes
Measuringpointsusing
CodeBlocksstep‐by‐
step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
Refertoparagraph"CreatingaCodeBlockstep‐by‐step"toaccess
SURVEYSurvey:JobName,SCodepage.
9.5.4
2.
Movethefocusonacodebox.


3.

When<StringAttrib:>isactive,youcantypeinanattributevalue
belowthecodenameofthehighlightedcodebox.
+(F4)or‐(F5)toincreaseordecreasethevalue.Appliesonlyifthe
valueisnumeric.
ALL(F1)tomeasureandstorethepointwiththehighlightedcode.
When<MeasurePoint:Yes>issetintheconfigurationsettings,
tappingthecodeboxwiththesuppliedstylusautomaticallymeasures
andstoresthepointwiththehighlightedcode.Selectingthecodeboxby
usingthearrowkeyswillnotmeasureandstorethepoint.
Coding
R9|176
Measuringlines/ares
usingCodeBlocksstep‐
by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
Activate<ShowInfo:Linework>inSURVEYConfiguration,SCode
page.
9.5.2
2.
Refertoparagraph"CreatingaCodeBlockstep‐by‐step"toaccess
SURVEYSurvey:JobName,SCodepage.
9.5.4
3.
Createaline/areaSmartCodeandreturntoSURVEYSurvey:Job
Name,SCodepage.
9.5.3

Theline/areaisopenedandclosedusingtheSmartCode.
4.
Tostartanarc/splinemovethefocuson<Linework:>,thelastlineof
thepage,andselectthelineworkflagtobestoredwiththepoint.
5.
Movethefocusontheline/areacodebox.
6.
ALL(F1)tomeasureandstorethepointwiththehighlightedline/area
code.
Coding
R9|177
9.6 CodeandAttributeMismatch
9.6.1 CodeMismatch
Description
Whenstoringapointwithacode,itmayhappenthatapointwiththesamepointIDalready
existsinthejob.Ifthecodesofthenewandtheexistingpointdonotmatch,ascreenopens
wherethecodecanbecorrected.Onepointcannothavedifferentcodes.
XX
PointCodeMismatch
STORE(F1)
Tostorethehighlightedcodeandanyassociated
attributeswiththepointbeingstoredandto
continuewiththeapplicationprogramordata
management.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodedescrip‐
tion,thecodegroupandanyattributesassoci‐
atedwiththehighlightedcode.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<NewCode:>
Output
Thecodeforthepoint.
<StoredCode:>
Output
Thecodeasstoredfortheexistingpointinthejob.
Coding
R9|178
Matchcodesstep‐by‐
step
Step

Description
XXPointCodeMismatchopensautomaticallyifthecodesofthenewandthe
existingpointdonotmatch.
1.
Highlightthecodetobestoredwiththenewpoint.
2.
STORE(F1)storesthehighlightedcodeandanyassociatedattributeswiththepoint
beingstoredandcontinueswiththeapplicationprogramordatamanagement.
Coding
R9|179
9.6.2 AttributeMismatch
Description

IfapointwiththesamepointIDexistsinthejob,thecodes,theattributenamesandtheattribute
valuesofthenewandtheexistingpointmustbeidentical.Shouldtheynotbeidentical,ascreen
openswheretheattributemismatchcanbecorrected.Onepointcannothavedifferent
attributes.
ThenameofthescreenchangeswithpressingCURNT(F5)orSTORD(F5):
PressingCURNT(F5):
PressingSTORD(F5):
XXAttributesBeingStored
XXAttributesAlreadyStored
Forsimplicity,thescreenshownisXXAttributesAlreadyStored.
XX
AttributesAlready
Stored
STORE(F1)
Tostoretheselectedattributeswiththe
new/createdpointandtocontinuewiththe
applicationprogramordatamanagement.
CURNT(F5)orSTORD(F5)
Tochangebetweenviewingtheattributenames
andvaluesofthenew/createdpointandthose
storedfortheexistingpointinthejob.
Coding
R9|180
Descriptionoffields
Matchattributesstep‐
by‐step
Field
Option
Description
<PointCode:>
Output
• ForXXAttributesAlreadyStored:Thecodeofthe
existingpointinthejob.
• ForXXAttributesBeingStored:Thecodeofthe
newpoint.
Attributes
Output
• ForXXAttributesAlreadyStored:Theattributes
asstoredfortheexistingpointinthejob.
• ForXXAttributesBeingStored:Theattributesof
thenewpoint.
Step

Description
XXAttributesAlreadyStoredopensautomaticallyiftheattributenamesand/or
valuesofthenewandtheexistingpointdonotmatch.
1.
CURNT(F5)andSTORD(F5)todisplaytheattributenamesandvaluestobestored
withthepoint.
2.
STORE(F1)storesthedisplayedattributenamesandvalueswiththepointbeing
storedandcontinueswiththeapplicationprogramordatamanagement.
Coding
R9|181
10 Linework
10.1 Overview
Description
Twomethodsareavailableforthesurveyingoflinesandareas.Thesetwomethodscanbe
combinedandaredescribedinthefollowingtable.
Lineworkby Description
Linework
• Inallapplicationprograms,adisplaymaskcanbeconfiguredtoshowthe
field<Linework:>.Thisfieldcontainsachoicelist,wheretheLineworkflags
canbeselected.
• Theselectionofalineworkflagdetermines:
• theactiontakenforaline/area,forexamplebeginningaline.
• thelineworkflagtobestoredwiththepoint.
• TheLineworkflags:
• areconfiguredinCONFIGURECoding&Linework,Linework.
• canbeexportedwithaformatfile.
Coding
• Line/areacodescanbeselectedinmanyapplicationprograms.
• Referto"8.5.2CreatingaNewCode"and"9Coding"formoreinformation.

• TheLineworkflagandcodingarenotlinked.
• AdditionallytoLinework,thematicalpoint,lineandareacodescanbeused.
• Quickcodingcanbeusedaspernormal.
Linework
R9|182
10.2 PerformingLinework

TheSurveyapplicationprogramisusedheretoexplainLinework.
Requirements
• AdisplaymaskwithachoicelistforLineworkmustbeconfigured.
• TheLineworkflagsaredefinedinCONFIGURECoding&LineworkSettings,Linework
PreparingLinework
Step1:PlacingLineworkinadisplaymask
Linework
Step2:DefiningtheLineworkflags
R9|183
PerformingLinework
Themostimportantkeysareexplained.
ALL(F1)
Tomeasureandstoredistancesandangles.
STOP(F1)
Availableif<EDMMode:Tracking>and
DIST(F2)waspressed.Stopsthedistancemeas‐
urements.(F1)changesbacktoALL.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureanddisplaydistances.Available
unless<EDMMode:Tracking>and/or<Log
AutoPts:Yes>,afterthetrackingorloggingis
started.
REC(F3)
Torecorddata.If<EDMMode:Tracking>
and/or<LogAutoPts:Yes>,recordsmeasured
pointandcontinuestracking.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Userinput
Theidentifierformanuallyoccupiedpoints.Theconfig‐
uredpointIDtemplateisused.TheIDcanbechanged
inthefollowingways:
• TostartanewsequenceofpointID’stypeoverthe
pointID.
Linework
R9|184
Field
Option
Description
• ForanindividualpointIDindependentoftheID
templateSHIFTINDIV(F5).SHIFTRUN(F5)
changesbacktothenextIDfromtheconfiguredID
template.Referto"15.1IDTemplates".
<Linework:>
Thelineworkflagtobestoredwiththepoint.The
optionsavailabledependonwhetheraline/areais
currentlyopen.
‐‐‐‐‐
Nolineworkflagisstored.
BeginLine
Opensanewlinewhenthenextpointisstored.Any
line/areawhichiscurrentlyopenisclosedandthelast
pointbelongingtothatline/areaisgiventhe
EndLine/CloseArealineworkflag.Thepointmayor
maynotbestoredwithapointcode.
3ptCurve
Storesthelineworkflagforacurvethroughthenext
threemeasuredpointsandcontinuesaline/area.
ReOpenAnyLine
Opensalinefromalistofalllineswhicharecurrently
storedinthejobwhenthenextpointisstored.Thelast
codeusedwiththereopenedlineisautomatically
selectedwhenthepointisstored.
Anyline/areawhichiscurrentlyopenisclosedandthe
lastpointbelongingtothatline/areaisgiventhe
EndLine/CloseArealineworkflag.
Linework
R9|185
Field
Option
Description
ReOpenLastLine
Opensthelastusedlineagain.Thelastcodeusedwith
thereopenedlineisautomaticallyselectedwhenthe
pointisstored.
EndLine
Closesallopenlines.
ContLine/Area
Indicatesaline/areaisopen.
StartSpline
Storesthelineworkflagforbeginningasplineand
continuesanyopenline/area.
EndSpline
Closesasplineandcontinuesanyopenline/area.
ContSpline
Indicatesaline/areaisopenwithsplinelinetype.
BeginArea
Opensanewareawhenthenextpointisstored.Any
line/areawhichiscurrentlyopenisclosedandthelast
pointbelongingtothatline/areaisgiventhe
EndLine/CloseArealineworkflag.Thepointmayor
maynotbestoredwithapointcode.
ReOpenAnyArea
Opensanareafromalistofalllineswhicharecurrently
storedinthejobwhenthenextpointisstored.Thelast
codeusedwiththereopenedareaisautomatically
selectedwhenthepointisstored.
Anyline/areawhichiscurrentlyopenisclosedandthe
lastpointbelongingtothatline/areaisgiventhe
EndLine/CloseArealineworkflag.
ReOpenLastArea Opensthelastusedareaagain.Thelastcodeusedwith
thereopenedareaisautomaticallyselectedwhenthe
pointisstored.
Linework
R9|186
Field
Option
Description
CloseArea
Closesallopenareas.
Nextstep
Step
Selecting
alinewithMapView
Description
1.
Gotothepointtobemeasured.
2.
SelecttheappropriateLineworkflagtobestoredwiththenextpoint.
3.
ALL(F1)
4.
Repeatsteps1.to3.untilallpointsaremeasuredandstored.
5.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)toexittheSurveyapplicationprogram.
6.
Useaformatfiletoexportthepointsincludingthelineworkflags.
• SelectingalineinMapViewispossiblewitheitherthesoftkeysorthetouchscreen.
• Referto"30MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature"forfurtherinformation.
Linework
R9|187
10.3 CombiningLineworkandCoding
Description

Configurationoptions
• Lineworkandcodingcanbecombined.
• Thiscombinationcanbeuseful,becausecoding,assigninglineworkflagsand
opening/closinglines/areascanallbedonewithonepointobservation.
• CombiningLineworkandcodingcanonlybeconfiguredifthematicalpointcodesorif
thematicalpoint,lineandareacodesareavailableforselection.Thematicalcodingcanbe
donewithorwithoutcodelists.
LineworkandcodingcanalsobecombinedusingSmartCodes.Referto"9.5.4UsingSmart‐
Codes".
• Theconfigurationforthetypesofcodesavailableandtheconfigurationforcoding
with/withoutacodelistbothhaveaninfluenceonthefollowing:
• Therequiredconfigurationofadisplaymask.
• Thebehaviourofthefieldsconfiguredforthedisplaymask.
• Thebehaviourofthesoftware.
• Thepossibleconfigurationsandtheirinfluenceareshowninthistable:
ConfigurationinCONFIGURECoding&Linework
ShowCodes
OnlyPtCodes
ThematcCodes
WithCodelist
AllCodes
WithoutCodelist WithCodelist
WithoutCodelist
Requiredfieldsandtheirappearanceindisplaymask
Code
Required

Linework



R9|188
Optional
‐
‐
‐
‐
Appearance
Choicelist
Userinput
Choicelist
Userinput
Required
‐
‐
‐

Optional



‐
Appearance
Output
Output
Output
Choicelist
Required




Optional
‐
‐
‐
‐
Appearance
Choicelist
Choicelist
Choicelist
Choicelist
CodeType
Linework
Requirements
• Adisplaymaskmustbeconfiguredwith:
• afieldforcodes.
• achoicelistforLinework.
• Theconfigurationofafieldforcodetypesinadisplaymaskisrequiredforworkingwith
point,lineandareacodeswithoutchoicelist.Elsetheconfigurationofafieldforcodetypes
isoptional.
• ConfigureinCONFIGURECoding&Linework,Coding:
• <ShowCodes:OnlyPtCodes>or<ShowCodes:AllCodes>.
• <ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>or<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
• InCONFIGURECoding&LineworkSettings,LineworkdefinestheflagsforLinework.
Linework
R9|189

Accessstep‐by‐step
UsingLinework/Coding
TheSurveyapplicationprogramisusedheretoexplainthecombinationofLinework/Coding.
Step
Description
1.
SelectMainMenu:SurveytoaccessSURVEYSurveyBegin.
2.
InSURVEYSurveyBeginselectajob.
3.
Selectaconfigurationset.
4.
Selectareflector.
5.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
ThisiswhatadisplaymaskconfiguredforLineworkandcodinglookslike.Themostimportant
keysareexplained.Fortheexplanationoftheotherkeysreferto"35.2SurveyingPoints".
ALL(F1)
Tomeasureandstoredistancesandangles.
STOP(F1)
Availableif<EDMMode:Tracking>and
DIST(F2)waspressed.Stopsthedistancemeas‐
urements.(F1)changesbacktoALL.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureanddisplaydistances.Available
unless<EDMMode:Tracking>and/or<Log
AutoPts:Yes>,afterthetrackingorloggingis
started.
REC(F3)
Torecorddata.If<EDMMode:Tracking>
and/or<LogAutoPts:Yes>,recordsmeasured
pointandcontinuestracking.
Linework
R9|190
UsingLinework/Coding
forpointcodes
step‐by‐step
For<ShowCodes:OnlyPtCodes>
Step
Field
Descriptionforthematicalcoding
Withcodelist
1.
<Code:>

Withoutcodelist
Selectacodefromthechoicelist. Typeinacode.
Onlypointcodesareavailablefor
selection.
<None>tostoreapointwithout ‐‐‐‐‐tostoreapointwithoutcode
codeortoperformLinework
ortoperformLineworkwithout
withoutcoding.
coding.
2.
<CodeType:>
• Pointisdisplayed.Thisfieldisanoutputfieldonly.
3.
<Linework:>
• SelectaLineworkflagtobestoredwiththepoint.


4.
• Select‐‐‐‐‐tostoreapointwithoutaLineworkflagortoperform
codingwithoutLinework.
‐
• ALL(F1)
‐
• Thepointisstoredwiththeselectedcode.
‐
• ThepointisstoredwiththeselectedLineworkflag.
‐
• Thechoiceofflagsavailablefor<Linework:>isupdated.
Linework
R9|191
UsingLinework/Coding
forallcodes
step‐by‐step
For<ShowCodes:AllCodes>
Step
Field
Descriptionforthematicalcoding
Withcodelist
1.
<Code:>

Withoutcodelist
Selectacodefromthechoicelist. Typeinacode.
Point,lineandareacodesare
availableforselection.
<None>tostoreapointwithout ‐‐‐‐‐tostoreapointwithoutcode
codeortoperformLinework
ortoperformLineworkwithout
withoutcoding.
coding.
2.
<CodeType:>
Thetypeoftheselectedcode.
Selectthetypeoftheentered
Thisfieldisanoutputfieldonly. code.
3.
<Linework:>
• SelectaLineworkflagtobestoredwiththepoint.

4.

• Select‐‐‐‐‐tostoreapointwithoutaLineworkflagortoperform
codingwithoutLinework.
‐
• ALL(F1)
‐
• Forapointcodebeingselected:
• Thepointisstoredwiththeselectedcode.
‐
• ThepointisstoredwiththeselectedLineworkflag.
‐
• Thechoiceofflagsavailablefor<Linework:>isupdated.
Linework
R9|192
11 Manage...\ConfigurationSets
11.1 Overview
Description
Theinstrumenthasnumeroususerconfigurableparametersandfunctions.Thisallowsa
varietyofpreferencestobeaddressed.Theconfigurationoftheparametersandfunctionsfor
anindividualmeasuringtechniquearecombinedinaconfigurationset.
Defaultconfiguration
sets
Defaultconfigurationsetsexistontheinstrument.Theyusestandardsettingsforthemajority
ofapplicationprograms.Defaultconfigurationsetscanbeeditedanddeleted.Itisalways
possibletorestorethedefaultconfigurationsets.
Userdefinedconfigura‐
tionsets
Newconfigurationsetscanbecreated.Theconfigurationsetwizardassistsineditingconfigu‐
rationsets.
Editoutsidetheconfigu‐
rationsetwizard
Parametersandfunctionscanbeeditedwithoutgoingthroughtheconfigurationsetwizard.
Referto"11.4EditingaConfigurationSet"formoreinformation.

Eachapplicationprogramcanbeconfiguredseparately.Applicationprogramsettingsare
configuredintheapplicationprogrambutarestoredaspartoftheconfigurationset.Referto
"31ApplicationPrograms‐General".
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
R9|193
11.2 AccessingConfigurationSetManagement
Access
SelectMainMenu:Manage...\ConfigurationSets.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Fromachoicelistinsomescreensforexamplethebeginscreenofapplicationprograms.
MANAGE
ConfigurationSets
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedconfigurationsetandto
returntoR9MainMenu.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateanewconfigurationset.Referto"11.3
CreatingaNewConfigurationSet".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditaconfigurationset.Accessesthefirst
screenofthesequentialconfigurationsetwizard
forthehighlightedconfigurationset.Default
configurationsetscanbeedited.Referto"11.4
EditingaConfigurationSet".
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedconfigurationset.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthedescription,
thecreatorandthecreationdateoftheconfigu‐
rationset.
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
R9|194
SHIFTSET‐D(F4)
Availableunlessadefaultconfigurationsetis
highlighted.Toturnthehighlightedconfigura‐
tionsetsintoauserdefineddefaultconfigura‐
tionsetstoredintheinstrument.
SHIFTDEFLT(F5)
Torecallpreviouslydeleteddefaultconfigura‐
tionsetsandtoresetdefaultconfigurationsets
tothedefaultsettings.Userdefinedconfigura‐
tionsetsarenotaffected.
Nextstep
IFaconfiguration
set
THEN
istobeselected
selectthedesiredconfigurationset.
CONT(F1)toclosethescreenandtoreturntothescreenfromwhere
MANAGEConfigurationSetswasaccessed.
istobecreated
highlightanyconfigurationsetandNEW(F2).Referto"11.3Creatinga
NewConfigurationSet".
istobeedited
highlighttheconfigurationsetandEDIT(F3).Referto"11.4Editinga
ConfigurationSet".
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
R9|195
11.3 CreatingaNewConfigurationSet
Access
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement"toaccessMANAGEConfiguration
Sets.
Configurationstep‐by‐
step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
InMANAGEConfigurationSetshighlightaconfigurationset.Acopyof 11.2
thisconfigurationsetistakenforfurtherconfigurations.
Example:SelectDEFAULTforthecreationofanewconfigurationset.
2.
3.
NEW(F2)toaccessMANAGENewConfigurationSet.Acopyofthe
highlightedconfigurationsetiscreated.
MANAGENewConfigurationSet
<Name:>Auniquenameforthenewconfigurationset.
<Description:>Adetaileddescriptionoftheconfigurationset,since
thenameofaconfigurationsetisusuallyanabbreviation.Input
optional.
<Creator:>Theperson’snamewhocreatesthenewconfigurationset.
Inputoptional.
Enteraname.
4.
STORE(F1)storesthenewconfigurationsetwiththeenteredname.
Startsthesequentialconfigurationsetwizard.
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
R9|196
Step
5.

Description
Referto
chapter
CONFIGUREWizardMode
17.2
<WizardMode:Reduced>
LIST(F6)accessesCONFIGUREQuickAccess.Listsallscreenswithin
theconfigurationset.Allowstoaccesstheseindividualscreensandto
changesettings.
6.
CONT(F1)toaccessCONFIGURECoding&Linework.
7.
CONFIGURECoding&Linework
8.
CONT(F1)toaccessCONFIGURETPSCorrection.
9.
CONFIGURETPSCorrections
Configureatmosphericppm,geometricppmandrefraction.
10.
CONT(F1)toaccessCONFIGUREEDM&iLockSettings.
11.
CONFIGUREEDM&iLockSettings
12.
CONT(F1)toaccessCONFIGUREOffsets.
13.
CONFIGUREOffsets
14.
CONT(F1)toaccessMANAGEConfigurationSets.
15.
MANAGEConfigurationSets
Theadaptedconfigurationsetishighlighted.
16.
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstoR9MainMenu.Thehigh‐
lightedconfigurationsetisthentheactiveconfigurationset.
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
15.3
16.4
16.1
15.4
R9|197
11.4 EditingaConfigurationSet
Description
Therearetwopossibilitiestoeditaconfigurationset.
Usingtheconfigurationsetwizardtobeleadthroughthesteps.
OR
Outsideoftheconfigurationsetwizard.Eachscreencanbeaccessedseparatelywithout
beingguidedthroughthesteps.
Accessstep‐by‐stepwith
usingconfigurationset
wizard
Step
Description
1.
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement"toaccessMANAGEConfig‐
urationSets.
2.
InMANAGEConfigurationSetshighlightaconfigurationsettobeedited.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessCONFIGUREWizardMode.Thisstartsthesequentialconfigura‐
tionsetwizard.
4.
Allfollowingstepsareidenticalwiththecreationofanewconfigurationset.
Referto"11.3CreatingaNewConfigurationSet".Followtheinstructionsinpara‐
graph"Configurationstep‐by‐step"fromstep5.onwards.
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
R9|198
Accesswithoutusingthe
configurationsetwizard
Thecurrentlyactiveconfigurationsetcanbeedited.Chooseoneofthefollowingoptionsand
accesstherequiredscreenstoedittheconfigurationset.
SelectMainMenu:Config....Referto"5MainMenu".
OR
FrominsideanapplicationprogrampressUSERandthenCONF(F2).
OR
InCONFIGUREWizardMode,pressLIST(F6).Referto"11.3CreatingaNewConfiguration
Set".
Manage...\ConfigurationSets
R9|199
12 Manage...\Reflectors
12.1 Overview
Description
• Eachreflectortypehasanadditiveconstant.
• Somereflectorsarepredefinedasdefaultandcanbeselected.
• Additionalreflectorscanbedefined.
Defaultreflector
Followingdefaultreflectorsarealwaysavailableontheinstrument:
Activereflector
Nameinlist
Type
AdditiveConstant
360°Prism
Prism
+23.1mm
Reflectorless
RL
+34.4mm
Onereflectorisalwaystheactivereflector.
Manage...\Reflectors
R9|200
12.2 AccessingReflectorManagement
Access
SelectMainMenu:Manage...\Reflectors.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
FromachoicelistinsomescreensforexampletheSURVEYSurveyBeginscreen.
MANAGE
Reflectors
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedreflectorandtoreturn
tothepreviousscreen.
NEW(F2)
Todefineanewreflector.Referto"12.3Creating
aNewReflector".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedreflector,exceptfor
defaultreflectors.Referto"12.4Editinga
Reflector".
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedreflector,exceptfor
defaultreflectors.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationabouttheadditive
constant,thereflectortypeandthecreatorofthe
reflector.
Manage...\Reflectors
R9|201
Nextstep
IFareflector
THEN
istobeselected
highlightthedesiredreflector.
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstothescreenfromwhere
MANAGEReflectorswasaccessed.
istobecreated
highlightanyreflectorandNEW(F2)createsanewreflector.Referto
"12.3CreatingaNewReflector".
istobeedited
highlightthedesiredreflector.
EDIT(F3)Referto"12.4EditingaReflector".
Manage...\Reflectors
R9|202
12.3 CreatingaNewReflector
Access
Referto"12.2AccessingReflectorManagement"toaccessMANAGEReflectors.
Createnewreflector
step‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
InMANAGEReflectorspress
2.
NEW(F2)The<Type:>ofthenewreflectoristakenfromthepreviouslyhighlighted
reflectorexceptforRLreflectors.
3.
MANAGENewReflector
<Name:>Asignificantnameforthenewreflector.
<Type:>Thetypeofreflectortobedefinedcanbe<Type:Prism>,<Type:Tape>or
<Type:Undefined>.
<Add.Constant:>Theadditiveconstantisalwaysin[mm].


Anadditiveconstantof0.0mmhasbeendefinedforcircularstandardprisms.
Allenteredorselectedadditiveconstantvaluesaredifferencestothis0.0mm
prismsystem.
Theadditiveconstantsofprismsareoftengiveninthetruezeroprismsystem.
Usethefollowingformulatoconverttheadditiveconstanttotheprismsystem.
ThisStonex®constantneedstobeenteredintotheStonex®instrument.
Formula:Truezeroconstant‐34.4mm=Stonex®constant.
ItishighlyrecommendedtochecktheadditiveconstantfornonStonex®
prismsonabaselinebymeansofanappropriateprocedure.
<Creator:>Anameofthecreatororothercommentscanbeentered.
4.
STORE(F1)storesthenewreflectorandreturnstoMANAGEReflectors.
Manage...\Reflectors
R9|203
12.4 EditingaReflector
Access
Referto"12.2AccessingReflectorManagement"toaccessMANAGEReflectors.
Editreflector
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
InMANAGEReflectorshighlightareflectortobeedited.
2.
EDIT(F3)toaccessMANAGEEditReflector.
3.
MANAGEEditReflector
Referto
chapter
Thefieldsareidenticalwiththoseforthecreationofanewreflector.All 12.3
fieldscanbeeditedexceptfieldsofStonex®defaultreflectors.
Maketherequiredchanges.
4.
STORE(F1)storesthechangesandreturnstoMANAGEReflectors.
Manage...\Reflectors
R9|204
13 Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
13.1 Overview
Description
Exportformat
Thisscreenlistsalltheexportersloaded.

Datacanbeexported
• toafileontheCompactFlashcard.
• viaRS232toanexternaldevice.Referto"19Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface"for
informationonhowtoconfiguretheinterface.
Format
Characteristic
CustomASCII Exportvariables
DXF
Description
RefertotheonlinehelpofStonex®Tools.
Formatdefinition
Composedindividuallyasformatfileusing
Stonex®Tools.Refertotheonlinehelpof
Stonex®Toolsforinformationoncreating
formatfiles.
Units
Definedwithintheformatfile.
Height
Allheighttypesaresupported.Ifthedesired
heightcannotbecomputed,thedefaultvalue
forthemissingvariableisoutput.
Exportvariables
All points are exported in local grid.
Height
Orthometricheight
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|205
13.2 AccessingtheDataExportFunctionality
Access
SelectMainMenu:Convert...\ExportDatafromJob.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
Nextstep
IFexportingto
THEN
customASCIIformat Referto"13.3ExportingDatafromaJobtoaCustomASCIIFormat".
anotherdevice
Referto"13.4ExportingDatafromaJobtoanotherDevice".
DXFformat
Referto"13.5ExportingDatainDXFFormat".
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|206
13.3 ExportingDatafromaJobtoaCustomASCIIFormat
Description
Thesettingsonthisscreendefinethedatathatisconvertedandexportedandwhatformatis
used.
Dataisexportedfromtheselectedjob.Currentlyactiveview,filterandsortsettingsareapplied.
ThepointsthatareexportedarethosethatarevisibleinMANAGEData:JobName.
Requirement
AtleastoneformatfilewascreatedusingStonex®ToolsandhasbeentransferredtotheSystem
RAM.
Access
Referto"13.2AccessingtheDataExportFunctionality"toaccessEXPORTExportASCIIfrom
Job.
Exportdatastep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
EXPORTExportASCIIfromJob
6
<ExportTo:CFCard>
<Directory:>Availablefor<ExportTo:CFCard>.Thedatacanbe
exportedtothe\Data,the\GSIortherootdirectory.
<Job:>AlljobsfromMainMenu:Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
<FormatFile:>TheformatfilescurrentlyavailableintheSystemRAM.
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|207
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
<FileName:>Thenameofthefiletowhichthedatashouldbe
exported.Thenameisautomaticallysuggestedbasedonthejobname
tobeexportedandanextension.Thedefaultextensiontobeusedcan
beconfiguredintheEXPORTDefineASCIIExportpanelusingCONF
(F2).
Selectthejobtobeexportedandenteranindividualfilenameoraccept
thesuggestedname.
2.
Highlight<FormatFile:>andENTER.
3.
EXPORTFormatFiles

AllformatfilesavailableintheSystemRAMarelisted.Selecttheformat
filetobeused.
DEL(F4)deletesthehighlightedformatfilefromtheSystemRAM.
4.
CONT(F1)selectsthehighlightedformatfileandleadsbackto
EXPORTExportASCIIfromJob.
5.
FILT(F4)tosetthesortandfiltersettingsforexport.AccessesEXPORT
Sorts&Filters.
6.
EXPORTSorts&Filters,Pointspage
7.6
<Sort:>Theorderinwhichpoints,linesandareasareexported.
<Filter:>Defineswhichpointsareexported.
7.
CONT(F1)acceptsthechangesandreturnstoEXPORTExportASCII
fromJob.
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|208
Step
Description
8.
CONT(F1)exportsthedata.
9.
Informationmessage:Aremoredatatobeexported?
Referto
chapter
• Ifyes,continuewithstep10.
• Ifno,continuewithstep11.
10.
YES(F4).Repeatsteps1.to9.
11.
NO(F6)returnstotheR9MainMenu.
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|209
13.4 ExportingDatafromaJobtoanotherDevice
General
DatacanbetransferredtoanexternaldeviceviaRS232.
Access
Referto"13.2AccessingtheDataExportFunctionality"toaccessEXPORTExportASCIIfrom
Job.
Exportdatastep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.

Description
Referto
chapter
EXPORTExportASCIIfromJob
13.1
<ExportTo:RS232>
IFACE(F5)accessesCONFIGUREExportJobInterface.Choosethe
portanddevicetowhichthedatashouldbeexported.
2.
FILT(F4)tosetthesortandfiltersettingsfortheexport.Accesses
EXPORTSorts&Filters.
3.
EXPORTSorts&Filters,Pointspage
7.6
<Sort:>Theorderinwhichpoints,linesandareasareexported.
<Filter:>Defineswhichpointsareexported.
4.
CONT(F1)acceptsthechangesandreturnstoEXPORTExportASCII
fromJob.
5.
CONT(F1)exportsthedata.
6.
Informationmessage:Aremoredatatobeexported?
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|210
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
• Ifyes,continuewithstep7.
• Ifno,continuewithstep8.
7.
YES(F4).Repeatthesteps1.to6.
8.
NO(F6)returnstotheR9MainMenu.
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|211
13.5 ExportingDatainDXFFormat
General
DatacanbeexportedtoaDXFfileinthe\DATAdirectoryoftheCompactFlashcard.
Access
Referto"13.2AccessingtheDataExportFunctionality"toaccessEXPORTExportDXFfrom
Job.
Exportdatastep‐by‐step
Step
1.
Description
EXPORTExportDXFfromJob
<Job:>AlljobsfromMainMenu:Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
<Filename:>Thenameofthefiletowhichthedatashouldbeexported.Thenameis
automaticallysuggestedbasedonthejobnametobeexportedandtheextensiondxf.

Selectthejobtobeexportedandenteranindividualfilenameoracceptthesuggested
name.
CONF(F2)accessesEXPORTConfiguration,Exportpage.
<Points:>Definesifpointsareexported.
<Lines:>Definesiflinesareexported.
<Areas:>Definesifareasareexported.

<Filter:>Defineswhichpointsareexported.
PAGE(F6)changestotheDXFpage.
<Lines&Areas:>DefinesiflinesandareasareexportedasLineorPolylineentities.
<Dimensions:>DefinesthedimensionoftheDXFfile.
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|212
Step

Description
<DXFLayer:>DefinestheDXFLayeras<Default>,<CodeGroup>,<Code>,
<Code+Attri>or<Code+Descr+Attri>.
PAGE(F6)changestotheLabelspage.Thesettingsonthispagedefinewhichlabels
withinformation(PointID,Coords,HeightandPtCode)foreachpointareexported.
Eachlabelcanbeexportedasseparatelayerorinthesamelayerasthepointis
exported.ForeachlabelthecolorcanbedefinedandforuserdefinedlabelstheDXF
layernamecanalsobedefined.Additionallythedecimalscanbedefinedforthe
CoordsandHeightlabel.
2.
CONT(F1)acceptsthechangesandreturnstoEXPORTExportDXFfromJob.
3.
CONT(F1)exportsthedata.

4.
Message:DonotremoveCFCard!
Informationmessage:Aremoredatatobeexported?
Ifyes,continuewithstep5.
Ifno,continuewithstep6.
5.
YES(F6).Repeatsteps1.to4.
6.
NO(F4)returnstotheR9MainMenu.
Convert...\ExportDatafromJob
R9|213
14 Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
14.1 Overview
Description
Thisscreenlistsalltheimportersloaded.ThedatatoimportarestoredontheCompactFlash
card.
DatacanbeimportedtoajobontheCompactFlashcard.
Importformats
Format
Characteristic
Description
ASCII
Importvariables
PointID,gridcoordinates,thematicalcodes.
Nofreecodes,noattributes.
Formatdefinition
Freeformat.Useandorderofvariablesand
delimitercanbedefinedduringimport.
Units
Ascurrentlyconfiguredontheinstrument.
Height
Orthometric
Specialities
Localheightsbutnocoordi‐
natesinfile
Pointsareimportedwithoutcoordinatesbut
withlocalheightandcodeifavailable.
Coordinatesbutnoheightsin Pointsareimportedwithoutheightbutwith
file
coordinatesandcodeifavailable.
Neithercoordinatesnor
heightsinfile
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
Noimport.
R9|214
Format
GSI8
GSI16
Characteristic
Description
NopointID’sinfile
Noimport.
Importvariables
PointIDWI11,localcoordinatesWI81,WI82,
WI83,thematicalcodesWI71.Nofreecodes,
noattributes.Referto"19.1GSIOutput"for
informationonGSIFormat.
Formatdefinition
Fixedformat.EastingandNorthingcanbe
switchedduringimport.
Units
AsdefinedintheGSIfile.
Heights
Orthometric
Specialities
Localheightsbutnocoordi‐
natesinfile
Pointsareimportedwithoutcoordinatesbut
withlocalheightandcodeifavailable.
Coordinatesbutnoheightsin Pointsareimportedwithoutheightbutwith
file
coordinatesandcodeifavailable.
DXF
Neithercoordinatesnor
heightsinfile
Noimport.
NopointID’sinfile
Noimport.
Importvariables
Block,point,line,arc,polyline.Localcoordi‐
nates.Nofreecodes,noattributes.
Formatdefinition
Fixedformat(X/Y/Z).
Units
Notpredefined.
Heights
Zvalueimportedasorthometric.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|215
Format
Characteristic
Description
Specialities
Neithercoordinatesnor
heightsinfile
Checks
Noimport
PointsarealwaysimportedwiththeclassCTRLandacoordinatequalityof‐‐‐‐‐.
Referto"7.3.1Terminology".
Whileimportingpointstoajob,checksareperformedagainstpointID,classandcodingof
pointsalreadyexistinginthejob.
Case1:PointalreadyexistsindatabasewithclassCTRL
Overwriteexistingpoint?
No
Pointnotimported.
Yes
Pointimported;coordinatesandcodeinformationoverwritten.
Case2:PointalreadyexistsindatabasewithaclassotherthanCTRL
Addpointtodatabase?
No
Pointnotimported.
Yes
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|216
Isacodeattachedtothepoint?
No
Pointimported.
Yes
Pointimported.
Yes
Istheattachedcodethesameas
forthepointalreadyexistingin
thedatabase?
No
Shouldtheexistingcodeforthe
pointinthedatabasebereplaced?
No
Pointimported,existingcodefromdata‐
baseapplies.
No
Pointimportedwithcode,codeaddedto
jobasthematicalcode.
Yes
Isthenewpointcodealreadyin
thejob?
Yes
Pointimportedwithcode.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|217
14.2 AccessingtheDataImportFunctionality
Access
SelectMainMenu:Convert...\ImportDatatoJob.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
Nextstep
IFimportingdatain THEN
ASCIIformat
Referto"14.3ImportingDatainASCIIFormat".
GSIformat
Referto"14.4ImportingDatainGSIFormat".
DXFformat
Referto"14.5ImportingDatainDXFFormat".
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|218
14.3 ImportingDatainASCIIFormat
Requirements
AtleastoneASCIIfilewithanyfileextensionisstoredinthe\DATAdirectoryoftheCompact‐
Flashcard.
Access
Referto"14.2AccessingtheDataImportFunctionality"toaccessIMPORTImportASCII/GSI
DatatoJob.
Importdatastep‐by‐step
Step
1.
Description
IMPORTImportASCII/GSIDatatoJob
<Import:ASCIIData>
<FromFile:>Allfilesinthe\DATAdirectoryontheCompactFlashcardcanbe
selected.
<ToJob:>Choosingajobasdestinationforimportmakesthisjobtheactivejob.All
jobsfromMainMenu:Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
<Header:>ThisoptionallowsuptotenheaderlineswhichmayexistinanASCIIfile
tobeskipped.Selectthenumberofheaderlines.
2.
CONF(F2)definestheformatofthedatatobeimported.
3.
IMPORTDefineASCIIImport
<Delimiter:>Theseparatorbetweentheimportvariables.
<MultiSpaces:>Availablefor<Delimiter:Space>.<MultiSpaces:No>forspace
delimiteddatahavingonespacebetweenthevariables.<MultiSpaces:Yes>for
spacedelimiteddatahavingmultispacesbetweenthevariables.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|219
Step
Description
<No.Lines/Pt:>Availablefor<Delimiter:LineFeed>.Thenumberoflinesusedto
describeeachpoint.

Selectthedelimiterandthepositionsoftheparticularvariables.
DEFLT(F5)recallsthedefaultASCIIimportsettings.
4.
CONT(F1)leadsbacktoIMPORTImportASCII/GSIDatatoJob
5.
CONT(F1)importsthedata.

6.
Pointswithaheight>20000marenotimported.
Informationmessage:Aremoredatatobeimported?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep7.
• Ifno,continuewithstep8.
7.
YES(F6).Repeatsteps1.to6.
8.
NO(F4)returnstotheR9MainMenu.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|220
14.4 ImportingDatainGSIFormat
Requirements
AtleastoneASCIIfileinGSIformatwiththefileextension*.gsiisstoredintheGSIdirectoryof
theCompactFlashcard.
Access
Referto"14.2AccessingtheDataImportFunctionality"toaccessIMPORTImportASCII/GSI
DatatoJob.
Importdatastep‐by‐step
Step
1.
Description
IMPORTImportASCII/GSIDatatoJob
<Import:GSIData>
<FromFile:>Allfileswithextension*.gsiinthe\GSIdirectoryontheCompactFlash
cardcanbeselected.

2.

3.
<ToJob:>Choosingajobasdestinationforimportmakesthisjobtheactivejob.All
jobsfromMainMenu:Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
CONF(F2)accessesIMPORTDefineGSIImport.For<SwitchWI81/WI82:Yes>all
WI81data,normallyEasting,isimportedasNorthingandallWI82data,normally
Northing,isimportedasEasting.Thiscoordinateswitchisnecessaryfor“lefthanded”
coordinatesystems.
CONT(F1)importsthedata.
Pointswithaheight>20000marenotimported.
Informationmessage:Aremoredatatobeimported?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep4.
• Ifno,continuewithstep5.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|221
Step
Description
4.
YES(F6).Repeatsteps1.to3.
5.
NO(F4)returnstotheR9MainMenu.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|222
14.5 ImportingDatainDXFFormat
Requirements
AtleastonefileinDXFformatwiththefileextension*.dxfhastobestoredinthe\DATAdirec‐
toryoftheCompactFlashcard.
Access
Referto"14.2AccessingtheDataImportFunctionality"toaccessIMPORTImportDXFDatato
Job.
Importdatastep‐by‐step
Step
1.
Description
IMPORTImportDXFDatatoJob
<FromFile:>Allfileswithextension*.dxfinthe\DATAdirectoryontheCompact‐
Flashcardcanbeselected.

<ToJob:>Choosingajobasdestinationforimportmakesthisjobtheactivejob.All
jobsfromMainMenu:Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
CONF(F2)accessesIMPORTConfiguration.
<BlockPrefix:>Optionalprefixtoimportedblocks.
<PointPrefix:>Optionalprefixtoimportedpoints.
<LinePrefix:>Optionalprefixtoimportedlines.
<FileUnits:>ChoosingtheunitfortheDXFdatatobeimported.
<CreateVertexPoints:>Optionifpointswillbecreatedatverticesoftheimported
line/arc/polylineelements.
<ConvrtWhiteElements:>Optionifwhitecoloredelementswillbeconvertedto
blackcoloredelements.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|223
Step
Description
<ExcludeHeight:>HeightvalueinsidetheDXFfileareconsideredinvalidandwill
notbeconverted.
2.
CONT(F1)leadsbacktoIMPORTImportDXFDatatoJob
3.
CONT(F1)importsthedata.

4.
Message:DonotremoveCFCard!
Informationmessage:Aremoredatatobeimported?
Ifyes,continuewithstep5.
Ifno,continuewithstep6.
5.
YES(F6).Repeatsteps1.to4.
6.
NO(F4)returnstotheR9MainMenu.
Convert...\ImportDatatoJob
R9|224
15 Config...\SurveySettings...
15.1 IDTemplates
15.1.1 OverviewofTemplates
Description
Descriptionofthe
defaultIDtemplates
• IDtemplatesarepredefinedtemplatesforpoint,lineorareanumbers.IDtemplatessave
havingtotypeintheIDforeachobject.Theyareusefulwhenmanypointsarecollected.
• IDtemplatesthatareselectedtobeusedsuggestID’sforPointID,LineIDandAreaID
wheneverpoints,linesandareasaretobesurveyed.
DefaultIDTemplate Description
0001
• SuggestedasIDformeasuredpointsindefaultconfigurationsets.
• ThisIDisautomaticallyincremented.
Area0001
• SuggestedasIDforareasindefaultconfigurationsets.
• ThisIDisautomaticallyincremented.
Auto0001
• SuggestedasIDforautopointsindefaultconfigurationsets.These
pointsareautomaticallyrecordedataspecificrate.
• ThisIDisautomaticallyincremented.
Aux0001
• SuggestedasIDforauxiliarypointsindefaultconfigurationsets.
Thesepointsareusedwhenmeasuringahiddenpoint.
• ThisIDisautomaticallyincremented.
Line0001
• SuggestedasIDforlinesindefaultconfigurationsets.
• ThisIDisautomaticallyincremented.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|225
DefaultIDTemplate Description
NoTemplateUsed
• ThelastpointIDduringasurveywillbedisplayed.ThisIDisauto‐
maticallyincrementedifitcontainsnumericalcharacters.IfthisID
isoverwritten,theautoincrementstartsfromthenewID.Theauto‐
maticincrementationcanbeturnedoffwheneditingthisID
template.Referto"15.1.4EditinganIDTemplate".
Time&Date
• ThecurrentlocaltimeanddateistheID.
UseCode&String
• Allowstheline/areaIDassignedtoaline/areaobjecttobebasedon
thecoderelatedtotheline/area.
• Ifline/areacodesarebeingusedthentheline/areacodeisused
aspartoftheline/areaID.
• Ifpointcodesarebeingusedthenthepointcodeisusedaspartof
theline/areaID.
• Ifattributes/stringsarenotbeingusedthenthenumericalpartof
theline/areaIDisautomaticallyincremented.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|226
Availabilityofthe
defaultIDtemplates
DefaultIDTemplate Availability:
SurveyPoints
AutoPoints
Lines
Areas
0001




Area0001




Auto0001




Aux0001




Line0001




NoTemplateUsed



Time&Date






UseCode&String
Selectingthe
defaultIDtemplates
• AdefaultIDtemplatecanbeselected:
• manually,byselectingitintheIDTemplateLibraryunderConfig\SurveySettings\ID
Templates.TheIDtemplatebecomesactiveassoonasitishighlightedonthescreenand
whenCONT(F1)ispressed.Thecurrentlyactiveconfigurationsetisautomatically
updated,toincludetheselectedIDtemplate.ToensurethatalldefaultIDtemplates
appearintheIDTemplateLibrary,pressSHIFTDEFLT(F5).
• indirectly,byselectingaconfigurationsetwhichincludestheIDtemplate.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|227
15.1.2 AccessingIDTemplateConfiguration
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\SurveySettings...\IDTemplates.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManage‐
ment".
CONFIGURE
IDTemplates
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|228
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<SurveyPts:>
Choicelist
SetstheIDtemplatesformeasuredpoints.
<AutoPts:>
Choicelist
SetstheIDtemplatesforautopoints.Thesepointsare
automaticallyrecordedataspecificrate.
<AuxilPts:>
Choicelist
SetstheIDtemplatesforauxiliarypoints.Thesepoints
areusedwhentryingtofindastake‐outpoint.
<Lines:>
Choicelist
SetstheIDtemplatesforlines.
<Areas:>
Choicelist
SetstheIDtemplatesforareas.
Nextstep
IFanIDtemplate
THEN
istobeselected
selectthedesiredIDtemplate.
CONT(F1)toclosethescreenandtoreturntothescreenfromwhere
CONFIGUREIDTemplateswasaccessed.
istobecreated
Referto"15.1.3CreatingaNewIDTemplate".
istobeedited
Referto"15.1.4EditinganIDTemplate".
istobedeleted
Referto"15.1.5DeletinganIDTemplate".
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|229
15.1.3 CreatingaNewIDTemplate
CreateIDtemplate
step‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Referto"15.1.2AccessingIDTemplateConfiguration"toaccessCONFIGUREID
Templates.
2.
InCONFIGUREIDTemplateshighlightanyfield.
3.
ENTERtoaccessCONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary.
4.
HighlightanIDtemplate.AcopyofthisIDtemplateistakenforfurtherconfigura‐
tions.
5.
NEW(F2)toaccessCONFIGURENewIDTemplate.
6.
CONFIGURENewIDTemplate
<ID:>ThenameoftheIDtemplateandtheformatoftheIDobject.Anycharacters
includingspacesareallowed.Leadingspacesarenotaccepted.
<Increment:>ID’sareincrementednumericaloralphanumerical.
<IncrementBy:>TheamountbywhichthepointIDisincremented.
<CursorPosn:>ThecharacterpositionatwhichthecursorisplacedwhenENTERis
pressedin<PointID:>whensurveyingpoints.<CursorPosn:LastCharacter>
meansthatthecursorisplacedimmediatelytotherightofthelastcharacter.
Adaptthesettingsaccordingtotherequirements.
7.
CONT(F1)storesthenewIDtemplateintotheIDtemplatelibraryandreturnsto
CONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary.
8.
CONT(F1)returnstoCONFIGUREIDTemplates.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|230
Step
9.
Examplesfor
incrementation
Description
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREIDTemplateswas
accessed.
For<Increment:Numericonly>
TherightmostnumericpartisincrementedwithinthepointID.
<ID:>
<IncrementBy:> NextpointID
Notes
Point994
5
Point999
Point1004
...
‐
994point
5
999point
1004point
...
‐
123point123
‐10
123point113
Righthandsidenumbersare
incremented.Negativeincre‐
mentsallowed.
Point11
‐6
Point5
Point‐1
Point‐7
Point‐13
...
‐
Abcdefghijklmn94 5
Abcdefghijklmno99 Incrementationfailsifnext
PointIDincrementfail incrementwillresultinmore
than16characters.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|231
<ID:>
<IncrementBy:> NextpointID
Abcdefghijklmno9 ‐5
Notes
Abcdefghijklmnop4 Negativeincrementingfailsif
PointIDincrementfail nextincrementrequiresnega‐
tivesignandwillresultinmore
than16characters.
For<Increment:Alphanumeric>
TherightmostcharacterwithinthepointIDisincrementedregardlessofwhetherthatchar‐
acterisnumericoralphanumeric.
Template
Incrementvalue NextpointID’s
Notes
Point994
5
Point999
Point99E
Point99J
...
‐
994point
5
994poiny
Lowercasealphacharacters
PointIDincrementfail incrementuntilzisreached.
ThenanewpointIDmustbe
entered.
Abcdef
‐5
Abcdea
AbcdeV
…
AbcdeB
PointIDincrementfail
Config...\SurveySettings...
Lowercasealphacharacters
decrementfromlowerto
uppercaseuntilAisreached.
ThenanewpointIDmustbe
entered.
R9|232
Template
Incrementvalue NextpointID’s
Notes
ABCDEB
5
Uppercasealphacharacters
incrementfromuppertolower
caseuntilzisreached.Thena
newpointIDmustbeentered.
ABCDEB
ABCDEG
...
Abcdez
PointIDincrementfail
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|233
15.1.4 EditinganIDTemplate
EditIDtemplate
step‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Referto"15.1.2AccessingIDTemplateConfiguration"toaccessCONFIGUREID
Templates.
2.
InCONFIGUREIDTemplateshighlightanyfield.
3.
ENTERtoaccessCONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary.
4.
CONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary
HighlighttheIDtemplatetobeedited.TheIDtemplateTime&Datecannotbe
edited.EDIT(F3).
5.
CONFIGUREEditIDTemplate
ThetypeofIDtemplateselectedforeditingdeterminestheavailabilityofthefields
onthisscreen.
• AvailableforthedefaultIDtemplateNoTemplateUsed:
<ID:>ThenameoftheIDtemplatecannotbechangedsinceitisadefaultID
template.
TheotherfieldsonthisscreenarethesameasinCONFIGURENewIDTemplate.
Referto"15.1.3CreatingaNewIDTemplate".
• AvailableforauserdefinedIDtemplate:
AllfieldsonthisscreenarethesameasinCONFIGURENewIDTemplate.Refer
to"15.1.3CreatingaNewIDTemplate".
Adaptthesettingsaccordingtotherequirements.
6.
CONT(F1)storesthechangesandreturnstoCONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|234
Step
Description
7.
CONT(F1)returnstoCONFIGUREIDTemplates.
8.
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREIDTemplateswas
accessed.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|235
15.1.5 DeletinganIDTemplate
DeleteIDtemplate
step‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Referto"15.1.2AccessingIDTemplateConfiguration"toaccessCONFIGUREID
Templates.
2.
InCONFIGUREIDTemplateshighlightanyfield.
3.
ENTERtoaccessCONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary.
4.
CONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary

HighlighttheIDtemplatetobedeleted.
DEL(F4).
ItdoesnotmatteriftheIDtemplateisbeingusedinaconfigurationset.TheID
templatewillberebuiltwhenthatconfigurationsetbecomesactive.
5.
YES(F4)returnstotheCONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary.
6.
CONT(F1)returnstoCONFIGUREIDTemplates.
7.
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREIDTemplateswas
accessed.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|236
15.1.6 WorkingExample
Description
Requirement
ConfigurationofID
templatestep‐by‐step
Application:
• PickuppointswithmanydifferentpointID’s.
• MostpointID’srequireanincrementingnumberbehindatext.
Workingtechnique:
ApplicationprogramSurvey.
Goal:
•
•
•
•
ThefirstpointID’sforsurveypointsareBolt001,Bolt002,....
AdifferentpointIDcanbeenteredduringthesurvey.
ThefollowingpointID’swillbebasedontheenteredpointID.
AnindividualpointIDcanbetypedinforonepoint.
ApplicationprogramSurveyisselected.Referto"35Survey‐General"formoreinformationon
Survey.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"15.1.3CreatingaNewIDTemplate".Followstep1.to4.
2.
CONFIGURENewIDTemplate
<ID:Bolt001>
<Increment:Numericonly>
<IncrementBy:1>
<CursorPosn:1>
3.
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstoCONFIGUREIDTemplateLibrary.
4.
CONT(F1)returnstoCONFIGUREIDTemplates.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|237
Step
5.
Description
CONFIGUREIDTemplates
<SurveyPts:Bolt001>
6.
Fieldprocedure
step‐by‐step
Step
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREIDTemplateswas
accessed.
Description
1.
Referto"35.2SurveyingPoints"toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
2.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName
<PointID:Bolt001>isshownautomatically.
3.
ALL(F1).<PointID:Bolt002>isshownautomatically.
4.
Repeatstep3.untilallpointswiththeIDBoltXXXaresurveyed.
5.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName
ThenextpointID’sareRoadXXXX,startingwithRoad0723.
TypeRoad0723<PointID:Road0723>.
6.
ALL(F1)<PointID:Road0724>isshownautomatically.
7.
Repeatstep6.untilallpointswiththeIDRoadXXXXaresurveyed.
8.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName
ThenextrequiredpointIDisBM98.Itisvalidforonepoint.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)
9.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName
TypeBM98<IndivPtID:BM98>.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|238
Step
Description
10.
ALL(F1).
ThesystemchangesbacktothepointID’sRoadXXXX.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|239
15.2 DisplaySettings
Description
DisplaysettingsdefinetheparametersshownonapageontheSURVEYscreen.
Fourdisplaymasksaredefinable.
Mask1:
Mask2:
Mask3:
Mask4:
AlwaysshownontheSURVEYscreen.
CanbeshownorhiddenontheSURVEYscreen.
CanbeshownorhiddenontheSURVEYscreen.
NevershownontheSURVEYscreen.Reservedforapplicationprograms.

Thesettingsonthisscreendefinethelayoutofthefourdisplaymasks.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\SurveySettings...\DisplaySettings.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManage‐
ment".
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|240
CONFIGURE
DisplaySettings
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DMASK(F3)
Toconfiguretheselecteddisplaymask.Referto
paragraph"CONFIGUREDefineDisplayMaskn".
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Define:>
Mask
1,2,3or4
Selecteddisplaymask.
<UseinSurvey:>
Output
Indicatesifthedisplaymaskisshownorhiddenasa
pageinSURVEY.
Nextstep
IFadisplaymask
THEN
isnottobeedited
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstothescreenfromwhere
CONFIGUREDisplaySettingswasaccessed.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|241
IFadisplaymask
THEN
istobeedited
highlightthedisplaymaskandDMASK(F3).Refertoparagraph
"CONFIGUREDefineDisplayMaskn".
CONFIGURE
DefineDisplayMaskn
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandtoreturntoCONFIGURE
DisplaySettings.
CLEAR(F4)
Tosetallfieldsto<XX.Line:LineSpaceFull>.
DEFLT(F5)
Torecallthedefaultsettings.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Visible:>
YesorNo
Showsorhidesthedisplaymaskasapagein
SURVEY.
<FixedLines:>
From0to5
Defineshowmanylinesdonotscrollinthe
surveyscreenwhenthatdisplaymaskisused.
<1stLine:>
Output
Fixedto<1stLine:PointID>.
<2ndLine:>to
<16thLine:>
Config...\SurveySettings...
Foreachlineoneofthefollowingoptionscanbe
selected.
R9|242
Field
Option
Description
Add.Constant
Outputfieldforadditiveconstantofcurrently
selectedreflector.
AngleRight
Displaysthehorizontalangledifference
betweenthebacksightpointandthecurrent
telescopeposition.
Annotation1‐4
Inputfieldforcommentstobestoredwiththe
point.
Attrib(free)01‐20
Outputfieldforattributesforfreecodes.
Attrib01‐20
Inputfieldforattributesforpointcodes.
Automation
Selectautomationtype.
AvgMax#Dist
Inputfieldformaximumnumberofdistance
measurementsintheaveragingEDMmode.
Azimuth
Outputfieldfortheazimuth.
BacksightPtID
OutputfieldforpointIDofbacksightpointif
QuicksetmethodwasusedinSetupapplication
program.
Code
Outputfieldforfreecodes.
Code(free)
Inputfieldforfreecodes.
CodeDesc
Outputfieldforthedescriptionofcodes.
CodeDesc(free)
Outputfieldforthedescriptionoffreecodes.
CodeType
Outputfieldforthetypeofcode,forexample
pointcode,linecodeorareacode.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|243
Field
Option
Description
EDMMode
SelectEDMmeasurementmode.
EDMType
SelectEDMtype.
Easting
OutputfieldforEastingcoordinateofmeasured
point.
Height
Outputfieldfortheheightcoordinateofthe
measuredpoint.
HeightDiff
Outputfieldfortheheightdifferencebetween
stationandreflector.
HorizDist
Outputfieldforhorizontaldistance.
Hz‐Angle
Outputfieldforthehorizontalangle.
InstrumentHt
Outputfieldfortheinstrumentheight.
LineSpaceFull
Insertfulllinespace.
LineSpaceHalf
Inserthalflinespace.
Linework
Choicelistwithoptionforflaggingaline/area.
Referto"15.3Coding&LineworkSettings".
LongitudinalTilt
Outputfieldforthelongitudinaltiltofthe
verticalaxis.
No.ofDists
Outputfieldfornumberofaverageddistances
measuredwithEDMmodeaveraging.
Northing
OutputfieldforNorthingcoordinateofmeas‐
uredpoint.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|244
Field
Option
Description
OffsetCross
Inputfieldforhorizontaldistanceoffsetfor
measuredpoint,perpendiculartothelineof
sight.
OffsetHeight
Inputfieldforheightoffsetformeasuredpoint.
OffsetLength
Inputfieldforhorizontaldistanceoffset,inthe
directionoflineofsight.
OffsetMode
Selectoffsetmode.
PPMAtmos
Outputfieldforatmosphericppmvalue.
PPMGeom
Outputfieldforgeometricppmvalue.
PPMTotal
Outputfieldforthetotalppmvalue.
PointID
Inputfieldforthepointnumber.
Reflector
Selectareflector.
ReflectorHeight
Inputfieldforreflectorheight.
SD‐LastRec
Outputfieldforthelastrecordeddistance.
SlopeDist
Outputfieldformeasuredslopedistance.
StationEast
OutputfieldforcurrentstationEastingcoordi‐
nates.
StationHeight
Outputfieldforcurrentstationheightcoordi‐
nates.
StationID
OutputfieldforcurrentstationID.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|245
Field
Option
Description
StationNorth
OutputfieldforcurrentstationNorthingcoordi‐
nates.
StdDev
Outputfieldofstandarddeviationinmillimeters
ofaverageddistances.
TransversalTilt
Outputfieldforthetransversaltiltofthevertical
axis.
V‐Angle
Outputfieldforverticalangle.
V‐Display
Selectverticalangledisplay.
Nextstep
Step
Description
1.
CONT(F1)returnstoCONFIGUREDisplaySettings.
2.
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREDisplaySettingswas
accessed.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|246
15.3 Coding&LineworkSettings
Description
Thesettingsonthisscreendefinethemethodofcoding,forbothpointsandlines.
Referto"9Coding"foracompletedescriptionofcoding.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\SurveySettings...\Coding&LineworkSettings.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement".
CONFIGURE
Coding&Linework,
Codingpage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|247
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<QuickCode:>
Never
Preventstheuseofquickcodingcompletely.
On
Allowstheuseofquickcodingandactivatesit.
Off
Allowstheuseofquickcoding,butkeepsitdeactivated.
<Digits:>
1,2or3
Availableunless<QuickCode:Never>.
Setsthemostlyusednumberofdigitsforthequick
code.Quickcodeswithlessdigitscanstillbeused.
Whiletypingaquickcodeduringasurvey,using
ENTERaftertypingoneortwodigitsofthequickcode
indicatestheendoftheinput.
<RecFreeCode:>
AfterPointor Determinesifafreecodemeasuredwithaquickcodeis
BeforePoint storedbeforeorafterthepoint.
Thisfieldisdisabledwhen<QuickCode:Never>.
<Attributes:>
Determinestheattributevaluesdisplayedunder
certaincircumstances.Thisisapplicabletoboththe
storinganddisplayingofattributevalues.
Default
Values
Whenavailable,thedefaultattributevalues,asstored
inthejob,aredisplayedandstored.
LastUsed
Whenavailable,thelastusedattributevaluesasstored
inthejobaredisplayedandstored.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|248
Field
Option
Description
<MandAttribs:>
Always
Prompt
ThescreenXXEnterMandatoryAttributewillalways
appearwhencodes,havingoneormoreattributesof
attributetypemandatory,arebeingstored.Attributes
ofattributetypemandatoryorfixedcanonlybe
createdinStonex®Tools.
OnlyIfNo
Value
ThescreenXXEnterMandatoryAttributewillonly
appearwhencodes,havingoneormoreattributesof
attributetypemandatory,arebeingstoredwithoutan
attributevalue.Attributesofattributetypemandatory
canonlybecreatedinStonex®Tools.
CodeChange ThescreenXXEnterMandatoryAttributewillonly
Only
appearwhenanewcodewithamandatoryattribute
wasselected.
<ThematcCodes:>
<ShowCodes:>
Setsthecodingmethod.
With
Codelist
Codesstoredwithinthejobcodelistcanbeselectedto
codepoints,linesandareas.
Without
Codelist
Codesstoredwithinthejobcodelistcannotbeselected
tocodepoints,linesandareas.Eachcodemustbe
entered.
OnlyPtCodes Onlypointcodeswillbeavailableinthechoicelistfor
<Code:>/<PointCode:>inadisplaymaskofanappli‐
cationprogram.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|249
Field
<StringAttrib:>
Option
Description
AllCodes
Allcodesofthejobcodelistwillbeavailableinthe
choicelistfor<Code:>/<PointCode:>inadisplay
maskofanapplicationprogram.Selectingaline/area
codeopensanewline/area.
Choicelist
Availablefor<ShowCodes:AllCodes>.
Whenthisfieldisactive,surveyedpointsthathavethe
samecodeattachedarestrungtooneline.
Nextstep
PAGE(F1)changestotheLineworkpage.
CONFIGURE
Coding&Linework,
Lineworkpage
TheflagsforLineworkaredefinedonthisscreen.Aflag
• isstoredasapropertyofapoint.
• canbeexportedwithaformatfile.
• isdifferenttoacode.
Theflagsdefinedonthisscreenarelinkedtotheoptionsavailablefor<Linework:>inadisplay
maskofanapplicationprogram.Theselectionfor<Linework:>inadisplaymaskdetermines
theflagstoredwithapoint.Theavailabilityof<Linework:>inadisplaymaskisconfiguredin
CONFIGUREDefineDisplayMaskn.Referto"10Linework"forinformationonLinework.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|250
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<BeginLine:>
Userinput
Opensanewlinewhenthenextpointisstored.Any
lineswhicharecurrentlyopenareclosed.Thepoint
mayormaynotbestoredwithapointcode.
<3ptCurve:>
Userinput
Storesthelineworkflagforacurvethroughthenext
threemeasuredpointsandcontinuesaline/area.
<ReOpenLast
Line:>
Userinput
Opensthelastusedlineagain.
<EndLine:>
Userinput
Closesallopenlines.
<ContLine/Area:>
Userinput
Indicatesaline/areaisopen.
<StartSpline:>
Userinput
Storesthelineworkflagforbeginningasplineand
continuesanyopenline/area.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|251
Field
Option
Description
<EndSpline:>
Userinput
Storesthelineworkflagtostopaspline.
<ContSpline:>
Userinput
Indicatesaline/areaisopenwithsplinelinetype.
<BeginArea:>
Userinput
Opensanewareawhenthenextpointisstored.Any
areaswhicharecurrentlyopenareclosed.Thepoint
mayormaynotbestoredwithapointcode.
<ReOpenLast
Area:>
Userinput
Opensthelastusedareaagain.
<CloseArea:>
Userinput
Closesallopenareas.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|252
15.4 Offsets
Description
Offsetscanbeconfiguredandentered.Theoffsetvaluesareappliedtomeasuredpoints.The
Offsetfunctionallowsoffsetpointstobedetermined,forinstancewhenthereflectorcannotbe
setupdirectlyonapoint.Transverse,longitudinaland/orelevationoffsetscanbedefinedfrom
thereflectorpositiontotheoffsetpoint.Allofthedisplayedandrecordedmeasurementdatais
inrelationtotheoffsetpoint.Thevaluesfortargeteccentricityisretainedafterstoragewith
<OffsetMode:Permanent>.Thevaluesaresettozerowith<OffsetMode:ResetafterREC>.
P2
d6
d1
d2
d3
d4
P1
d5
P3
P0

P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
Station
Currentposition
Offsetpoint
Offsetpoint
Offsetcross‐
Offsetcross+
Offsetlength‐
Offsetlength+
Offsetheight‐
Offsetheight+
Ifconfiguredinadisplaymask,theoffsetvaluesappearalsointhedisplaymaskinSurvey.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|253
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\SurveySettings...\Offsets.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManage‐
ment".
CONFIGURE
Offsets
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreen
fromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
OFS=0(F5)
Tosetalloffsetsto0.000.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|254
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<OffsetMode:>
Resetafter
REC
Theoffsetvaluesareresetto0.000afterapointis
measuredwithREC(F3)orALL(F1).
Permanent
Theoffsetvaluesareappliedtoeverymeasuredpoint
untilresetorchanged.
<OffsetCross:>
Userinput
Setscrossoffsetoftargetpoint,perpendiculartothe
lineofsight.
<OffsetLength:>
Userinput
Setslengthoffsetoftargetpoint,inthedirectionofthe
lineofsight.
<OffsetHeight:>
Userinput
Setsheightoffsetoftargetpoint.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREOffsetswasaccessed.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|255
15.5 TargetCheck
Description
• Itispossibletoconfiguretheinstrumenttomonitorsequentiallystoredmeasurementsand
tonotifytheuserifthecoordinatesliewithinadefinedrangefromeachother.
• Ifconfigured,whenapointisbeingstoredtheX,Ycoordinatesofthepointbeingstoredare
comparedtothoseofthelastpreviouslystoredpoint.Ifthedifferenceislessthanthedefined
positiontolerancethenawarningisshown.Itcannowbedecidedwhethertostorethepoint
ornot.
• Ifconfigured,thenbacksighttargetpointsandresectiontargetpointswhichweremeasured
duringthesetupprocedurearealsocheckedinthismanner.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\SurveySettings...\TargetCheck.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
Configuring
thetargetcheck
CONT(F1)
Toacceptthescreenentriesandcontinue.
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|256
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<TargetCheck:>
On
Targetcheckingisactivated.
Off
Targetcheckingisnotactivated.
Userinput
Thepositiontolerance.TheunitsaredefinedbyConfig
\GeneralSettings\Units&Formats.
<PosTolerance:>
Config...\SurveySettings...
R9|257
16 Config...\InstrumentSettings...
16.1 EDM&iLockSettings
Description

• ThesettingsonthisscreendefinetheactiveEDMElectronicDistanceMeasurementand
iLocksettings.
• Referto"29Functions"fordetailedinformationonEDMandiLock.
• DescriptionsapplyingeneraltoR9instruments.
• Availableoptionsdependonthepurchasedmodel,forexamplewithorwithoutiLock.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...\EDM&iLockSettings.
OR
PressUSER.
Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
PressSHIFTUSER.
Referto"3QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER"forinformationontheSHIFTUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement".
CONFIGURE
EDM&iLockSettings,
Surveypage
Setuppage
Description
• Thisscreenhastwopages‐theSurveypageandtheSetuppage.
• TheSurveypageandSetuppagecontainidenticalfields.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|258
• ThesettingsmadeintheSurveypageareusedbyallapplicationsandallmeasurements
takenoutsideoftheSetupapplicationprogram.
• ThesettingsmadeintheSetuppageareonlyusedinsidetheSetupapplicationprogram.
• AnychangesmadetotheEDM&iLockSettings(forexampleviaIcons,QuickSet,Hotkeys)
whiletheSetupapplicationprogramisactive,onlyaffecttheSetupEDM&iLocksettings.
• AnychangesmadetotheEDM&iLockSettings(forexampleviaIcons,QuickSet,Hotkeys)
whiletheSetupapplicationprogramisnotactive,onlyaffecttheSurveyEDM&iLock
settings.
• WhenenteringtheSetupapplicationprogram,theSetupEDM&iLockSettingsareactive.
• WhenleavingtheSetupapplicationprogram,theSurveyEDM&iLockSettingsareactive.
• BothSurveyandSetupEDM&iLockSettingsarepartoftheconfigurationsets.
Diagram
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
TEST(F4)
ToaccesstheCONFIGUREEDMTest
Signal/Frequencyscreen.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetootherpageonscreen.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|259
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<EDMType:>
Reflector
(IR)
Allfieldsaresettothelastusedoptions.
TheIREDMexistsforallinstrumenttypesandallows
tomeasurethedistancetoaprismoratape.IRisthe
EDMthatcanbeusedwithiLockandRobotic.For
<Automation:iLock>or<Automation:Robotic>
<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>isautomaticallyset.
Whenever<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>isselected,
thelastsettingfor<Automation:>whichwasused
withreflectorisset.
Whenactivated,IRisdisplayedasanicon.
Reflctrless
(RL)
<Automation:None>and<Reflector:Reflector‐
less>areselected.Theotherfieldsaresettothelast
usedoptions.
Whenactivated,RLisdisplayedasanicon.
LongRange
(LO)
<Automation:None>isselected.Lastusedoptions
areresetfortheotherfields.
Whenactivated,LOisdisplayedasanicon.
<EDMMode:>
Standard
Availableforall<EDMType:>options.
Standardsingledistancemeasurement.
Whenactivated,STDisdisplayedasanicon.
Fast
Availableonlyfor<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>.
Fastsingledistancemeasurement.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|260
Field
Option
Description
Whenactivated,FASTisdisplayedasanicon.
Tracking
Availableunless<EDMType:LongRange(LO)>.
Continuousdistancemeasurement.
Whenactivated,TRKisdisplayedasanicon.
SynchroTrack Availableonlyfor<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>.
Thisisthemeasurementmodefortheinterpolationof
anglemeasurementsinIRRobotictrackingmode.In
differencetonormalIRRobotictrackingmode,where
anglemeasurementsareonlyassignedtocertain
distancemeasurements,SynchroTrackwillperforma
linearinterpolationbetweenthepreviousand
followinganglemeasurement,baseduponthetimes‐
tampoftheEDMmeasurement.
Usingthisinterpolationprocedure,ahigheraccuracy
foralldynamicapplications(forexamplemachine
guidance)ispossible.
Whenactivated,SYNCisdisplayedasanicon.
Average
Availableforall<EDMType:>options.
Repeatsmeasurementsinstandardmeasuringmode.
Theaveragedistanceof<AVGMax#Dist:>andthe
standarddeviationfortheaverageddistancearecalcu‐
lated.
Whenactivated,AVGisdisplayedasanicon.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|261
Field
Option
Description
<AVGMax#Dist:>
Userinput
Availableif<EDMMode:Average>.Inputfieldforthe
maximumnumberofdistancestobeaveragedfrom2
to999distances.
<Reflector:>
Choicelist
ReflectornamesasconfiguredinMainMenu:
Manage...\Reflectors.
<Add.Constant:>
Output
Theadditiveconstantstoredwiththechosenreflector.
<Automation:>
None
MeasurementsaredonewithoutiLock.
iLock
Positioningtostaticprisms.
Robotic
Theinstrumentlocksontoandfollowsthemoving
prism.
<iLockSettings:>
iLockSettings.
Normal
NormalModeisturnedon.
LowVisOn
LowVisabilityModeisturnedon.Toincreasethe
instrumentmeasuringabilityduringsuboptimal
weatherconditions.AvailableonlywheniLockor
Roboticmodeisactivated.
Thismodeisautomaticallydeactivatedwhenthe
instrumentisturnedoff.
LowVis
AlwaysOn
LowVisabilityModeispermanentlyturnedon.
S‐RangeOn
ShortRangeModeisturnedon.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|262
Field
Option
Description
Thismodeisdesignedforsurveyworkatcloserange
fromtheinstrument(upto60‐80m).Underthese
conditionstheinstrumentRoboticModeissignifi‐
cantlystabilised.
Thismodehasaconsiderableinfluenceontherange
(restrictionto100‐150m)for<Automation:iLock>.
Thismodeisautomaticallydeactivatedwhenthe
instrumentisturnedoff.
<TargetView:>
S‐Range
AlwaysOn
ShortRangeModeispermanentlyturnedon.
Choicelist
Availableonlyfor<Automation:iLock>.Reducesthe
Aimfieldofviewtothecentralareaofinterest.
Off
TheAimfieldofviewisnotreduced.
On
TheAimfieldofviewisreduced.
Thismodeisautomaticallydeactivatedwhenthe
instrumentisturnedoff.
AlwaysOn
TheAimfieldofviewispermanentlyreduced.
Nextstep
IFEDM
THEN
isnottobetested
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstoR9MainMenu.
istobetested
TEST(F4)totesttheEDMsignalstrengthandfrequency.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|263
16.2 SearchWindows
Description
• Thesettingsonthisscreendefinethesizeofsearchwindowsforprismstobesearchedin.
TheprismscanbesearchedwithiLockintheAimwindow.
• Referto"29.2PrismSearchMethods"foradditionalinformation.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...\SearchWindows.
OR
PressUSER.
Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement".
CONFIGURE
SearchWindows,
iLockWindowpage
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
DEFLT(F5)
TorecallthedefaultiLockwindowsettings.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetootherpageonscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<HzSearch:>
Userinput
Horizontalextentofwindow.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|264
Field
Option
Description
Thisfieldisdisabledwhen<TargetView:On>or
<TargetView:AlwaysOn>.<Targetviewactive>is
displayedatthebottomonthispagewhenthefieldis
disabled.
<VSearch:>
Userinput
Verticalextentofwindow.
Thisfieldisdisabledwhen<TargetView:On>or
<TargetView:AlwaysOn>.<Targetviewactive>is
displayedatthebottomonthispagewhenthefieldis
disabled.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoR9MainMenu.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|265
16.3 AutomaticPrismSearch
Description
• Thesettingsonthisscreendefinethebehaviourofautomaticprismsearchafterthetargetis
lostinlockmode.
• Referto"29Functions"forinformationoniLock,lockandautomationbehaviour.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...\AutomaticPrismSearch.
OR
PressUSER.
Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement".
CONFIGURE
AutomaticPrismSearch
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
DEFLT(F5)
Torecallthedefaultsettings.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|266
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Predictfor:>
From1sto5s Ifthetargetislostwhen<Automation:Robotic>the
pathofthereflectorispredictedfortheselected
amountofseconds.
<Searchwith:>
NoSearch
Performnosearchafterprediction.
iLock
PerformsearchafterpredictionwithiLockina
dynamiciLockwindow.
LastPoint
Ifthetargetislostwhen<Automation:Robotic>,
thentheinstrumentturnsbacktothelaststoredpoint.
Thefieldofviewisdisabledwhiletheinstrumentis
repositioning.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstoR9MainMenu.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|267
16.4 TPSCorrections
Description
• Thesettingsonthisscreendefinetheatmosphericppm,thegeometricppmandtherefrac‐
tion.Thegeometricppmcanalsobedeterminedbyaresectioncalculation.
• Forstandardapplicationprogramsthedistanceiscorrectedonaccountofatmospheric
influences.Thegeometricalcorrectionandtheprojectiondistortionsaresetto0.00.Heights
arereducedwiththestandardrefractioncoefficient.
• RefertoR9UserManualforinformationoncalculations.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...\TPSCorrections.
OR
PressUSER.
Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement".
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|268
CONFIGURE
TPSCorrections,
AtmosPPMpage
Theatmosphericdistancecorrectionsarederivedfromthedryairtemperature,airpressureor
elevationabovemeansealevelMSLandrelativeairhumidityorwetbulbtemperature.
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
P<>E(F3)
Tochange<AtmPressure:>to<Elevabove
MSL:>andback.
%<>T’(F4)
Tochange<RelHumidity:>to<TempWet‐
bulb:>andback.
PPM=0(F5)
Toset<Atmosphericppm:0.0>.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetootherpageonscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Temperature:>
Userinput
Setsthetemperature.
<AtmPressure:>or Userinput
<ElevaboveMSL:>
Setstheatmosphericpressureortheelevationabove
meansealeveldependentonselection.
<RelHumidity:>or Userinput
<TempWet‐bulb:>
Setstherelativeairhumidityorthewetbulbtempera‐
turedependentonselection.
<Atmospheric
ppm:>
Theatmosphericppmiseithersetorcalculatedfrom
theabovevalues.
Userinputor
Output
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|269
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheGeomPPMpage.
CONFIGURE
TPSCorrections,
GeomPPMpage
• Thegeometricdistancecorrection(geometricppm)isderivedfromthemapprojection
distortion(mapprojectionppm),theheightabovereferencedatumcorrection(heightppm)
andanindividualcorrection(individualppm).
• ThecalculationofthemapprojectionppmfollowstheformulafortheTransversalMercator
Projection.Theindividualfactorsare:thescalefactorofthelineofprojectioncentral
meridian,Gauss‐Krüger=1.0,UTM=0.9996,etc.andtheoffsetfromthelineofprojection.
• Thecalculationoftheheightppmisderivedfromtheheightoftheinstrumentstationabove
thereferencedatum.NormallythisistheheightabovemeansealevelMSL.
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
PPM=0(F5)
Toset<Geometricppm:0.0>.
Onlyavailablewhen<CalcScale:Manually>.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetootherpageonscreen.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|270
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<CalcScale:>
Manually
Thegeometricppmvalueismanuallycalculated.
<ScaleatC.M.:>
Userinput
Thescaleatthecentralmeridian.
<OffsettoC.M.:>
Userinput
Theoffsettothecentralmeridian.
<MapProjppm:>
Output
Themapprojectionppmvalue.Ifthisvaluecannotbe
calculated,then‐‐‐‐‐isdisplayedandisalsoignoredin
thecalculationofthegeometricppmvalue.
<HtaboveRef:>
Userinput
Theheightoftheinstrumentstationabovetherefer‐
encedatum.
<ppmaboveRef:>
Output
Theheightppmvaluecalculatedfrom<Htabove
Ref:>.
<Individualppm:>
Userinput
Theindividualppmvalue.
<Geometricppm:>
Output
Geometricppm=
MapProjppm+ppmaboveRef+Individualppm.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheRefractionpage.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|271
CONFIGURE
TPSCorrections,
Refractionpage
Therefractioncorrectionistakenintoaccountduringthecalculationoftheheightdifference.
RefertoR9UserManualforinformationonrefractioncalculation.
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
DEFLT(F5)
Sets<Correction:On>and<Refcoeff(k):
0.13>.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetootherpageonscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Correction:>
OnorOff
Refractioncorrectionisappliedtomeasurements.
<Refcoeff(k):>
Userinput
Availableif<Correction:On>.Refractioncoefficient
tobeusedforcalculation.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGURETPSCorrectionswasaccessed.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|272
16.5 Compensator
Description
ThecompensatorandtheHzcorrectioncanbedeactivatedifrawdataistobedisplayedand
recorded.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...\Compensator.
OR
PressUSER.
Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.
Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManagement".
OR
ICONS.
CONFIGURE
Compensator
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|273
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Compensator:>
On
Verticalanglesarerelativetoplumbline.Thehori‐
zontalangleiscorrectedforthetransversaltilterrors
if<Hz‐Correction:On>.
Off
Verticalanglesarerelativetovertical/standingaxis.
On
Thehorizontalanglesarecorrectedforthelineofsight,
tiltingaxisandif<Compensator:On>transversaltilt
errors.
Off
Horizontalanglesarenotcorrected.
<Hz‐Correction:>
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoR9MainMenu.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|274
16.6 InstrumentID
Description
• Thesettingsonthisscreendefinetheinstrumentidentificationnumber.Thisnumberisused
forthegenerationofthefilenames.
• Usingformatfiles,theinstrumentIDcanbeoutputtogetherwithdatafromtheinstrument.
Bydoingso,itcanbeidentifiedwhichinstrumentwasusedforcertainmeasurements.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...\InstrumentID.
CONFIGURE
InstrumentID
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
DEFLT(F5)
TorecallthedefaultinstrumentID.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<InstrumentID:>
Userinput
Setsafourdigitnumberasinstrumentidentification
number.Bydefaultthelastfournumbersoftheserial
numberareused.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|275
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoR9MainMenu.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|276
16.7 TelescopeAccessories
Description
Thesettingsonthisscreenofferthepossibilitytolimitthemotorizationtoacertainpartofthe
horizontaland/orverticalcircleasusedtelescopeandlensaccessoriesmayobstructafullrota‐
tionofthetelescope.Generalpositioningfunctionsarethenrestrictedtotheseboundaries.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\InstrumentSettings...\TelescopeAccessories.
CONFIGURE
TelescopeAccessories,
HzLimitpage
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
NEW(F2)
Todefinenewhorizontallimitsforinstrument
rotation.
SHOW(F5)
Todefinenewhorizontallimitsforinstrument
rotation.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<HzBegin:>
<HzEnd:>
Output/User
input
Theboundariesofthewindowwithintheinstrument
isallowedtoturn.
<UseLimit:>
Yes
Instrumentturningisrestrictedtothedefined
window.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|277
Field
Option
Description
No
Instrumentrotateswithoutanylimitation,from0to
400gon.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)returnstotheVLimitpage.
CONFIGURE
TelescopeAccessories,
VLimitpage
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
NEW(F2)
Todefinenewverticallimitsfortelescoperota‐
tion.
SHOW(F5)
Topositionthetelescopetoitsrotationlimits.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<VBegin:>
<VEnd:>
Output/User
input
Verticalextentofthewindowinwhichtheinstrument
isallowedtoturnthetelescope.Thevalueofthe
currentlimitreferstotheverticalreadingofthe
presentlineofsightdirection.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|278
Field
Option
Description
<UseLimit:>
None
Telescopeturnswithoutanylimitationfrom0to
400gon.
Eyepiece
Themovementofthetelescopeislimitedbythestored
EyepieceAccessoriesLimits.
Lens
Themovementofthetelescopeislimitedbythestored
LensAccessoriesLimits.
Eyepce&Lens Themovementofthetelescopeislimitedbythecombi‐
nationofbothareaswiththeleastverticalextend.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoR9MainMenu.
Config...\InstrumentSettings...
R9|279
17 Config...\GeneralSettings...
17.1 Units&Formats
Description
Thesettingsonthisscreendefine
• theunitsforalltypesofmeasurementdatadisplayed.
• informationrelatedtosometypesofmeasurementdata.
• theorderinwhichcoordinatesaredisplayed.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...\Units&Formats.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManage‐
ment".
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|280
CONFIGURE
Units&Formats,
Unitspage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<DistanceUnit:>
Description
Theunitsshownforalldistanceandcoordinaterelated
fields.
Metre(m)
Metres[m]
IntFt(fi)
Internationalfeet[fi],storageinUSfeet
IntFt/Inch(fi) Internationalfeet[fi],inchesand1/8inches(0'000/8
fi),storageinUSfeet
USFt(ft)
USfeet[ft]
USFt/Inch(ft) USfeet,inchesand1/8inches(0'000/8fi)[ft]
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|281
Field
Option
Description
<DistanceDec:>
From
0Decimalto
4Decimals
Thenumberofdecimalplacesshownforalldistance
andcoordinaterelatedfields.Thisisfordatadisplay
anddoesnotapplytodataexportorstorage.Theavail‐
ableoptionsdependontheselected<DistanceUnit:>.
<AngleUnit:>
400gon,360° Theunitsshownforallangularandcoordinaterelated
'",360°decor fields.MoreanglesettingscanbedefinedontheAngle
6400mil
page.
<AngleDec:>
Thenumberofdecimalplacesshownforallangular
andcoordinaterelatedfields.Thisisfordatadisplay
anddoesnotapplytodataexportorstorage.
From
Availablefor<AngleUnit:400gon>or<AngleUnit:
2Decimalsto 360°dec>.
4Decimals
From
1Decimalto
3Decimals
Availablefor<AngleUnit:6400mil>.
0.1’’,1’’,5’’,
10’’,60’’
Availablefor<AngleUnit:360°’’’>.
<GradeUnit:>
Theinputandoutputformatforgrades.
h:v
Horizontalbyverticaldistance.
v:h
Verticalbyhorizontaldistance.
%(v/h*100) Percentageofverticalbyhorizontaldistance.
ElevAngle
Elevationangle.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|282
Field
Option
Description
2
<AreaUnit:>
m ,IntAcres Theunitsshownforallarearelatedfields.
(Ai),USAcres
(A),Hectares
(ha),fi2orft2
<VolumeUnit:>
m3,fi3,ft3or
yd3
<TempUnit:>
Celsius(°C)or Theunitsshownforalltemperaturerelatedfields.
Fahrenheit
(°F)
<PressUnit:>
mbar,mmHg, Theunitsshownforallpressurerelatedfields.
InchHg
psi=poundspersquareinch.
(inHg),hPaor
psi
Theunitsshownforallvolumerelatedfields.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheAnglepage.Refertoparagraph"CONFIGUREUnits&Formats,Angle
page".
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|283
CONFIGURE
Units&Formats,
Anglepage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<DirecRef:>
North
Azimuth,
South
Azimuth,
NorthAnti‐
clock,or
Bearing
Setsthereferencedirectionaswellasthedirection
fromwhereandhowazimuthsarecomputed.
For<DirecRef:Bearing>,theazimuth/bearingfields
inotherscreensarecalled<Bearing:>.NE,SW,SEand
NWindicatethequadrantofthebearing.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|284
Field
Option
Description
NW
SW
N
NE
SE
Forallotheroptions,theazimuth/bearingfieldsin
otherscreensarecalled<Azimuth:>.
<V‐Display:>
<V‐Angle:>
ZenithAngle
V=0inzenith.
ElevAngle
V=0horizontalelevationangle.V‐anglesarepositive
abovethehorizonandnegativebelowit.
ElevAngle%
V=0horizontal.V‐anglesareexpressedin%andare
positiveabovethehorizonandnegativebelowit.
Holdafter
DIST
Theverticalangleisfixedafteradistancemeasure‐
mentwithDIST(F2),whereasthehorizontalangleis
continuouslyupdatedwiththetelescopemovement.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|285
Field
Option
Description
Running
Theverticalangleiscontinuouslyupdatedwiththe
telescopemovement.
Theactivereflectorheightisappliedinthe
calculationofremotepointelevations.The
reflectorheightmustbesettozerotodisplay
andrecordtheelevationofthetargetedremote
point.

Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheTimepage.Refertoparagraph"CONFIGUREUnits&Formats,Time
page".
CONFIGURE
Units&Formats,
Timepage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|286
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<TimeFormat:>
24houror
Howthetimeisshowninalltimerelatedfields.
12hour(am/pm)
<DateFormat:>
Day.Month.Year, Howthedateisshowninalldaterelatedfields.
Month/Day/Year
or
Year/Month/Day
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheFormatpage.Refertoparagraph"CONFIGUREUnits&Formats,
Formatpage".
CONFIGURE
Units&Formats,
Formatpage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|287
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<GridFormat:>
East,Northor Theorderinwhichgridcoordinatesareshowninall
North,East
screens.Theorderindisplaymasksdependsonthe
usersettings.
<GeodeticFormat:> Lat,Longor
Long,Lat
Description
Theorderinwhichgeodeticcoordinatesareshownin
allscreens.Theorderindisplaymasksdependsonthe
usersettings.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|288
17.2 WizardMode
Description
Thesettingsonthisscreendefinethebehaviouroftheconfigurationsetwizard.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...\WizardMode.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManage‐
ment".
CONFIGURE
WizardMode
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandtoreturntoR9Main
Menuortocontinuewiththesubsequentscreen
withintheconfigurationsetwizard.
LIST(F6)
ToaccessCONFIGUREQuickAccess.Listsall
screenswithinaconfigurationset.Allowsto
accesstheseindividualscreensandchange
settings.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<WizardMode:>
ViewAll
Screens
Allconfigurationscreensareshownintheconfigura‐
tionsetwizard.Applicationprogramconfiguration
screensarenotincluded.Theycanbeconfigured
withineachapplicationprogram.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|289
Field
Option
Description
Reduced
Areducedsetofscreensareshownintheconfigura‐
tionsetwizard.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoR9MainMenuorcontinueswiththesubsequentscreenwithinthe
configurationsetwizard.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|290
17.3 UserMenu
Description
Thesettingsonthisscreenassignaparticularfunction,screenorapplicationprogramtothe
USERkey.Referto"2USERKey"formoreinformationontheUSERkey.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...\UserMenu.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManage‐
ment".
CONFIGUREUserMenu,
UserMenupage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|291
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<1:>to<9:>
Choicelist
Allfunctions,screensorapplicationprogramswhich
canbeassignedtotheindividuallinesintheuser
definedmenu.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|292
17.4 Language
Description
Thesettingonthisscreendefinesthelanguageusedontheinstrument.Threelanguagescanbe
storedontheinstrumentatonetime‐Englishandtwoothers.Englishcannotbedeleted.Refer
to"23.2SystemLanguages".
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...\Language.
CONFIGURE
LanguagesonInstru‐
ment
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedlanguage.
Descriptionoffields
Column
Option
Description
<Language:>
Choicelist
Setsthelanguage.
Theselectedlanguageisusedforthesystemsoftware.
Ifalanguageisnotavailableforthesystemsoftware,
theEnglishlanguageisusedinstead.
Applicationprogramsruninthelanguagetheywere
loaded.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoR9MainMenu.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|293
17.5 Lights,Display,Beeps,Text
Description
Thesettingsonthisscreenallowthelightsandscreenappearancetobeconfigured,turnthe
notificationbeepsonandoffanddefinethebehaviourofthekeys.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...\Lights,Display,Beeps,Text.
OR
PressSHIFTF11.
CONFIGURE
Lights,Display,Beeps,
Text,
Lightspage
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Redlaser:>
OnorOff
ToturntheredlaserofRLEDMonandoff.
<SureBeam:>
OnorOff
ToturntheLaserGuide(GUS74)onandoff.
ThisfieldisonlyavailableifGUS74isfitted
<Intensity:>
From0%to
100%
ToadjusttheSureBeam/LaserGuideintensityusing
theleftandrightarrowkeys.
<Reticule:>
OnorOff
Toturnthereticuleilluminationonandoff.
<Intensity:>
From0%to
100%
Toadjustthereticuleilluminationintensityusingthe
leftandrightarrowkeys.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|294
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheDisplaypage.
CONFIGURE
Lights,Display,Beeps,
Text,
Displaypage
ThispagecontainsthescreendisplaysettingsfortheR9instrument.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
CALIB(F5)
Tocalibratethetouchscreen.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<TouchScreen:>
OnorOff
Turnstouchscreenonandoff.
<ScreenBeep:>
Off,Softor
Loud
Controlsthebeepupontouchingthetouchscreen.
<ScreenIllum:>
AlwaysOn,On Controlsthescreenilluminationtobeon,oronforthe
for1min,On specifiedtimeafterthelastkeywaspressed.
for2min,On
for5min
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|295
Field
Option
Description
<KeyIllum:>
Off,Sameas
Screenor
AlwaysOn
Controlsthekeyboardillumination.
<Contrast:>
From0%to
100%
Toadjustthescreenbrightness.
<Heating:>
OfforAuto‐
matic
Turnsscreenheatingonandoff.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheBeepspage.
CONFIGURE
Lights,Display,Beeps,
Text,
Beepspage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|296
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<WarningBeeps:>
Off,Softor
Loud
Controlsthebeepforacousticwarningsignalsforthe
R9instrument.
<KeyBeeps:>
Off,Softor
Loud
ControlsthebeepuponkeypressesfortheR9instru‐
ment.
<Hz‐SectrBeep:>
OnorOff
TurnstheHz‐sectorbeeponandoff.Theinstrument
beepswhenwithin5gon/4°30’ofthedefinedsector,
thereisalongandconsistentbeepwithin0.5gon/27’
andnobeepwithin0.005gon/16’’.
<SectorAngle:>
Userinput
Inputfieldforsectorangleforwhichabeepshould
sound.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheTextpage.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|297
CONFIGURE
Lights,Display,Beeps,
Text,
Textpage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<KeyRptDelay:>
Userinput
Keyrepeatdelayisthetimebetweentheinitialkey
pressandwhenthekeystartsrepeating.Forexample
innumericmodepressandhold1.Behaviouron
screen:1‐delay‐11111111111.Inalphamodethe
focusstaysononefieldandscrollsthroughtheavail‐
ablecharacters:S‐delay‐TU7STU7.
Timebetweentheinitialkeypressandwhenthekey
startsrepeating.Alphanumeric,numeric,CEorarrow
keysinallgeneralscreensaredelayedbythespecified
time.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|298
Field
Option
Description
<AlphaMode:>
FunctionKeys Alphanumericinputcaneitherbethroughfunctionor
orNumeric
numerickeys.
Keys
<DefltαNum:>
Upto6choices Availableif<AlphaMode:FunctionKeys>.Setsthe
setofextracharactersavailablethroughαNUMoron
F1‐F6wheneveranentryismade.
Thechoicesavailabledependonthecharactersets
loadedontheinstrumentandthelanguageconfigured
tobeusedontheinstrument.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothenextpage.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|299
17.6 StartUp&PowerDown
Description
• Thesettingsonthisscreen
• definetheinstrumentstartupscreen.
• definethebehaviouroftheinstrumentwhenstartingupandwhenpoweringdown.
• defineaPINcodewhichneedstobeenteredwhenstartinguptheinstrument.
StartUp
• Thescreenenteredafterturningontheinstrumentcanbeconfigured.
PowerDown
• Oncepowerisrestoredafterapowerlosstheinstrumentreturnstothescreeninwhichit
wasoperatingwhenthepowerfailed.Afterrestarting,theinstrumentusesthesamejoband
configurationsetasbeforethepowerloss.Ifeitherthejoborconfigurationsetarenotavail‐
ablethefirstinthelistisused.
• Twotypesofpowerlosscouldbeexperienced:
• Suddenpowerloss:
• Gradualpowerloss:
Internalorexternalbatterybeingremoved
Internalorexternalbatteryrunningdownnaturally
PINCode
• APersonalIdentificationNumberprotectioncanbeactivated.
Type
Description
PINprotectionactive
InstrumentpromptsforPINcodeentry
• afterstartingup.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|300
Type
Description
• whenchangingthePINcodeinCONFIGUREStartUp
&PowerDown.
PINcodegeneration
Bytheuser.
AttemptsforcorrectPINcode
Five.Afterfivefalseattempts,aPersonalUnblocKingcode
mustbetypedin.
PUKcodegeneration
• ByStonex®.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\GeneralSettings...\StartUp&PowerDown.
OR
Withintheconfigurationsetwizard.Referto"11.2AccessingConfigurationSetManage‐
ment".
CONFIGURE
StartUp&PowerDown
StartUp&PowerDown
page
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|301
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<StartScreen:>
Choicelist
Determinesthefirstscreenwhichisshownafter
turningontheinstrument.
<PowerDown:>
<Mode:>
<AfterTime:>
Setsthebehaviouroftheinstrumentshutdown.
WithConfirmation
Instrumentshutdownmustbeconfirmed.
Directly
Theinstrumentisshutdownimmediately
withoutconfirmation.
TurnOff
Theinstrumentturnsoffifnoeventshave
occurredafterthetimesetin<AfterTime:>.
RemainOn
Theinstrumentdoesnotpowerdownautomat‐
ically.
Userinput
Availableunless<Mode:RemainOn>is
selected.Minutesafterwhichtheinstrument
shouldturnoff.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothePINCodepage.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|302
CONFIGURE
StartUp&PowerDown,
PINCodepage
Theappearanceofthescreenvarieswiththesettingfor<UsePIN:>whenthisscreenis
accessed.
<UsePIN:No>
NoPINcodehasbeensetbefore.
• ThePINcodeprotectioncanbeactivated.
• ThenaPINcodecanbetypedin.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
<UsePIN:Yes>
APINcodehasbeensetbefore.
• ThePINcodemustbetypedinorderto
changesettingsonthispage.
• ThenthePINcodeprotectioncanbedeacti‐
vated.
• OrthePINcodecanbechanged.
R9|303
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<UsePIN:>
YesorNo
ActivatesthePINcodeprotection.Thissettingisnot
partoftheconfigurationset.
<NewPIN:>
Userinput
ThePINcodemustbeanumberwithfourtosixdigits.
<PINCode:>
Userinput
ThePINcodeaspreviouslydefinedonthispage.The
correctPINcodemustbetypedinwithinfiveattempts
orthePUKcodeisrequired.Referto"1Instrument
ProtectionwithPIN".
<ChangePIN:>
YesorNo
Activates<NewPIN:>totypeinanewPINcode.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Config...\GeneralSettings...
R9|304
18 Interfaces,Ports,Devices
18.1 OverallConcept
Terminology
Term
Description
Interface
Theprocedures,codesandprotocolsthatenabletwoentitiestointeract
foranexchangeofdata.Eachinterfaceisgivenameaningfuldisplay
namewhichenableseasydistinctionbetweeninterfaces.
Port
Aconnectionthroughwhichaseparatedevicemaycommunicatewith
theinstrument.
Device
Thehardwarewhichisconnectedtothechosenport.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|305
Concept
Table
Thistablegivesanoverviewoftheinteractionbetweenaninterface,portanddevice.
Concept
Example
Interface
Whattypeofinformationistobecommunicated GeoComMode
betweentheinstrumentanddevice?
Port
Whichportisbeingusedtoconnectthedeviceto Port2(Handle)
theinstrument?
Device
Whichdeviceisbeingconnectedtotheportand BaudRate:115200
whatareitscommunicationsettingsandindi‐
Parity:None
vidualparameters?
DataBits:8
StopBit:1
LinkNumber:1,Setas:
Base
Screen
Thisscreengivesanoverviewofallinterfaceswiththecurrentlyassignedportanddevice.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|306
Point
Description
1.
• CONFIGUREInterfaces‐EDIT(F3)referstointerfaceparameters.
Toconfiguretheparametersrelatedtothehighlightedinterface(switchingon/off
theinterface,portselection,deviceselectionanddevicecommunicationsettings).
• CONFIGUREInterfaces‐CTRL(F4)referstodeviceparameters.
Toconfigureadditionalparametersrelatedtothehighlighteddevice.
• CONFIGUREInterfaces‐USE(F5)enablestheimmediateturningon/offofan
interface,withouttheneedforediting/configuring.Thelastusedsettingsare
automaticallyrecalled.
2.
Oneportcanonlyconnecttoonedeviceatatime.
3.
Oneportmaybeusedbymorethanoneinterfaceatatime.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|307
Furtherinformation
IFmoreinformation THEN
isrequiredon
interfaces
Referto"18.2Interfaces"
ports
Referto"18.3Ports"
devices
Referto"18.4Devices"
EDIT(F3)
Referto"19Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface"
interfaceparameters
CTRL(F4)
deviceparameters
Referto"20Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice"
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|308
18.2 Interfaces
18.2.1 OverviewofInterfaces
Description
Theinstrumenthasvariousinterfacesconfiguredtobeusedwithaportandadevice.The
configurationvariesdependingontheindividualapplication.
Availableinterfaces
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|309
18.2.2 AccessingCONFIGUREInterfaces
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\Interfaces....
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
CONFIGURE
Interfaces
Thescreengivesanoverviewofallinterfaceswiththecurrentlyassignedportanddevice.
CONT(F1)
Toreturntothescreenfromwherethisscreen
wasaccessed.
EDIT(F3)
Toconfiguretheparametersrelatedtothehigh‐
lightedinterface.
CTRL(F4)
Availableforcertaindevicesconnectedto
certaininterfaces.Toconfigureadditionalpara‐
maters.
USE(F5)
Toturnthehighlightedinterfaceonoroff.Ifthe
interfaceisturnedonthenthesettingswhich
werelastusedwiththatinterfaceareactive.If
thedevicewhichwaslastusedwiththatinter‐
faceisnolongeravailable,theRS232isassigned
tothatinterface.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|310
Nextstep
IF
THEN
aninterfaceistobeturned HighlighttheinterfaceandEDIT(F3).
on/off,aportistobe
Referto"19Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface"
selectedoradeviceistobe
selected
adeviceattachedtoan
HighlighttherelevantinterfaceandCTRL(F4).
interfaceistobeconfigured Referto"20Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice"
aninterfaceistobeturned HighlighttherelevantinterfaceandUSE(F5).
on/off
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|311
18.3 Ports
Description
• Theinstrumentisalwaysfittedwiththeportlocatedattheinstrumentbase(port1).Addi‐
tionalportsareavailableforRH9(port2)andforBluetooth(port3).
• Thelistofavailabledevicesalwaysdependsontheselectedport.
Availableports
Type
Port
R9
Port1
Forpowerand/orcommunication,5pinLEMO‐0
Port2(Handle)
HotshoeconnectionforRH9
Port3(BT)
BluetoothmoduleforcommunicationwithBluetoothcapabledevices
Location
Port
Description
Port1
Thisportislocatedatthebaseoftheinstrumentandisalwaysavailable.
Port2(Handle)
ThisportislocatedontopoftheCommunicationsidecover.
Port3(BT)
ThisportishousedwithintheCommunicationsidecover.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|312
18.4 Devices
18.4.1 OverviewofDevices
Description
Furtherinformation
• Adeviceisthehardwarewhichisconnectedtothechosenport.Devicesareusedtotransmit
andreceivemeasurementdata.
• BeforeusinganydevicewithR9itisnecessarytoconfiguretheinterfacewithwhichitwill
beused.Referto"19Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface"forinformationonhowto
configureinterfaces.
• Somedevicesmaybeusedwithdifferentinterfacesfordifferentapplications.
IFmoreinformationis
requiredon
THEN
radiosforremotecontrol
Referto"18.4.5Device‐RadiosforRemoteControl".
RS232
Referto"18.4.6Device‐RS232".
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|313
18.4.2 AccessingCONFIGUREDevices
Description
Accessstep‐by‐step
• Allowsdevicestobecreated,edited,selectedanddeleted.
• Referto"20Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice"formoreinformation.
Step
Description
1.
MainMenu:Config...\Interfaces...
2.
Highlighttheappropriateinterfacebasedonthetypeofdevicethatneedstobe
configured.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessCONFIGUREXX.
4.
DEVCE(F5)toaccessCONFIGUREDevices.Refertoparagraph"CONFIGURE
Devices".
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|314
CONFIGURE
Devices
Thisscreenconsistsoftwopages.Thefunctionalitydescribedbelowisalwaysthesame.
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlighteddeviceandreturnto
thescreenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW(F2)
Tocreateanewdevice.Referto"18.4.3Creating
aNewDevice".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlighteddevice.Referto"18.4.4
EditingaDevice".
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlighteddevice.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthetypeofdevice
andthecreatorofthedevice.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTDEFLT(F5)
Torecallpreviouslydeleteddefaultdevicesand
toresetdefaultdevicestothedefaultsettings.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|315
Descriptionofcolumns
Column
Description
Name
Namesofavailabledevices.
Type
Typeofdevicedefinedwhencreatingthedevice.
Creator
Thecreatorofthedevice.ThecreatorcaneitherbeDefaultifthedeviceisa
default,orUserifthedevicehasbeencreated.

IfaDefaultdeviceiseditedbyusingEDIT(F3)thenitscreatorisstill
displayedasDefault.
Nextstep
IFthedesireddeviceis
THEN
presentinthelist
highlightthedesireddevice.
CONT(F1)toclosethescreenandtoreturntothescreenfrom
whereCONFIGUREDeviceswasaccessed.
isnotpresentinthelist
NEW(F2).Referto"18.4.3CreatingaNewDevice".
ispresentinthelistbut
needstobeedited
highlightthedesireddevice.
EDIT(F3).Referto"18.4.4EditingaDevice".
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|316
18.4.3 CreatingaNewDevice
Description
Accessstep‐by‐step
Allowsanewdevicetobeconfigured.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"18.4.2AccessingCONFIGUREDevices"toaccessCONFIGUREDevices.
2.
Highlightadeviceofthesametypeasthedevicetobecreated,fromthelist.
3.
NEW(F2)toaccessCONFIGURENewDevice.
CONFIGURE
NewDevice
STORE(F1)
Tostorethenewdeviceandtoreturntothe
screenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|317
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Name:>
Userinput
Nameofnewdevice.
<Type:>
Output
SamedevicetypeaswashighlightedwhenNEW(F2)
wasused.
<BaudRate:>
From1200to Frequencyofdatatransferfrominstrumenttodevice
115200
inbitspersecond.
<Parity:>
None,Oddor
Even
Errorchecksumattheendofablockofdigitaldata.
<DataBits:>
7or8
Numberofbitsinablockofdigitaldata.
<StopBits:>
1or2
Numberofbitsattheendofablockofdigitaldata.
<FlowControl:>
Noneor
RTS/CTS
Availableforsomedevices.Activateshardwarehand‐
shake.
Whentheinstrument/deviceisreadyfordata,it
assertstheRequestToSendlineindicatingitisready
toreceivedata.ThisisreadbythesenderattheClear
ToSendinput,indicatingitiscleartosendthedata.
Nextstep
STORE(F1)toclosethescreenandtoreturntothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREDevicewas
accessed.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|318
18.4.4 EditingaDevice
Accessstep‐by‐step
CONFIGURE
EditDevice
Step
Description
1.
Referto"18.4.2AccessingCONFIGUREDevices"toaccessCONFIGUREDevices.
2.
Highlightthedevicetobeeditedfromthelist.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessCONFIGUREEditDevice.
Theavailabilityofoptionsmaychangedependingontheselecteddevice.Mostfieldsareiden‐
ticalwiththecreationofanewdevice.Referto"18.4.3CreatingaNewDevice"forinformation
onthefields.
Nextstep
STORE(F1)toclosethescreenandtoreturntothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREEditDevice
wasaccessed.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|319
18.4.5 Device‐RadiosforRemoteControl
Typicaluses
ToremotecontroltheR9.
Supportedradios
TheradiousedwithR9forremotecontrolistheRH9.R9hastobesettothecorrectcommuni‐
cationmodetosendandreceivedataandcommandsviatheradio.
Userdefinedradios
Otherradiosthanthedefaultradioscanbeused.Theirsettingsmustbedefinedbycreatinga
newradioconfiguration.Referto"18.4.3CreatingaNewDevice".Theseradiosmustbe
connectedwithacable.Referto"AppendixDCables"forinformationoncables.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|320
18.4.6 Device‐RS232
Typicaluses
•
•
•
•
ToexchangeinformationwithadeviceviaanRS232interface.
RS232GeoCOMcanbeusedtocontroltheinstrumentviaGeoCOMcommands.
RS232GSIcanbeusedtosenddatafromtheinstrumenttoacomputer.
Port1isusedtoconnecttoRS232deviceswithacable.Referto"AppendixDCables"for
informationoncables.
Exampleofuse
Step
SupportedRS232
Description
1.
AdevicewithanRS232interfacemustbeconnectedtotheinstrument.
2.
Informationcanbeexchangedbetweentheinstrumentandthedevice.Forexample
measurementdatacanbecontinuouslysentoutfromtheinstrument.
3.
Aconnectionismaintaineduntiltheinstrumentisturnedoff,theconfigurationis
changedorthedeviceisdetached.
DefaultRS232devices
• RS232
• RS232_GSI
• RS232_GeoCOM
UserdefinedRS232
Allsettingscanbedefined.
Interfaces,Ports,Devices
R9|321
19 Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
19.1 GSIOutput
Description
Accessstep‐by‐step
Dataisstreamedthroughtheserialport(RS232)andisstoredtotheactivejob.GSIdatais
storedwhen<UseInterface:Yes>andeitherALL(F1)orREC(F3)ispressed.Theformatof
thedatadependsontheoptionselectedin<OutputFormat:>.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"18.2.2AccessingCONFIGUREInterfaces"toaccessCONFIGUREInterfaces
2.
CONFIGUREInterfaces
HighlightGSIOutput.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessCONFIGUREGSIOutput.
CONFIGURE
GSIOutput
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DEVCE(F5)
Tocreate,select,editordeleteadevice.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|322
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<UseInterface:>
YesorNo
Activatestheinterface.
<Port:>
Output
Thisfieldisavailablewhen<UseInterface:Yes>.
Porttobeused.
<Device:>
Output
Thisfieldisavailablewhen<UseInterface:Yes>.
Devicetobeused.
<Protocol:>
<GSIFormat:>
Thisfieldisavailablewhen<UseInterface:Yes>.
Protocoldefinesifthesystemexpectsahandshakeor
nohandshake.
RS232GSI
Ahandshakeisrequired.
Adatablockissentoutfromtheinstrumentanda
receiveconfirmationisexpected.Thishandshake
requiresthatGeoComModebeactivated.
None
Nohandshakeisrequired.
Output
Thisfieldisavailablewhen<UseInterface:Yes>.
GSI8
Polar&Cart.
GSIPolarandCartesian(8datacharacters)
(PointID,Hz,V,SlopeDist,PPM,E,N,Elev.)
GSI16Polar
GSIPolar(16datacharacters)
(PointID,Hz,V,SlopeDist,PPM,reflectorheight)
GSI16Carte‐
sian
GSICartesian(16datacharacters)
(E,N,Elev,ReflectorHeight)
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|323
Field
Option
Description
Pt,N,E,Ht,Date
Coordinatedata
(NorthingBEFOREEasting)
Pt,E,N,Ht,Date
Coordinatedata
(EastingBEFORENorthing)
PseudoNMEA BasedonNMEA(NationalMarineElectronicsAssocia‐
GGA
tion),whichisastandardforinterfacingmarineelec‐
tronicdevices.
GSI8Polar
GSIPolar(8datacharacters)
(PointID,Hz,V,SlopeDist,PPM)
GSI16Polar2
GSIPolar(16datacharacters)
(PointID,Hz,V,SlopeDist,PPM)
Nextstep
IFadeviceis
THEN
nottobecreatedor
edited
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstothescreenfromwhere
CONFIGUREGSIOutputwasaccessed.
tobecreatedor
edited
DEVCE(F5)tocreateoreditadevice.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|324
Outputformat‐
GSIFormat
GSIdataistransmittedinblocks.Everyblockconsistsofseveraldatawords,refertotheexam‐
plesbelow.EverydatawordbeginswithatwocharacterWordIndex,theWIcode,specifying
thedatatypewithinthisblock.EachGSI‐8wordhasintotal16characters,consistingof7infor‐
mationcharactersfollowedby8datacharactersandbytheblankcharacterASCIIcode32atthe
endofthedataword.TheGSI‐16blockissimilartotheGSI‐8blockbuttheblockbeginswith*
andthedatawordcontains16charactersforlargevaluessuchasUTMcoordinates,largealpha‐
numericcodes,attributesorpointID’s.
Example1showsaGSI‐8blocksequencewiththewordsforpointID(11),Eastingcoordinate
(81)andNorthingcoordinate(82).Example2showsaGSI‐16blocksequencewiththewords
forpointID(11),horizontal(21)andverticalangle(22).
TherearenohardcodedGSIfilesavailable
Type
GSI8Polar&Cart
GSI16Polar
GSI16Cartesian
WI11
PointID
PointID
PointID
WI21
Azimuth
Azimuth
‐
WI22
V
V
‐
WI31
SlopeDist
SlopeDist
‐
WI51
PPMTotal/mm
PPMTotal/mm
‐
WI81
East
‐
East
WI82
North
‐
North
WI83
Elev.
‐
Elev.
WI87
Refl.Ht
‐
Refl.Ht
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|325
Example1:GSI8
Eachwordhas16charactersofwhich8charactersareusedforthedatablock.
Word1
110001+0000A110
110002+0000A111
110003+0000A112
110004+0000A113
110005+0000A114
Word2
81..00+00005387
81..00+00007586
81..00+00007536
81..00+00003839
81..00+00001241
Word3
82..00‐00000992
82..00‐00003031
82..00‐00003080
82..00‐00003080
82..00‐00001344
Example2:GSI16
Eachwordhas24charactersofwhich16charactersareusedforthedatablock.
Word1
*110001+000000000PNC0055
*110002+000000000PNC0056
*110003+000000000PNC0057
*110004+000000000PNC0058
*110005+000000000PNC0059
Word2
21.002+0000000013384650
21.002+0000000012802530
21.002+0000000011222360
21.002+0000000010573550
21.002+0000000009983610
Word3
22.002+0000000005371500
22.002+0000000005255000
22.002+0000000005433800
22.002+0000000005817600
22.002+0000000005171400
GSIWordinformation
Pos.
Name
Descriptionofvalues
1‐2
WordIndex(WI)
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
Applicablefor
R9|326
Pos.
Name
Descriptionofvalues
Applicablefor
3
Nosignifi‐
cance
.:Noinformation.
WI11,WI21,WI22,
WI31,WI51,WI81,
WI82,WI83,WI87
4
Automatic .:Noinformation.
indexinfor‐ 0:<Compensator:Off>
mation
3:<Compensator:On>
WI21,WI22
5
Inputmode .:Noinformation.
0:Measuredvaluestransferredfrominstrument
1:Manualinputfromkeyboard
2:Measuredvalue,<Hz‐Correction:On>.
3:Measuredvalue,<Hz‐Correction:Off>.
4:Resultcalculatedfromfunctions
WI21,WI22,WI31,
WI51,WI81,WI82,
WI83,WI87
6
Units
WI21,WI22,WI31,
WI81,WI82,WI83,
WI87
.:Noinformation.
0:<DistanceUnit:Metre(m)>,lastdigit1/1000m
1:<DistanceUnit:Usft(ft)>,lastdigit1/1000ft
2:<AngleUnit:400gon>
3:<AngleUnit:360°dec>
4:<AngleUnit:360°’’’>l
5:<AngleUnit:6400mil>
6:<DistanceUnit:Metre(m)>,lastdigit1/10000m
7:<DistanceUnit:Usft(ft)>,lastdigit1/10000ft
7
Sign
+:Positivevalue
‐:Negativevalue
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
WI21,WI22,WI31,
WI51,WI81,WI82,
WI83,WI87
R9|327
Outputformat‐
Pt,N,E,Ht,Date
Pos.
Name
Descriptionofvalues
Applicablefor
8‐15
8‐23
Data
Dataincludesasequenceof8(16)numericalor WI11,WI21,WI22,
alphanumericalcharacters.
WI31,WI51,WI81,
WI82,WI83,WI87
Certaindatablocksareallowedtocarry
morethanonevalueforexampleppm/mm.
Thisdataisautomaticallytransferredwith
theaccordingsignbeforeeachsinglevalue.
16
24
Separating :Blank
character

WI11,WI21,WI22,
WI31,WI51,WI81,
WI82,WI83,WI87
Format
PointID,Northing,Easting,Elevation,Date,Time<CR/LF>
Descriptionoffields
TheformatsettingsaredefinedinCONFIGUREUnits&Formats.
Field
Description
PointID
Textdescribingthepointidentification
Northing
Thenorthingcoordinate.
Easting
Theeastingcoordinate.
Elevation
Theheightcoordinate.
Date
Themeasurement/originationdate.
Time
Themeasurement/originationtime.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|328
Field
Description
<CR/LF>
CarriageReturnLineFeed
Example
2004,4997.635,6010.784,393.173,09/10/2001,16:34:12.2
2005,4997.647,6010.765,393.167,09/10/2001,16:34:12.4
2006,4997.657,6010.755,393.165,09/10/2001,16:34:12.7
Outputformat‐
Pt,E,N,Ht,Date

Format
ThisoutputformatisidenticaltothePt,N,E,Ht,DateformatexcepttheorderoftheEastingand
Northingvariablesarereversed.
Fieldsarealwaysseparatedbyacomma.AcommaisneverplacedbeforetheChecksumfield.
Wheninformationforafieldisnotavailable,thepositioninthedatastringisempty.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|329
19.2 GeoCOMMode
Description
Accessstep‐by‐step
TheGeoCOMModepermitscommunicationoftheR9withaRC9controller.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"18.2.2AccessingCONFIGUREInterfaces"toaccessCONFIGUREInterfaces
2.
CONFIGUREInterfaces
HighlightGeoCOMMode.
3.
EDIT(F3)toaccessCONFIGUREGeoCOMMode.
CONFIGURE
GeoCOMMode
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DEVCE(F5)
Tocreate,select,editordeleteadevice.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|330
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<UseInterface:>
YesorNo
Activatestheinterface.
<Port:>
Output
Availableif<UseInterface:Yes>.Porttobeused.
<Device:>
Output
Availableif<UseInterface:Yes>.Devicetobeused.
<Protocol:>
Output
Availableif<UseInterface:Yes>.Protocoltobeused.
Nextstep
IFadeviceis
THEN
nottobecreatedor
edited
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstothescreenfromwhere
CONFIGUREGeoCOMModewasaccessed.
tobecreatedor
edited
DEVCE(F5)tocreateoreditadevice.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|331
19.3 ExportJob
Description
• TheExportJobinterfaceallowsdatafromajobtobeexportedfromtheinstrumenttoan
externaldevice.Referto"13.4ExportingDatafromaJobtoanotherDevice"forinformation
onhowtoexportdataviaRS232.
• Thesettingsonthisscreendefinetheportandthedevicetowhichthedatashouldbe
exported.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Config...\Interfaces....HighlightExportJob.EDIT(F3).
OR
SelectMainMenu:Convert...\ExportDatafromJob.Set<ExportTo:RS232>.IFACE(F5).
CONFIGURE
ExportJobInterface
Theavailabilityofthefieldsdependonthesettingfor<Device:>.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DEVCE(F5)
Tocreate,select,editordeleteadevice.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|332
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<UseDevice:>
YesorNo
Activatestheinterface.
<Port:>
Output
Availableif<UseInterface:Yes>.Porttobeused.
<Device:>
Output
Thedevicecurrentlyassignedtotheselectedport
withintheactiveconfigurationset.Thedevicewhichis
selecteddeterminestheavailabilityofthenextfields.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereCONFIGUREExportJobInterfacewasaccessed.
Config...\Interfaces...‐EditingTheInterface
R9|333
20 Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice
20.1 RadiosforRemoteControl
Description
Thefollowingradioforremotecontrolsupportschannelchanging:
• RH9
• RH9‐GLRBT
ConfigureRH9connec‐
tionstep‐by‐step
Refertothestatedchapterformoreinformationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
AccessCONFIGUREInterfaces.
18.2.2
2.
InCONFIGUREInterfaceshighlightGeoCOMModewhenport2isset
active.
3.
CTRL(F4)toaccessCONFIGURERadioHandle.
4.
CONFIGURERadioHandle.
<RadioType:>Thetypeofprotocol.
<LinkNumber:>Theassignedchannelnumber(from0to20).

ThelinknumberfortheRC9controllerandtheradiomustbethe
same.
<Setas:>TheoptionRemoteorBaseareavailable.
Remotesetstheradiointoremotemode.
Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice
R9|334
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
Basesetstheradiointobasemode.


TheradiomodulesinsidetheRC9controllerandtheradiomust
besettooppositesettings.ItisrecommendedtosettheRC9
controllertoRemoteandtheRH9toBase.
DEFLT(F5)Torecallthedefaultsettings.
Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice
R9|335
20.2 RS232
Description
ConfigureRS232
connectionstep‐by‐step
RS232isastandardserialcommunicationmethodthatisabletotransferdatawithouttheneed
forpredefinedtimeslots.RS232canbeused,withaBluetoothhousing,toprovideawireless
connectiontoanotherBluetoothenableddevice,forexample,acomputer.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"18.2.2AccessingCONFIGUREInterfaces"toaccessCONFIGUREInterfaces.
2.
InCONFIGUREInterfaceshighlightaninterfacewhichhasanRS232device
attached.
3.
CTRL(F4)toaccessCONFIGURERS232Connection.
4.
CONFIGURERS232Connection
<Device:>ThetypeofdevicehighlightedwhenCONFIGURERS232Connectionwas
accessed.
<Bluetooth:>SomedevicesaskfortheidentificationnumberoftheBluetooth.The
identificationnumberofStonex®’sBluetoothis0000.

5.
<IDAddress:>Availablefor<Bluetooth:Yes>.TheIDaddressoftheBluetooth
devicetobeused.
SRCH(F4)availablefor<Bluetooth:Yes>,tosearchforallavailableBluetooth
devices.IfmorethanoneBluetoothdeviceisfoundalistofavailabledevicesis
provided.
CONT(F1)returnstoCONFIGUREInterfaces.
Config...\Interfaces...‐ControllingTheDevice
R9|336
21 Tools...\FormatMemoryDevice
Description
AllowstheCompactFlashcardandtheSystemRAMtobeformatted.Alldatawillbeerased.
Referto"AppendixBMemoryTypes"formoreinformationonthetypesofmemorydevices
available.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\FormatMemoryDevice.
TOOLS
FormatMemoryDevice
CONT(F1)
Toformatamemorydeviceandreturntothe
screenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PROGS(F4)
Toformattheapplicationprogramsmemory.
SYSTM(F5)
ToformatSystemRAMmemory.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<MemoryDevice:>
Description
Thetypeofmemorytobeformatted.
CFCard
Forinstrumentswithoutinternalmemory.
Tools...\FormatMemoryDevice
R9|337
Field
<FormatMethod:>
Option
Description
CFCardor
Internal
Memory
ForinstrumentswithCompactFlashcardandinternal
memory.
FormatQuick Afterformatting,dataisnotvisibleanymorebutstill
existsonthememorydeviceandisoverwrittenasand
whenrequired.
Format
Complete
Dataisfullydeleted.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
theCompactFlashcardistobe
formatted
CONT(F1)toformatthememorydeviceandreturnto
R9MainMenu.
theapplicationprogramsmemoryisto PROGS(F4)toformattheapplicationprograms
beformatted
memory.Allloadableapplicationprogramsare
deleted.
theSystemRAMistobeformatted

SYSTM(F5)toformattheSystemRAM.
IftheSystemRAMisformattedallsystemdatasuchasuserdefinedconfigurationsetsand
codelistswillbelost.
Tools...\FormatMemoryDevice
R9|338
22 Tools...\TransferObjects...
Description
ThischapterdescribesthebasicprocedurefortransferringobjectsbetweentheCompactFlash
cardandtheSystemRAM.Referto"AppendixCDirectoryStructureoftheMemoryDevice"for
informationaboutfiletypesandlocationsoffilesontheCompactFlashcard.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\TransferObjects...\XX.
TOOLS
TransferXX
TheavailablefieldsonthescreendependontheoptionselectedinMainMenu:
Tools...\TransferObjects....
CONT(F1)
Totransferanobjectandreturntothescreen
fromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
ALL(F3)
Availableforsometransferobjectoptions.To
transferallobjects.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<From:>
Description
Memorydevicetotransferobjectfrom.
CFcard
TransferfromCompactFlashcard.
Tools...\TransferObjects...
R9|339
Field
Option
Description
SystemRAM
TransferfromSystemRAM.Availableunlessobjectto
transferisajob.
Internal
Memory
Transferfrominternalmemory.
<To:>
Output
Memorydevicetotransferobjectto.Memorydevice
notselectedin<From:>.
<Codelist:>
Choicelist
Toselectthecodelisttobetransferred.
<ConfigSet:>
Choicelist
Toselecttheconfigurationsettobetransferred.
<FormatFile:>
Choicelist
Toselecttheformatfilestobetransferred.
<Job:>
Choicelist
ToselectthejobtobetransferredbetweenCompact‐
Flashcardandinternalmemory.
Nextstep
IFallXX
THEN
aretobetransferred ALL(F3)transfersallobjectsinlist.
arenottobetrans‐
ferred
CONT(F1)transfersselectedobject.
Tools...\TransferObjects...
R9|340
23 Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
23.1 ApplicationPrograms
Description
ApplicationprogramuploadsarepossiblefromtheCompactFlashcardtotheapplication
programsmemory.Thesefilesarestoredinthe\SYSTEMdirectoryofthememorydeviceand
usetheextension*.a*.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...\ApplicationPrograms.
TOOLS
UploadApplication
Programs
CONT(F1)
Touploadanapplicationprogramandreturnto
thescreenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DEL(F4)
Todeleteanapplicationprogram.
Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
R9|341
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<From:>
Output
UploadfromCompactFlashcard.
<To:>
Output
Uploadtoapplicationprogrammemory.
<Program:>
Choicelist
ListofprogramfilesstoredontheCompactFlashcard.
<Version:>
Output
Versionoftheprogramfilechosen.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)uploadstheselectedapplicationprogram.
Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
R9|342
23.2 SystemLanguages
Description
SystemlanguageuploadsarepossiblefromtheCompactFlashcardtotheinstrument.These
filesarestoredinthe\SYSTEMdirectoryoftheactivememorydeviceanduseanextensionthat
isindividualtoeachlanguage.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...\SystemLanguages.
TOOLS
UploadSystem
Languages
CONT(F1)
Touploadasystemlanguageandreturntothe
screenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DEL(F4)
TodeletealanguagefromtheSystemRAM.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<From:>
Output
UploadfromCompactFlashcard.
<To:>
Output
Uploadtotheinstrument.
<Language:>
Choicelist
ListoflanguagefilesstoredontheCompactFlashcard.
<Version:>
Output
Versionofthelanguagefile.
Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
R9|343
Nextstep
CONT(F1)uploadstheselectedlanguage.

Itisnotpossibletohavemorethanthreelanguagefilesstoredontheinstrument.Englishis
alwaysavailableasthedefaultlanguageandcannotbedeleted.
Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
R9|344
23.3 InstrumentFirmware
Description
FirmwareuploadsarepossiblefromtheCompactFlashcardtotheinstrument.Thesefilesare
storedinthe\SYSTEMdirectoryoftheactivememorydeviceandusetheextension*.fw.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...\InstrumentFirmware.
TOOLS
UploadSystem
Firmware
CONT(F1)
Touploadfirmwareandreturntothescreen
fromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<From:>
Output
UploadfromCompactFlashcard.
<To:>
Output
Uploadtotheinstrument.
<Firmware:>
Choicelist
ListoffirmwarefilesstoredontheCompactFlashcard.
<Version:>
Output
Versionofthefirmwarefile.
Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
R9|345
Nextstep
CONT(F1)touploadfirmware.
Tools...\UploadSystemFiles...
R9|346
24 Tools...\Calculator
24.1 Overview
Description
Thecalculatorcanbeusedtoperformthefollowingarithmeticoperationssuchas
•
•
•
•
•
Operatingmodes
addition,subtraction,multiplicationanddivision
statistics
trigonometry,hyperbolictrigonometryandcalculationswithPi
polar,rectangularandangleconversions
powers,logs,rootsandexponentialfunctions.
Thecalculatorhastwooperatingmodes‐RPNmodeandStandardmode.
Thearithmeticoperationsavailableareidentical,thedifferenceliesinthewayinformationis
entered,storedanddisplayedonthescreen.
Type
Description
RPN
ReversePolishNotation
Thisoperatingmodewasdevelopedasawayofwritingmathematicalexpres‐
sionswithoutusingparenthesisandbrackets.Manyscientificcalculators,for
exampleHewlettPackardcalculators,areimplementedwiththisoperating
mode.Valuesareenteredandkeptinaworkingstack.
Standard
Thisoperatingmodeisbasedontheprinciplesofconventionalpocketcalcu‐
lators.Thereisnostackingofvalues.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|347
24.2 AccessingtheCalculator
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\Calculator.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
PressCALCinanyscreenwheneditinganinputfieldfornumericcharacters,suchas
<Azimuth:>inCOGOTraverseInput.Referto"24.4.4CallingandClosingtheCalculator
fromanInputFieldforNumericCharacters".
Tools...\Calculator
R9|348
24.3 ConfiguringtheCalculator
Accessstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Referto"24.2AccessingtheCalculator"toaccessTOOLSXXCalculator.
2.
SHIFTCONF(F2)toaccessTOOLSCalculatorConfiguration.
TOOLS
CalculatorConfiguration
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<OperatngMode:>
RPN
Theprincipleof,forexample,HewlettPackardcalcula‐
tors.Referto"24.1Overview"formoreinformation.
Referto"24.4.1RPNMode"foraworkingexample.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|349
Field
Option
Description
Standard
Theprincipleofconventionalpocketcalculators.Refer
to"24.1Overview"formoreinformation.Referto
"24.4.2StandardMode"foraworkingexample.
<AngleUnit:>
<DisplayDec:>
Theunitusedfortrigonometricfunctionsinthecalcu‐
lator.Theselectionhereisindependentfromtheangle
settinginCONFIGUREUnits&Formats.
DEG
Degrees
RAD
Radians
GRAD
Gon
From0Deci‐
malsto10
Decimals
ThenumberofdecimalplacesshowninTOOLSCalcu‐
lator.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)confirmstheselectionsmadeandreturnstothescreenfromwhereTOOLSCalcu‐
latorConfigurationwasaccessed.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|350
24.4 UsingtheCalculator
24.4.1 RPNMode
Requirements
<OperatngMode:RPN>inTOOLSCalculatorConfiguration.
Access
Referto"24.2AccessingtheCalculator"toaccessTOOLSRPNCalculator.
TOOLS
RPNCalculator
Refertoparagraph"Workingexample"forinformationabouttheoperatingprinciple.
ThefunctionkeysF1‐F6areallocatedseventimes.
Using or thevariousallocationscanbe
accessed.Referto"24.4.3DescriptionofSoftkeys"
forinformationaboutthefunctionkeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
Firstfieldonthe
screen
Output
Theunitusedfortrigonometricfunctionsinthecalcu‐
latorasconfiguredinTOOLSCalculatorConfigura‐
tion.
DEG
Degrees
Tools...\Calculator
R9|351
Field
Option
Description
RAD
Radians
GRAD
Gon
<ΣY:>
Output
Theresultofthesumordifferenceofvaluesin<Y:>
usingΣ+(F1)andΣ‐(F2).
<ΣX:>
Output
Theresultofthesumordifferenceofvaluesin<X:>
usingΣ+(F1)andΣ‐(F2).
<T:>
Output
Thirdstack.Afteranoperation,thevaluefrom<Z:>is
writtenhere.
<Z:>
Output
Secondstack.Afteranoperation,thevaluefrom<Y:>
iswrittenhere.
<Y:>
Output
Firststack.Afteranoperation,thevaluefrom<X:>is
writtenhere.
<X:>
Userinput
Thevalueforthenextoperation.
Nextstep
SHIFTDONE(F4)returnstoR9MainMenu.
Workingexample
Task:Calculate(3+5)/(7+6).
Step
Description
1.
Typein3.
2.
ENTER
3.
Typein5.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|352
Step
4.


5.
Description
ENTER
<Y:3>,<X:5>
+(F1)
<X:8>
6.
Typein7.
7.
ENTER

<Y:8>,<X:7>
8.
Typein6.
9.
ENTER



10.
11.
<Z:8>,<Y:7>,<X:6>
+(F1)
<Y:8>,<X:13>
/(F4)
<X:0.61538>
Tools...\Calculator
R9|353
24.4.2 StandardMode
Requirements
<OperatngMode:Standard>inTOOLSCalculatorConfiguration.
Access
Referto"24.2AccessingtheCalculator"toaccessTOOLSStandardCalculator.
TOOLS
StandardCalculator
Refertoparagraph"Workingexample"forinformationabouttheoperatingprinciple.
ThefunctionkeysF1‐F6areallocatedseventimes.
Using or thevariousallocationscanbe
accessed.Referto"24.4.3DescriptionofSoftkeys"
forinformationaboutthefunctionkeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
Firstfieldonthe
screen
Output
Theunitusedfortrigonometricfunctionsinthecalcu‐
latorasconfiguredinTOOLSCalculatorConfigura‐
tion.
DEG
Degrees
RAD
Radians
Tools...\Calculator
R9|354
Field
Option
Description
GRAD
Gon
Output
Theresultofthesumordifferenceofvaluesinthelast
fieldonthescreenusingΣ+(F1)andΣ‐(F2).
Thirdtosixthfieldon Output
thescreen
Previouslyenteredvalue
OR
Latestoperationincludingresult
#indicatesthatthevalueiscutafterthethirddecimal.
Lastfieldonthe
screen
Thevaluefornextoperationorresultfromlatestoper‐
ation.
<Σ:>
Userinput
Nextstep
SHIFTDONE(F4)returnstoR9MainMenu.
Workingexample
Task:Calculate(3+5)/(7+6).
Tools...\Calculator
R9|355
Step
Description
1.
Typein3.
2.
ENTER
3.
+(F1)
4.
Typein5.
5.
ENTER

6.
7.
8.
9.
Lastfieldonthescreendisplays8.00000.
suchthatSTO(F1)isvisible.
STO(F1)
suchthat+(F1)isvisible.
Typein7.
10.
ENTER
11.
+(F1)
12.
Typein6.
13.
ENTER


14.
Lastfieldonthescreendisplays13.00000.
Remember13.00000.
suchthatREC(F2)isvisible.
15.
REC(F2)torecall8.00000.
16.
ENTER
17.
suchthat/(F4)isvisible.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|356
Step
Description
18.
/(F4)
19.
Typein13.
20.
ENTER

Lastfieldonthescreendisplays0.61538.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|357
24.4.3 DescriptionofSoftkeys
Overviewofsoftkeys
Thesoftkeysshownanddescribedarethoseof<OperatngMode:RPN>.Mostofthesoftkeys
areidenticalandtheirfunctionalityissimilartothatfor<OperatngMode:Standard>.
ThefunctionkeysF1‐F6areallocatedseventimeswithsoftkeys.Using or thevariousallo‐
cationscanbeaccessed.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|358
Descriptionofsoftkeys
Firstlevel
+(F1)
Toadd<X:>and<Y:>.
‐(F2)
Tosubtract<X:>from<Y:>.
*(F3)
Tomultiply<X:>by<Y:>.
/(F4)
Todivide<Y:>by<X:>.
+/‐(F5)
Tochangebetweenpositiveandnegativealge‐
braicsignfor<X:>.
CLRX(F6)
Toclear<X:>.
toaccesstheSecondlevel
Σ+(F1)
Toadd<X:>to<ΣX:>and<Y:>to<ΣY:>.
Σ‐(F2)
Tosubtract<X:>from<ΣX:>and<Y:>from
<ΣY:>.
MEAN(F3)
Tocalculatethemean<ΣX>.
SDEV(F4)
Tocalculatethestandarddeviationfor<ΣX>.
CLRΣ(F6)
Toclear<ΣX>and<ΣX>.
toaccesstheThirdlevel
Tools...\Calculator
R9|359
SIN(F1)
Tocalculatesineof<X:>.
COS(F2)
Tocalculatecosineof<X:>.
TAN(F3)
Tocalculatetangentof<X:>.
ASIN(F4)
Tocalculatearcsineof<X:>.
ACOS(F5)
Tocalculatearccosineof<X:>.
ATAN(F6)
Tocalculatearctangentof<X:>.
toaccesstheFourthlevel
°DMS(F1)
Toconvertdecimaldegreesintodd.mm.ss.
°DEC(F2)
Toconvertdd.mm.ssintodecimaldegrees.
PI(F3)
Toinsert<X:3.1415926536>.Thenumberof
decimalsdependsontheselectionfor<Display
Dec:>inTOOLSCalculatorConfiguration.
D‐>R(F5)
Toconvertdegreesintoradians.
R‐>D(F6)
Toconvertradiansintodegrees.
toaccesstheFifthlevel
Tools...\Calculator
R9|360
POLAR(F1)
Conversionofrectangularcoordinatesinto
polarcoordinates.Theycoordinatemustbe
visiblein<Y:>andthexcoordinatein<X:>
whenpressingthiskey.Theangleisdisplayedin
<Y:>andthedistancein<X:>.
RECT(F2)
Conversionofpolarcoordinatesintorectan‐
gularcoordinates.Theanglemustbevisiblein
<Y:>andthedistancein<X:>whenpressing
thiskey.Theycoordinateisdisplayedin<Y:>,
thexcoordinatein<X:>.
SQRT(F3)
Tocalculate X
<X:>.
X^2(F4)
Tocalculate<X:>2.
1/X(F5)
Toinverse<X:>.
Y^X(F6)
Tocalculate<Y:><X:>.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|361
toaccesstheSixthlevel
LOG(F1)
Tocalculatethelog10<X:>.
10^X(F2)
Tocalculate10<X:>.
LN(F3)
Tocalculatetheloge<X:>.
e^X(F4)
Tocalculatee<X:>.
Y^X(F6)
Tocalculate<Y:><X:>.
toaccesstheSeventhlevel
STO(F1)
Tostore<X:>tothememory.Uptotenvalues
canbestored.
RCL(F2)
Torecallavaluefor<X:>fromthememory.Up
totenvaluescanberecalled.
X<>Y(F3)
Toswapthevaluesfor<X:>and<Y:>.
LASTX(F4)
Torecallthelast<X:>beforerecentcalculation.
CLEAR(F6)
Todeleteeverything.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|362
SHIFTtoaccessthesecondleveloffunctionkeys
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toconfigurethecalculator.
SHIFTDONE(F4)
ToreturntoR9MainMenu.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|363
24.4.4 CallingandClosingtheCalculatorfromanInputFieldforNumericCharac‐
ters

Callandclosecalculator
step‐by‐step
COGOtraversecalculationisusedasexample.
Step
Description
1.
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\COGOtoaccessthescreenCOGO
COGOBegin.
2.
COGOCOGOBegin
Referto
chapter
Checkthesettings.
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOCOGOMenu.
4.
COGOCOGOMenu
HighlightTraverse.
5.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOTraverseInput.
6.
COGOTraverseInput
Highlight<Azimuth:>.
7.
ENTER
8.
CALC(F5)toaccessTOOLSXXCalculator.

9.
Ifavaluehadalreadybeentypedinfor<Azimuth:>,thisvalueistaken
overintotheinputfieldinTOOLSXXCalculator.
TOOLSXXCalculator
Tools...\Calculator
R9|364
Step
10.

Description
Referto
chapter
Performthecalculations.
24.4.1,
24.4.2
SHIFTDONE(F4)toreturntoCOGOTraverseInput.
Thecalculatedvalueistakenoverfor<Azimuth:>.
Tools...\Calculator
R9|365
25 Tools...\FileViewer
Description

Access
AllowsASCIIfilesonthememorydevicetobeviewed.TheASCIIfilecanhaveupto500KB.
Referto"AppendixCDirectoryStructureoftheMemoryDevice"formoreinformationonthe
contentsoffoldersonthememorydevice.
The\DBXdirectorycannotbeaccessedtoviewfiles.
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\FileViewer.
TOOLS
Device\Directory
CONT(F1)
Toaccessthehighlighteddirectoryortoview
thehighlightedfile.
DIR(F2)
Availableforadirectoryor..beinghighlighted.
Toaccessthehighlighteddirectoryortomove
uponedirectory.
VIEW(F3)
Availableforafilebeinghighlighted.Toviewthe
highlightedfile.AccessesTOOLSViewFile:File
Name.Referto"TOOLSViewFile:FileName".
DEL(F4)
Availableforafilebeinghighlighted.Todelete
thehighlightedfile.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthesizeofadirec‐
toryorfile.
Tools...\FileViewer
R9|366
Descriptionofcolumns
Column
Description
First
Directoriesandfilesaredisplayedifavailable.Thefileextensionis
shownforfiles.
\atthebeginningofalineindicatesadirectory.
..isdisplayedatthetopofthelistifadirectoryhasbeenaccessed.
Second
Dateofthedirectoryorfile.
Third
Timeofthedirectoryorfile.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thescreenistobe
quit
ESCtoreturntoR9MainMenu.
adirectoryisto
accessed
highlightthedirectoryandDIR(F2).
afileistobeviewed highlightthefileandVIEW(F3).Referto"TOOLSViewFile:FileName".
Tools...\FileViewer
R9|367
TOOLS
ViewFile:FileName
CONT(F1)
Toreturntothescreenfromwherethisscreen
wasaccessed.
Keys
Keys
Function
Movesup.
Movesdown.
Movesright.
Movesleft.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereTOOLSViewFile:FileNamewasaccessed.
Tools...\FileViewer
R9|368
26 Tools...\LicenceKeys
Description
• Alicencekeycanbeusedtoactivateapplicationprogramsandprotectedoptions.
• Alicencekeyfilecanbeuploadedtotheinstrument.Touploadalicencekeyfilethefile
shouldbelocatedonthe\SYSTEMdirectoryoftheCompactFlashcard.Licencekeyfilesuse
thenamingconventionL_123456.key,where123456istheinstrumentserialnumber.
• LicencekeyscanalsobetypedinmanuallyinMainMenu:Tools...\LicenceKeysorthefirst
timetheapplicationprogramisstarted.
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\LicenceKeys.
OR
Selectanapplicationprogramnotyetactivated.
TOOLS
EnterLicenceKey
CONT(F1)
ToacceptchangesandreturntoR9MainMenu
orcontinuewithapplicationprogram.
SHIFTDEL(F4)
Todeletealllicencekeysontheinstrument.
Tools...\LicenceKeys
R9|369
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<Method:>
Description
Themethodusedtoinputthelicencekeytoactivate
theapplicationprogramortheprotectedoptions.
UploadKey
File
ThelicencekeyfileisuploadedfromtheCompactFlash
card.Thelicencekeyfilemustbestoredinthe
\SYSTEMdirectoryontheCompactFlashcard.
ManualEntry Allowsthelicencekeytobetypedinmanually.
ofKey
<Key:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:ManualEntryofKey>.The
licencekeyrequiredtoactivateanapplication
program.Entryisnotcasesensitive.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoR9MainMenuorcontinueswithselectedapplicationprogram.
Tools...\LicenceKeys
R9|370
27 Tools...\Check&Adjust
27.1 Overview
Description
Stonex®instrumentsaremanufactured,assembledandadjustedtothebestpossiblequality.
Quicktemperaturechanges,shockorstresscancausedeviationsandinfluencetheinstrument
accuracy.
Itisthereforerecommendedtocheckandadjusttheinstrumentfromtimetotime.Thiscanbe
doneinthefieldbyrunningthroughspecificmeasurementprocedures.Theproceduresare
guidedandhavetobefollowedcarefullyandpreciselyasdescribedinthefollowingchapters.
Someotherinstrumenterrorsandmechanicalpartscanbeadjustedmechanically.
Electronicadjustment
Thefollowinginstrumenterrorscanbechecked&adjustedelectronically:
l,t
i
c
a
iLock
Compensatorlongitudinalandtransversalindexerrors
Verticalindexerror,relatedtothestandingaxis
Hzcollimationerror,alsocalledlineofsighterror
Tiltingaxiserror
iLockzeropointerrorforHzandV‐option
Everyanglemeasuredinthedailyworkiscorrectedautomaticallyifthecompensatorandthe
Hz‐correctionsareactivatedintheinstrumentconfiguration.SelectMainMenu:
Config...\InstrumentSettings...\Compensatortocheckthesettings.
Theresultsfromcheckandadjustaredisplayedaserrorsbutusedwiththeoppositesignas
correctionswhenappliedtomeasurements.
Mechanicaladjustment
RefertotheStonex®R9UserManualfordetails.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|371
Precisemeasurements


Togetprecisemeasurementsinthedailywork,itisimportant:
• Tocheckandadjusttheinstrumentfromtimetotime.
• Totakehighprecisionmeasurementsduringthecheckandadjustprocedures.
• Tomeasuretargetsintwofaces.Someoftheinstrumenterrorsareeliminatedbyaveraging
theanglesfrombothfaces.
• Tofollowthefouradvicesbelow.
Duringthemanufacturingprocess,theinstrumenterrorsarecarefullydeterminedandsetto
zero.Asmentionedabove,theseerrorscanchangeanditishighlyrecommendedtoredeter‐
minetheminthefollowingsituations:
• Beforethefirstuse
• Beforeeveryhighprecisionsurvey
• Afterroughorlongtransportations
• Afterlongworkingperiods
• Afterlongstorageperiods
• Ifthetemperaturedifferencebetweencurrentenvironmentandthetemperatureatthelast
calibrationismorethan20°C
Beforedeterminingtheinstrumenterrors,theinstrumenthastobelevelledupusing
theelectroniclevel.SHIFTF12toaccessSTATUSLevel&LaserPlummet,Referto
"28.7STATUS:Level&LaserPlummet".
Thetribrach,thetripodandtheundergroundshouldbeverystableandsecurefrom
vibrationsorotherdisturbances.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|372


Theinstrumentshouldbeprotectedfromdirectsunlightinordertoavoidthermal
warmingingeneralandespeciallyononesideoftheinstrumenthousing.
Itisalsorecommendedtoavoidstrongheatshimmerandairturbulences.Thebest
conditionscanbefoundusuallyearlyinthemorningandwithovercastsky.
+20°C
Beforestartingtowork,theinstrumenthasto
becomeacclimatisedtotheambienttempera‐
ture.Approximatelytwominutesper°C
temperaturedifferencefromstorageto
workingenvironmentbutatleast15min
shouldbetakenintoaccount.
°C
+20°C
°C
> 15 min
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|373
27.2 DetailsonInstrumentErrors
General
Instrumenterrorsoccur,ifthestandingaxis,thetiltingaxisandthelineofsightarenotprecisely
perpendiculartoeachother.
Hzcollimationerror(c)
c
d
b
a
a) Tiltingaxis
b) Lineperpendiculartotiltingaxis
c) Hzcollimationerror(c),alsocalledlineofsight
error
d) Lineofsight
TheHzcollimationerror(c)isalsocalledlineofsighterror.Itiscausedbythedeviation
betweentheopticallineofsight,whichmeansthedirectioninwhichthecrosshairspointsand
thelineperpendiculartothetiltingaxis.ThiserroraffectsallHzreadingsandincreaseswith
steepsightings.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|374
Tiltingaxiserror(a)
r
b
a
d
c
a) Axisperpendiculartotheverticalaxis
b) Mechanicalverticalaxisoftheinstrument,also
calledstandingaxis
c) Tiltingaxiserror
d) Tiltingaxis
Thetiltingaxiserror(a)iscausedbythedeviationbetweenthemechanicaltiltingaxisandthe
lineperpendiculartotheverticalaxis.
ThiserroraffectsHzangles.Theaffectionis0inthehorizonandincreaseswithsteepsights.To
determinethiserror,itisnecessarytopointtoatargetlocatedsignificantlybeloworabovethe
horizontalplane.ToavoidinfluencesfromtheHzcollimationerror(c),thishastobedeter‐
minedpriortothetiltingaxiserror.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|375
Verticalindexerror(i)
a
d
b
c
a) Mechanicalverticalaxisoftheinstrument,also
calledstandingaxis
b) Axisperpendiculartotheverticalaxis
c) V=90°readinginaspecificface
d) Verticalindexerror
Averticalindexerror(i)exists,ifthe0°markoftheverticalcirclereadingdoesn’tcoincidewith
themechanicalverticalaxisoftheinstrument,alsocalledstandingaxis.
TheVindexerror(i)isaconstanterrorthataffectsallverticalanglereadings.
Compensatorindex
errors(l,t)
a b
b
c
a
d
Tools...\Check&Adjust
a) Mechanicalverticalaxisoftheinstrument,also
calledstandingaxis
b) Plumbline
c) Longitudinalcomponent(l)ofthecompensator
indexerror
d) Transversalcomponent(t)ofthecompensator
indexerror
R9|376
Thecompensatorindexerrors(l,t)occur,iftheverticalaxisoftheinstrumentandtheplumb‐
lineareparallelbutthezeropointsofthecompensatorandthecircularleveldonotcoincide.
Thecalibrationprocedureelectronicallyadjuststhezeropointofthecompensator.
TheplaneofthedualaxiscompensatoroftheR9isdefinedbyalongitudinalcomponentin
directionofthetelescopeandatransversalcomponentperpendiculartothetelescope.
Thelongitudinalcompensatorindexerror(l)hasasimilareffectastheverticalindexerrorand
affectsallverticalanglereadings.
Thetransversalcompensatorindexerror(t)issimilartothetiltingaxiserror.Theeffectofthis
errortotheHzanglereadingsis0atthehorizonandincreaseswithsteepsightings.
iLockcollimationerrors
d
a
c
a)
b)
c)
d)
b
Centreofprism
Crosshairs
VcomponentofiLockcollimationerror
HzcomponentofiLockcollimationerror
TheiLockcollimationerroristheangulardivergencebetweenthelineofsight,whichmeansthe
directioninwhichthecrosshairspoint,andtheiLockCCDcameraaxis,whichdetectsthecentre
oftheprism.HzandVanglesarecorrectedbytheHzandVcomponentsoftheiLockcalibration
errorstomeasureexactlytothecentreoftheprism.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|377

Summaryoferrorstobe
adjustedelectronically
Note,thatevenafteradjustmentoftheiLock,thecrosshairsmightnotbepositionedexactlyon
thecentreoftheprismafteraniLocksearch.Thisisanormaleffect.TospeeduptheiLock
search,thetelescopeisnotpositionedexactlyonthecentreoftheprism.Thesmallrestdevia‐
tions,theiLockoffsets,aremeasuredindividuallyforeachmeasurementandcorrectedelec‐
tronically.ThismeansthattheHz‐andV‐anglesarecorrectedtwice:firstbythedetermined
iLockerrorsforHzandVandthenbytheindividualsmalldeviationsofthecurrentpointing,the
iLockoffsets.
Instrumenterror
EffectsHz
EffectsV
Elimination
withtwoface
measurement
Automatically
correctedwith
properadjust‐
ment
c‐Hzcollimationerror

‐


a‐Tiltingaxiserror

‐


l‐Compensatorindexerror
‐



t‐Compensatorindexerror

‐


i‐V‐Indexerror
‐



iLockCollimationerror


‐

Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|378
27.3 AccessingCheck&AdjustMenu
Access
SelectMainMenu:Tools...\Check&Adjust...
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
TOOLS
Check&AdjustMenu
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
CONF(F2)
ToaccesstheTOOLSConfigurationscreen.
Referto"27.4ConfigureCheck&Adjust".
DescriptionoftheCheck&Adjustfunctions
Function
Description
Referto
chapter
Combined(l,t,i,c,iLock) Todeterminethel,t,i,candiLockinstrumenterrors. 27.5
TiltingAxis(a)
Todeterminethetiltingaxis(a)error.
27.6
Compensator(l,t)
Todeterminethecompensator(l,t)errors.
27.7
CurrentValues
Toviewthecurrentinstrumenterrors
27.8
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|379
Function
Description
EndCheck&Adjust
ToexittheTOOLSCheck&AdjustMenu.
Referto
chapter
Nextstep
IFthetaskisto
THEN
determinetheinstru‐
menterrors
selectoneofthethreeavailablecheckandadjustprocedures:
Combined(l,t,i,c,iLock),TiltingAxis(a)orCompensator(l,t).
adjustthecircularlevel
Referto"27.9AdjustingtheCircularLeveloftheInstrumentand
Tribrach".
inspectthelaser
plummet
Referto"27.11InspectingtheLaserPlummetoftheInstrument".
adjustthetripod
Referto"27.12ServicingtheTripod".
toendcheckandadjust
selectEndCheck&Adjust.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|380
27.4 ConfigureCheck&Adjust
Accessstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Referto"27.3AccessingCheck&AdjustMenu"toaccessTOOLSCheck&Adjust
Menu.
2.
CONF(F2)toaccessTOOLSConfiguration.
TOOLS
Configuration,
Parameterspage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptthesettingsandtoreturntothescreen
TOOLSCheck&AdjustMenu
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|381
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Adjust
Reminder:>
2weeks,
1month,
3months,
6months,
12monthsor
Aremindermessageisdisplayedeachtimetheinstru‐
mentisturnedonifoneormoreadjustmentvalues
weredeterminedlongeragothanthetimespecified
withthisparameter.Thishelpstoredeterminethe
instrumenterrorsonaregularbasis.
Never
Aremindermessagetoreadjusttheinstrumentis
neverdisplayed.Thissettingisnotrecommended.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheLogfilepage.
TOOLS
Configuration,
Logfilepage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<WriteLogfile:>
YesorNo
Togeneratealogfilewhentheapplicationprogramis
exited.
Alogfileisafiletowhichdatafromanapplication
programiswrittento.Itisgeneratedusingtheselected
<FormatFile:>.
<FileName:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Thenameofthefileto
whichthedatashouldbewritten.Alogfileisstoredinthe
\DATAdirectoryoftheactivememorydevice.Thedatais
alwaysappendedtothefile.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|382
Field
Option
Description
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesXXLogfileswhereaname
foranewlogfilecanbecreatedandanexistinglogfilecan
beselectedordeleted.
<FormatFile:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Aformatfiledefines
whichandhowdataiswrittentoalogfile.Formatfilesare
createdusingStonex®Tools.Aformatfilemustfirstbe
transferredfromtheCompactFlashcardtotheSystem
RAMbeforeitcanbeselected.Referto"22
Tools...\TransferObjects..."forinformationonhowto
transferaformatfile.
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesXXFormatFileswhere
anexistingformatfilecanbeselectedordeleted.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changesbacktotheParameterspage.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|383
27.5 CombinedAdjustment(l,t,i,candiLock)
Accessstep‐by‐step
Description
Step
Description
1.
Referto"27.3AccessingCheck&AdjustMenu"toaccessTOOLSCheck&Adjust
Menu.
2.
InTOOLSCheck&AdjustMenuhighlightCombined(l,t,i,c,iLock).
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessTOOLSCombinedI.
Thecombinedadjustmentproceduredeterminesthefollowinginstrumenterrorsinone
process:
l,t
i
c
iLockHz
iLockV
Compensatorlongitudinalandtransversalindexerrors
Verticalindexerror,relatedtothestandingaxis
Hzcollimationerror,alsocalledlineofsighterror
iLockzeropointerrorforHzangle‐option
iLockzeropointerrorforVangle‐option
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|384
Combinedprocedure
step‐by‐step
Step

1.
Description
Beforedeterminingtheinstrumenterrors,theinstrumenthastobe:
• levelledupusingtheelectroniclevel
• protectedfromdirectsunlight
• acclimatisedtotheambienttemperature,approximatelytwominutesper°C
differencecomparedtothestorageplace.
• Referto"27.1Overview"paragraph"Precisemeasurements"formoredetails.
TOOLSCheck&AdjustMenu
SelecttheoptionCombined(l,t,i,c,iLock)
2.
TOOLSCombinedI
<iLockAdjust:On>IncludesthedeterminationoftheiLock,HzandVadjustment
values.
ItisrecommendedtouseacleanStonex®circularprismastarget.Donotuse
a360°prism.

<iLockAdjust:Off>iLockHzandVadjustmentvaluedeterminationisnotincluded.
Aprismisnotnecessarilyrequiredtoruntheprocedure.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|385
Step
Description
3.
~1
00
m
Aimthetelescopeaccuratelyatatargetata
distanceofabout100m.Thetargetmustbe
positionedwithin±9°/±10gonofthehori‐
zontalplane
Theprocedurecanbestartedinany
telescopeface.
Thefinepointinghastobe
performedmanuallyinbothfaces.


± 9°
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|386
Step
4.
Description
MEAS(F1)tomeasureandtocontinuetothenextscreen.
Motorisedinstrumentschangeautomati‐
callytotheotherface.
180°
180°
5.

6.
TOOLSCombinedII
MEAS(F1)tomeasurethesametargetintheotherfaceandtocalculatetheinstru‐
menterrors.
Ifoneormoreerrorsarebiggerthanthepredefinedlimits,theprocedurehastobe
repeated.Allmeasurementsofthecurrentrunarerejectedandarenotaveragedwith
theresultsfrompreviousruns.
TOOLSAdjustmentAccuracy
<No.ofMeas:>Showsthenumberofrunsexecuted.Onerunconsistsofameasure‐
mentinfaceIandfaceII.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|387
Step

Description
Allotherfieldsdisplaythestandarddeviationsofthedeterminedadjustmenterrors.
Thestandarddeviationscanbecalculatedfromthesecondrunonwards.
Itisrecommendedtomeasureatleasttworuns.
7.
MEAS(F5)ifmorerunshavetobeadded.Continuewithstep2.
OR
CONT(F1)toacceptthemeasurementsandtoaccessTOOLSAdjustment
Results.Nomorerunscanbeaddedlater.
TOOLS
AdjustmentResults
CONT(F1)
Toacceptandstorethenewdeterminedinstru‐
menterrors,whereYesissetintheUsecolumn.
Writestoorappendstoanexistinglogfile,ifthe
logfilerecordinghasbeenenabled.Referto
"27.4ConfigureCheck&Adjust".
USE(F4)
TosetYesorNointheUsecolumnforthehigh‐
lightedset.
MORE(F5)
Toviewadditionalinformationaboutthe
currentusedoldinstrumenterrors.
REDO(F2)
Torejectallresultsandtorepeatthecomplete
checkandadjustprocedure.Refertostep2.of
paragraph"Combinedprocedurestep‐by‐step".
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|388
Descriptionofcolumnsandfields
Column
Option
Description
New[g]
‐‐‐‐‐
Showsthenewdeterminedandaveragedinstrument
errors.Theunitisdisplayedin[].
Use
Yes
Storesthenewadjustmenterror.
No
Keepsthecurrentlyusederroractiveontheinstru‐
mentandrejectsthenewone.
‐‐‐‐‐
Showstheoldadjustmenterrors,whicharecurrently
validontheinstrument.Theunitisdisplayedin[].
Old[g]
Nextstep
IFtheresultsare
THEN
tobestored
CONT(F1)overwritestheoldadjustmenterrorswiththenewones,if
YesissetintheUsecolumn.
tobedetermined
again
REDO(F2)rejectsallnewdeterminedadjustmentvaluesandrepeats
thewholeprocedure.Refertostep2.ofparagraph"Combinedproce‐
durestep‐by‐step".
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|389
27.6 TiltingAxisAdjustment(a)
Accessstep‐by‐step
Description
Step
1.
Referto"27.3AccessingCheck&AdjustMenu"toaccessTOOLSCheck&Adjust
Menu.
2.
InTOOLSCheck&AdjustMenuhighlightTiltingAxis(a).
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessTOOLSTilting‐AxisAdjustmentI.
Thisproceduredeterminesthefollowinginstrumenterror:
a
Tiltingaxisadjustment
step‐by‐step
Description
Tiltingaxiserror
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description

Beforedeterminingthetiltingaxiserror,theinstrumenthastobe:
Referto
chapter
• levelledupusingtheelectroniclevel
• protectedfromdirectsunlight
• acclimatisedtotheambienttemperature,approximatelytwo
minutesper°Cdifferencecomparedtothestorageplace.
• TheHzcollimationerrorhastobedeterminedbefore.
1.
27.1,27.5
TOOLSCheck&AdjustMenu
Selecttheoption:TiltingAxis(a)
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|390
Step
2.
Description
Referto
chapter
TOOLSTilting‐AxisAdjustmentI
+ 27°
- 27°
Tools...\Check&Adjust
V=
90
°
Aimthetelescopeaccuratelyata
targetatadistanceofabout
100m.Fordistanceslessthan
100mmakesuretoprecisely
pointtothetarget.Thetarget
mustbepositionedwithinat
least27°/30gonaboveor
beneaththehorizontalplane.
Theprocedurecanbe
startedinanytelescopeface.
Thefinepointinghastobe
performedmanuallyinboth
faces.


R9|391
Step
3.
Description
Referto
chapter
MEAS(F1)tomeasureandtocontinuetothenextscreen.
Motorisedinstrumentschange
automaticallytotheotherface.
180°
180°
4.

5.
TOOLSTiltingAxisAdjustmentII
MEAS(F1)tomeasurethesametargetintheotherfaceandtocalculate
thetiltingaxiserror.
Iftheerrorisbiggerthanthepredefinedlimit,theprocedurehastobe
repeated.Themeasurementsofthecurrentrunarethenrejectedand
notaveragedwiththeresultsfrompreviousruns.
TOOLST‐AxisAdjustmentAccuracy
<No.ofMeas:>Showsthenumberofrunsexecuted.Onerunconsists
ofameasurementinfaceIandfaceII.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|392
Step

Description
Referto
chapter
<σaT‐axis:>showsthestandarddeviationofthedeterminedtilting
axiserror.Thestandarddeviationcanbecalculatedfromthesecond
runonwards.
Itisrecommendedtomeasureatleast2runs.
6.
MEAS(F5)ifmorerunshavetobeadded.Continuewithstep2.
OR
CONT(F1)toacceptthemeasurementsandtoaccessTOOLST‐Axis
AdjustmentResult.Nomorerunscanbeaddedlater.
TOOLS
T‐AxisAdjustment
Result
CONT(F1)
Toacceptandrecordthenewdeterminedtilting
axiserror.Writestoorappendstoanexisting
logfile,ifthelogfilerecordinghasbeenenabled.
Referto"27.4ConfigureCheck&Adjust".
REDO(F2)
Torejecttheresultandtorepeatthecomplete
checkandadjustprocedure.Refertostep2.of
paragraph"Tiltingaxisadjustmentstep‐by‐
step".
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|393
Descriptionofcolumnsandfields
Column
Option
Description
New[g]
‐‐‐‐‐
Showsthenewdeterminedandaveragedtiltingaxis
error.Theunitisdisplayedin[].
Old[g]
‐‐‐‐‐
Showstheoldinstrumenterror,whichiscurrently
validontheinstrument.Theunitisdisplayedin[].
Nextstep
IFtheresultis
THEN
tobestored
CONT(F1)overwritestheoldtiltingaxiserrorwiththenewone.
tobedetermined
again
REDO(F2)rejectsthenewdeterminedtiltingaxiserrorandrepeatsthe
wholeprocedure.Refertostep2.ofparagraph"Tiltingaxisadjustment
step‐by‐step".
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|394
27.7 CompensatorAdjustment(l,t)
Accessstep‐by‐step
Description
Step
1.
Referto"27.3AccessingCheck&AdjustMenu"toaccessTOOLSCheck&Adjust
Menu.
2.
InTOOLSCheck&AdjustMenuhighlightCompensator(l,t).
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessTOOLSCompensatorAdjustment.
Thecompensatoradjustmentproceduredeterminesthefollowinginstrumenterrors:
l
t
Compensatorindex
adjustmentstep‐by‐step
Description
Compensatorlongitudinalindexerror
Compensatortransversalindexerror
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description

Beforedeterminingthecompensatorindexerrors,theinstrumenthas
tobe:
Referto
chapter
• levelledupusingtheelectroniclevel
• protectedfromdirectsunlight
• acclimatisedtotheambienttemperature,approximatelytwo
minutesper°Cdifferencecomparedtothestorageplace.
1.
27.1
TOOLSCheck&AdjustMenu
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|395
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
Selecttheoption:Compensator(l,t)
2.
TOOLSCompensatorAdjustment
MEAS(F1)tomeasurethefirstface.Notargethastobeaimedat.
Motorisedinstrumentschangetotheotherfaceand
180° releaseameasurementautomatically.

3.
Ifoneormoreerrorsarebiggerthanthepredefinedlimits,theproce‐
durehastoberepeated.Allmeasurementsofthecurrentrunare
rejectedandarenotaveragedwiththeresultsfrompreviousruns.
TOOLSCompAdjustmentAccuracy
<No.ofMeas:>Showsthenumberofrunsexecuted.Onerunconsists
ofameasurementinfaceIandfaceII.

<σlComp:>and<σtComp:>showthestandarddeviationsofthe
determinedadjustmenterrors.Thestandarddeviationscanbecalcu‐
latedfromthesecondrunonwards.
Itisrecommendedtomeasureatleasttworuns.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|396
Step
Description
4.
Referto
chapter
MEAS(F5)ifmorerunshavetobeadded.Continuewithstep2.
OR
CONT(F1)toacceptthemeasurementsandtoaccessTOOLSComp
AdjustmentResults.Nomorerunscanbeaddedlater.
TOOLS
CompAdjustment
Results
CONT(F1)
Toacceptandrecordthenewdetermined
instrumenterrors.Writestoorappendstoan
existinglogfile,ifthelogfilerecordinghasbeen
enabled.Referto"27.4ConfigureCheck&
Adjust".
REDO(F2)
Torejectallresultsandtorepeatthecomplete
checkandadjustprocedure.Refertostep2.of
paragraph"Compensatorindexadjustment
step‐by‐step".
Descriptionofcolumnsandfields
Column
Option
Description
New[g]
‐‐‐‐‐
Showsthenewdeterminedandaveragedinstrument
errors.Theunitisdisplayedin[].
Old[g]
‐‐‐‐‐
Showstheoldinstrumenterrors,whicharecurrently
validontheinstrument.Theunitisdisplayedin[].
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|397
Nextstep
IFtheresultsare
THEN
tobestored
CONT(F1)overwritestheoldinstrumenterrorswiththenewones.
tobedetermined
again
REDO(F2)rejectsthenewdeterminedinstrumenterrorsandrepeats
thewholeprocedure.Refertostep2.ofparagraph"Compensatorindex
adjustmentstep‐by‐step".
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|398
27.8 CurrentInstrumentErrors
Access
Step
Description
1.
Referto"27.3AccessingCheck&AdjustMenu"toaccessTOOLSCheck&Adjust
Menu.
2.
InTOOLSCheck&AdjustMenuhighlightCurrentValues.
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessTOOLSCurrentValues.
TOOLS
CurrentValues
CONT(F1)
ToreturntotheTOOLSCheck&AdjustMenu
screen.Referto"27.3AccessingCheck&Adjust
Menu".
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthedateofthe
determination,thestandarddeviationofthe
errorsandthetemperatureduringthedetermi‐
nation.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)returnstoTOOLSCheck&AdjustMenuscreen.Referto"27.3AccessingCheck&
AdjustMenu".

Notethatthetemperatureoftheenvironmentaroundtheinstrumentmaydifferfromthe
temperatureshownonthescreenasitistheinternaltemperatureoftheinstrument.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|399
27.9 AdjustingtheCircularLeveloftheInstrumentandTribrach
Adjustingthecircular
levelstep‐by‐step
1
4
Step
SHIFT
F12
4
2
Description
1.
Placeandsecuretheinstrumentintothetribrachandontoatripod.
2.
Usingthetribrachfootscrews,leveltheinstrumentwiththeelectroniclevel.SHIFT
F12toaccessSTATUSLevel&LaserPlummet.
3.
Checkthepositionofthecircularlevelontheinstrumentandtribrach.
4.
a)Ifbothcircularlevelsarecentered,noadjustmentsarenecessary
b)Ifoneorbothcircularlevelsarenotcentered,adjustasfollows:
Instrument:Ifitextendsbeyondthecircle,usethesuppliedallenkeytocentreit
withtheadjustmentscrews.Turntheinstrumentby200gon(180°).Repeatthe
adjustmentprocedureifthecircularleveldoesnotstaycentered.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|400
Step

Description
Tribrach:Ifitextendsbeyondthecircle,usethesuppliedallenkeytocentreit
withtheadjustmentscrews.
Aftertheadjustments,alladjustingscrewsshouldhavethesametighteningtension
andnoadjustingscrewshallbeloose.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|401
27.10 AdjustingtheCircularLevelofthePrismPole
Adjustingthecircular
levelstep‐by‐step
4b
1
2
4a
Step
Description
1.
Suspendaplumbline.
2.
Usingapolebipod,aligntheprismpoleparalleltotheplumbline.
3.
Checkthepositionofthecircularlevelontheprismpole.
4.
a)Ifthecircularleveliscentered,noadjustmentisnecessary.

b)Ifthecircularlevelisnotcentered,useanallenkeytocentreitwiththeadjustment
screws.
Aftertheadjustments,alladjustingscrewsshouldhavethesametighteningtension
andnoadjustingscrewshallbeloose.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|402
27.11 InspectingtheLaserPlummetoftheInstrument

Thelaserplummetislocatedintheverticalaxisoftheinstrument.Undernormalconditionsof
use,thelaserplummetdoesnotneedadjusting.Ifanadjustmentisnecessaryduetoexternal
influences,theinstrumenthastobereturnedtoanyStonex®authorizedserviceworkshop.
Inspectingthelaser
plummetstep‐by‐step
1
2
5
360°
SHIFT
F12
Ø 2.5 mm / 1.5 m
3
F6
4
6
≤ 3 mm / 1.5 m
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.
Step
Description
1.
Placeandsecuretheinstrumentintothetribrachandontoatripod.
2.
Usingthetribrachfootscrews,leveltheinstrumentwiththeelectroniclevel.SHIFT
F12toaccessSTATUSLevel&LaserPlummet.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|403
Step
Description
3.
PAGE(F6)toaccesstheLaserPlummetpage.Switchonthelaserplummet.Inspec‐
tionofthelaserplummetshouldbecarriedoutonabright,smoothandhorizontal
surface,likeasheetofpaper.
4.
Markthecentreofthereddotontheground.
5.
Turntheinstrumentthrough360°slowly,carefullyobservingthemovementofthe
redlaserdot.

6.
Themaximumdiameterofthecircularmovementdescribedbythecentreofthelaser
pointshouldnotexceed3mmatadistanceof1.5m.
Ifthecentreofthelaserdotdescribesaperceptiblecircularmovementormoves
morethan3mmawayfromthepointwhichwasfirstmarked,anadjustmentmaybe
required.InformyournearestStonex®authorizedserviceworkshop.Dependingon
brightnessandsurface,thediameterofthelaserdotcanvary.At1.5mitisabout2.5
mm.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|404
27.12 ServicingtheTripod
Servicingthetripod
step‐by‐step
1
2
3
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.
Step

Description
Theconnectionsbetweenmetalandtimbercomponentsmustalwaysbefirmand
tight.
1.
Tightenthelegcapscrewsmoderately,withthesuppliedallenkey.
2.
Tightenthearticulatedjointsonthetripodheadjustenoughtokeepthetripodlegs
openwhenliftingthetripodofftheground.
3.
Tightentheallenscrewsofthetripodlegs.
Tools...\Check&Adjust
R9|405
28 STATUS
28.1 STATUSFunctions
Description
TheSTATUSfunctionshelpusingtheinstrumentbyshowingthestateofmanyinstrumentfunc‐
tions.Allfieldsareoutputfields.Unavailableinformationisindicatedby‐‐‐‐‐.
Access
PressUSERandthenSTAT(F3).Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
STATUS
StatusMenu
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
STATUS
R9|406
Descriptionofthe
STATUSfunctions
STATUSfunction
Description
StationInformation
Informationrelatedtothecurrentstationsetonthe 28.2
instrument.
Battery&Memory
Informationrelatedtouseandstatusofbatteryand
memory.
SystemInformation
Informationrelatedtotheinstrumenthardwareand 28.4
firmware.
Interfaces...
Informationrelatedtotheconfigurationanduseof
interfaces,portanddevices.
28.5
Bluetooth
Informationrelatedtotheconfigurationanduseof
Bluetoothinterfaces.
28.6
Level&LaserPlummet Informationrelatedtoelectroniclevelandlaser
plummet.
STATUS
Referto
chapter
28.3
28.7
R9|407
28.2 STATUS:StationInformation
Access
SelectSTATUS:StationInformation.
Referto"28.1STATUSFunctions"onhowtoaccesstheSTATUSmenu.
STATUS
StationInformation
CONT(F1)
ToexitSTATUSStationInformation.
STATUS
R9|408
Descriptionoffields
Field
Description
<StationID:>
StationIDofthecurrentstationset‐up.
<InstrumentHt:>
Instrumentheightofthecurrentstationset‐up.
<Easting:>
Eastingvalueoftheinstrumentposition.
<Northing:>
Northingvalueoftheinstrumentposition.
<OrthoHt:>
Theorthometricheightoftheinstrumentpositionisdisplayed.
<Temperature:>
Temperaturesetontheinstrument.
<Pressure:>
Pressuresetontheinstrument.
<Atmosppm:>
Atmosphericppmsetontheinstrument.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)toexitSTATUSStationInformation.
STATUS
R9|409
28.3 STATUS:Battery&Memory
Access
SelectSTATUS:Battery&Memory.
Referto"28.1STATUSFunctions"onhowtoaccesstheSTATUSmenu.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Tapthebatteryicon.
OR
TaptheCompactFlashcardicon.
STATUS
Battery&Memory,
Batterypage
CONT(F1)
ToexitSTATUSBattery&Memory.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
STATUS
R9|410
Descriptionoffields
Field
Description
Anyfield
Thepercentageofremainingpowercapacityforallbatteriesare
displayednumerically.Batteriesnotinuseareshowningrey.For
internalandexternalbatterybeingattachedatthesametimethe
internalbatteryisuseduntilitisemptyandthentheexternalbatteryis
used.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheMemorypage.
STATUS
Battery&Memory,
Memorypage
Ifnoinformationforafieldisavailable,forexamplenoCompactFlashcardisinserted,then‐‐‐‐‐
isdisplayed.
CONT(F1)
ToexitSTATUSBattery&Memory.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
STATUS
R9|411
Descriptionoffields
Field
Description
<DeviceUsed:>
Thememorydeviceinuse.
<MemCFCard:>
Thetotal/freememoryfordatastorageontheCompactFlashcard.
<MemInstrmnt:>
Thetotal/freememoryfordatastorageontheinternalmemory.Agrey
fieldandgrey‐‐‐‐‐indicateanunavailableinternalmemory.
<MemPrograms:>
Thetotal/freesystemmemoryusedforapplicationprograms.
<MemSystem:>
Thetotal/freesystemmemory.Thesystemmemorystores
• instrumentrelatedfilessuchassystemsettings.
• surveyrelatedfilessuchascodelistsandconfigurationsets.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)toexitSTATUSBattery&Memory.
STATUS
R9|412
28.4 STATUS:SystemInformation
Access
SelectSTATUS:SystemInformation.
Referto"28.1STATUSFunctions"onhowtoaccesstheSTATUSmenu.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
STATUS
SystemInformation,
Instrumentpage
Showsthetypeofinstrument,theserialnumber,theequipmentnumber,theIDoftheinstru‐
ment,thecurrentlyactivesystemlanguageandtheavailabilityofadditionalinstrumenthard‐
wareoptions.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheFirmwarepage.
STATUS
SystemInformation,
Firmwarepage
Showstheversionsofallsystemfirmware.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Description
<Firmware:>
Firmwareversionoftheonboardsoftware.
<BuildUserIface:>
Buildversionoftheonboardsoftware.
<BuildProcessb.:>
Buildversionoftheprocessorboard.
<TelescopeFw:>
Firmwareversionofthetelescope.
<Boot:>
Firmwareversionofthebootsoftware.
<API:>
Firmwareversionfortheapplicationprograminterface.
STATUS
R9|413
Field
Description
<EFInterface:>
Firmwareversionfortheelectricfrontinterface.
<Keyboard/Display:>
Firmwareversionforthegraphicaluserinterface.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheApplicationpage.
STATUS
SystemInformation,
Applicationpage
Showstheversionsofalluploadedapplicationprograms.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)exitsSTATUSSystemInformation.
STATUS
R9|414
28.5 STATUS:Interfaces...
Description
STATUSInterfacesgivesanoverviewofallinterfaceswiththeportandthedevicescurrently
assigned.
Access
SelectSTATUS:Interfaces....
Referto"28.1STATUSFunctions"onhowtoaccesstheSTATUSmenu.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
STATUS
Interfaces
Thescreengivesanoverviewofallinterfaceswiththecurrentlyassignedportanddevice.
Unavailableinformationisindicatedby‐‐‐‐‐.
CONT(F1)
ToexitSTATUSInterfaces.
STATUS
R9|415
28.6 STATUS:Bluetooth
Description
Thisscreenshows
• Bluetoothportsavailableandconfigured.
• thedeviceattachedandconnectedtoeachBluetoothport.
• theIDaddressofeachdevice.
Access
SelectSTATUS:Bluetooth.
Referto"28.1STATUSFunctions"onhowtoaccesstheSTATUSmenu.
OR
TaptheBluetoothicon.
STATUS
Bluetooth
ThewayinformationisdisplayedindicatestheconfigurationstatusoftheBluetoothportand
theconnectionstatusofthedevice.
Informationdisplayed
Bluetoothportconfigured
Deviceconnected
inblack


ingrey

‐
as‐‐‐‐‐
‐
‐
Nextstep
CONT(F1)exitsSTATUSBluetooth.
STATUS
R9|416
28.7 STATUS:Level&LaserPlummet
Description
Theelectroniclevelisshownandcanbecentred.
Access
SelectSTATUS:Level&LaserPlummet.
Referto"28.1STATUSFunctions"onhowtoaccesstheSTATUSmenu.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.

Thelevelmoveslinearwiththeinclinationvalues<TiltL:>and<TiltT:>.Onthescreenclosest
tothecircularlevel,theelectroniclevelmovesdownifthevaluein<TiltL:>getsbiggerandvice
versa.Ifthevaluefor<TiltT:>getsbiggerthelevelmovesleftandviceversa.
STATUS
Level&LaserPlummet,
Levelpage
CONT(F1)
ToexitSTATUSLevel&LaserPlummet.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
STATUS
R9|417
Descriptionoffields
Field
Description
<TiltL:>
Longitudinaltiltoftheverticalaxis.
<TiltT:>
Transversaltiltoftheverticalaxis.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheLaserPlummetpage.
STATUS
Level&LaserPlummet,
LaserPlummetpage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<LaserPlummet:>
OnorOff
Toturnthelaserplummetonoroff.Isalwaysseton
whenaccessingthisscreen.Changingthissettingturns
thelaserplummetonoroffimmediately.
<Intensity:>
From0%to
100%
Thepercentageoftheintensityofthelaserplummetis
displayednumericallyandgraphically.Theminimum
valueis10%.Changingthisvaluewiththerightandleft
arrowkeyschangestheintensityofthelaserplummet
immediately.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)exitsSTATUSLevel&LaserPlummet.
STATUS
R9|418
29 Functions
29.1 EDM
Description
EDMtypes
ElectronicDistanceMeasurementEDMisthesensorusedfordistancemeasurements.
Therearethreedifferent<EDMType:>andfivedifferent<EDMMode:>theinstrumentcan
workin.Thesetermsaredescribedbelow.
Referto"16.1EDM&iLockSettings"andto"3QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER"formoreinforma‐
tion.
EDMType
Description
IR
<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>allowstomeasurethedistancetoaprism
orreflectortapewiththevisibleredlaser.
Thelastusedoptionsfor<Reflector:>,<Add.Constant:>,<Reflector
Ht:>and<EDMMode:>areapplied.
For<Automation:iLock>or<Automation:Robotic>,<EDMType:
Reflector(IR)>isautomaticallyset.
Itisimportanttoselectthecurrentlyused<Reflector:>fromthe
listtogaincorrectresults.

RL
<EDMType:Reflctrless(RL)>allowstomeasuredistancestoobjects
withoutareflectorwiththevisibleredlaser.Thelastusedoptionfor
<EDMMode:>isapplied,<Reflector:Reflectorless>and<Reflector
Ht:0.000>areset.<Automation:None>isset.
Functions
R9|419
EDMmodes
EDMType
Description
LO
<EDMType:LongRange(LO)>allowstomeasureverylongdistances
toprisms.
Thelastusedoptionfor<EDMMode:>and<Reflector:>areapplied,
<Automation:None>isset.
EDMMode
Description
Standard
PressingALL(F1)orDIST(F2)asinglemeasurementisperformed
withfocusonaccuracyandnotontime.
Fast
PressingALL(F1)orDIST(F2)asinglemeasurementisperformed
withfocusontime,accuracynotashighasfor<EDMMode:Standard>.
Tracking
PressingALL(F1)orDIST(F2)continuousmeasurementsare
performedwithfocusonfastmeasurements.PressREC(F3)tostore
themeasurements.
STOP(F1)tostoptracking.

Average
PressingALL(F1)orDIST(F2)with<AvgMax#Dist:n>nmeasure‐
mentsareperformedwith<EDMMode:Standard>.Duringmeasure‐
mentsthecurrentaverageandstandarddeviationaredisplayed.
Functions
R9|420
EDMMode
Description
SynchroTrack
Availableonlyfor<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>.
Thisisthemeasurementmodeformoreprecisemeasurementsin
Roboticmode.
PressingALL(F1)orDIST(F2)alinearinterpolationbetweenthe
previousandfollowinganglemeasurementisperformed,basedupon
thetimestampoftheEDMmeasurement.
Usingthisinterpolationprocedure,ahigheraccuracyforalldynamic
applicationsispossible.
Functions
R9|421
29.2 PrismSearchMethods
29.2.1 iLock
Description
iLockisthesensorwhichrecognisesandmeasuresthepositionofaprismbymeansofaCCD
array.AlaserbeamistransmittedandthereflectedbeamisreceivedbythebuiltinCCDarray.
ThepositionofthereflectedspotwithrespecttothecentreoftheCCDiscomputed.TheseiLock
offsetsareusedtocorrectthehorizontalandverticalangles.TheiLockoffsetsarealsousedto
controlthemotorswhichturntheinstrumenttocentrethecrosshairstotheprism.Inorderto
minimisethetimeformeasuring,thecrosshairsarenotmovedtotheexactcentreoftheprism.
TheiLockoffsetcanbeupto500ccdependingonselected<EDMMode:>.TheiLockmeasures
theiLockoffsetsbetweenthecrosshairsandprismcentreandcorrectstheHzandVangles
accordingly.ThereforetheHzandVanglesaremeasuredtotheprism‐centre,evenifthecross‐
hairsarenotaimedpreciselyatthecentreoftheprism.
For<Automation:iLock>theinstrumentcanfindastaticprismandmeasureadistanceonce
ALL(F1)orDIST(F2)ispressed.Theinstrumentdoesnotfollowamovingprism.
Referto"16.1EDM&iLockSettings"andto"3QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER"formoreinforma‐
tion.
Functions
R9|422
Fieldofview
Thetelescopefieldofviewistheregionseenwhenlookingthroughthetelescope.TheAimfield
ofviewistheregionseenbytheiLock.
Nextstep
IFthereflectoris
THEN
inthefieldofview
Refertoparagraph"iLockmeasurement"formoreinformation.
notinthefieldofview
Refertoparagraph"iLocksearch"formoreinformation.
iLockmeasurement
Ifthereflectorisinthefieldofviewand<Automation:iLock>
thecrosshairsareautomaticallypositionedtothereflector
when,forexampleALL(F1)orDIST(F2)ispressed.NoAim
searchisstarted.
Thedisplayedvaluesarealwaysrelatedtothecentreof
theprismafterALL(F1)orDIST(F2)ispressed.For
ALL(F1)thesevaluesaredisplayedonlyshortlyafter
thekeypress.
Thecrosshairsofthetelescopemaynotfullycoincide
withthecentreoftheprismwhenviewedthroughthe
telescope.TheremainingiLockoffsetsforthehorizontal
andverticalanglesaremeasuredbytheiLocksensorand
appliedtothemeasuredanddisplayedangles.

Functions
R9|423
iLocksearch
Ifthereflectorisnotinthefieldofviewwhen
ALL(F1)orDIST(F2)ispressed,aniLock
searchisstarted.FortheiLocksearchtheAim
windowisscannedlinebylinestartingatthe
currenttelescopeposition.
Ifthe
• prismwasnotfound:RETRY(F5)canbe
pressedtosearchforthereflectorinan
increasedarea.
• prismwasfound:TheiLockmeasurement
isperformedtopositionthetelescopeto
thecentreoftheprism.
iLockwindow
TheiLockwindowisarelativewindowbasedonthecurrenttelescopeposition.Thehorizontal
andverticalextentcanbedefined.PressingALL(F1),DIST(F2)orR.GO(F5)startsaniLock
searchintheiLockwindow.
DynamiciLockwindow
For<Searchwith:iLock>afterlossoflockandpredictiontheprismissearchedforwithiLock
inadynamiciLockwindow.Thiswindowcoversahorizontalregionfromthepositionoflossof
locktothecurrenttelescopepositionandthesameextentontheotherside.Theverticaldimen‐
sionofthedynamicwindowisonethirdofthehorizontalexpansion.Referto"29.3Robotic"for
informationonRobotic.
Functions
R9|424
Automationmodes
Automation
Description
None
Pointsaremeasuredwith<Automation:None>.iLocksearchand/or
iLockmeasurementarenotperformed.
iLock
<Automation:iLock>isset.TheiLocksensorisusedformeasure‐
mentstostaticreflectors.IfneededaniLockmeasurementoriLock
searchisperformedafterpressingALL(F1)orDIST(F2).Theaccuracy
ofiLockmeasurementsdependsontheset<EDMMode:>.
Robotic
<Automation:Robotic>isset.TheiLocksensorisusedtofollow
movingprismsandtofindprismsafterlossoflock.Dependingon
<EDMMode:>singleorcontinuousmeasurementsareperformed
pressingALL(F1)orDIST(F2).
Functions
R9|425
29.3 Robotic
Description

EnableRobotic
Roboticenablesinstrumentstofollowamovingprism.TheiLocksensorisactive.When<Auto‐
mation:Robotic>andadistancemeasurementisinitiatedwithDIST(F2)orR.GO(F5)is
pressed,aniLocksearchisexecuted.Theinstrumentlocksontotheprismandfollowsitsmove‐
ments.iLockoffsetsarecontinuouslyappliedtotheanglemeasurements.Whentheinstrument
loseslocktothereflector,asearchisexecutedwithiLock.
Referto"16Config...\InstrumentSettings..."andto"3QuickSettings‐SHIFTUSER"formore
information.
Ifthespeedofthereflectoristoofast,thetargetmaybelost.Makesurethatthespeeddoesnot
exceedthefiguregiveninthetechnicaldata.
<Automation:Robotic>.TheinstrumentisnotyetlockedontothereflectorandtheiLock
sensorisnotactive.PressingALL(F1),DIST(F2),R.GO(F5)orCONT(F1)inQUICKSET
OrientationWithCompass,QUICKSETPositioningHz/V,QUICKSETMovebyJoystickor
QUICKSETCheckRecordedPt/BacksightPttheiLockisusedtofindthereflector.Whenthe
reflectorisfound,theinstrumentlocksontothereflector.Theinstrumentfollowsthemoving
reflector.TheiLocksensorisactive.
Aslongastheinstrumentislockedon,iLockoffsetsarecontinuouslyappliedtotheanglemeas‐
urements.Iftheinstrumentloseslocktotheprismtheinstrumentmaysearchfortheprism
withiLock.
Lossoflock
Whentheinstrumentislockedontoareflector,lockmaybelostifthemovementofthereflector
istoofastfortheinstrumenttofolloworthereflectorishiddenbehindanobject.Afterlockis
lost,thepredictionisusedtofindtheprismagain.Refertoparagraph"Prediction"formore
information.
Functions
R9|426
TheiLocksensorisstillactive.

Prediction
Whenevertheprismismovedinthefieldofviewofthetelescopetheinstrumentlocksautomat‐
icallytotheprism.
a
b
c
a) Movingreflectorlockedontobytheinstrument
b) Lossoflock
c) Prediction
Aslongastheprismisbeingtrackedbytheinstrumentamathematicalfiltercontinuouslycalcu‐
latestheaveragespeedanddirectionoftheprism.Ifthelineofsightbetweeninstrumentand
prismisdisturbed,theinstrumentkeepsonmovingusingthesecalculatedvalues.Thisbehav‐
iouriscalledprediction.Thepredictiontimecanbeconfigured.
DuringpredictiontheRoboticiconisdisplayed.Iftheprismcomesintothefieldofviewofthe
iLockitautomaticallylocksonagain.
Prismsearchafter
prediction
Afterprediction,theprismissearchedfordependingonthesettingsintheCONFIGUREAuto‐
maticPrismSearchscreen.
• <Searchwith:NoSearch>.Ifprismmovedinfieldofview,prismisnotsearchedforuntil
ALL(F1),DIST(F2),R.GO(F5),CONT(F1),SCT‐>(F6)orSHIFTSCT<‐(F5)ispressed.
• <Searchwith:iLock>.prismissearchedforinthedynamicAimwindowwithiLock.
• <Searchwith:LastPoint>:Theinstrumentturnsbacktothelaststoredpoint.
Relock
Independentof<Searchwith:>theinstrumentcanrelockontotheprism.Refertoparagraph
"EnableRobotic"forinformationonhowtoenablelock.
Functions
R9|427
29.4 SureBeam
Description
TheSureBeam,navigationlightconsistsoftwodifferentlycolouredflashinglightsinthetele‐
scopehousingoftheR9.TheSureBeamisusedforguidanceintothelineofsight.Iftheleftlight
isseen,theprismshouldbemovedrightandviceversa.Ifbothflashinglightscanbeseen,the
prismisinthelineofsightoftheinstrument.
Functionality
100 m (300 ft)
TheSureBeamcanbeused
• tohelpguidingthereflectorintothetele‐
scopelineofsightwhentheinstrumentis
remotelycontrolledand<Automation:
iLock>.
• tostakeoutpoints
6m
(20 ft)
Theinstrumentemitstwodifferentlycolored
flashingconesoflight.Atatargetdistanceof
100mtheconeshaveawidthof6m.Between
thetwoconesoflightasectorwithawidthof
30mmiscreatedwherebothguidelightsare
visiblesimultaneously.Inthispositionthe
prismisinthelineofsightoftheinstrument.
6m
(20 ft)
Functions
R9|428
UsingtheSureBeam
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
Referto
chapter
Set<Automation:Robotic>andpressCOMPS(F1)orHz/V(F2)or 3.2
JSTCK(F3)ontheQUICKSETChangeSettingsto:screen
OR
Set<SureBeam:On>ontheCONFIGURELights,Display,Beeps, 17.5
Text,Lightspage.
2.
Aligninstrumentlineofsightandprism,wherebothflashingSureBeam
lightscanbeseensimultaneously.
3.
CONT(F1)tolockontotheprism.
4.
IftheinstrumenthaslockedontotheprismtheSureBeamisturnedoff
automatically.


IftheSureBeamwasturnedonintheCONFIGURELights,Display,
Beeps,Text,Lightspage,ithastobeturnedoffbysetting<SureBeam:
Off>.
TheSureBeamisturnedoffautomaticallyoncetheinstrumenthaslockedontoaprism.
Functions
R9|429
29.5 Illumination
Description
Thereareseveraldifferentilluminationtypesbuiltintotheinstrumentthatallfulfilldifferent
functions.Somearetosupportmeasurements,forexamplethevisibleredlaserpointer.Others,
suchasthescreenillumination,areformoreconvenientworkwiththeinstrument.These
differenttypesofilluminationaredescribedbelow.
Laserplummet
Thelaserplummetallowssettinguptheinstrumentoveramarkedpoint.Thelaserbeamis
emittedfromthebottomoftheinstrument,pointingtotheground.Whentheinstrumentis
levelledandthelaserbeampointsexactlyatthegroundpoint,theinstrumentissetupcorrectly.
Thelaserplummetcanbeturnedonandoff.Itisturnedonautomaticallywhenopeningthe
STATUSLevelandLaserPlummetscreenandturnedoffwhenleavingthescreen.
Visibleredlaserpointer
Thevisibleredlaserpointerisusedforreflectorlessmeasurements.Thevisibleredlaser
pointerisarrangedcoaxiallywiththelineofsightofthetelescopeandemittedthroughthe
objective.Iftheinstrumentiswelladjusted,thevisibleredlaserbeamcoincideswiththelineof
sight.

Screen/keyillumination
Thedirectionofthebeamshouldbeinspectedbeforeprecisedistancemeasurementsare
executed,sinceanexcessivedeviationofthelaserbeamfromthelineofsightcancauseinaccu‐
rateresults.
Thescreenandkeyilluminationallowsamoreconvenientworkingwiththeinstrumentwhen
thelightingconditionsarenotideal.TheycanbeturnedonintheCONFIGURELights,Displays,
Beeps,Text,Lightspage.ToaccessthisscreenpressSHIFTF11inanyapplicationprogram.
Changestothesettingbecomeeffectiveinstantly.Referto"17.5Lights,Display,Beeps,Text"for
moreinformationonscreenandkeyilluminationsettings.
Functions
R9|430
30 MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
30.1 Overview
Description
MapViewisaninteractivedisplayfeatureembeddedinthefirmwarebutusedbyallapplication
programsaswellasdatamanagement.MapViewprovidesagraphicaldisplayofthesurvey
elementswhichallowsforabetteroverallunderstandingofhowthedatabeingusedandmeas‐
uredrelatestoeachother.
DependingontheapplicationprogramandwhereintheapplicationprogramMapViewis
accessedfrom,differentmodes,andtheirassociatedfunctionality,areavailable.
ThedisplayeddatainallmodesofMapViewcanbeshiftedbyusingboththearrowkeysandthe
touchscreen.
MapViewmodes
MapViewisavailableinthreemodes:
Mapmode:
•
•
•
•
Plotmode:
•
Surveymode:
•
•
•
•
Partofdatamanagement.
Isalsoavailablewithinsomeapplicationprograms.
Canbeusedtoview,selectandeditpoints,linesandareas.
AvailableastheMappageindatamanagementandsomeapplication
programs.
Isavailabletoviewresultsinvariousapplicationprograms.For
example,COGOapplicationprogram.
AvailableasthePlotpageinsomeapplicationprograms.
PartoftheSurveyapplicationprogram.
Isavailablewithinsomeapplicationprograms,forexample,Stakeout
applicationprogram.
Canbeusedtoselectlinesandareas.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|431
• SameasMapmodebutalsoshowsthepositionsoftheinstrumentand
thereflector.
• Providesspecialfunctionalitywhenstakingoutpoints.
• AvailableastheMappageinSurveyandsomeapplicationprograms.
Modeswithinapplica‐
tionprograms
ItispossibletoaccessdifferentMapViewmodesfromthesameapplicationprogram.For
example,toaccessMapViewinmapmodeoraccesstheMapViewinsurveymode.
Displayabledata
ThedatadisplayedinMapViewisdefinedbytheapplicationprogramthroughwhichitwas
accessed,filterssetinMANAGESorts&Filters,andtheselectionsmadeinXXMapView
Configuration.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|432
30.2 AccessingMapView
Description
TheMapViewinteractivedisplayfeatureisprovidedasapagewithinallapplicationprograms
anddatamanagement.Itisaccessedthroughtheapplicationprogramitself.Dependingonthe
applicationprogramandfromwhereintheapplicationprogramMapViewisaccessed,different
MapViewmodesareavailable.
Accessstep‐by‐step
Exampleaccessformapmode:
Step
Description
1.
SelectMainMenu:Manage...\Data.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
Fromachoicelistinsomescreensforexampleinapplicationprograms.
2.
PAGE(F6)untilMANAGEData:JobName,Mappageisactive.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|433
Exampleaccessforplotmode:
Step
Description
1.
PressON.HighlightCOGO.CONT(F1).Referto"31.2AccessingthePrograms
Menu"forinformationontheONkey.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
2.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOCOGOMenu.
3.
COGOCOGOMenu
HighlightIntersections.
4.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOIntersectionInput.
5.
COGOIntersectionInput
Chooseamethodandenterappropriatedata.
6.
CALC(F1)toaccessCOGOXXResults.
7.
PAGE(F6)untilCOGOXXResults,Plotpageisactive.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|434
Exampleaccessforsurveymode:
Step
Description
1.
SelectMainMenu:Survey.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
PressON.HighlightSurvey.CONT(F1).Referto"31.2AccessingthePrograms
Menu"forinformationontheONkey.

2.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
3.
PAGE(F6)untilSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Mappageisactive.
MapViewcanbeopenmultipletimes,forexampleasSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Mappage
accessedfromR9MainMenuandasMANAGEData:JobName,Mappageaccessedusingthe
USERkey.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|435
30.3 ConfiguringMapView
Description

Accessstep‐by‐step
AllowsoptionstobesetwhichareusedasdefaultoptionswithinMapView.Thesesettingsare
storedwithintheconfigurationsetandapplytoallMapandPlotpages,regardlessofhow
MapViewisaccessed.
AnychangesmadeinXXMapViewConfigurationaffecttheappearanceofMapViewinall
applicationprograms,notjusttheactiveapplicationprogram.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"30.2AccessingMapView"toaccessMapViewinmap,plotorsurveymode.
2.
SHIFTCONF(F2)toaccessXXMapViewConfiguration.
XX
MapViewConfiguration,
Pointspage
CONT(F1)
Toconfirmtheselectionsandtoreturntothe
screenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
SYMBL(F3)
Toviewallpointsymbolsandtheirdescriptions.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|436
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<ShowPoints:>
YesorNo
DeterminesifpointsaredisplayedinMapView.
<PointID:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<ShowPoints:Yes>.DeterminesiftheID
ofapointisdisplayed.
<PointCode:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<ShowPoints:Yes>.Determinesifthe
codeofapointisdisplayed.
<PointHeight:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<ShowPoints:Yes>.Determinesifthe
heightofapointisdisplayed.
<PointCQ:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<ShowPoints:Yes>.Determinesifthe
coordinatequalityofapointisdisplayed.
Displayablepointinfor‐
mation
a)
b)
c)
d)
<PointID:>
<PointCode:>
<PointHeight:>
<PointCQ:>
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheLines&Areaspage.Refertoparagraph"XXMapViewConfiguration,
Lines&Areaspage".
XX
MapViewConfiguration,
Lines&Areaspage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<ShowLines:>
YesorNo
DeterminesiflinesaredisplayedinMapView.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|437
Field
Option
Description
<ShowLineID:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<ShowLines:Yes>.DeterminesiftheID
ofalineisdisplayed.
<ShowLineCode:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<ShowLines:Yes>.Determinesifthe
codeofalineisdisplayed.
<ShowAreas:>
YesorNo
DeterminesifareasaredisplayedinMapView.
<ShowAreaID:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<ShowAreas:Yes>.DeterminesiftheID
ofanareaisdisplayed.
<ShowAreaCode:> YesorNo
Displayableline/area
information
Availablefor<ShowAreas:Yes>.Determinesifthe
codeofanareaisdisplayed.
Alineisshownasexample.
a) <ShowLineID:>
b) <ShowLineCode:>
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheDisplaypage.Refertoparagraph"XXMapViewConfiguration,
Displaypage".
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|438
XX
MapViewConfiguration,
Displaypage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<ShowPtInfo:>
When<200
PtsorAs
Configured
Determinesifpointinformationisshownornot.For
<ShowPtInfo:When<200Pts>pointinformationis
notshownwhenmorethan200pointsaredisplayed.
For<ShowPtInfo:AsConfigured>thepointinfor‐
mation,asconfiguredinXXMapViewConfiguration,
Pointspage,isshownregardlessofthenumberof
pointsbeingdisplayed.
<Rotate180°:>
YesorNo
Availablefor<DatumView:Local>.Torotatethemap
by180°.Thenortharrowisnotrotatedandstillorien‐
tatedtowardsthetopofthescreen.
<Toolbar:>
OnorOff
Determinesifthetoolbaroftouchiconsaredisplayed.
Referto"30.4.3Toolbar".
<CurrPosInfo:>
Determinesifacertaininformationrelatedtothe
currentpositionisdisplayedinthelowerleftcornerof
themap(onlyvisibleinsurveymode).
<None>
Noinformationisdisplayedinthemap.
PointID
PointIDofthecurrentposition.
Code
Codeofthecurrentposition.
Attrib01
Userdefinedattribute.
Attrib02
Userdefinedattribute.
Attrib03
Userdefinedattribute.
Attrib04
Userdefinedattribute.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|439
Field
Option
Description
Attrib05
Userdefinedattribute.
Quality3D
Current3Dcoordinatequalityofthecomputedposi‐
tion.
ThefollowingfieldsarerelevantforSurveyMode:
<ShowPath:>
YesorNo
Displaysthepathofthereflectorasadashedline.
<CenterTo:>
Choicelist
Tocentrethemaponthereflectorortheinstrument.
Reflector
Tocentrethemaponthereflector.
ForEDMmodestandard,fastoraverage,themapwill
centreontothelastmeasuredpoint.
ForEDMmodetrackingorsynchrotrack,themapwill
centreontothecurrentreflectorposition.
Thesebehavioursaretrueforallautomationsettings
TotalStation
Tocentrethemapontheinstrument.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)confirmstheselectionsandreturnstowhereXXMapViewConfigurationwas
accessed.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|440
30.4 MapViewComponents
30.4.1 Softkeys
Description
StandardfunctionalityisprovidedbyanumberofsoftkeyswithinMapView.Thesesoftkeysare
availableregardlessofthemodeinwhichMapViewwasaccessedandalwaysperformthesame
functions.
Standardsoftkeys
ThesoftkeysdescribedbelowarestandardonallMapViewscreens.Fordescriptionsofmode
specificsoftkeysseeappropriatechapters.
Softkey
Description
ZOOM+(F4)
Tozoomintothemap.
PressingESCstopsthezoomingprocess.Allkeysbecomeactive
again.
ZOOM‐(F5)


PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfigureMapView.AccessesXXMapViewConfiguration.Referto
"30.3ConfiguringMapView".
SHIFTFIT(F3)
Tofitalldisplayabledataintothescreenarea.Referto"30.4.3Toolbar"
formoreinformation.
Tozoomoutofthemap.
PressingESCstopsthezoomingprocess.Allkeysbecomeactive
again.
Touchscreenfunctions
Somesoftkeyfunctionalitycanbereplacedbytouchscreenfunctions.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|441
Softkey
Touchequivalent
PAGE(F6)
Taponapagetab.
SHIFTFIT(F3)
Taponfittouchicon.Referto"30.4.3Toolbar".
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|442
30.4.2 ScreenArea
Description
TheMapViewscreenareaisverysimilarinallcases.Thepositionsofthescalebar,theNorth
arrowandthetoolbar,ifvisible,donotchange.
Standardscreen
b
a
a) Toolbar
c b) Northarrow
c) Scalebar
Reflector
ReflectorsaredisplayedontheMappage.Thereflectorpathisshownasdashedline.
Symbol
Description
Measuredposition.
Instrumentstation
Symbol
Description
Positionoftheinstrumentstation.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|443
Scalebar
Symbol
Description
Scaleofthecurrentscreen.Theminimumis0.5m.Thereisnomaximumforthe
zoombutthescalecannotdisplayvaluesgreaterthan99000m.Inthiscasethe
valuedisplayedwillbe>99000m.
Northarrow
Symbol
Description
Northarrow.Northisalwaysorientatedtowardsthetopofthescreen.
Toolbar
Symbol
Description
Touchicontoolbar.Referto"30.4.3Toolbar"formoreinformationaboutthe
functionalityofthetouchiconsinthetoolbar.
Pointwithfocus
Symbol
Description
Thepointthathasthefocus.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|444
30.4.3 Toolbar
Description
Touchiconsinthe
toolbar
Touchiconsareavailableinatoolbar,if<Toolbar:On>inXXMapViewConfiguration,
Displaypage.Thetoolbarisalwayslocatedonthelefthandsideofthescreen.Someofthefunc‐
tionsperformedbythetouchiconscanalsobereplicatedusingasoftkeyinthesamemodeas
whenthetouchiconappears.Thesoftkeyequivalenttoeachtouchicon,ifoneexists,areindi‐
catedbelow.
Touchicon
Softkey
Description
SHIFTFIT(F3)
Availableasatouchiconinmapmode.Thefittouch
iconfitsalldisplayabledata,accordingtofiltersandthe
mapconfiguration,intothescreenarea,usingthe
largestpossiblescale.
‐
Thewindowingtouchiconzoomstoaspecifiedarea
window.Anareawindowcanbedrawnbytappingon
thetopleftandthebottomrightcornerofthearea.This
causesthescreentozoomtotheselectedarea.
‐
Availableinsurveymode.Thistouchicondisplaysthe
currentdirectionasdashedline.AlocationontheMap
pagecanthenbetappedandtheinstrumentturnsto
thisdirection.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|445
30.4.4 PointSymbols
Points
When<ShowPoints:Yes>inXXMapViewConfiguration,pointsaredisplayed,inallmodes,
accordingtotheirclass.
Symbol
Description
3DcontrolpointisapointofclassCTRLwithhorizontalandverticalcoordinate
components.
2DcontrolpointisapointofclassCTRLwithhorizontalcoordinatecomponents.
AdjustedpointisapointofclassADJ.
ReferencepointisapointofclassREF.
AveragepointisapointofclassAVGE.
MeasuredpointisapointofclassMEAS.
EstimatedpointisapointofclassEST.


PointsofclassNONEorpointsofclassCTRL/MEASwithaheightonlycomponentcannotbe
displayedinMapView.
Alistofthepointtypesavailable,andtheirdescription,isavailablebypressingSYMBL(F3)in
XXMapViewConfiguration,Pointspage.Referto"30.3ConfiguringMapView".
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|446
30.5 MapMode
30.5.1 MapViewinMapMode
Description
ThemapmodeofMapViewisavailableastheMappageindatamanagementandsomeapplica‐
tionprograms.Itcanbeusedtodisplay,selectandeditpoints,linesandareas.
Access
Referto"30.2AccessingMapView"paragraph"Exampleaccessformapmode:".
OR
Fromachoicelistinsomescreens,forexample,inapplicationprograms,whichaccessdata
management.
OR
Asapartofanapplicationprogram,forexample,COGO.

TheMANAGEData:JobName,Mappageisusedastheexamplebelow.Thefunctionsdescribed
arethesameforallMappagesinmapmode.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|447
MANAGE
Data:JobName,
Mappage
ThesoftkeysdescribedbelowarespecifictoMapViewinmapmode.Referto"30.4.1Softkeys"
fordescriptionsofthestandardsoftkeys.
FOCUS(F2)orDONE(F2)
Toactivatethefocustoolandselectapoint
withoutusingthetouchscreen.Referto"30.5.2
SelectingPoints,LinesandAreas".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedpoint’sparameters.
AccessesMANAGEEditPoint:PointID.
SHIFTCENTR(F4)
Tocentrethescreenaroundthepointwiththe
currentfocus,orthefocustoolifDONE(F2)is
visible.
SHIFTFILTR(F5)
AvailableforFOCUS(F2).Tochangethefilter
settings.AccessesMANAGESorts&Filters.
Touchscreenfunctions
Key
Touchequivalent
FOCUS(F2)
Taponapoint.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|448
30.5.2 SelectingPoints,LinesandAreas
Description
Selectapointusingthe
softkeysstep‐by‐step
Selectingapoint,lineorareainthemapmodeofMapViewispossibleusingboththesoftkeys
andthetouchscreen.Thefunctionalityofallscreensandfieldaresimilarfortheselectingofa
point,lineorarea.Thestep‐by‐stepinstructionsforselectingapointusingthesoftkeyscanbe
appliedforlinesandareas.
Step
1.

Description
Display
Referto"30.5.1MapViewinMapMode"toaccessMANAGE
Data:JobName,Mappage.
Ifnopointfieldishighlightedonthepreviouspagewhenthe
Mappageisaccessed,thenanypointthatisselectedwillbe
assignedtothefirstpointfieldonthepreviouspage,the
secondpointtothesecondpointfield,etc.
IfapointfieldishighlightedwhentheMappageisaccessed
thenthepointselectedwillbeassignedtothatfield.
2.
FOCUS(F2)toactivatethefocustool.Thefocustoolismade
upofasquareplacedatthecentreofdashedcrosshairs.The
focustoolalwaysstartsatthecentreofthescreenarea.
3.
Usethearrowkeystonavigatethefocustooltothepointto
select.Apointisavailableforselectionwhenthesquareis
centredaroundthepointsymbol.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|449
Step

Description
Display
Whentherearemultiplepointswithinthesameareaandthe
preciseselectionisunclear,pressingENTERwillaccessXX
SelectPoint.
4.
PressENTERtoselectthepoint.Thepointparametertext,as
definedinXXMapViewConfiguration,Pointspage,is
highlighted.
5.
Havemultiplepointsbeenselected?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep6.
• Ifno,continuewithstep8.
6.
XXSelectPoint
PointIDTheIDofthepointswithinrangeofthepointselec‐
tion.
PointCodeThecodeofthepointswithinrangeofthepoint
selection.

7.
Selectthedesiredpoint.
MORE(F5)todisplayinformationaboutthepointcode,the
3Dcoordinatequalityandclass,thetimethepointwas
storedandthedatethepointwasstored.
CONT(F1)returnstoMANAGEData:JobName,Mappage
withthefocusontheselectedpoint.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|450
Step
8.
Selectingapointusing
thetouchscreenstep‐
by‐step
Step
1.

2.

3.
Description
Display
DONE(F2)exitsthefocustool.
Description
Display
Referto"30.5.1MapViewinMapMode"toaccessMANAGE
Data:JobName,Mappage.
Ifnopointfieldishighlightedonthepreviouspagewhenthe
Mappageisaccessed,thenanypointthatisselectedwillbe
assignedtothefirstpointfieldonthepreviouspage,the
secondpointtothesecondpointfield,etc.
IfapointfieldishighlightedwhentheMappageisaccessed
thenthepointselectedwillbeassignedtothatfield.
Taponthepointtobeselected.
Whentherearemultiplepointswithinthesameareaandthe
preciseselectionisunclear,tappingonthepointwillaccess
XXSelectPoint.
Havemultiplepointsbeenselected?
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|451
Step
Description
Display
• Ifyes,continuewithstep4.
• Ifno,continuewithstep6.
4.
XXSelectPoint
PointIDTheIDofthepointswithinrangeofthepointselec‐
tion.
PointCodeThecodeofthepointswithinrangeofthepoint
selection.

Selectthedesiredpoint.
MORE(F5)todisplayinformationaboutthepointcode,the
3Dcoordinatequalityandclass,thetimethepointwas
storedandthedatethepointwasstored.
5.
CONT(F1)returnstoMANAGEData:JobName,Mappage
withthefocusontheselectedpoint.
6.
Asquareiscentredontheselectedpointandthepoint
parametertext,asdefinedinXXMapViewConfiguration,
Pointspage,ishighlighted.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|452
30.6 PlotMode‐MapViewScreenArea
Description
TheplotmodeofMapViewisavailableasthePlotpageinanapplicationprogramandcanbe
usedtoviewtheresultsoftheapplicationprogram.Resultsareshowninblack,allotherinfor‐
mation,thatisdisplayable,isshowningrey.
Access
Referto"30.2AccessingMapView"paragraph"Exampleaccessforplotmode:".
OR
Asapartofanapplicationprogram,forexample,COGO.

COGO
XXResults,
Plotpage
TheCOGOXXResults,Plotpageisusedastheexamplebelow.Thefunctionsdescribedarethe
sameforallPlotpages.
ThesoftkeysdescribedbelowarespecifictoMapViewinplotmode.Referto"30.4.1Softkeys"
fordescriptionsofthestandardsoftkeys.
SHIFTFITR(F4)
Tofittheresultsinthescreenarea.
SHIFTRFRSH(F5)
Torefreshthescreen.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|453
Touchscreenfunctions
Exampleofresults
displayedinMapViewon
Plotpage
Key
TouchEquivalent
SHIFTFITR(F4)
Taponfitresultstouchicon.Referto"30.4.3Toolbar".
Application
Display
Description
COGOIntersec‐
tion,Bearing‐
Bearing
Intersectinglines
withknownbear‐
ingsfromknown
points.
COGOlinecalcu‐
lation,Segmen‐
tation
Pointsdefiningthe
lineandthose
createdontheline
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|454
Application
Display
Description
COGOShift,
Rotate&Scale
Originalpointsin
grey,calculated
COGOpointsin
black
Setup
Directionstoresec‐
tionpoints.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|455
30.7 SurveyMode
30.7.1 MapViewinSurveyMode
Description
ThesurveymodeofMapViewisavailableastheMappageinSurveyandisusedtodisplaythe
positionoftheinstrumentstationduringasurvey.Itcanalsobeusedtoselectlinesandareas.
ItisalsousedbytheStakeoutapplicationprogramtoassistinthestakingout/measuringof
points.

Referto"30.7.2MapViewinStakingOutSurveyMode"formoreinformationaboutusing
MapViewwhenstakingoutpoints.
Access
Referto"30.2AccessingMapView"paragraph"Exampleaccessforsurveymode:".

TheSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Mappageisusedastheexamplebelow.Thefunctions
describedarethesameforallMappagesinsurveymode.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|456
SURVEY
Survey:JobName,
Mappage
ThesoftkeysdescribedbelowarespecifictoMapViewinsurveymode.Referto"30.4.1
Softkeys"fordescriptionsofthestandardsoftkeys.
SHIFTCENTR(F4)
Tocentrethescreenaroundthepointwiththe
currentfocusorthefocustool,ifFOCUS(F2)is
active.
SHIFTRFRSH(F5)
Torefreshthescreen.
Touchscreenfunctions
Key
Touchequivalent
SHIFTCENTR(F4)
Taponcentretouchicon.Referto"30.4.3Toolbar".
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|457
30.7.2 MapViewinStakingOutSurveyMode
Description
WhenstakingoutapointinStakeoutapplicationprogram,theMappageisavailable.The
MapViewsurveymodeisprovidedforthisoperation,withsomedifferences.
• WiththeRC9activepointscanbeselected,usingthetouchscreen,aspointstobestaked.
• Anarrowindicatingthedirectionfromthecurrentpositiontothepointtobestakedis
provided.
• AboxprovidesinformationsuchasthedistancetothestakeoutpointandtheCUT/FILL
valuesothepointtobestakedcanbefound.
Datadisplayed
ForStakeoutapplicationprogram.
• From<Job:>and<StakeoutJob:>,allpointsymbolsareshowningreen,pointID’sinblack
anddisplayablelinesandareasinacolourdefinedinMANAGENewLineorMANAGEEdit
Line.
• Ifthesurveyistobeorientatedtoareferenceline/arc,thelineisdisplayedinblack.

TheSTAKEOUTXXStakeout,Mappageisusedastheexamplebelow.Thefunctionsdescribed
arethesameforallMappagesavailablewhenstakingout.
Accessstep‐by‐step
ExampleaccessforMapViewinsurveymode,Stakeout
Step
Description
1.
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\Stakeout.
OR
PressON.HighlightStakeout.CONT(F1).
OR
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|458
Step
Description
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
PressSTAKE(F5)fromanotherapplicationprogram,forexampleCOGO.
STAKEOUT
XXStakeout,
Mappage
2.
CONT(F1)toaccessSTAKEOUTXXStakeout.
3.
PAGE(F6)untilSTAKEOUTXXStakeout,Mappageisactive.
ThesoftkeysdescribedbelowarespecifictoMapViewinsurveymode,stakingout.Referto
"30.4.1Softkeys"fordescriptionsofthestandardsoftkeys.
SHIFTCENTR(F4)
Tocentrethescreenaroundthereflector.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|459
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<DIST:>
Output
Horizontaldistancefromthecurrentpositiontothe
pointtobestaked.
<CUT:>
Output
Thenegativeheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
currentpositiontotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
<FILL:>
Output
Thepositiveheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
currentpositiontotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|460
30.7.3 SelectingLinesandAreas
Description
Selectingalinestep‐by‐
step
SelectingalineorareainthesurveymodeofMapViewispossibleusingthetouchscreen.The
functionalityofallscreensandfieldaresimilarfortheselectingofalineorarea.Thestep‐by‐
stepinstructionsforselectingalineusingthetouchscreencanbeappliedforareas.
Step
Description
1.
SelectMainMenu:Survey.
OR
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\Survey.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
PressON.HighlightSurvey.CONT(F1).Referto"31.2AccessingthePrograms
Menu"forinformationontheONkey.
2.
PAGE(F6)untilSURVEYXXSurvey,Mappageisactive.
3.
Taponthelinetobeselected.

4.
Whentherearemultiplelineswithinthesameareaandthepreciseselectionis
unclear,tappingonthelinewillaccessXXSelectLine.
Havemultiplelinesbeenselected?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep5.
• Ifno,continuewithstep7.
5.
XXSelectLine
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|461
Step
Description
PointIDTheIDofthelineswithinrangeofthelineselection.
PointCodeThecodeofthelineswithinrangeofthepointselection.

Selectthedesiredline.
MORE(F5)todisplayinformationaboutthelinecode,thestarttime,theendtime,
thelengthandtheOpenstatusoftheline.
6.
CONT(F1)returnstoSURVEYData:JobName,Mappage.
7.
Amessageappearsinthemessageline.
• LineLineNamewasopened(Ifthelinewasclosebefore).
• LineLineNamewasclosed(Ifthelinewasopenbefore).
MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature
R9|462
31 ApplicationPrograms‐General
31.1 Overview
Description
Applicationprogramsaresoftwarepackagessupportingspecifictasks.Availableare:
•
•
•
•
Survey(integratedintotheinstrumentfirmwareandcannotbedeleted)
Setup(integratedintotheinstrumentfirmwareandcannotbedeleted)
COGO
Stakeout
Foranexplanationoftheapplicationprogramsrefertotherelevantchapters.
Loadableandnon‐load‐
ableapplication
programs
Loadableapplicationprograms:
•
•
Non‐loadableapplicationprograms: •
•
Canbeloadedontotheinstrument.
Canbedeletedfromtheinstrument.
Arealwaysavailableontheinstrument.
SurveyandSetuparenon‐loadableapplication
programs.Togetupdatesfortheseprograms,the
systemsoftwarehastobereloaded.
ApplicationPrograms‐General
R9|463
31.2 AccessingtheProgramsMenu
Description
Accesstotheapplication
programsmenu
TheapplicationprogramsmenucontainsallloadedapplicationprogramsincludingSurveyand
Setup.Theyarelistedintheorderinwhichtheywereloaded.Selectinganoptioninthemenu
startstheapplicationprogramassignedtotheoption.Configurationsandmeasurementsthat
canbeperformeddependontheapplicationprogram.
ThescreenoftheapplicationprogramsmenuiscalledR9Programs.
SelectMainMenu:Programs....
OR
PressON.
R9
Programs
CONT(F1)
Tostartthehighlightedapplicationprogram.
Nextstep
Selectanoptioninthemenutoopentheapplication.Refertothechapterontheindividual
applicationprograms.

Fourapplicationprogramscanbeopenatonetime.XXBeginisshownfortheapplication
programopenedfirst,butnotforthefollowingapplicationprograms.
ApplicationPrograms‐General
R9|464
32 COGO
32.1 Overview
Description
COGOisanapplicationprogramtoperformcoordinategeometrycalculationssuchas
• coordinatesofpoints.
• bearingsbetweenpoints.
• distancesbetweenpoints.
Thecalculationscanbemadefrom
• existingpointdatainthejob,knowndistancesorknownazimuths.
• measuredpoints.
• enteredcoordinates.
IncontrasttoremotepointmeasurementswithintheSurveyapplicationprogram,COGOis
moreofacalculationprogramthanameasuringprogram.

COGOcalculation
methods
ChangingcoordinatesofapointwhichhasbeenpreviouslyusedinCOGOdoesnotresultinthe
pointbeingrecomputed.
TheCOGOcalculationmethodsare:
•
•
•
•
Inverse.
Traverse.
Intersections.
Linecalculations.
COGO
•
•
•
•
Arccalculations.
Shift,Rotate&Scale(Manual)
Shift,Rotate&Scale(MatchPts)
AreaDivision
R9|465
Distancesandazimuths
Typeofdistances:
Typeofazimuths:
CodingofCOGOpoints
• ThematicalcodingisavailableinCOGOXXResultsaftertheCOGOcalculation.Thematical
codingofCOGOpointsisidenticaltocodingmeasuredpoints.Referto"9Coding"forinfor‐
mationoncoding.
• FortheCOGOcalculationshift,rotate&scale,thecodesfromtheoriginalpointsaretaken
overforthecalculatedCOGOpoints.
Properties
ofCOGOpoints
ThepropertiesstoredwithCOGOpointsare:
• Class:EitherMEASorCTRLdependingontheCOGOcalculationmethod.
• Subclass:COGO
• Source:ArcBasePt,ArcCentrePt,ArcOffsetPt,ArcSegmtPt,COGOAreaDivsn.,COGO
Shift/Rtn,COGOTraverse,Intsct(BrgBrg),Intsct(BrgDst),Intsct(DstDst),Intsct(4
Pts),LineBasePt,LineOffsetPtorLineSegmtPtdependingontheCOGOcalculation
methodused
• Instrumentsource:TPS
COGO
Grid
Theazimuthsaregridazimuthsrelativetothelocalgrid.
R9|466
32.2 AccessingCOGO
Access
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\COGO.
OR
PressON.HighlightCOGO.CONT(F1).Referto"31.2AccessingtheProgramsMenu"for
informationontheONkey.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.

ThescreensforeachCOGOcalculationmethodcanbeaccesseddirectlybypressingUSERwhere
COGOCOGOBeginisnotaccessed.Thecurrentlyactiveconfigurationsetandjobareused.
COGO
COGOBegin
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandaccessthesubsequent
screen.Thechosensettingsbecomeactive.
CONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
AccessesCOGOConfiguration.Referto"32.3
ConfiguringCOGO".
SETUP(F3)
Tosetupstation.AccessesSETUPStation
Setup.
COGO
R9|467
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Job:>
Choicelist
Theactivejob.AlljobsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
<Codelist:>
Choicelist
Nocodesarestoredintheselected<Job:>.Allcodelists
fromMainMenu:Manage...\Codelistscanbe
selected.
Output
Codeshavealreadybeenstoredintheselected<Job:>.
IfcodeshadbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelist,
thenthenameofthecodelistisdisplayed.Ifcodeshave
notbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelistbuttyped
in,thenthenameoftheactivejobisdisplayed.
<ConfigSet:>
Choicelist
Theactiveconfigurationset.Allconfigurationsets
fromMainMenu:Manage...\ConfigurationSetscan
beselected.
<Reflector:>
Choicelist
Theactivereflector.AllreflectorsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Reflectorscanbeselected.
<Add.Constant:>
Output
Theadditiveconstantstoredwiththechosenreflector.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)acceptschangesandaccessesCOGOCOGOMenu.
COGO
R9|468
COGO
COGOMenu
TheCOGOmenulistsallCOGOcalculationmethodsandtheoptiontoendCOGO.
CONT(F1)
Toselectthehighlightedoptionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
AccessesCOGOConfiguration.Referto"32.3
ConfiguringCOGO".
DescriptionoftheCOGOmenuoptions
COGOmenuoptions
Description
Referto
chapter
Inverse
Tocalculatethedirection,thedistanceandthe3D
coordinatedifferencesbetween:
32.4
• twoknownpoints,
• aknownpointandagivenline,
• aknownpointandagivenarc.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetriplets,positiononly
pointsandheightonlypointscanbeused.
Traverse
Tocalculatethepositionofnewpointsusing
COGO
32.5
R9|469
COGOmenuoptions
Description
Referto
chapter
• theazimuth/bearingandthedistancefroma
knownpoint.Offsetoptional.
• theangleandthedistancefromaknownpoint.
Offsetoptional.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononly
pointscanbeused.
Intersections
Tocalculatethepositionofanintersectionpoint
using
32.6
• bearingsfromtwoknownpoints.
• abearingandadistancefromtwoknownpoints.
• distancesfromtwoknownpoints.
• fourpoints.
• twolines
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononly
pointscanbeused.
LineCalculations
Tocalculatethebasepointofthelineusing
32.7
• twoknownpointsandanoffsetpoint.
• abearingandadistancefromaknownpointand
anoffsetpoint.
Tocalculatetheoffsetpointofthelineusing
COGO
R9|470
COGOmenuoptions
Description
Referto
chapter
• twoknownpointsthatdefinetheline,adistance
alongthelineandanoffset.
• adistancealongabearingfromaknownpointand
offset.
Tocalculatenewpointsonalineusing
• twoknownpointsthatdefinethelineandeither
thesegmentlengthorthenumberofsegments.
• abearinganddistancefromaknownpointthat
definethelineandeitherthesegmentlengthor
thenumberofsegments.
ArcCalculations
Tocalculate:
32.8
• thearccentre.
• thebasepointofthearc.
• theoffsetpointofthearc.
• newpointsonanarc.
Thearccanbedefinedusing
• threepoints.
• aradiustotwoknownpoints.
• aradiusandtwotangents,eachofitdefinedbya
pointandtheintersectionpointofthetangents.
COGO
R9|471
COGOmenuoptions
Description
Referto
chapter
• thelengthofanarcandtwotangents,eachofit
definedbyapointandtheintersectionpointofthe
tangents.
• thelengthofachordandtwotangents,eachofit
definedbyapointandtheintersectionpointofthe
tangents.
Knownmustbealso,dependingonthearccalculation
method
• anoffsetpoint.
• eitherthesegmentlengthorthenumberof
segments.
Shift,Rotate&Scale
(Manual)
Tocalculatethepositionofnewpointsusing
32.9
• coordinatesofknownpoints
• shifts.
• rotation.
• scale.Heightsarenotscaled.
Thevaluesforshifts,rotationand/orscaleare
enteredmanually.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetriplets,positiononly
pointsandheightonlypointscanbeused.
COGO
R9|472
COGOmenuoptions
Description
Referto
chapter
Shift,Rotate&Scale
(MatchPts)
Tocalculatethecoordinatesofnewpointsusingthe 32.10
shifts,rotationandscalecomputedfromselected
points.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetriplets,positiononly
pointsandheightonlypointscanbeused.
AreaDivision
Todivideanareabya
32.11
• definedline
• percentage
• sizeofasubarea.
EndCOGO
ToendCOGOandreturntothescreenfromwhere
COGOwasaccessed.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
aCOGOcalculationmethod highlighttherelevantoptionandpressCONT(F1).Refertothe
istobestarted
chaptersstatedabove.
COGOistobeconfigured
SHIFTCONF(F2).Referto"32.3ConfiguringCOGO".
COGOistobeended
highlightEndCOGOandCONT(F1).
COGO
R9|473
32.3 ConfiguringCOGO
Access
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\COGO.InCOGOCOGOBeginpressCONF(F2)toaccess
COGOConfiguration.
OR
PressON.HighlightCOGO.CONT(F1).InCOGOCOGOBeginpressCONF(F2)toaccess
COGOConfiguration.
OR
PressSHIFTCONF(F2)inCOGOCOGOMenu.Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO".
OR
PressSHIFTCONF(F2)inCOGOXX.
COGO
Configuration,
Parameterspage
ThisscreenconsistsoftheParameterspage,ResidualspageandtheLogfilepage.Theexpla‐
nationsforthesoftkeysgivenbelowarevalidforallpages.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTABOUT(F5)
Todisplayinformationabouttheprogramname,
theversionnumber,thedateoftheversion,the
copyrightandthearticlenumber.
COGO
R9|474
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<DistanceType:>
Description
Thetypeofdistancesandoffsetstobeacceptedas
input,shownasoutputandusedinthecalculation.
Grid
<TwoFaces:>
Distancesarecalculatedasthetrigonometricdistance
betweenthepositionoftwopoints.Thedistancefield
is<HDist‐Grid:>.
Definesiftheinstrumentmeasuresthesecondface
automaticallyafterstoringthefirst.
Yes
AfterstoringameasurementwithALL(F1)orREC
(F3)motorisedinstrumentschangefaceautomati‐
cally.ThemeasurementsoffaceIandfaceIIareaver‐
agedonthebaseoffaceI.Theaveragedvalueisstored.
No
Noautomaticmeasurementintwofaces.
<UseOffsets:>
YesorNo
ActivatestheuseofoffsetsintheCOGOcalculations.
InputfieldsfortheoffsetsareavailableinCOGOXX.
<StorePtsAs:>
MEASorCTRL TostorethecogopointwithpointclassMEASorwith
pointclassCTRL.
PointsstoredwithpointclassMEAScanbestoredwith
thesamepointID.Theaveragingfunctionality(config‐
uredunderjobmanagement)canthenbeusedto
calculateanaverageforthesepoints.
COGO
R9|475
Field
Option
Description
PointsstoredwithpointclassCTRLcanonlybestored
withauniquepointID.Amessageisalwaysdisplayed
whenapointisabouttobestoredwithanalready
existingpointID.Theusercanthendecidetoeither
keeptheexistingpointoroverwritetheexistingpoint.
<EstPosQlty:>
Userinput
Theestimatedvalueforthepositionqualityassigned
toallcalculatedCOGOpointswhichisusedforthe
averagingcalculation.
<EstHtQlty:>
Userinput
Theestimatedvaluefortheheightqualityassignedto
allcalculatedheightswhichisusedfortheaveraging
calculation.
WhentheIntersections<Method:TPSObs‐TPSObs>,thefollowingfieldsapply:
<ComputeHt:>
Outputtext
Definestheheightbeingused.
UsingAverage Usinganaverageofthetwoobservations.
UseUpper
Height
Usingtheupperheight.
UseLower
Height
Usingthelowerheight.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheResidualspage.Refertoparagraph"COGOConfiguration,Residuals
page".
COGO
R9|476
COGO
Configuration,
Residualspage
ThispageappliestoCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale(MatchPts).
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Easting:>
Userinput
ThelimitabovewhichEastingresidualswillbeflagged
aspossibleoutliers.
<Northing:>
Userinput
ThelimitabovewhichNorthingresidualswillbe
flaggedaspossibleoutliers.
<Height:>
Userinput
ThelimitabovewhichHeightresidualswillbeflagged
aspossibleoutliers.
<ResidualDistbtn:>
Themethodbywhichtheresidualsofthecontrol
pointswillbedistributedthroughoutthetransforma‐
tionarea.
None
Nodistributionismade.Residualsremainwiththeir
associatedpoints.
1/DistanceXX Distributestheresidualsaccordingtothedistance
betweeneachcontrolpointandthenewlytransformed
point.
Multiquad‐
ratic
Distributestheresidualsusingamultiquadraticinter‐
polationapproach.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheLogfilepage.Refertoparagraph"COGOConfiguration,Logfilepage".
COGO
R9|477
COGO
Configuration,
Logfilepage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<WriteLogfile:>
YesorNo
Togeneratealogfilewhentheapplicationprogramis
exited.
Alogfileisafiletowhichdatafromanapplication
programiswrittento.Itisgeneratedusingtheselected
<FormatFile:>.
<FileName:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Thenameofthe
filetowhichthedatashouldbewritten.Alogfileis
storedinthe\DATAdirectoryoftheactivememory
device.Thedataisalwaysappendedtothefile.
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesXXLogfileswherea
nameforanewlogfilecanbecreatedandanexisting
logfilecanbeselectedordeleted.
<FormatFile:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Aformatfile
defineswhichandhowdataiswrittentoalogfile.
FormatfilesarecreatedusingStonex®Tools.Aformat
filemustfirstbetransferredfromtheCompactFlash
cardtotheSystemRAMbeforeitcanbeselected.Refer
to"22Tools...\TransferObjects..."forinformationon
howtotransferaformatfile.
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesXXFormatFiles
whereanexistingformatfilecanbeselectedor
deleted.
COGO
R9|478
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.

<Azimuth:>isusedthroughoutthischapter.Thisshouldalwaysbeconsideredtoalsomean
<Bearing:>.
COGO
R9|479
32.4 COGOCalculation‐InverseMethod
32.4.1 Overview
Description
Itispossibletocomputeaninverseresultbetweenpoint,lineandarcelements:
Option1:inversebetweenpoint‐point
Tocomputeaninversebetweentwoknownpoints.
P2
d1
d3
d2
P1
Knownelements:
P1 Firstknownpoint(From)
P2 Secondknownpoint(To)
Unknownelements:
α DirectionfromP1toP2
d1 SlopedistancebetweenP1andP2
d2 HorizontaldistancebetweenP1andP2
d3 HeightdifferencebetweenP1andP2
Option2:inversebetweenpoint‐line
Tocomputeaninversebetweenaknownpointanda
givenline(theinverseiscomputedastheperpendicular
betweentheknownpointandthegivenline).
P2
P4
d2
P0
P1
COGO
d1
P3
Knownelements:
P0 Instrumentstation
P1 Startingpoint
P2 EndpointorthedirectionfromP1toP2
P3 Offsetpoint
Unknownelements:
P4 Basepoint
d1 Theperpendicularoffsettothebasepoint
d2 Thedistancealongtheline
R9|480
Option3:inversebetweenpoint‐arc
P2
P4
d1
P3
d2
P1
P0
Tocomputeaninversebetweenaknownpointanda
givenarc(theinverseiscomputedastheperpendicular
betweentheknownpointandthegivenarc).
Knownelements:
P0 Instrumentstation
P1 Startingpoint
P2 Endpoint
P3 Offsetpoint
P4 Secondpointorarcradiusorarc/chordlength
Unknownelements:
P4 Basepoint
d1 Theperpendicularoffsettothebasepoint
d2 Thedistancealongthearc
Thecoordinatesofthepointsmustbeknown.Thepoints:
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeenteredmanually.
COGO
R9|481
32.4.2 InverseBetweenTwoKnownPoints(Pt‐Pt)
Startingstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
2.
Calculating
STORE(F1)
Tostoretheresult.
SURVY(F5)
Tomeasureaknownpointforthecalculation.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toconfiguretheprogram.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthescreen.
COGO
R9|482
Descriptionoffields
Storingtheresults
step‐by‐step
Field
Option
Description
<From:>or<To:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDofthetwoknownpoints.Totypeincoor‐
dinatesforaknownpointopenthechoicelist.Press
NEW(F2)tocreateanewpoint.
<Azimuth:>
Output
Thedirectionfromthefirstpointtothesecondpoint.
<HDist‐XX:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistancebetweenthetwopoints.
<∆Height:>
Output
Theheightdifferencebetweenthetwopoints.
<SlopeDist:>
Output
Theslopedistancebetweenthetwopoints.
<Grade:>
Output
Thegradebetweenthetwopoints.
<∆Easting:>
Output
ThedifferenceinEastingbetweenthetwopoints.
<∆Northing:>
Output
ThedifferenceinNorthingbetweenthetwopoints.
Step
1.
Description
PressSTORE(F1)tostoretheinverseresulttotheactivejob.
Therearenopointsstoredtothedatabase,onlytheinverseresult.
2.
Inverseresultscanbeexportedfromthejobusingaformatfile.Theformatfileis
createdwithFormatManagerinStonex®Tools.
COGO
R9|483
32.4.3 InverseBetweenaKnownPointandaLine(Pt‐Line)
Startingstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
2.
Calculating
CALC(F1)
Tocalculatetheresult.
INV(F2)
Tocalculatetheinversebetweentwopoints.
LAST(F4)
Toselectthevaluesfordistanceandoffsetfrom
previousCOGOinversecalculations.
SURVY(F5)
Tomeasureaknownpointforthecalculation.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toconfiguretheprogram.
SHIFTMODIF(F4)
Tomodifytheoriginalazimuth,distanceor
offsetvalue.
COGO
R9|484
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthescreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<Method:>
Description
2PointsorPt/Brg/Dist.
Themethodforcalculatingtheinverseresult.
Storingtheresults
step‐by‐step
<StartPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefiningthestartoftheline.
<EndPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefiningtheendoftheline.
<Azimuth:>
Output
Thedirectionfromthefirstpointtothesecondpoint.
<HDist‐XX:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistancebetweenthetwopoints.
<OffsetPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefininganoffsettotheline.
Step
Description
1.
PressCALC(F1)tocalculatetheinverseresultandmovetotheresultsscreen.
2.
PressSTORE(F1)tostoretheinverseresulttotheactivejob.
Therearenopointsstoredtothedatabase,onlytheinverseresult.
3.
Inverseresultscanbeexportedfromthejobusingaformatfile.Theformatfileis
createdwithFormatManagerinStonex®Tools.
COGO
R9|485
32.4.4 InverseBetweenaKnownPointandanArc(Pt‐Arc)
Startingstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
2.
Calculating
CALC(F1)
Tocalculatetheresult.
INV(F2)
Tocalculatetheinversebetweentwopoints.
LAST(F4)
Toselectthevaluesfordistanceandoffsetfrom
previousCOGOInversecalculations.
SURVY(F5)
Tomeasureaknownpointforthecalculation.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toconfiguretheprogram.
SHIFTMODIF(F4)
Tomodifytheoriginalazimuth,distanceor
offsetvalue.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthescreen.
COGO
R9|486
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<Method:>
Description
3Pointsor2Points/Radiusor2Tgnts/Radiusor
2Tgnts/ArcLngtor2Tgnts/ChrdLngt.
Themethodforcalculatingtheinverseresult.
<StartPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefiningthestartofthearc.
<SecondPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefiningasecondpointonthearc.
<EndPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefiningtheendofthearc.
<ArcLength:>
UserInput
Thearclength.
<Azimuth:>
Output
Thedirectionfromthefirstpointtothesecondpoint.
<ChordLength:>
UserInput
Thechordlengthofthearc.
<HDist‐XX:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistancebetweenthetwopoints.
<OffsetPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefininganoffsettothearc.
<PIPoint:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDdefiningtheintersectionofthetangents.
<Point1:>
Choicelist
ThepointID(withPIPoint)definingthe1sttangent.
<Point2:>
Choicelist
ThepointID(withPIPoint)definingthe2ndtangent.
<Radius:>
UserInput
Theradiusofthearc.
COGO
R9|487
Storingtheresults
step‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
PressCALC(F1)tocalculatetheinverseresultandmovetotheresultsscreen.
2.
PressSTORE(F1)tostoretheinverseresulttotheactivejob.
Therearenopointsstoredtothedatabase,onlytheinverseresult.
3.
Inverseresultscanbeexportedfromthejobusingaformatfile.Theformatfileis
createdwithFormatManagerinStonex®Tools.
COGO
R9|488
32.5 COGOCalculation‐TraverseMethod
32.5.1 Overview
Description
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesofonepoint.
• thedirectionfromtheknownpointtotheCOGOpoint.
• thedistancefromtheknownpointtotheCOGOpoint.
• offsets,ifrequiredandconfigured.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoint
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
ThedirectionfromtheknownpointtotheCOGOpointcanbeanazimuthoranangle.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononlypointscanbeused.Positiononlyiscalcu‐
lated,heightcanbetypedin.
ACOGOtraversecalculationcanbecalculatedfor
• asinglepoint.
• multiplepoints.Severalsinglepointsarecalculatedinonesequence.
• sideshots.
COGO
R9|489
Diagram
COGOtraversecalculationwithoffsetforasinglepoint
P4
d3
P2
Known
P1 Knownpoint
α DirectionfromP1toP2
d1 DistancebetweenP1andP2
d2 Positiveoffsettotheright
d3 Negativeoffsettotheleft
Unknown
P2 COGOpointwithoutoffset
P3 COGOpointwithpositiveoffset
P4 COGOpointwithnegativeoffset
d2
P3
d1
P1
COGOtraversecalculationwithoutoffsetformultiplepoints
2
1
P2
d4
P5
4
d2
d1
3
P3
d3
P1
P4
COGO
Known
P1 Knownpoint
α1 DirectionfromP1toP2
α2 DirectionfromP2toP3
α3 DirectionfromP3toP4
α4 DirectionfromP3toP5
d1 DistancebetweenP1andP2
d2 DistancebetweenP2andP3
d3 DistancebetweenP3andP4
d4 DistancebetweenP3andP5
Unknown
P2 FirstCOGOpoint
P3 SecondCOGOpoint
P4 ThirdCOGOpoint‐sideshot
P5 FourthCOGOpoint
R9|490
32.5.2 TraversewithAzimuth/Bearing
COGOtraversecalcula‐
tionwith
azimuth/bearingstep‐
by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOTraverseInput.

COGOTraverseInput,Inputpage
2.
COGOTraverseInput,Inputpage
32.3
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
<Method:Azimuth>
<From:>ThepointIDoftheknownpointfortheCOGOcalculation.



3.
Selectapointtobeused.
SURVY(F5)when<From:>ishighlighted.Tomeasureaknownpoint 35.2
fortheCOGOcalculation.
Forallpointfields,theMapViewinteractivedisplayontheMappage
canbeusedtoselectthedesiredpoint.
30.5
Totypeincoordinatesforaknownpointopenthechoicelistwhen
<From:>ishighlighted.PressNEW(F2)tocreateanewpoint.
7.3.2
COGOTraverseInput,Inputpage
<Azimuth:>ThedirectionfromtheknownpointtotheCOGOpoint.
<HDist‐XX:>Thehorizontaldistancebetweentheknownpointandthe
COGOpoint.
COGO
R9|491
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
<Offset:>Availablefor<UseOffsets:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,
Parameterspage.TheoffsetoftheCOGOpointfromthelineofdirec‐
tion.Apositiveoffsetistotheright,anegativeoffsetistotheleft.

Typeintheazimuth,thedistanceandtheoffset,ifrequired.
Thevaluesfortheazimuth,thedistanceandtheoffsetcanbecalculated 32.4
fromtwoexistingpoints.
INV(F2)when<Azimuth:>,<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>ishighlighted.
ToperformaCOGOinversecalculation.




UponpressingSTORE(F1)inCOGOInverse,theresultfromthe
COGOinversecalculationiscopiedtothefieldwhichwashigh‐
lightedwhenINV(F2)waspressed.
For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepage
theresultoftheCOGOinversecalculationiswrittentothelogfile.
Thevaluesfortheazimuth,thedistanceandtheoffsetcanbeselected 32.12
frompreviousCOGOinversecalculations.
LAST(F4)when<Azimuth:>,<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>ishighlighted.
TorecallpreviousresultsfromCOGOinversecalculations.
UponpressingCONT(F1)inCOGOLastInverseCalculations,the
selectedresultiscopiedtothefieldwhichwashighlightedwhenLAST
(F4)waspressed.
Thevaluesfortheazimuth,thedistanceandtheoffsetcanbemathe‐
maticallymodified.
COGO
32.13
R9|492
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
SHIFTMODIF(F4)when<Azimuth:>,<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>is
highlighted.Toadd,subtract,multiplyanddividevalues.
4.
IstheCOGOpointaforesight?
• Ifyes,CALC(F1).
TheresultiscalculatedanddisplayedinCOGOTraverseResults.
AfterstoringtheresultandreturningtoCOGOTraverseInput,
Inputpage,thepointdisplayedin<From:>isthenewlycalculated
COGOpoint.ThenextCOGOcalculationcanbecontinuedfromthis
newpoint.
• Ifno,SSHOT(F3).
TheresultiscalculatedanddisplayedinCOGOTraverseResults.
AfterstoringtheresultandreturningtoCOGOTraverseInput,
Inputpage,thepointoriginallyselectedin<From:>isstill
displayed.ThenextCOGOcalculationcanbecontinuedfromthat
samepoint.
5.
COGOTraverseResults,Resultpage
<PointID:>TheidentifierfortheCOGOpointdependingonthepoint 15.1
IDtemplateconfiguredfor<SurveyPts:>inCONFIGUREID
Templates.ThepointIDcanbechanged.
Thecalculatedcoordinatesaredisplayed.
TypeinapointID.
COGO
R9|493
Step
Description

STAKE(F5)toaccesstheStakeoutapplicationprogramandstakeout 34.4
thecalculatedCOGOpoint.

Referto
chapter
AfterstakingandstoringtheCOGOpoint,COGOTraverseResults,
Resultpageisdisplayed.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)foranindividualpointIDindependentoftheID
15.1
template.SHIFTRUN(F5)changesbacktothenextIDfromtheconfig‐
uredIDtemplate.
6.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
7.
COGOTraverseResults,Codepage
9and7.3.2
<Code:>/<PointCode:>Thethematicalcode.Allcodesofthejobcan
beselected.
Typeinacodeifrequired.
8.
PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
9.
COGOTraverseResults,Plotpage

10.

30.6
AnarrowpointsfromtheknownpointtothecalculatedCOGOpoint.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)doesnotstoretheCOGOpointandexitsCOGOcalcu‐
lations.
STORE(F1)tostoretheresultandreturntoCOGOTraverseInput,
Inputpage.
For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepagethe
resultiswrittentothelogfile.
COGO
R9|494
Step
Description
11.
AremoreCOGOtraversecalculationstobemade?
Referto
chapter
• Ifyes,repeatsteps2.to11.
• Ifno,continuewithstep12.
12.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)toexitCOGOcalculation.
COGO
R9|495
32.5.3 TraversewithAngleRight
Access
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOTraverseInput.
COGO
TraverseInput,
Inputpage
CALC(F1)
TocalculatetheCOGOpoint.
INV(F2)
Tocalculatethevaluesforthedistanceandthe
offsetfromtwoexistingpoints.Availableif
<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>ishighlighted.
SSHOT(F3)
Tocalculatethepointasasideshot.
LAST(F4)
Toselectthevaluesforthedistanceandthe
offsetfrompreviousCOGOinversecalculations.
Availableif<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>ishigh‐
lighted.
SURVY(F5)
TomeasureapointfortheCOGOcalculation.
Availableif<From:>or<Backsight:>ishigh‐
lighted.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
SHIFTMODIF(F4)
Tomathematicallymodifythevaluesforthe
angleright,thedistanceandtheoffset.Available
if<AngleRight:>,<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>is
highlighted.
COGO
R9|496
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Method:>
AngleRight
ThedirectionfromtheknownpointtotheCOGOpoint
isanangle.
<From:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDoftheknownpointfortheCOGOcalcula‐
tion.
<Backsight:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDofapointusedasbacksight.
<AngleRight:>
Userinput
Theanglebetween<Backsight:>andthenewCOGO
pointtobecalculatedfromthepointselectedas
<From:>.Apositivevalueisforclockwiseangles.A
negativevalueisforcounterclockwiseangles.
<Azimuth:>
Output
ThedirectionfromtheknownpointtotheCOGOpoint
calculatedfrom<AngleRight:>.
<HDist‐XX:>
Userinput
Thehorizontaldistancebetweentheknownpointand
theCOGOpoint.
<Offset:>
Userinput
TheoffsetoftheCOGOpointfromthelineofdirection.
Apositiveoffsetistotheright,anegativeoffsetistothe
left.
Nextstep
TheworkflowisverysimilartoaCOGOtraversecalculationwithazimuth/bearing.Referto
"32.5.2TraversewithAzimuth/Bearing".
COGO
R9|497
32.6 COGOCalculation‐IntersectionsMethod
32.6.1 IntersectionwithBearing‐Bearing
Description
TheCOGOintersectioncalculationbearing‐bearingcalculatestheintersectionpointoftwo
lines.Alineisdefinedbyapointandadirection.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesoftwopoints.
• thedirectionfromtheseknownpointstotheCOGOpoint.
• offsetsifrequiredandconfigured.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononlypointscanbeused.Positiononlyiscalcu‐
lated,heightcanbetypedin.
COGO
R9|498
Diagram
1
P3
2
P1
P2
COGOintersectioncalcu‐
lationwithbearing‐
bearingstep‐by‐step
Known
P1 Firstknownpoint
P2 Secondknownpoint
α1 DirectionfromP1toP3
α2 DirectionfromP2toP3
Unknown
P3 COGOpoint
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
/
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOIntersectionInput.

COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
2.
COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
32.3
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
<Method:Brng‐Brng>
<1stPoint:>ThepointIDofthefirstknownpointfortheCOGOcalcu‐
lation.
Selectthepointstoredinthejob.
COGO
R9|499
Step



3.
Description
Referto
chapter
SURVY(F5)when<1stPoint:>ishighlighted.Tomeasureapointfor 35.2
theCOGOcalculation.
Forallpointfields,theMapViewinteractivedisplayontheMappage
canbeusedtoselectthedesiredpoint.
30.5
Totypeincoordinatesforaknownpointopenthechoicelistwhen<1st 7.3.2
Point:>ishighlighted.PressNEW(F2)tocreateanewpoint.
COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
<Azimuth:>ThedirectionfromthefirstknownpointtotheCOGO
point.
<Offset:>Availablefor<UseOffsets:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,
Parameterspage.TheoffsetoftheCOGOpointfromthelineofdirec‐
tion.Apositiveoffsetistotheright,anegativeoffsetistotheleft.

Typeintheazimuthandtheoffset,ifrequired.
Thevaluesfortheazimuthandtheoffsetcanbecalculatedfromtwo
existingpoints.
32.4
INV(F2)when<Azimuth:>or<Offset:>ishighlighted.Toperforma
COGOinversecalculation.


UponpressingSTORE(F1)inCOGOInverse,theresultfromthe
COGOinversecalculationiscopiedtothefieldwhichwashigh‐
lightedwhenINV(F2)waspressed.
For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepage
theresultoftheCOGOinversecalculationiswrittentothelogfile.
COGO
R9|500
Step
Description

Thevaluesfortheazimuthandtheoffsetcanbeselectedfromprevious 32.12
COGOinversecalculations.

Referto
chapter
LAST(F4)when<Azimuth:>or<Offset:>ishighlighted.Torecall
previousresultsfromCOGOinversecalculations.
UponpressingCONT(F1)inCOGOLastInverseCalculations,the
selectedresultiscopiedtothefieldwhichwashighlightedwhenLAST
(F4)waspressed.
Thevaluesfortheazimuthandtheoffsetcanbemathematicallymodi‐ 32.13
fied.
SHIFTMODIF(F4)when<Azimuth:>or<Offset:>ishighlighted.To
add,subtract,multiplyanddividevalues.
4.
COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
Theproceduretoinputthesecondknownpointandtheazimuthis
identicaltotheprocedureforthefirstknownpoint.Repeatsteps2.and
3.
5.
CALC(F1)tocalculatetheresult.
6.
COGOBrng‐BrngResults,Resultpage
<PointID:>TheidentifierfortheCOGOpointdependingonthepoint 15.1
IDtemplateconfiguredfor<SurveyPts:>inCONFIGUREID
Templates.ThepointIDcanbechanged.
Thecalculatedcoordinatesaredisplayed.
TypeinapointID.
COGO
R9|501
Step
Description

STAKE(F5)toaccesstheStakeoutapplicationprogramandstakeout 34.4
thecalculatedCOGOpoint.

Referto
chapter
AfterstakingandstoringtheCOGOpointCOGOBrng‐BrngResults,
Resultpageisdisplayed.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)foranindividualpointIDindependentoftheID
15.1
template.SHIFTRUN(F5)changesbacktothenextIDfromtheconfig‐
uredIDtemplate.
7.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
8.
COGOBrng‐BrngResults,Codepage
9and7.3.2
<Code:>/<PointCode:>Thethematicalcode.Allcodesofthejobcan
beselected.
Typeinacodeifrequired.
9.
10.

11.

PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
COGOBrng‐BrngResults,Plotpage
30.6
ArrowspointfromtheknownpointstothecalculatedCOGOpoint.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)doesnotstoretheCOGOpointandexitsCOGOcalcu‐
lation.
STORE(F1)tostoretheresultandreturntoCOGOIntersectionInput,
Inputpage.
For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepagethe
resultiswrittentothelogfile.
COGO
R9|502
Step
Description
12.
AremoreCOGOintersectioncalculationstobemade?
Referto
chapter
• Ifyes,repeatsteps2.to12.
32.6.2,
<Method:>inCOGOIntersectionInput,Inputpagecanbe
32.6.3or
changed.RefertotherelevantchaptersfortheotherCOGOintersec‐ 32.6.4.
tioncalculationmethods.
• Ifno,continuewithstep13.
13.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)toexitCOGOcalculation.
COGO
R9|503
32.6.2 IntersectionwithBearing‐Distance
Description
TheCOGOintersectioncalculationbearing‐distancecalculatestheintersectionpointofaline
andacircle.Thelineisdefinedbyapointandadirection.Thecircleisdefinedbythecentre
pointandtheradius.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesoftwopoints.
• thedirectionfromoneknownpointtotheCOGOpoint.
• thedistancefromthesecondknownpointtotheCOGOpoint.
• offsetsifrequiredandconfigured.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononlypointscanbeused.
COGO
R9|504
Diagram
P4
r
P3
P1
COGOintersectioncalcu‐
lationwithbearing‐
distancestep‐by‐step
P2
Known
P1 Firstknownpoint
P2 Secondknownpoint
α DirectionfromP1toP3andP4
r
Radius,asdefinedbythedistancefromP2to
P4andP3
Unknown
P3 FirstCOGOpoint
P4 SecondCOGOpoint
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
TheprocedureofaCOGOintersectioncalculationwithbearing‐
distanceissimilartoaCOGOintersectioncalculationwithbearing‐
bearing.
Followthesteps1.to5.inparagraph"COGOintersectioncalculation
withbearing‐bearingstep‐by‐step".Thedifferencesare:
32.6.1
• <Method:Brng‐Dist>istobeselectedinCOGOIntersection
Input,Inputpage.
• Forthesecondknownpoint<HDist‐XX:>isusedinsteadof
<Azimuth:>.Thekeysandadvicementionedarestillvalid.
2.
CALC(F1)tocalculatetheCOGOpoints.
COGO
R9|505
Step
Description

Tworesultsarecalculated.
3.
COGOBrng‐DistResults,Result1page
<PointID:>TheidentifierforthefirstresultoftheCOGOpoint
dependingonthepointIDtemplateconfiguredfor<SurveyPts:>in
CONFIGUREIDTemplates.ThepointIDcanbechanged.






Referto
chapter
15.1
Thecalculatedcoordinatesaredisplayed.
TypeinapointID.
STAKE(F5)toaccesstheStakeoutapplicationprogramandstakeout 34.4
thecalculatedCOGOpoint.
AfterstakingandstoringtheCOGOpointCOGOBrng‐BrngResults,
Result1pageisdisplayed.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)foranindividualpointIDindependentoftheID
15.1
template.SHIFTRUN(F5)changesbacktothenextIDfromtheconfig‐
uredIDtemplate.
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepagewhereacodeandattributescan 9
beselected.
PressingPAGE(F6)twicechangestothePlotpage.
30.6
BothCOGOpointsandknownpointsaredisplayed.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)doesnotstoretheCOGOpointsandexitsCOGOcalcu‐
lations.
RSLT1(F3)orRSLT2(F3)toviewthefirstandsecondresult.
COGO
R9|506
Step
4.
Description
Referto
chapter
COGOBrng‐DistResults,Result1page
sthefirstresulttobestored?
• Ifyes,STORE(F1)tostoretheresultandactivatetheResult2page.
For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepagethe
resultiswrittentothelogfile.
• Ifno,RSLT2(F3)toactivatetheResult2page.
5.
COGOBrng‐DistResults,Result2page
Repeatstep3.
6.
COGOBrng‐DistResults,Result2page
Isthesecondresulttobestored?
• Ifyes,STORE(F1)tostoretheresultandreturntoCOGOIntersec‐
tionInput,Inputpage.For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfig‐
uration,Logfilepagetheresultiswrittentothelogfile.
• Ifno,ESCdoesnotstoretheCOGOpointandreturnstoCOGOInter‐
sectionInput,Inputpage.
7.
AremoreCOGOintersectioncalculationstobedone?
• Ifyes,repeatsteps1.to7.
32.6.1,
<Method:>inCOGOIntersectionInput,Inputpagecanbe
32.6.3or
changed.RefertotherelevantchaptersforotherCOGOintersection 32.6.4
calculationmethodthan<Method:Brng‐Dist>.
• Ifno,continuewithstep8.
COGO
R9|507
Step
8.
Description
Referto
chapter
SHIFTQUIT(F6)exitCOGOcalculation.
COGO
R9|508
32.6.3 IntersectionwithDistance‐Distance
Description
TheCOGOintersectioncalculationdistance‐distancecalculatestheintersectionpointoftwo
circles.Thecirclesaredefinedbytheknownpointasthecentrepointandthedistancefromthe
knownpointtotheCOGOpointastheradius.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesoftwopoints.
• thedistancefromtheknownpointstotheCOGOpoint.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemanuallyoccupiedduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononlypointscanbeused.
Diagram
P1
r1
P4
r2
P3
COGO
P2
Known
P1 Firstknownpoint
P2 Secondknownpoint
r1 Radius,asdefinedbythedistancefromP1to
P3orP4
r2 Radius,asdefinedbythedistancefromP2to
P3orP4
Unknown
P3 FirstCOGOpoint
P4 SecondCOGOpoint
R9|509
COGOintersectioncalcu‐
lationwithdistance‐
distancestep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
TheprocedureforaCOGOintersectioncalculationwithdistance‐
distanceisverysimilartoaCOGOintersectioncalculationwithbearing
‐bearing.
Followthesteps1.to5.inparagraph"COGOintersectioncalculation
withbearing‐bearingstep‐by‐step".Thedifferencesare:
32.6.1
• <Method:Dist‐Dist>istobeselectedinCOGOIntersectionInput,
Inputpage.
• Forbothknownpoints<HDist‐XX:>isusedinsteadof<Azimuth:>.
Thekeysmentionedarestillvalid.
• <Offset:>isunavailable.
2.
TheremainingprocedureisidenticaltoaCOGOintersectioncalculation
withbearing‐distance.ThescreeniscalledCOGODist‐DistResults.
Followthesteps2.to8.inparagraph"COGOintersectioncalculation
withbearing‐distancestep‐by‐step".
COGO
32.6.2
R9|510
32.6.4 IntersectionwithByPoints
Description
TheCOGOintersectioncalculationbypointscalculatestheintersectionpointoftwolines.Aline
isdefinedbytwopoints.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesoffourpoints.
• offsetsofthelinesifrequiredandconfigured.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononlypointscanbeused.
Diagram
P2
P4
a
b
P5
P3
P1
COGO
Known
P1 Firstknownpoint
P2 Secondknownpoint
P3 Thirdknownpoint
P4 Fourthknownpoint
a
LinefromP1toP2
b
LinefromP3toP4
Unknown
P5 COGOpoint
R9|511
COGOintersectioncalcu‐
lationwithbypoints
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOIntersectionInput.

COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
2.
COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
32.3.
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
<Method:ByPoints>
<1stPoint:>ThepointIDoftheknownstartpointofthefirstlinefor
theCOGOcalculation.
<2ndPoint:>ThepointIDoftheknownendpointofthefirstlinefor
theCOGOcalculation.



3.
Selectthepointsstoredinthejob.
SURVY(F5)when<1stPoint:>or<2ndPoint:>ishighlighted.To
measureaknownpointfortheCOGOcalculation.
35.2
Forallpointfields,theMapViewinteractivedisplayontheMappage
canbeusedtoselectthedesiredpoint.
30.5
Totypeincoordinatesforaknownpointopenthechoicelistwhen<1st 7.3.2
Point:>or<2ndPoint:>ishighlighted.PressNEW(F2)tocreateanew
point.
COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
COGO
R9|512
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
<Offset:>Availablefor<UseOffsets:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,
Parameterspage.Theoffsetofthelineinthedirection<1stPoint:>to
<2ndPoint:>.Apositiveoffsetistotheright,anegativeoffsetistothe
left.



Typeintheoffsetifrequired.
Thevaluefortheoffsetcanbecalculatedfromtwoexistingpoints.
32.4
INV(F2)when<Offset:>ishighlighted.ToperformaCOGOinverse
calculation.


UponpressingSTORE(F1)inCOGOInverse,theresultfromthe
COGOinversecalculationiscopiedtothefieldwhichwashigh‐
lightedwhenINV(F2)waspressed.
For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepage
theresultoftheCOGOinversecalculationiswrittentothelogfile.
ThevaluefortheoffsetcanbeselectedfrompreviousCOGOinverse
calculations.
32.12
LAST(F4)when<Offset:>ishighlighted.Torecallpreviousresults
fromCOGOinversecalculations.
UponpressingCONT(F1)inCOGOLastInverseCalculations,the
selectedresultiscopiedtothefield.
Thevaluefortheoffsetcanbemathematicallymodified.
32.13
SHIFTMODIF(F4)when<Offset:>ishighlighted.Toadd,subtract,
multiplyanddividevalues.
COGO
R9|513
Step
4.
Description
Referto
chapter
COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
Theprocedureforthethirdandfourthknownpointandtheoffsetis
identicaltotheprocedureforthefirstandsecondknownpoint.Repeat
steps2.and3.
5.
TheremainingprocedureisidenticaltoaCOGOintersectioncalculation
withbearing‐bearing.ThescreeniscalledCOGOByPointsResults.On
thePlotpagetwosolidlinesaredisplayed.
Followthesteps5.to13.inparagraph"COGOintersectioncalculation 32.6.1
withbearing‐bearingstep‐by‐step".
COGO
R9|514
32.6.5 IntersectionwithTPSObservation‐TPSObservation
Description
TheCOGOintersectioncalculationTPSobservation‐TPSobservationcalculatestheintersec‐
tionpointoftwolines.AlineisdefinedbyaTPSstationandaTPSmeasurementfromthis
station.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesoftwopoints.
• azimuthsofthelines.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• mustbetakenfromtheactivejob.
• mustbeTPSstationpoints.
Theazimuthsofthelines
• mustbeTPSmeasurementsanglemeasurementsfromtheknownpoints.
• canbetwoanglemeasurementsorananglemeasurementandadistancemeasurement.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetripletsandpositiononlypointscanbeused.
COGO
R9|515
Diagram
P2
P0
P1
COGOintersectioncalcu‐
lationwithTPSObs‐TPS
Obsstep‐by‐step
Known
P0 Firstknownpoint(TPSstation)
P1 Secondknownpoint(TPSstation)
α1 DirectionfromP0toP2
α2 DirectionfromP1toP2
Unknown
P2 COGOpoint
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOIntersectionInput.

COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
2.
COGOIntersectionInput,Inputpage
32.3
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
<Method:TPSObs‐TPSObs>
<1stTPSStn:>ThepointIDofthefirstTPSstationwhichistheknown
startpointofthefirstlinefortheCOGOcalculation.
COGO
R9|516
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
<TPSMeasmnt:>ThepointIDoftheTPSmeasurementwhichisthe
knownendpointofthefirstlinefortheCOGOcalculation.
<Azimuth:>Theazimuthrelatedtotheknownendpointofthefirstline
fortheCOGOcalculation.
<2ndTPSStn:>ThepointIDofthesecondTPSstationwhichisthe
knownstartpointofthesecondlinefortheCOGOcalculation.
<TPSMeasmnt:>ThepointIDoftheTPSmeasurementwhichisthe
knownendpointofthesecondlinefortheCOGOcalculation.
<Azimuth:>Theazimuthrelatedtotheknownendpointofthesecond
linefortheCOGOcalculation.

Pointscanonlybeselectedfromtheactivejob.Pointsforthe<2ndTPS
Stn:>andthe<TPSMeasmnt:>fromthatstationcanalsobedirectly
measuredwhenusingthismethod.
Thevaluefortheazimuthcanbecalculatedfromtwoexistingpoints.
32.4
INV(F2)when<Azimuth:>ishighlighted.ToperformaCOGOinverse
calculation.


UponpressingSTORE(F1)inCOGOInverse,theresultfromthe
COGOinversecalculationiscopiedtothefieldwhichwashigh‐
lightedwhenINV(F2)waspressed.
For<WriteLogfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepage
theresultoftheCOGOinversecalculationiswrittentothelogfile.
COGO
R9|517
Step
Description
Referto
chapter

ThevaluefortheazimuthcanbeselectedfrompreviousCOGOinverse 32.12
calculations.
LAST(F4)when<Azimuth:>ishighlighted.Torecallpreviousresults
fromCOGOinversecalculations.
UponpressingCONT(F1)inCOGOLastInverseCalculations,the
selectedresultiscopiedtothefield.
COGO
R9|518
32.7 COGOCalculation‐LineCalculationsMethod
32.7.1 LineCalculation‐BasePoint
Description
TheCOGOlinecalculationbasepointcalculatesthebasepoint,stationandoffsetofapointin
relationtoaline.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• coordinatesoftwopointsandanoffsetpoint.
OR
• coordinatesofonepointandanoffsetpoint
• bearinganddistancefromonepoint
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
COGO
R9|519
Diagram
P2
P4
d2
P0
P1

Access
d1
P3
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
d1
d2
Instrumentstation
<StartPoint:>
<EndPoint:>
<OffsetPoint:>
Basepoint
<Offset‐XX:>
<∆Line‐XX:>
LinemanagementisnotavailableforCOGOlinecalculations.
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOLineCalculationsInput.
COGO
LineCalculationsInput,
Inputpage
CALC(F1)
TocalculateCOGOpoint.
INV(F2)
Tocalculatethevaluesforthedistanceandthe
offsetfromtwoexistingpoints.Availableif
<Azimuth:>or<HDist‐XX:>ishighlighted.
LAST(F4)
Toselectthevaluesforthedistanceandthe
offsetfrompreviousCOGOinversecalculations.
Availableif<Azimuth:>or<HDist‐XX:>ishigh‐
lighted.
COGO
R9|520
SURVY(F5)
TomeasureapointfortheCOGOcalculation.
Availableif<StartPoint:>or<EndPoint:>is
highlighted.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
SHIFTMODIF(F4)
Tomathematicallymodifythevalues.Available
if<Azimuth:>,<∆Line‐XX:>or<HDist‐XX:>is
highlighted.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Task:>
CalcBase
Point
Calculatesthebasepoint,thestationandoffsetofa
pointinrelationtoaline.
CalcOffset
Point
Calculatesthecoordinatesofanewpointafterinputof
stationandoffsetvaluesinrelationtoaline.
Segmentation Calculatesthecoordinatesofnewpointsonaline
eitherequallyspacedorwithdefinedsegments.
<Method:>
<StartPoint:>
COGO
Themethodbywhichthelinewillbedefined.
2Points
Usestwoknownpointstodefinetheline.
Pt/Brg/Dist
Definesthelineusingaknownpoint,adistanceandan
azimuthoftheline.
Choicelist
Thestartpointoftheline.AllpointsfromCOGOData:
JobNamecanbeselected.
R9|521
Field
Option
Description
<EndPoint:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Method:2Points>.Theendpointofthe
line.AllpointsfromCOGOData:JobNamecanbe
selected.
<Azimuth:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:Pt/Brg/Dist>.Theazimuthof
theline.
<HDist‐XX:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:Pt/Brg/Dist>.Thehorizontal
distancefromthestartpointtotheendpointofthe
line.
<∆Line‐XX:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>.Horizontal
distancefromstartpointtobasepoint.
<OffsetPoint:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>.Theoffset
point.
<Offset‐XX:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>.Offsetfrom
basepointtooffsetpoint.Positivetotherightand
negativetotheleftoftheline.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)accessesMappage.Refertoparagraph"COGOLineCalculationsInput,Mappage".
COGO
LineCalculationsInput,
Mappage
TheMappageprovidesaninteractivedisplayofthedata.Referto"30MapViewInteractive
DisplayFeature"forinformationonthefunctionalityandsoftkeysavailable.
COGO
R9|522
Nextstep
COGO
XXPointResults,
Resultpage
IF
THEN
<Task:CalcBasePoint>
CALC(F1)accessesCOGOBasePointResults.Refertopara‐
graph"COGOXXPointResults,Resultpage".
<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>
CALC(F1)accessesCOGOOffsetPointResults.Refertoparag‐
rahp"COGOXXPointResults,Resultpage".
<Task:Segmentation>
CALC(F1)accessesCOGODefineSegmentation.Refertopara‐
graph"32.7.3LineCalculation‐Segmentation".
Theresultscreensforbasepointandoffsetpointareverysimilar.Theexplanationsgivenfor
thesoftkeysbelowarevalidfortheResultpage.
STORE(F1)
TostoreresultandtoreturntoCOGOLine
CalculationsInput.
STAKE(F5)
ToaccesstheStakeoutapplicationprogramand
stakeoutthecalculatedCOGOpoint.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)andSHIFTRUN(F5)
Tochangebetweenenteringanindividualpoint
IDdifferenttothedefinedIDtemplateandthe
runningpointIDaccordingtotheIDtemplate.
Referto"15.1IDTemplates".
COGO
R9|523
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Userinput
TheidentifierfortheCOGOpointdependingonthe
pointIDtemplateconfiguredfor<SurveyPts:>in
CONFIGUREIDTemplates.
<OffsetPoint:>
Output
PointIDofoffsetpoint.Availablefor<Task:CalcBase
Point>.
<∆Line‐XX:>
Output
Horizontaldistancefromstartpointtobasepoint.
Availablefor<Task:CalcBasePoint>.
<∆Offset‐XX:>
Output
Offsetfrombasepointtooffsetpoint.Positivetothe
rightandnegativetotheleftoftheline.Availablefor
<Task:CalcBasePoint>.
<LineLength:>
Output
Lengthoflinefromstartpointtoendpoint.
<LineBrng:>
Output
Bearingoflinefromstartpointtoendpoint.
<OffsPtBrng:>
Output
Bearingofoffsetpointfrombasepointtooffsetpoint.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
COGO
XXPointResults,
Codepage
ThefunctionalityoftheCodepageissimilartoCOGOTraverseResult,Codepage.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
COGO
R9|524
COGO
XXPointResults,
Plotpage
ThefunctionalityofthePlotpageissimilartoCOGOTraverseResults,Plotpage.
Nextstep
STORE(F1)storestheresultandaccessesCOGOLineCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
COGO
R9|525
32.7.2 LineCalculation‐OffsetPoint
Description
TheCOGOlinecalculationoffsetpointcalculatesthecoordinatesofanewpointafterinputof
stationandoffsetvaluesinrelationtoaline.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• coordinatesoftwopoints.
• offsets.
OR
• coordinatesofonepoint.
• bearinganddistancefromonepoint.
• offsets.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.

LinemanagementisnotavailableforCOGOlinecalculations.
COGO
R9|526
COGOlinecalculation
offsetpointstep‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOLineCalculations
Input.

COGOLineCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
32.3
2.
COGOLineCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
32.7.1
<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>
3.
CALC(F1)calculatestheresults.
4.
COGOOffsetPointResults,Resultpage
32.7.1
STORE(F1)storestheresults.
COGO
R9|527
32.7.3 LineCalculation‐Segmentation
Description
TheCOGOlinecalculationsegmentationcalculatesthecoordinatesofnewpointsonaline.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• coordinatesofthestartandtheendpointoftheline
OR
• abearinganddistancefromaknownpointthatdefinetheline
ANDEITHER
• thenumberofsegmentsdividingtheline
OR
• asegmentlengthfortheline.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
Diagram
d
d
P0
d
Linedividedby<Method:No.ofSegments>
d
P1
COGO
P0
P1
d
<StartPoint:>
<EndPoint:>
Equallyspacedsegmentsresultfromdividing
alinebyacertainnumberofpoints.
R9|528
d1
d1
d1
P0
COGOlinecalculation
segmentationstep‐by‐
step
Linedividedby<Method:SegmentLength>
d2
P1
P0
P1
d1
d2
<StartPoint:>
<EndPoint:>
<SegLength:>
Remainingsegment
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOLineCalculation
Input.

COGOLineCalculationInput,Inputpage
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
32.3
2.
COGOLineCalculationsInput,Inputpage
32.7.1
<Task:Segmentation>
3.
CALC(F1)toaccessCOGODefineSegmentation.
4.
COGODefineSegmentation
<Method:>Howthelineistobedivided.Refertoparagraph"Diagram".
Dependingontheselection,thefollowingfieldsareuserinputoroutput
fields.
<LineLength:>Calculatedlinelengthbetweentheselected<Start
Point:>and<EndPoint:>.
COGO
R9|529
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
<No.ofSegs:>For<Method:No.ofSegments>typeinthenumberof
segmentsfortheline.For<Method:SegmentLength>typeinthe
segmentlengthfortheline.Aremainingsegmentmayresultfromthis
method.
<SegLength:>For<Method:No.ofSegments>thisisthecalculated
lengthofeachsegment.For<Method:SegmentLength>typeinthe
requiredsegmentlength.
<LastSegLgth:>Availablefor<Method:SegmentLength>.The
lengthoftheremainingsegment.
<StartPtID:>ThepointIDtobeassignedtothefirstnewpointonthe
line.TheselectedpointIDtemplatesfromCONFIGUREIDTemplates
arenotapplied.
<PtIDInc:><StartPtID:>isincrementednumericallyforthesecond,
third,etc.pointontheline.
5.

6.
CALC(F1)toaccessCOGOSegmentationResults.
Thecoordinatesofthenewpointsarecalculated.Theheightsare
computedalongthelineassumingalinearslopebetween<Start
Point:>and<EndPoint:>.
COGOSegmentationResults,Resultpage
<NumberofSegments:>Describesthenumberofresultingsegments
forthelineincludingtheremainingsegment,ifitapplies.
COGO
R9|530
Step

Description
Referto
chapter
<LastSegmentLgth:>Availablefor<Method:SegmentLength>.The
lengthoftheremainingsegment.
STAKE(F5)toaccesstheStakeoutapplicationprogramandstakeout
thecalculatedCOGOpoint.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)orESCreturntoCOGOSegmentationResults,
Resultpage.
7.
PAGE(F1)toaccessCOGOSegmentationResults,Plotpage
30.6
Theknownpointsdefiningthelineandthosecreatedonthelineare
showninblack.
8.
CONT(F1)returnstoCOGOLineCalculationsInput.
COGO
R9|531
32.8 COGOCalculation‐ArcCalculationsMethod
32.8.1 ArcCalculation‐ArcCentre
Description
TheCOGOarccalculationarccentrecalculatesthecoordinatesofthecentreofthearc.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• coordinatesofthreepoints
OR
• coordinatesoftwopoints
• radiustothetwopoints
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
Diagram
d2
P2
d1
P1
P3
COGO
P0
P0
P1
P2
P3
d1
d2
Instrumentstation
<StartPoint:>
<EndPoint:>
ArcCentre
<ArcRadius:>
<ArcLength:>
R9|532

ArcmanagementisnotavailableforCOGOarccalculations.
Access
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOArcCalculationsInput.
COGO
ArcCalculationsInput
Inputpage
Thesoftkeysaresimilartolinecalculation.Referto"32.7.1LineCalculation‐BasePoint"for
informationonsoftkeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Task:>
CalcArc
Center
Calculatesthecoordinatesofthecentreofthearc.
CalcOffset
Point
Calculatesthecoordinatesofanewpointafterinputof
stationandoffsetvaluesinrelationtoanarc.
CalcBase
Point
Calculatesthebasepoint,thestationandoffsetofa
pointinrelationtoanarc.
Segmentation Calculatesthecoordinatesofnewpointsonanarc
eitherequallyspaced,inadefinedintervalorina
definedangle.
<Method:>
Themethodbywhichthearcwillbedefined.
3Points
Usesthreeknownpointstodefinethearc.
2
Definesthearcusingtwoknownpointsandaradiusof
Points/Radius thearc.
2
Definesthearcusingtwotangentsandaradiusofthe
Tgnts/Radius arc.
COGO
R9|533
Field
Option
Description
2Tgnts/Chrd Definesthearcusingtwotangentsandthechordofthe
Lngt
arc.
<StartPoint:>
Choicelist
Thestartpointofthearc.AllpointsfromCOGOData:
JobNamecanbeselected.Availablefor<Method:3
Points>and<Method:2Points/Radius>.
<SecondPoint:>
Choicelist
AllpointsfromCOGOData:JobNamecanbeselected.
Availablefor<Method:3Points>.Thesecondpointof
thearc.
<EndPoint:>
Choicelist
Theendpointofthearc.AllpointsfromCOGOData:
JobNamecanbeselected.Availablefor<Method:3
Points>and<Method:2Points/Radius>.
<Point1:>
Choicelist
Apointonthefirsttangent.Availablefor<Method:2
Tgnts/Radius>,<Method:2Tgnts/ArcLngt>and
<Method:2Tgnts/ChrdLngt>.
<PIPoint:>
Choicelist
Thepointofintersectionofthetwotangents.Available
for<Method:2Tgnts/Radius>,<Method:2
Tgnts/ArcLngt>and<Method:2Tgnts/ChrdLngt>.
<Point2:>
Choicelist
Apointonthesecondtangent.Availablefor<Method:
2Tgnts/Radius>,<Method:2Tgnts/ArcLngt>and
<Method:2Tgnts/ChrdLngt>.
<Radius:>
Userinput
Theradiusofthearc.Availablefor<Method:2
Points/Radius>and<Method:2Tgnts/Radius>.
<ArcLength:>
Userinput
Thelengthofthearc.Availablefor<Method:2
Tgnts/ArcLngt>.
COGO
R9|534
Field
Option
Description
<ChordLength:>
Userinput
Thelengthofthechord.Availablefor<Method:2
Tgnts/ChrdLngt>.
<∆ArcDist‐XX:>
Userinput
Horizontaldistancealongthearcfromstartpointto
basepoint.Availablefor<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>.
<∆Offset‐XX:>
Userinput
Offsetfrombasepointtooffsetpoint.Positivetothe
rightandnegativetotheleftofthearc.Availablefor
<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>.
<OffsetPoint:>
Choicelist
Theoffsetpoint.Availablefor<Task:CalcBase
Point>.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
<Task:CalcArcCenter>
CALC(F1)accessesCOGOCenterofArcResults.Refertopara‐
graph"COGOXXResults,Resultpage".
<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>
CALC(F1)accessesCOGOOffsetPointResults.Refertopara‐
graph"COGOXXResults,Resultpage".
<Task:CalcBasePoint>
CALC(F1)accessesCOGOBasePointResults.Refertopara‐
graph"COGOXXResults,Resultpage".
<Task:Segmentation>
CALC(F1)accessesCOGODefineSegmentation.Referto
"32.8.4ArcCalculation‐Segmentation".
COGO
R9|535
COGO
XXResults,
Resultpage
Refertoparagraph"32.7.1LineCalculation‐BasePoint"forinformationonsoftkeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Userinput
TheidentifierfortheCOGOpointdependingonthe
pointIDtemplateconfiguredfor<SurveyPts:>in
CONFIGUREIDTemplates.
<ArcRadius:>
Output
Computedradiusofarc.
<ArcLength:>
Output
Computedlengthofarc.
<OffsPtBrng:>
Output
Availablefor<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>.Bearingof
offsetpointfrombasepointtooffsetpoint.
<OffsetPoint:>
Output
Availablefor<Task:CalcBasePoint>.PointIDof
offsetpoint.
<∆ArcDist‐XX:>
Output
Availablefor<Task:CalcBasePoint>.Horizontal
distancealongthearcfromstartpointtobasepoint.
<∆Offset‐XX:>
Output
Availablefor<Task:CalcBasePoint>.Offsetfrom
basepointtooffsetpoint.Positivetotherightandnega‐
tivetotheleftoftheline.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
COGO
R9|536
COGO
XXResults,
Codepage
ThefunctionalityoftheCodepageissimilartoCOGOTraverseResults,Codepage.
COGO
XXResults,
Plotpage
ThefunctionalityofthePlotpageissimilartoCOGOTraverseResults,Plotpage.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
Nextstep
STORE(F1)storestheresultandaccessesCOGOArcCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
COGO
R9|537
32.8.2 ArcCalculation‐BasePoint
Description
TheCOGOarccalculationbasepointcalculatesthecoordinatesofthebasepoint,stationand
offsetofapointinrelationtoanarc.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• coordinatesofthreepoints
• coordinatesofanoffsetpoint
OR
• coordinatesoftwopoints
• radiustothetwopoints
• coordinatesofanoffsetpoint
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
COGO
R9|538
Diagram
P2
P4
d1
P3
d2
P1

COGOarccalculation
basepointstep‐by‐step
P0
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
d1
d2
Instrumentstation
<StartPoint:>
<EndPoint:>
<OffsetPoint:>
Basepoint
<∆Offset‐XX:>
<∆ArcDist‐XX:>
ArcmanagementisnotavailableforCOGOarccalculations.
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOArcCalculations
Input,Inputpage.

COGOArcCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
32.3
2.
COGOArcCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
32.8.1
<Task:CalcBasePoint>
3.
CALC(F1)calculatestheresults.
COGO
R9|539
Step
4.
Description
Referto
chapter
COGOBasePointResults,Resultpage
32.8.1
STORE(F1)storestheresults.
COGO
R9|540
32.8.3 ArcCalculation‐OffsetPoint
Description
TheCOGOarccalculationoffsetpointcalculatesthecoordinatesofanewpointafterinputofarc
andoffsetvaluesinrelationtoanarc.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• coordinatesofthreepoints.
• offsets.
OR
• coordinatesoftwopoints.
• radiustothetwopoints.
• offsets.
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.

COGOarccalculation
offsetpointstep‐by‐step
ArcmanagementisnotavailableforCOGOarccalculations.
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.
Description
Referto
chapter
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOArcCalculations
Input.
COGO
R9|541
Step
Description
Referto
chapter

COGOArcCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
SHIFTCONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
32.3
2.
COGOArcCalculationsInput,Inputpage.
32.8.1
<Task:CalcOffsetPoint>
3.
CALC(F1)calculatestheresults.
4.
COGOOffsetPointResults,Resultpage
32.8.1
STORE(F1)storestheresults.
COGO
R9|542
32.8.4 ArcCalculation‐Segmentation

Exceptionstolinecalcu‐
lationsegmentation
TheCOGOarccalculationsegmentationandthefunctionalityofallscreensandfieldsaresimilar
tothoseforCOGOlinecalculationsegmentation.Referto"32.7.3LineCalculation‐Segmenta‐
tion".
NewfieldandoptioninCOGODefineSegmentation
Field
Option
Description
<Method:>
DeltaAngle
Todividethearcbyanangularvalue.
<DeltaAngle:>
Userinput
Theangularvaluebywhichnewpointswillbedefined
onthearc.
COGO
R9|543
32.9 COGOCalculation‐Shift,Rotate&Scale(Manual)
Method
Description
TheCOGOcalculationshift,rotate&scale(manual)appliesshiftsand/orrotationand/orscale
tooneorseveralknownpoints.Thevaluesforshiftsand/orrotationand/orscalearetypedin
manually.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesofthepointstobeshifted,rotatedand/orscaled.Theymustbestoredinthe
activejob.
• theshiftvalues.TheycanbedefinedasthedirectionofEasting,NorthingandHeightorasan
azimuthandagriddistanceorasshiftfromonepointtoanother.
• therotationvalue.Itcanbedefinedbyapointasrotationcentreplusarotationorbyan
existingandnewazimuth.
• thescale.Itisonlyappliedtotheposition.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetriplets,positiononlypointsandheightonlypointscanbeused.
COGO
R9|544
Diagram
a
P1’
P2’
b
P1
P2
Shift
a
Height
b
Easting
P1 Knownpoint
P1’ Shiftedpoint
P2 Knownpoint
P2’ Shiftedpoint
a
b
P1’
P0
P1
P2’
P2
COGO
Rotation
a
Height
b
Easting
P0 <RotationPt:>
P1 Knownpoint
P1’ Rotatedpoint
P2 Knownpoint
P2’ Rotatedpoint
R9|545
a
P4’
P5’
P5
P4
b
P2
P1
P2’
P3
P3’
Scale
a
Height
b
Easting
P1 <RotationPt:>,canbeheldfixed,allother
pointsarethenscaledfromhere
P2 Knownpoint
P2’ Scaledpoint
P3 Knownpoint
P3’ Scaledpoint
P4 Knownpoint
P4’ Scaledpoint
P5 Knownpoint
P5’ Scaledpoint
Access
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale.
COGO
Shift,Rotate&Scale,
Pointspage
Listedarepointswhichhavebeenselectedforshifting,rotatingand/orscaling.
CALC(F1)
Toperformtheshift,rotationandscalecalcula‐
tionandtocontinuewiththesubsequentscreen.
CalculatedCOGOpointsarenotyetstored.
ADD(F2)
Toaddseveralpointsfromtheactivejobtothe
list.AccessesCOGOData:JobName.Selected
sortandfiltersettingsapply.CONT(F1)addsall
displayedpointstothelistinCOGOShift,Rotate
&Scaleandreturnstothatscreen.
COGO
R9|546
ADD1(F3)
Toaddonepointfromtheactivejobtothelist.
AccessesCOGOData:JobName.Selectedsort
andfiltersettingsapply.CONT(F1)addsthe
currentlyhighlightedpointtothelistinCOGO
Shift,Rotate&Scaleandreturnstothatscreen.
REMOV(F4)
Toremovethehighlightedpointfromthelist.
Thepointitselfisnotdeleted.
MORE(F5)
Todisplayinformationaboutthecodesifstored
withanypoint,thetimeandthedateofwhenthe
pointwasstoredandthe3Dcoordinatequality
andtheclass.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTREMA(F4)
Toremoveallpointsfromthelist.Thepoints
itselfarenotdeleted.
SHIFTRANGE(F5)
Todefinearangeofpointsfromtheactivejobto
beaddedtothelist.Refertoparagraph"COGO
SelectPointsbyRange".
COGO
R9|547
Nextstep
IF
THEN
allpointsfromCOGO
Data:JobNameareto
beadded
ADD(F2).
onepointfromCOGO
ADD1(F3).
Data:JobNameistobe
added
arangeofpointsfrom SHIFTRANGE(F5)accessesCOGOSelectPointsbyRange.Refer
COGOData:JobNameis toparagraph"COGOSelectPointsbyRange".
tobeadded
allpointsareadded
COGO
SelectPointsbyRange
PAGE(F1)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale,Shiftpage.Refer
toparagraph"COGOShift,Rotate&Scale,Shiftpage".
CONT(F1)
Toaddthepointswithintheselectedrangeto
thelistinCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale,Points
pageandtoreturntothescreenfromwherethis
screenwasaccessed.
NEXT(F3)
Toaddthepointswithintheselectedrangeto
thelistinCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale,Points
pagewithoutquittingthisscreen.Anotherrange
ofpointID’scanbeselected.
COGO
R9|548
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<FromPtID:>and
<ToPtID:>
Userinput
• NumericpointID’sinbothfields:
PointswithnumericpointID’sfallingwithinthe
rangeareselected.
Example:
<FromPtID:1>,<ToPtID:50>
SelectedarepointID’s1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10….49,
50aswellas001,01,0000045,...
NotselectedarepointID’s100,200,300,...
• AlphanumericpointID’sinbothfields:
Theleftmostcharacterofbothentriesisusedas
thebasisfortherange.ThestandardASCIInumer‐
icalrangeisused.Pointswithalphanumericpoint
ID’sfallingwithintherangeareselected.
Example:
<FromPtID:a9>,<ToPtID:c200>
SelectedarepointID’sa,b,c,aa,bb,cc,a1,b2,c3,c4,
c5,a610,...
NotselectedarepointID’sd100,e,200,300,tzz...
Nextstep
Step
1.
Description
CONT(F1)addsallpointswithintherangetothelistinCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale
andreturnstothescreenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.
COGO
R9|549
Step
2.
Description
PAGE(F6)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale,Shiftpage.Referto"COGOShift,
Rotate&Scale,Shiftpage".
COGO
Shift,Rotate&Scale,
Shiftpage
CALC(F1)
Toperformtheshift,rotationandscalecalcula‐
tionandtocontinuewiththesubsequentscreen.
CalculatedCOGOpointsarenotyetstored.
INV(F2)
TocalculatetheamoutofshiftinEasting,
Northingandheightfromtwoexistingpoints.
Availableif<∆Easting:>,<∆Northing:>or
<∆Height:>ishighlighted.
LAST(F4)
Toselectthevaluefortheshiftfromprevious
COGOinversecalculations.Availableif
<∆Easting:>,<∆Northing:>or<∆Height:>is
highlighted.
SURVY(F5)
TomeasureapointfortheCOGOcalculation.
Availablefor<Method:Use2Points>if
<From:>or<To:>ishighlighted.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
AccessesCOGOConfiguration.Referto"32.3
ConfiguringCOGO".
COGO
R9|550
SHIFTMODIF(F4)
Tomathematicallymodifythevalues.Available
if<∆Easting:>,<∆Northing:>or<∆Height:>
ishighlighted.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<Method:>
Description
Themethodbywhichtheshiftin∆ Easting,∆ Northing
and∆Heightwillbedetermined.
Enter
∆E,∆N,∆Ht
Definestheshiftusingcoordinatedifferences.
Enter
Bng,Dst,Ht
Definestheshiftusinganazimuth,adistanceanda
heightdifference.
Use2Points
Computestheshiftfromthecoordinatedifferences
betweentwoknownpoints.
<From:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Method:Use2Points>.ThepointIDof
thefirstknownpointforcalculatingtheshift.
<To:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Method:Use2Points>.ThepointIDof
thesecondknownpointforcalculatingtheshift.
<Azimuth:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:EnterBng,Dst,Ht>.The
azimuthdefinesthedirectionoftheshift.
<HDist‐XX:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:EnterBng,Dst,Ht>.The
amountofshiftfromtheoriginalpointtothecalcu‐
latedCOGOpoints.
COGO
R9|551
Field
Option
Description
<∆Easting:>
Userinputor
output
TheamountofshiftinEastdirection.
<∆Northing:>
Userinputor
output
TheamountofshiftinNorthdirection.
<∆Height:>
Userinputor
output
Theamountofshiftinheight.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale,Rotatepage.Referto"COGOShift,Rotate&
Scale,Rotatepage".
COGO
Shift,Rotate&Scale,
Rotatepage
ThesoftkeysarethesameasontheShiftpage.Refertoparagraph"COGOShift,Rotate&Scale,
Shiftpage"forinformationonthekeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<Method:>
<RotationPt:>
COGO
Description
Themethodbywhichtherotationanglewillbedeter‐
mined.
UserEntered
Therotationcanbemanuallytypedin.
Computed
Therotationwillbecalculatedas<NewAzimuth:>
minus<ExistingAz:>.
Choicelist
Thepointaroundwhichallpointswillberotated.
R9|552
Field
Option
Description
<ExistingAz:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:Computed>.Aknowndirec‐
tionbeforerotating.
<NewAzimuth:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:Computed>.Aknowndirec‐
tionafterrotating.
<Rotation:>
Userinputor
output
Theamountbywhichthepointswillberotated.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale,Scalepage.Referto"COGOShift,Rotate&
Scale,Scalepage".
COGO
Shift,Rotate&Scale,
Scalepage
ThesoftkeysarethesameasontheShiftpage.Refertoparagraph"COGOShift,Rotate&Scale,
Shiftpage"forinformationonthekeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<Method:>
COGO
Description
Themethodbywhichthescalefactorwillbedeter‐
mined.
UserEntered
Thescalefactorcanbemanuallytypedin.
Computed
Thescalefactorwillbecalculatedas<NewDist:>
dividedby<ExistingDist:>.
R9|553
Field
Option
Description
<ExistingDist:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:Computed>.Aknown
distancebeforescaling.Thisvalueisusedforcalcu‐
latingthescalefactor.
<NewDist:>
Userinput
Availablefor<Method:Computed>.Aknown
distanceafterscaling.Thisvalueisusedforcalculating
thescalefactor.
<Scale:>
Userinputor
output
Thescalefactorusedinthecalculation.
<ScaleFromPt:>
No
Scalingisperformedbymultiplyingtheoriginalcoor‐
dinatesofallpointsby<Scale:>.
Yes
<Scale:>isappliedtothecoordinatedifferenceofall
pointsrelativeto<RotationPt:>selectedontheRota‐
tionpage.Thecoordinatesof<RotationPt:>willnot
change.
Nextstep
CALC(F1)performstheshift,rotationandscalecalculationandaccessesCOGOShift,Rotate&
ScaleStore.
COGO
R9|554
COGO
Shift,Rotate&Scale
Store,
Generalpage
STORE(F1)
Totostoretheresultsandcontinuewiththenext
subsequentscreen.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PtsSelected:>
Output
Thenumberofselectedpointshavingbeenshifted,
rotatedand/orscaled.
<StoreJob:>
Choicelist
ThecalculatedCOGOpointswillbestoredinthisjob.
AlljobsfromMainMenu:Manage...\Jobscanbe
selected.Theoriginalpointsarenotcopiedtothisjob.
<AddIdentifier:>
YesorNo
Activatestheuseofadditionalidentifiersforthepoint
ID’softhecalculatedCOGOpoints.
<Identifier:>
Userinput
Theidentifierwithuptofourcharactersisaddedin
frontoforattheendoftheIDofthecalculatedCOGO
points.
COGO
R9|555
Field
Option
Description
<Prefix/Suffix:>
Prefix
Addsthesettingfor<Identifier:>infrontoftheorig‐
inalpointID’s.
Suffix
Addsthesettingfor<Identifier:>attheendofthe
originalpointID’s.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
theusedparameters PAGE(F6)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&ScaleStore,Summary
aretobeviewed
page.
thecalculatedCOGO PAGE(F6)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&ScaleStore,Plotpage.Orig‐
pointsaretobe
inalpointsaredisplayedingrey,calculatedCOGOpointsaredisplayed
viewedgraphically
inblack.
thecalculatedCOGO STORE(F1)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&ScaleResults,Result
pointsaretobe
page.Refertoparagraph"COGOShift,Rotate&ScaleResultsResult
stored
page".
COGO
Shift,Rotate&Scale
Results
Resultpage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<No.ofNewPts:>
Output
Numberofnewpointscreated.
<No.ofSkippedPts>
Output
Numberofpointswhichwereskippedeitherdueto
notbeingabletoconvertcoordinatesorpointswith
identicalpointID’salreadyexistedin<StoreJob:>.
COGO
R9|556
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thestoredCOGOpoints PAGE(F6)accessesCOGOShift,Rotate&ScaleResults,Plotpage.
aretobeviewedgraphi‐ Originalpointsaredisplayedingrey,calculatedCOGOpointsare
cally
displayedinblack.
morepointsaretobe
shifted,rotatedand/or
scaled
CONT(F1)returnstoCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale.
COGOistobeended
SHIFTQUIT(F6).
COGO
R9|557
32.10 COGOCalculation‐Shift,Rotate&Scale(MatchPts)Method
Description
TheCOGOcalculationshift,rotate&scale(matchpts)appliesshiftsand/orrotationand/or
scaletooneorseveralknownpoints.Theshiftsand/orrotationand/orscalearecalculated
fromselectedpointsusinga2DHelmerttranformation.
Elementsthatmustbeknownare
• thecoordinatesofatleasttwomatchingpointsforthecalculationoftheshiftsand/orrota‐
tionand/orscale.
• thecoordinatesofthepointstobeshifted,rotatedand/orscaled.Theymustbestoredinthe
activejob.
• theshiftvalues.TheycanbedefinedasthedirectionofEasting,NorthingandHeightorasan
azimuthandagriddistanceorasshiftfromonepointtoanother.
• therotationvalue.Itcanbedefinedbyapointasrotationcentreplusarotationorbyan
existingandnewazimuth.
• thescale.Itisonlyappliedtotheposition.
Pointswithfullcoordinatetriplets,positiononlypointsandheightonlypointscanbeused.
Computationofshift,
rotationandscalevalues
Thenumberofpairsofpointsmatcheddetermineswhethertheshift,rotationandscalevalues
arecomputed.
Numberof
pairsof
points
matched
ShiftEast
ShiftNorth
ShiftHeight
Rotation
Scale
1
x
x
x
‐
‐
COGO
R9|558
Numberof
pairsof
points
matched
ShiftEast
ShiftNorth
ShiftHeight
Rotation
Scale
>1
x
x
x
x
x
Access
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOMatchCommonPoints(n).
COGO
MatchCommonPoints
(n)
Thisscreenprovidesalistofpointschosenfromtheactivejob.Thepointsareusedforthedeter‐
minationofthe2DHelmerttransformation.Thenumberofpointsmatchedisindicatedinthe
title,forexampleCOGOMatchCommonPoints(3).Unlessthereisnopairofmatchingpoints
inthelistallsoftkeysareavailable.Refertoparagraph"Matchpointsstep‐by‐step"forinforma‐
tiononhowtomatchpoints.
CALC(F1)
Toconfirmtheselections,computethetransfor‐
mationandcontinuewiththesubsequent
screen.
NEW(F2)
Tomatchanewpairofpoints.Thispairisadded
tothelist.Anewpointcanbemanuallyoccu‐
pied.Refertoparagraph"Matchpointsstep‐by‐
step".
EDIT(F3)
Toeditthehighlightedpairofmatchedpoints.
DEL(F4)
Todeletethehighlightedpairofmatchedpoints
fromthelist.
COGO
R9|559
MATCH(F5)
Tochangethetypeofmatchforahighlighted
pairofmatchedpoints.Referto"Descriptionof
columns".
RESID(F6)
Todisplayalistofthematchedpointsusedin
thetransformationcalculationandtheirassoci‐
atedresiduals.Refertoparagraph"Fixparame‐
ters".
SHIFTPARAM(F5)
Todefinetheparameterstobeusedinthe2D
transformation.
Descriptionofcolumns
Column
Description
SourcePt
ThepointIDofthepointsoforiginforthecalculationoftheshifts
and/orrotationand/orscale.
TargetPt
ThepointIDofthetargetpointsforthecalculationoftheshiftsand/or
rotationand/orscale.
Match
Thetypeofmatchtobemadebetweenthepoints.Thisinformationis
usedinthetransformationcalculation.Position&Height,Position
only,HeightonlyorNone.
Noneremovesmatchedcommonpointsfromthetransformationcalcu‐
lationbutdoesnotdeletethemfromthelist.Thiscanbeusedtohelp
improveresiduals.
COGO
R9|560
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thetransformationis CALC(F1).Thecalculatedshift,rotationandscalevaluesaredisplayed
tobecomputed
inCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale.Theycannotbeedited.Theremaining
functionalityofthecalculationisverysimilartoCOGOcalculationshift,
rotate&scale(manual).Referto"32.9COGOCalculation‐Shift,Rotate
&Scale(Manual)Method".
apairofpointsisto NEW(F2)orEDIT(F3).Refertoparagraph"Matchpointsstep‐by‐
bematchedoredited step".
parametersforthe SHIFTPARAM(F5).Refertoparagraph"Fixparameters".
transformationareto
befixed
Matchpointsstep‐by‐
step
Beforecalculatingatransformation,itmustbedefinedwhichpointsaretobematched.
Matchingnewpointsandeditingmatchedpointsisverysimilar.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOMatchCommonPoints.
2.
NEW(F2)orEDIT(F3)
3.
COGOChooseMatchingPointsorCOGOEditMatchingPoints
<SourcePt:>Apointoforiginforthecalculationoftheshiftsand/orrotationand/or
scale.
<TargetPt:>Atargetpointforthecalculationoftheshiftsand/orrotationand/or
scale.
COGO
R9|561
Step
Description
<MatchType:>Thetypeofmatchtobemadebetweenthepointsselectedin
<SourcePt:>and<TargetPt:>.Position&Height,PositionOnly,HeightOnlyor
None.

4.
Fixparameters
Selectthepointstobematched.
SURVY(F5).Tomanuallyoccupyapointandstoreitintheactivejob.
CONT(F1)returnstoCOGOMatchCommonPoints(n)andaddsanewlineof
matchedpointstothematchedpointslist.
Thesettingsonthisscreendefinetheparameterstobeusedinthetransformation.
IFthevaluefora
fieldis
THENthevalueforthisparameterwillbe
‐‐‐‐‐
calculated.
anynumber
fixedtothatvalue.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<∆Easting:>
Userinput
ShiftinEastingdirection.
<∆Northing:>
Userinput
ShiftinNorthingdirection.
<∆Height:>
Userinput
ShiftinHeightdirection.
<Rotation:>
Userinput
RotationaroundtheXaxis.
<Scale:>
Userinput
Scalefactor.
COGO
R9|562
Nextstep
IF
AND
afielddisplays‐‐‐‐‐
theparameter highlightthefield.Enterthevalueoftheparameter.
needstobe
FIX(F4).
fixedtoavalue
afielddisplaysa
value
theparameter highlightthefield.ADJST(F4).
needstobe
calculated
allparametersare
configured
‐
COGO
THEN
CONT(F1)toreturntoCOGOMatchCommonPoints
(n).
R9|563
32.11 AreaDivision
32.11.1 Overview
Description
TheCOGOcalculationareadivisiondividesanareabyadefinedline,bypercentageorbythesize
ofasubarea.
Theareadivisionmethodsarelistedinthetablebelow.Elementsthatmustbeknownforthe
calculationdependontheareadivisionmethod.Atleastthreepointsarerequiredtoforman
area.
Divideby
Using
Definedline
Parallelline
Throughapoint
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
• Onepointonthedividingline
Byadistance
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
• Distance
Throughapoint
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
• Onepointonthedividingline
Byadistance
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
• Distance
Parallelline
‐
• Sizeofnewareainpercentage
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
Perpendicularline
‐
• Sizeofnewareainpercentage
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
Perpendicularline
Percentage
Elementsrequired
COGO
R9|564
Divideby
Area
Using
Elementsrequired
Swingline
Rotationpoint
• Sizeofnewareainpercentage
• Rotationpointoftheswingline
Parallelline
‐
• Sizeofnewarea
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
Perpendicularline
‐
• Sizeofnewarea
• Twopointsdefiningtheline
Swingline
Rotationpoint
• Sizeofnewarea
• Rotationpointoftheswingline
Thecoordinatesoftheknownpoints
• maybetakenfromtheactivejob.
• maybemeasuredduringtheCOGOcalculation.
• maybeentered.
COGO
R9|565
Diagram
Thediagramsshowtheareadivisionmethods.Somediagramsapplytoseveralareadivision
methods.
Areadivisionmethod
<Divide:>
<Using:>
<Shift:>
1.
ByDefinedLine
ParallelLine
ByDistance
2.
ByPercentage
ParallelLine
‐
3.
ByArea
ParallelLine
‐
P3
P1
d
P2
P0
COGO
P0
P1
P2
P3
d
<PointA:>ofdefinedline
<PointB:>ofdefinedline
FirstnewCOGOpoint
SecondnewCOGOpoint
<HDist‐XX:>
R9|566
Areadivisionmethod
<Divide:>
<Using:>
<Shift:>
1.
ByDefinedLine
PerpendicLine
ByDistance
2.
ByPercentage
PerpendicLine
‐
3.
ByArea
PerpendicLine
‐
P2
P1
P3
d
P0
COGO
P0
P1
P2
P3
d
<PointA:>ofdefinedline
<PointB:>ofdefinedline
FirstnewCOGOpoint
SecondnewCOGOpoint
<HDist‐XX:>
R9|567
Areadivisionmethod
1.
<Divide:>
<Using:>
<Shift:>
ByDefinedLine
ParallelLine
ThroughPoint
P2
d
P3
P0
COGO
P1
P0
P1
P2
P3
d
<PointA:>ofdefinedline
<PointB:>ofdefinedline
<ThroughPoint:>;inthiscase
itisaknownpointofthe
existingborder
NewCOGOpoint
<HDist‐XX:>
R9|568
Areadivisionmethod
1.
<Divide:>
<Using:>
<Shift:>
ByDefinedLine
PerpendicLine
ThroughPoint
P2
P1
P3
P0
COGO
d
P0
P1
P2
P3
d
<PointA:>ofdefinedline
<PointB:>ofdefinedline
<ThroughPoint:>;inthiscase
itisaknownpointofthe
existingborder
NewCOGOpoint
<HDist‐XX:>
R9|569
Areadivisionmethod
<Divide:>
<Using:>
<Shift:>
1.
ByPercentage
SwingLine
‐
2.
ByArea
SwingLine
‐
P1
P0
COGO
P2
α
P0
P1
P3
α
FirstnewCOGOpoint
SecondnewCOGOpoint
<RotationPnt:>
<Azimuth:>
R9|570
32.11.2 ChoosinganAreatobeDivided
Access
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOChooseAreatobeDivided.
COGO
ChooseAreatobe
Divided
CONT(F1)
Toacceptthechangesandaccessthesubsequent
screen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<AreatoUse:>
Description
Thesettingdeterminestheavailabilityofthesubse‐
quentfieldsandscreen.
SelectExisting Touseanareafromthe<Job:>selectedinCOGO
COGOBegin.Theareacanbeeditedandanewarea
canbecreatedfrompointsexistinginthe<Job:>.
SurveyNew
Area
COGO
Tosurveypointsthatdonotexistinthejobyet.The
pointswillbeaddedtoanewarea.
R9|571
Field
Option
Description
<AreaID:>
Choicelist
For<AreatoUse:SelectExisting>.Toselectthearea
tobedivided.
Userinput
For<AreatoUse:SurveyNewArea>.Toentera
nameforthenewarea.
<No.ofPoints:>
Output
Numberofpointsformingthearea.
<Area:>
Output
Thesizeoftheselectedarea.
<Perimeter:>
Output
Theperimeterofthearea.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
<AreatoUse:Select CONT(F1)accessesCOGODefineHowtoDivideArea.Referto
Existing>
"32.11.3DividinganArea".
<AreatoUse:
SurveyNewArea>
COGO
CONT(F1)accessesCOGOSurvey:JobName.Referto"COGOSurvey:
JobName,Surveypage".
R9|572
COGO
Survey:JobName,
Surveypage
Pointstobeaddedtothenewareacanbesurveyed.
ALL(F1)
Tomeasureandstoredistancesandangles.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureanddisplaydistances.Available
unless<EDMMode:Tracking>and/or<Log
AutoPts:Yes>,afterthetrackingorloggingis
started.
REC(F3)
Torecorddata.
If<EDMMode:Tracking>and/or<LogAuto
Pts:Yes>,recordsmeasuredpointand
continuestracking.
DONE(F4)
ToendsurveyinganareaandtoaccessCOGO
EditArea:AreaIDwheretheareacanbestored.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)andSHIFTRUN(F5)
Tochangebetweenenteringanindividualpoint
IDdifferenttothedefinedIDtemplateandthe
runningpointIDaccordingtotheIDtemplate.
Referto"15.1IDTemplates".
COGO
R9|573
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Userinput
Theidentifierformanuallyoccupiedpoints.Theconfig‐
uredpointIDtemplateisused.TheIDcanbechanged
inthefollowingways:
• TostartanewsequenceofpointID’stypeoverthe
pointID.
• ForanindividualpointIDindependentoftheID
templateSHIFTINDIV(F5).SHIFTRUN(F5)
changesbacktothenextIDfromtheconfiguredID
template.Referto"15.1IDTemplates".
<ReflectorHt:>
Userinput
Thelastusedreflectorheightissuggestedwhen
accessingtheSurveyapplicationprogram.Anindi‐
vidualreflectorheightcanbytypedin.
<Hz:>
Output
Thecurrenthorizontalangle.
<V:>
Output
Thecurrentverticalangle.
<HorizDist:>
Output
ThehorizontaldistanceafterDIST(F2)waspressed.
Nodistanceisdisplayedwhenaccessingthescreenand
afterREC(F3)orALL(F1).
<HtDiff:>
Output
Theheightdifferencebetweenstationandmeasured
pointafterDIST(F2).Displays‐‐‐‐‐whenaccessingthe
screenandafterREC(F3)orALL(F1).
COGO
R9|574
Nextstep
IFthetaskisto
THEN
changetoanotherpageonthis
screen
PAGE(F6).
stopsurveyingtheareaandtostore DONE(F4)andthenSTORE(F1).COGODefineHowto
thearea
DivideAreaisaccessed.Referto"32.11.3Dividingan
Area".
returntoCOGOChooseAreatobe ESC.
Divided
COGO
R9|575
32.11.3 DividinganArea
Access
Referto"32.11.2ChoosinganAreatobeDivided"toaccessCOGODefineHowtoDivideArea.
COGO
DefineHowtoDivide
Area,
Inputpage
Aftereachchangeofparametersinthisscreen,thevaluesintheoutputfieldsarerecalculated
andupdated.
CALC(F1)
Toperformtheareadivisionandtocontinue
withthesubsequentscreen.CalculatedCOGO
pointsarenotyetstored.
INV(F2)
Tocalculatethevalueforthedistancefromtwo
existingpoints.Availableif<HDist‐XX:>ishigh‐
lighted.
SIZE(F3)andPERC(F3)
Todisplaythesizeandtheperimeterofthesub‐
area.
LAST(F4)
Toselectthevalueforthedistancefrom
previousCOGOinversecalculations.Availableif
<HDist‐XX:>ishighlighted.
SURVY(F5)
TomanuallyoccupyapointfortheCOGOcalcu‐
lation.Availableif<PointA:>,<PointB:>or
<RotationPnt:>ishighlighted.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
COGO
R9|576
SHIFTMODIF(F4)
Tomathematicallymodifythevaluesforthe
distanceorangle.Availableif<HDist‐XX:>or
<Azimuth:>ishighlighted.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<DivideBy:>
Description
Thisfielddefineshowthesizeofthesubareais
defined.
Percentage
Thesizeofthesubareaisgivenin%.
Area
Thesizeofthesubareaisgiveninm2.
DefinedLine
Thenewborderdefiningthesizeofthesubareais
known.
<Using:>
Thisfielddefineshowthenewborderwillrun.
<Sub‐Area‐XX:>
COGO
ParallelLine
Theborderwillbeparalleltoalinedefinedby<Point
A:>and<PointB:>.
Perpendic
Line
Theborderwillbeperpendiculartoalinedefinedby
<PointA:>and<PointB:>.
SwingLine
Theborderwillbealinerotatedaround<Rotation
Pnt:>by<Azimuth:>.
Userinput
For<DivideBy:Percentage>and<DivideBy:Area>.
Thesizeofthesubareamustbetypedeitherin%orin
m2.
R9|577
Field
Option
Description
Whendividingtheareausingaparallelorperpendic‐
ularline,areferencelineisdefinedby<PointA:>and
<PointB:>.Thedirectionofthenewdividinglineis
alwaysthesameasthedirectionofthereferenceline.
Thesubareaisalwaystotheleftofthenewdividing
line.
Whendividingalineusingaswingline,thedirectionof
thenewdividinglineisdefinedbythe<Rotation
Pnt:>andthe<Azimuth:>.Thesubareaisalwaysto
theleftofthenewdividingline.
Output
For<DivideBy:DefinedLine>.Thesizeofthesub
areaiscalculatedinthebackgroundanddisplayed.
<PointA:>
Choicelist
Thefirstpointofthelinewhichisusedasthereference
foranewparallelorperpendicularborder.Allpoints
fromCOGOData:JobNamecanbeselected.
<PointB:>
Choicelist
Thesecondpointofthelinewhichisusedastherefer‐
enceforanewparallelorperpendicularborder.All
pointsfromCOGOData:JobNamecanbeselected.
<Shift:>
Availablefor<DivideBy:DefinedLine>.
ByDistance
Thenewborderwillruninacertaindistancefromthe
linedefinedby<PointA:>and<PointB:>.
ThroughPoint Thenewborderwillrunthroughapointdefinedin
<ThroughPoint:>.
COGO
R9|578
Field
Option
Description
<ThroughPoint:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Shift:ThroughPoint>.Thepoint
throughwhichthenewborderwillrun.
<RotationPnt:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<Using:SwingLine>.Thepointaround
whichthenewborderwillrotateby<Azimuth:>.
<Azimuth:>
Output
Availablefor<Using:SwingLine>.Theangleofthe
newborderfrom<RotationPnt:>tothenewCOGO
point.
<HDist‐XX:>
Thedistancefromthelinedefinedby<PointA:>and
<PointB:>tothenewborder.
UserInput
For<DivideBy:DefinedLine>and<Shift:By
Distance>.
Output
For<DivideBy:Percentage>or<DivideBy:Area>
with<Using:ParallelLine>or<Using:Perpendic
Line>.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheMappage.Refertoparagraph"COGODefineHowtoDivideArea,Map
page".
COGO
DefineHowtoDivide
Area,
Mappage
TheMappageprovidesaninteractivedisplayofthedata.Referto"30MapViewInteractive
DisplayFeature"forinformationonthefunctionalityandsoftkeysavailable.
COGO
R9|579
Nextstep
CALC(F1)performstheareadivisionandaccessesCOGOResultsofAreaDivision.Referto
"32.11.4ResultsoftheAreaDivision".
COGO
R9|580
32.11.4 ResultsoftheAreaDivision
Access
CALC(F1)inCOGODefineHowtoDivideArea.
COGO
ResultsofAreaDivision,
Resultpage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptthecalculationandtocontinuewith
thesubsequentscreen.CalculatedCOGOpoints
arenotyetstored.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<AreaRatio:>
Output
Theratioofthesizeofthetwosubareasinpercent.
<Area1‐XX:>
Output
Thesizeofthefirstsubareainm2.
<Area2‐XX:>
Output
Thesizeofthesecondsubareainm2.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
COGO
R9|581
COGO
ResultsofAreaDivision,
Mappage
ThepointsdefiningtheareaandthecalculatedCOGOpointsareshowninblack.
COGO
AreaDivisionResults,
ResultXpage
Thecoordinatesoftheintersectionpointsofthenewborderwiththeoriginalareaare
displayed.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)accessCOGOAreaDivisionResults.
STORE(F1)
TostorethetworesultsandtoreturntoCOGO
ChooseAreatobeDividedoncebothpointsare
stored
RSLT1(F3)orRSLT2(F3)
Toviewthefirstandsecondresult.
STAKE(F5)
ToaccesstheStakeoutapplicationprogramand
stakeoutthecalculatedCOGOpoint.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)andSHIFTRUN(F5)
Tochangebetweenenteringanindividualpoint
IDdifferenttothedefinedIDtemplateandthe
runningpointIDaccordingtotheIDtemplate.
Referto"15.1IDTemplates".
COGO
R9|582
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Userinput
TheidentifierfortheCOGOpointdependingonthe
pointIDtemplateconfiguredfor<SurveyPts:>in
CONFIGUREIDTemplates.
<Height:>
Userinput
Aheightvaluetobestoredwiththecalculatedpoint
canbetypedin.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
COGO
AreaDivisionResults,
Codepage
Allcodesofthejobcanbeselected.Typeinacodeifrequired.
COGO
AreaDivisionResults,
Plotpage
Thepointsdefiningtheareaandthepointsofthenewborderareshowninblack.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
Nextstep
STORE(F1)storestheresultsandaccessesCOGOChooseAreatobeDivided.For<Write
Logfile:Yes>inCOGOConfiguration,Logfilepagetheresultiswrittentothelogfile.
COGO
R9|583
32.11.5 WorkingExample
Description
Application:
Divideanareabyadefined,parallelline.Thenewborderhastorun
throughaknownpointwiththepointID100.
Goal:
Thepointsformingtheoriginalareaaretobepicked.
Theareadivisionistobecalculated.
Diagram
P3
P1
d
P2
P0
Fieldprocedurestep‐by‐
step
Step
<PointA:>ofdefinedline
<PointB:>ofdefinedline
FirstnewCOGOpoint
SecondnewCOGOpoint
<HDist‐XX:>
Description
1.
MainMenu:Programs...\COGO
2.
COGOCOGOBegin

P0
P1
P2
P3
d
Selectajobandaconfigurationsetwiththesettingsmentionedabove.
CONF(F2)toconfiguretheCOGOapplicationprogram.
COGO
R9|584
Step
Description
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOCOGOMenu.
4.
HighlightAreaDivision.
5.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOChooseAreatobeDivided.
6.
COGOChooseAreatobeDivided
<AreatoUse:SurveyNewArea>
<AreaID:>TypeinanIDforthenewarea.
7.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOSurvey:JobName.
8.
COGOSurvey:JobName
<PointID:>Typeinanameforthefirstpointofthearea.
9.
ALL(F1)tomeasureandstorethefirstpointofthearea.
10.
Surveyallpointsbelongingtothearea.Point100mustbepartofthepoints.
11.
DONE(F4)onceallpointsaresurveyed.
12.
COGOEditArea:AreaID
Checkthepointsformingthearea.
13.
STORE(F1)tostoretheareaandtoaccessCOGODefineHowtoDivideArea.
14.
COGODefineHowtoDivideArea,Inputpage
<DivideBy:DefinedLine>
<Using:ParallelLine>
<PointA:>and<PointB:>Selectthefirstandthesecondpointofthelinewhichis
usedasthereferenceforthenewborder.Thenewborderwillrunparalleltothisline.
COGO
R9|585
Step
Description
<Shift:ThroughPoint>
<ThroughPoint:100>
15.
CALC(F1)toaccessCOGOResultsofAreaDivision.
16.
COGOResultsofAreaDivision,Resultpage
Thesizeofthetwonewsubareasisdisplayed,
17.
CONT(F1)toaccessCOGOAreaDivisionResults.
18.
COGOAreaDivisionResults,Result1page
<PointID:>TheidentifierforthefirstCOGOpointdependingonthepointID
templateconfiguredfor<SurveyPts:>inCONFIGUREIDTemplates.ThepointID
canbechanged.




Thecalculatedcoordinatesaredisplayed.
TypeinapointID.
COORD(F2)viewsothercoordinatetypes.
RSLT1(F3)andRSLT2(F3)toviewthefirstandsecondresult.
STAKE(F5)toaccesstheStakeoutapplicationprogramandstakeoutthecalculated
COGOpoint.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)foranindividualpointIDindependentoftheIDtemplate.SHIFT
RUN(F5)changesbacktothenextIDfromtheconfiguredIDtemplate.
19.
STORE(F1)storesthefirstCOGOpointanddisplaysthecoordinatesofthesecond
COGOpoint.
20.
STORE(F1)storesthesecondCOGOpointandreturnstoCOGOChooseAreatobe
Divided.
COGO
R9|586
Step
Description
21.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)toexittheCOGOapplicationprogram.
COGO
R9|587
32.12 SelectingaResultfromPreviousCOGOInverseCalculations
Description
Selectaresultfrom
previousCOGOinverse
calculationsstep‐by‐
step
Azimuths,distancesandoffsetsrequiredwithintheCOGOtraverseandintersectioncalculations
canbeselectedfrompreviouslycalculatedinverseresults.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOTraverseInputorCOGOIntersec‐
tionInput.
2.
COGOXXInput,Inputpage
Highlight<Azimuth:>,<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>.
3.
LAST(F4)toaccessCOGOLastInverseCalculations.
4.
COGOLastInverseCalculations
AllpreviousCOGOinversecalculationsstoredintheactivejobaredisplayed,sorted
bytimewiththemostrecentatthetop.Thisscreenconsistsofthreecolumns.
• FirstcolumnFrom:
ThepointIDofthefirstknownpointfortheCOGOinversecalculation.
• SecondcolumnTo:
ThepointIDofthesecondknownpointfortheCOGOinversecalculation.
• Thirdcolumn:
Theinformationdisplayedcanvary.‐‐‐‐‐isdisplayedforunavailableinformation,
forexampleifaheightonlypointisused,Azimuthcannotbecalculated.
Azimuth:Thedirectionfromthefirsttothesecondknownpoint.
HDist‐XX:Thehorizontaldistancebetweenthetwoknownpoints.
COGO
R9|588
Step



Description
DateandTimewhentheCOGOinversecalculationwasstored.
VIEW(F3)toviewallcalculatedvaluesforthehighlightedCOGOinversecalculation.
Thisincludestheheightdifference,theslopedistance,thegradeandthecoordinate
differencesbetweenthetwoknownpoints.
DEL(F4)todeletethehighlightedCOGOinversecalculation.
MORE(F5)todisplayotherinformationinthethirdcolumn.
5.
HighlighttheCOGOinversecalculationofwhicharesultistobetakenoverintoCOGO
XXInput,Inputpage.
6.
CONT(F1)toreturntoCOGOXXInput,Inputpage.

TherelevantresultofthehighlightedCOGOinversecalculationiscopiedintothefield
whichwasinitiallyhighlightedinCOGOXXInput,Inputpage.
COGO
R9|589
32.13 ModifyingValuesforAzimuths,DistancesandOffsets
Description
Accessstep‐by‐step
Thevaluesfortheazimuth,thedistanceandtheoffsetrequiredwithintheCOGOtraverseand
intersectioncalculationcanbemathematicallymodified.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"32.2AccessingCOGO"toaccessCOGOTraverseInputorCOGOIntersec‐
tionInput.
2.
COGOXXInput,Inputpage
Highlight<Azimuth:>,<HDist‐XX:>or<Offset:>.
3.
COGO
ModifyValue
SHIFTMODIF(F4)toaccessCOGOModifyValue.
Onthisscreennumberscanbetypedinforthemultiplication,division,additionandsubtraction
withtheoriginalazimuth,distanceoroffsetvalue.Thestandardrulesofmathematicalopera‐
tionsapply.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptthemodifiedvalueandtoreturntothe
screenfromwherethisscreenwasaccessed.The
modifiedvalueiscopiedintothefieldwhichwas
initiallyhighlightedinCOGOXXInput,Input
page.
COGO
R9|590
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Azimuth:>,
<HDist‐XX:>or
<Offset:>
Output
Thenameofthefieldandthevaluewhichwashigh‐
lightedbeforeaccessingCOGOModifyValue.
<Multiply:>
Userinput
Thenumbertomultiplyby.
• Minimum:‐3000
• Maximum:3000
• ‐‐‐‐‐performsamultiplicationby1.
<Divide:>
Userinput
Thenumbertodivideby.
• Minimum:‐3000
• Maximum:3000
• ‐‐‐‐‐performsadivisionby1.
<Add:>
Userinput
Thenumbertobeadded.
• Forazimuths
Minimum:0
Maximum:Fullcircle
• Fordistancesandoffsets
Minimum:0m
Maximum:30000000m
• ‐‐‐‐‐performsanadditionof0.000.
COGO
R9|591
Field
Option
Description
<Subtract:>
Userinput
Thenumbertobesubtracted.
• Forazimuths
Minimum:0
Maximum:Fullcircle
• Fordistancesandoffsets
Minimum:0m
Maximum:30000000m
• ‐‐‐‐‐performsasubtractionof0.000.
<Azimuth:>,
<HDist‐XX:>or
<Offset:>
Output
Themodifiedvalueforthefieldinthefirstline.This
fieldisupdatedwitheverymathematicaloperation.
Anglesgreaterthanthefullcirclearereducedaccord‐
ingly.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)acceptsthemodifiedvalueandreturnstothescreenfromwherethisscreenwas
accessed.
COGO
R9|592
Example:Calculations
foranazimuth
Example:Calculations
foradistance
Step

Userinput
Valueascalculated
Valueasdisplayed
<Azimuth:250.0000>g
1.
<Multiply:2>
500
<Azimuth:100.0000>g
2.
<Divide:3>
166.667
<Azimuth:166.6670>g
3.
<Add:300>
466.667
<Azimuth:66.6670>g
4.
<Subtract:100>
366.667
<Azimuth:366.6670>g
Thebehaviourforanoffsetisidentical.
Step

Userinput
Valueascalculated
Valueasdisplayed
<HDist‐Grid:250.000>m
1.
<Multiply:2>
500
<HDist‐Grid:500.000>m
2.
<Divide:3>
166.667
<HDist‐Grid:166.667>m
3.
<Add:300>
466.667
<HDist‐Grid:466.667>m
4.
<Subtract:100>
366.667
<HDist‐Grid:366.667>m
COGO
R9|593
33 Setup
33.1 Overview
Description
TheSetupprogramisusedwhensettingupaTPSstation,todeterminetheTPSstationcoordi‐
natesandsettingtheTPSorientation.
Setupmethods
• SetAzimuth
• KnownBacksightPoint
• Orientation&HeightTransfer
• Resection
• ResectionHelmert
• LocalResection
Eachsetupmethodrequiresdifferentinputdataandadifferentnumberoftargetpoints.
Allsetupmethodsaredescribedin"33.4SetupMethods".
Properties
ofsetuppoints
Type
Station
Target
Class
REF
MEASorNONE
Subclass
TPS
TPS
Source
Setup(setupmethod)
Setup(setupmethod)
Instrumentsource
TPS
TPS
Setup
R9|594
33.2 AccessingSetup
Access
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\Setup.
OR
PressON.HighlightSetup.CONT(F1).
Referto"31.2AccessingtheProgramsMenu"fordetailsontheONkey.
OR
PressUSER(configuringtheUserMenutoincludetheSetupprogram).
Referto"2USERKey"fordetailsontheUSERkey.
OR
PressSETUP(F3)intheBeginscreenofanotherprogram(otherthanSetup).
SETUP
StationSetupBegin
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandaccessthesubsequent
screen.Thechosensettingsbecomeactive.
CONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheSetupapplicationprogram.
AccessesSETUPConfiguration.Referto"33.3
ConfiguringSetup".
Setup
R9|595
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Job:>
Choicelist
Theactivejob.AlljobsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
<Codelist:>
Choicelist
Nocodesarestoredintheselectedjob.Allcodelists
fromMainMenu:Manage...\Codelistscanbe
selected.
Output
Codeshavealreadybeenstoredintheselectedjob.If
codeshadbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelist,
thenthenameofthecodelistisdisplayed.Ifcodeshave
notbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelistbuttyped
in,thenthenameoftheactivejobisdisplayed.
<ConfigSet:>
Choicelist
Theactiveconfigurationset.Allconfigurationsetsfrom
MainMenu:Manage...\ConfigurationSetscanbe
selected.
<Reflector:>
Choicelist
Thereflectorcurrentlysetintheselectedconfiguration
set.AllreflectorsfromMainMenu:Manage...\Reflec‐
torscanbeselected.
<Add.Constant:>
Output
Theadditiveconstantstoredwiththechosenreflector.
Setup
R9|596
Nextstep
IFtheSetupapplicationprogram
THEN
istobeaccessed
CONT(F1)toacceptthechangesandcontinue.
istobeconfigured
CONF(F2).Referto"33.3ConfiguringSetup".
Setup
R9|597
33.3 ConfiguringSetup
Access
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\Setup.
InSETUPStationSetupBeginpressCONF(F2)toaccessSETUPConfiguration.
OR
PressON.HighlightSetup.CONT(F1).
InSETUPStationSetupBeginpressCONF(F2)toaccessSETUPConfiguration.
OR
PressSHIFTCONF(F2)inSETUPStationSetup.
SETUP
Configuration,
Generalpage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTABOUT(F5)
Todisplayinformationabouttheprogramname,
theversionnumber,thedateoftheversion,the
copyrightandthearticlenumber.
Setup
R9|598
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<SetupReminder:> Choicelist
<TwoFaces:>
Setup
Description
Currentinstrumentsetupdetailscanbedisplayedto
remindtheusertoeitherkeepthecurrentinstrument
setuportocreateanewinstrumentsetup.
Referto"33.4.1SetupReminder"fordetails.
Yes
WheneverCONT(F1)ispressedinaBeginscreen,the
currentsetupinformationisdisplayed.
No
WheneverCONT(F1)ispressedinaBeginscreen,the
currentsetupinformationisnotdisplayedandthe
programcontinuesasnormal.
Choicelist
Definesiftheinstrumentmeasuresthesecondface
automaticallyafterstoringthefirst.
Yes
AfterstoringameasurementwithALL(F1)orREC
(F3)motorisedinstrumentschangefaceautomatically,
non‐motorisedinstrumentsaccessSETUPTelescope
Positioning.ThemeasurementsoffaceIandfaceIIare
averagedonthebaseoffaceI.Theaveragedvalueis
stored.
No
Noautomaticmeasurementintwofaces.

Forthesetupmethods<Method:SetAzimuth>
or<Method:KnownBSPoint>theselected
optioninthefield<TwoFaces:>isignored.For
thesesetupmethods,measurementsarenot
madeintwofaces.
R9|599
Field
Option
Description
<UseScale:>
Choicelist
TheappearanceoftheSETUPResultsscreendiffers
withthissetting.
Yes
Thecalculatedscalefactorandppmvaluefromthe
resectionandorientationandheighttransfercalcula‐
tionaredisplayedintheSETUPResults,Sigmapage.
Theppmvaluemaybesetinthesystemasthe
geometricppmvalue.InSETUPStationSetupthe
<CurrentScale:>isdisplayedandPPM(F5)isavail‐
able.
No
Thecalculatedscalefactorfromtheresectioncalcula‐
tionisdisplayedintheSETUPResults,Sigmapagebut
cannotbesetasthegeometricppmvalue.
2D
Instrumentpositionshorizontallytothepoint.
3D
Instrumentpositionshorizontallyandverticallytothe
point.
Off
Instrumentdoesnotpositiontothepoint.
Choicelist
Tosetthedirectiontothebacksightpointtozero.
Yes
Sets<AR:0.0000>towardsthebacksightpoint.Ifset
inthecurrentdisplaymask,<AR:>displaysthehori‐
zontalangledifferencebetweenthebacksightpoint
andthemeasuredpoint.Thishasnoeffectontheset
orientation.
<AutoPosition:>
<DisplayAR:>
Setup
R9|600
Field
Option
Description
No
Doesnotsetavaluefor<AR:>.Ifthedisplaymaskis
configuredtodisplay<AR:>intheSurveyapplication
program,thevalueisidenticaltotheazimuth.
If<SetAngleRight:Yes>andmorethanone
backsightpointisused,thebehaviourisasfor
<SetAngleRight:No>.

Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheParameterspage.
SETUP
Configuration,
Parameterspage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTABOUT(F5)
Todisplayinformationabouttheprogramname,
theversionnumber,thedateoftheversion,the
copyrightandthearticlenumber.
Setup
R9|601
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
When<Method:Resections>or<Method:Ori&HtTransfer>,thefollowingfieldsapply:
<HzAccOri:>
Userinput
ForResectionorOrientationandHeightTransfer.Limit
forthestandarddeviationoftheorientationforresec‐
tionandorientationandheighttransfer.
<PosAccTarget:>
Userinput
ForResectionorOrientationandHeightTransfer.Posi‐
tionaccuracyofthetargetpointforresectionand
orientationandheighttransfer.
<HtAccTarget:>
Userinput
ForResectionorOrientationandHeightTransfer.
Heightaccuracyofthetargetpointforresectionand
orientationandheighttransfer.
When<Method:LocalResection>,thefollowingfieldsapply:
<Define:>
Choicelist
ForLocalResection.TodefinethepositiveNorthor
positiveEastaxis.
NorthingAxis Thesecondpointmeasureddefinesthedirectionofthe
positiveNorthaxis.
EastingAxis
Thesecondpointmeasureddefinesthedirectionofthe
positiveEastaxis.
When<Method:ResectionHelmert>,thefollowingfieldsapply:
<Weighting:>
Setup
1/Distanceor Tochangethedistanceweightingthatisusedinthe
1/Distance2 calculationofthestationheightintheresection.
R9|602
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheCheckspage.
SETUP
Configuration,
Checkspage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTABOUT(F5)
Todisplayinformationabouttheprogramname,
theversionnumber,thedateoftheversion,the
copyrightandthearticlenumber.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
When<Method:KnownBSPoint>,thefollowingfieldsapply:
<PosCheck:>
YesorNo
Allowsachecktobemadeonthehorizontalcoordinate
differencebetweentheexistingandthemeasured
knownbacksightpoint.Ifthedefined<PosLimit:>is
exceeded,thesetupcanberepeated,skippedorstored.
<PosLimit:>
Userinput
Availablefor<PosCheck:Yes>.Setsthemaximum
horizontalcoordinatedifferenceacceptedintheposi‐
tioncheck.
Setup
R9|603
Field
Option
Description
<HeightCheck:>
YesorNo
Allowsachecktobemadeontheverticaldifference
betweentheexistingandthemeasuredknownback‐
sightpoint.Ifthe<HeightLimit:>isexceeded,the
stakeoutcanberepeated,skippedorstored.
<HeightLimit:>
Userinput
Availablefor<HeightCheck:Yes>.Setsthemaximum
verticaldifferenceacceptedintheheightcheck.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheLogfilepage.
SETUP
Configuration,
Logfilepage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTABOUT(F5)
Todisplayinformationabouttheprogramname,
theversionnumber,thedateoftheversion,the
copyrightandthearticlenumber.
Setup
R9|604
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<WriteLogfile:>
YesorNo
Togeneratealogfilewhentheapplicationprogramis
exited.
Alogfileisafiletowhichdatafromanapplication
programiswrittento.Itisgeneratedusingtheselected
<FormatFile:>.
<FileName:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Thenameofthefileto
whichthedatashouldbewritten.Alogfileisstoredinthe
\DATAdirectoryoftheactivememorydevice.Thedatais
alwaysappendedtothefile.
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesLogfileswhereanamefor
anewlogfilecanbecreatedandanexistinglogfilecanbe
selectedordeleted.
<FormatFile:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Aformatfiledefines
whichandhowdataiswrittentoalogfile.Formatfilesare
createdusingStonex®Tools.Aformatfilemustfirstbe
transferredfromtheCompactFlashcardtotheSystem
RAMbeforeitcanbeselected.Referto"22
Tools...\TransferObjects..."forinformationonhowto
transferaformatfile.
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesFormatFileswherean
existingformatfilecanbeselectedordeleted.
Setup
R9|605
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Setup
R9|606
33.4 SetupMethods
33.4.1 SetupReminder
Description
• Whenactivated,thesetupreminderfunctiondisplaysascreenwhichenablestheuserto
checkthecurrentstationsetupdetailsbeforeproceedingwiththesurvey.Whenthisscreen
appears,threeoptionsareavailabletotheuser:
• 1.Tokeepthecurrentstationsetupandproceedwiththesurvey.
• 2.Tocreateanewstationsetup.
• 3.Tocheckthebacksightpoint.
• Thesetupreminderfunctionisavailabletoeveryapplicationprogram,except:
• AlignmentToolKit
• Setup
Access
Whenthesetupreminderfunctionisactivated(referto"33.3ConfiguringSetup"),thecurrent
stationsetupdetailsaredisplayedwheneverCONT(F1)ispressedinaBeginscreeninan
applicationprogram.
Setup
R9|607
SetupReminderscreen
Reminderforsetupmethod
‐SetAzimuth
‐KnownBSPoint
Reminderforsetupmethod
‐Ori&HtTransfer
‐Resection
‐ResectionHelmert
‐LocalResection
Descriptionofsoftkeys
Softkey
Description
CONT(F1)
Tocontinuewiththeexistingprogram.
NEW(F3)
TostarttheSetupprogramandcreateanewstationsetup.
CHKPT(F6)
ToopentheCheckRecordedPt/BacksightPtscreen.
Setup
R9|608
33.4.2 SetAzimuth
Requirements
• Thepositioncoordinatesofthestationpointarerequired.Theinstrumentissetupand
orientedtoeitheraknownorunknowntargetpoint,towhichatrueorassumedazimuthis
set.
Updating
Hzmeasurements
• Astationsetupusingthissetupmethodisalwaysautomaticallyflaggedwithan’updatelater’
attribute.Therefore,allanglemeasurementstakenfromthatstationarealwaysautomati‐
callyupdated.
Accessstep‐by‐step
• ThisscreencanbeaccessedfromtheSETUPStationSetupscreenorbypressingSETAZ
(F5)intheSURVEYSurveyscreen.Thestep‐by‐stepdescriptionisforaccessfromthe
SETUPStationSetupscreen.
• Refertothestatedchapterformoreinformationonscreens.
Setup
R9|609
Step
Description
1.
PressONtoaccesstheProgramsmenu.
2.
SelectandactivateSetuptomovetothefirstscreen.
3.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPStationSetup.
4.
<Method:>EnsurethatSetAzimuthisselected.
Referto
chapter
<StationCoord:>Selectthesourcefortheinstrumentstationcoordi‐
nates.
<StationID:>Enter/Selecttheinstrumentstation.
<InstrumentHt:>Entertheheightoftheinstrumentstation.
<FixpointJob:>Selectthefixpointjobofthecontrol/targetpoints.
5.
Thegeometricscalecorrectionisdisplayed.
Thecorrectiondisplayeddependsupontheoptionschosenin
CONFIGURETPSCorrections,GeoPPMpage:
16.4
• if<CalcScale:Automatically>,<ComputdScale:>isdisplayed.
• if<CalcScale:Manually>,<CurrentScale:>isdisplayed.
6.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPSetStn&Ori‐SetAzimuth.
Setup
R9|610
SETUP
SetStn&Ori‐
SetAzimuth,
Setuppage
SET(F1)
Tosetthestationandorientationandexitthe
Setupapplicationprogram.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureadistancetothepointbeingusedto
settheazimuth.A
distancemeasurementisNOTrequiredwhen
settingtheStationandtheOrientationSET(F1).
CheckingisNOTperformedonthedistance
measurementwhensettingtheStationandthe
OrientationSET(F1).
Az=0(F4)
AvailableontheSetuppage.Toset<Azimuth:
0>andrunning.Thisvalueisnotsettothe
systemuntilSET(F1)ispressed.
HOLD(F5)orFREE(F5)
AvailableontheSetuppageandif<iLock:Off>.
HOLD(F5)freezesthecurrent<Azimuth:>
value,makingitpossibletosetthe<Azimuth:>
valuefirst,turntheinstrumenttothedesired
directionandreleasethe<Azimuth:>value
usingFREE(F5).
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)andSHIFTRUN(F5)
AvailableontheSetuppage.Tochangebetween
enteringanindividualbacksightpointID
differenttothedefinedIDtemplateandthe
runningpointIDaccordingtotheIDtemplate.
Referto"15.1IDTemplates"formoreinforma‐
tiononpointIDtemplates.
Setup
R9|611
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<BacksightID:>
Userinput
PointIDofthebacksightpointaccordingtothepointID
template.
<ReflectorHt:>
Userinput
Thedefaultreflectorheightasdefinedintheactive
configurationsetissuggested.
<Azimuth:>
Userinput
Thecurrentsystemazimuthvalue.Ifadifferent
azimuthistypedinandENTERispressedorifAz=0
(F4)ispressed,thisazimuthvalueisdisplayedinthe
fieldandupdatedwiththetelescopemovement.The
valueisnotsettothesystemuntilSET(F1)ispressed.
<HorizDist:>
Output
Press(F2)tomeasureadistancetothetargetpoint
beingusedtosettheazimuth.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thenextpageistobeaccessed
PAGE(F6)changestotheBSInfopage.
thestationandorientationistobeset
SET(F1)tosetthestationandorientation.
Setup
R9|612
SETUP
SetStn&Ori‐
SetAzimuth,
BSInfopage
SET(F1)
Tosetthestationandorientationandexitthe
Setupapplicationprogram.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<BacksightID:>
Output
BacksightIDasenteredinSETUPStationSetup.
<Code:>
Choicelist
Thecodeforthebacksightpoint.
<CodeDesc:>
Output
Ashortdescriptionofthecode.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thenextpageistobeaccessed
PAGE(F6)changestotheStnInfopage.
thestationandorientationistobeset
SET(F1)tosetthestationandorientation.
Setup
R9|613
SETUP
SetStn&Ori‐
SetAzimuth,
StnInfopage
SET(F1)
Tosetthestationandorientationandexitthe
Setupapplicationprogram.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<StationID:>
Output
StationIDasselectedinSETUPStationSetup.
<InstrumentHt:>
Userinput
Theinstrumentheight.
<Code:>
Choicelist
Thecodeforthestationpoint.
<CodeDesc:>
Output
Ashortdescriptionofthecode.
<StnEasting:>
Output
Theeastingcoordinateforthesetupstation.
<StnNorthing:>
Output
Thenorthingcoordinateforthesetupstation.
<StnHeight:>
Output
Theheightofthesetupstation.
Setup
R9|614
Field
Option
Description
<CurrentScale:>
Output
Thegeometricscalecorrectionisdisplayed.
Thecorrectiondisplayeddependsupontheoptions
choseninCONFIGURETPSCorrections,GeoPPM
page.Referto"16.4TPSCorrections"fordetails.
Nextstep
Setazimuth
step‐by‐step
IF
THEN
thenextpageistobeaccessed
PAGE(F6)changestotheSetuppage.
thestationandorientationistobeset
SET(F1)tosetthestationandorientation.
Application:
Setuptheinstrumentoveraknownpointwithorientationtoapoint
withknownazimuth.
Settings:
Set<Automation:iLock>inCONFIGUREEDM&iLockSettings.
Setup
R9|615
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
AccessSETUPSetStn&Ori‐SetAzimuth.
33.4.2
2.
SETUPSetStn&Ori‐SetAzimuth,Setuppage
<Azimuth:>Theazimuthtothebacksightpoint.
<BacksightID:>ThepointIDofthebacksightpoint.
<ReflectorHt:>Thecurrentreflectorheight.
Aimatthereflectoronthebacksightpoint.
3.
SET(F1)tosetthestationandorientationandreturntoMainMenu.
Setup
R9|616
33.4.3 KnownBacksightPoint
Requirements
• Thepositioncoordinatesofthestationpointarerequired.Theinstrumentissetupand
orientedtoaknownbacksighttarget.
Accessstep‐by‐step
Refertothestatedchapterformoreinformationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
PressONtoaccesstheProgramsmenu.
2.
SelectandactivateSetuptomovetothefirstscreen.
3.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPStationSetup.
4.
<Method:>EnsurethatKnownBSPointisselected.
Referto
chapter
<StationCoord:>Selectthesourcefortheinstrumentstationcoordi‐
nates.
<StationID:>Enter/Selecttheinstrumentstation.
<InstrumentHt:>Entertheheightoftheinstrumentstation.
<FixpointJob:>Selectthefixpointjobofthecontrol/targetpoints.
5.
Thegeometricscalecorrectionisdisplayed.
Thecorrectiondisplayeddependsupontheoptionschosenin
CONFIGURETPSCorrections,GeoPPMpage:
16.4
• if<CalcScale:Automatically>,<ComputdScale:>isdisplayed.
• if<CalcScale:Manually>,<CurrentScale:>isdisplayed.
6.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPSetStn&Ori‐KnownBSPoint.
Setup
R9|617
SETUP
SetStn&Ori‐
KnownBSPoint,
Setuppage
SET(F1)
Tosetthestationandorientationandexitthe
Setupapplicationprogram.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasurethedistancetothebacksightpoint.
MORE(F5)
AvailableontheSetuppage.Togglesbetween
thedisplayedvalues.Asdefaultthe∆valuesfor
azimuth,horizontaldistanceandheightare
shown.IfMORE(F5)ispressed,thedisplay
changestothemeasuredvaluesofazimuth,hori‐
zontaldistanceandheight.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<BacksightID:>
Choicelist
BacksightpointID.All3Dand2Dpointsfrom
<FixpointJob:>canbeselected.
<ReflectorHt:>
Userinput
Thedefaultreflectorheightasdefinedintheactive
configurationsetissuggested.
<CalcAzimuth:>
Output
Displaysthecalculatedazimuthfromtheselected
stationtothebacksightpoint.
<CalcHDist:>
Output
Displaysthecalculatedhorizontaldistancebetween
theselectedstationandbacksightpoint.
Setup
R9|618
Field
Option
Description
<∆HorizDist:>
Output
Thedifferencebetweenthecalculatedhorizontal
distancefromstationtobacksightpointandthemeas‐
ureddistance.
<∆Height:>
Output
Thedifferencebetweenthecoordinateheightofthe
backsightpointandthemeasuredheightoftheback‐
sightpoint.Ifthebacksightpointisa2Dpoint,thisfield
shows‐‐‐‐‐.
<HorizDist:>
Output
DisplayedafteradistancewasmeasuredwithDIST
(F2)andafterMORE(F5)waspressed.Themeasured
horizontaldistancetothebacksightpoint.Shows‐‐‐‐‐
beforeDIST(F2).
<Height:>
Output
DisplayedafteradistancewasmeasuredwithDIST
(F2)andafterMORE(F5)waspressed.Themeasured
heightofthebacksightpoint.Shows‐‐‐‐‐beforeDIST
(F2)
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thenextpageistobeaccessed
PAGE(F6)changestotheBSInfopage.
thestationandorientationistobeset
SET(F1)tosetthestationandorientation.
Setup
R9|619
SETUP
SetStn&Ori‐
KnownBSPoint,
BSInfopage
SET(F1)
Tosetthestationandorientationandexitthe
Setupapplicationprogram.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<BacksightID:>
Output
BacksightIDasenteredinSETUPStationSetup.
<Code:>
Choicelist
Thecodeforthebacksightpoint.
<CodeDesc:>
Output
Ashortdescriptionofthecode.
<BSEasting:>
Output
Theeastingcoordinateforthebacksightpoint.
<BSNorthing:>
Output
Thenorthingcoordinateforthebacksightpoint.
<BSHeight:>
Output
Theheightofthebacksightpoint.
Setup
R9|620
Nextstep
SETUP
SetStn&Ori‐
KnownBSPoint,
StnInfopage
IF
THEN
thenextpageistobeaccessed
PAGE(F6)changestotheStnInfopage.
thestationandorientationistobeset
SET(F1)tosetthestationandorientation.
ThisscreenhasthesamefunctionalityasSETUPSetStn&Ori‐SetAzimuth,StnInfopage.
Referto"33.4.2SetAzimuth"forfurtherinformation.Referto"8.5.3EditingaCode"forfurther
informationoncoding.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
thenextpageistobeaccessed
PAGE(F6)changestotheSetuppage.
thestationandorientationistobeset
SET(F1)tosetthestationandorientation.
Setup
R9|621
33.4.4 OrientationandHeightTransfer
Requirements
• Thepositioncoordinatesofthestationpointarerequired.Theinstrumentissetupand
orientedtooneormoreknownbacksighttargets.
Accessstep‐by‐step
Refertothestatedchapterformoreinformationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
PressONtoaccesstheProgramsmenu.
2.
SelectandactivateSetuptomovetothefirstscreen.
3.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPStationSetup.
4.
<Method:>EnsurethatOri&HtTransfrisselected.
Referto
chapter
<StationCoord:>Selectthesourcefortheinstrumentstationcoordi‐
nates.
<StationID:>Enter/Selecttheinstrumentstation.
<InstrumentHt:>Entertheheightoftheinstrumentstation.
<FixpointJob:>Selectthefixpointjobofthecontrol/targetpoints.
5.
Thegeometricscalecorrectionisdisplayed.
Thecorrectiondisplayeddependsupontheoptionschosenin
CONFIGURETPSCorrections,GeoPPMpage:
16.4
• if<CalcScale:Automatically>,<ComputdScale:>isdisplayed.
• if<CalcScale:Manually>,<CurrentScale:>isdisplayed.
6.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPMeasureTarget.
Setup
R9|622
SETUP
MeasureTarget
ALL(F1)
Tomeasureandstorethedistancesandangles
madetothecontrolpoints.Afterstoringthe
measurementdatatothe<Job:>,thenext
<PointID:>inthejobisdisplayed.Theinstru‐
mentpositionstothepointifenoughdatais
available.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureanddisplaydistances.
REC(F3)
Recordsdisplayedvaluestothecurrentjob.A
distancemeasurementisnotnecessarybefore
pressingREC(F3).Afterstoringthemeasure‐
mentdatatothe<Job:>,thenext<PointID:>in
thejobisdisplayed.Theinstrumentpositionsto
thepointifenoughdataisavailable.
CALC(F5)
Availablewhensufficientdata(whentwoor
morepointshavebeenmeasured)isavailable
forcalculation.Runsthesetupcalculationand
accessesSETUPResults.
SHIFTFIND(F2)
Availableoncesufficientdataisavailablefor
calculation.AccessesSETUPFindTargetto
guidethereflectortotheselectedtargetpoint.
Referto"33.6FindingaTargetPoint"forinfor‐
mationonthisscreen.
SHIFTPOSIT(F4)
Availableoncesufficientdataisavailablefor
calculation.Topositiontheinstrumenttothe
selectedtargetpoint.
Setup
R9|623
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDofthetargetpointtobemeasured.All
pointsfrom<FixpointJob:>canbeselected,except
classNONE.
<ReflectorHt:>
Userinput
Thedefaultreflectorheightasdefinedintheactive
configurationsetissuggested.
<Azimuth:>
Output
Thecurrenthorizontalangle.
<V:>
Output
Thecurrentverticalangle.
<SlopeDist:>
Output
ThemeasuredslopedistanceafterDIST(F2)was
pressed.
<∆Azimuth:>
Output
Displaysthedifferencebetweenthecalculatedazimuth
andthecurrenthorizontalangle.
If<Method:Resection>,displays‐‐‐‐‐untilsufficient
dataforcalculationisavailable.
<∆HorizDist:>
Output
Thedifferencebetweenthecalculatedandthemeas‐
uredhorizontaldistance.
<∆Height:>
Output
Thedifferencebetweenthegivenandthemeasured
heightofthetargetpoint.
Setup
R9|624
Nextsteps

IF
THEN
moretargetpoints
aretobemeasured
ALL(F1)tomeasureandstoredistancesandangles,or
REC(F3)tostorethecurrentmeasurement.
sufficienttarget
pointsweremeas‐
ured
CALC(F5)toaccessSETUPResults.
Referto"33.5SetupResults"formoreinformation.
Amaximumoftentargetpointscanbemeasuredandusedforthecalculation.Whenthe
maximumnumberofpointswasmeasured,theSETUPResultsscreenisaccessedautomatically
afterALL(F1).IntheSETUPAdditionalInformationscreenmeasuredtargetpointscanbe
deletedandtheSETUPMeasureTargetscreencanbereaccessedtomeasurenewtarget
points.
Setup
R9|625
33.4.5 Resection/ResectionHelmert
Requirements
Thecoordinatesofthestationpointareunknown.Thecoordinatesandorientationaredeter‐
minedbysightingtooneormoreknowntargetpoints(maximumoftentargetpoints).Only
anglesorbothanglesanddistancesmaybemeasured.Foraresection,leastsquaresorrobust
calculationsareused.ForaresectionHelmert,Helmertcalculationsareused.
Accessstep‐by‐step
Refertothestatedchapterformoreinformationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
PressONtoaccesstheProgramsmenu.
2.
SelectandactivateSetuptomovetothefirstscreen.
3.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPStationSetup.
4.
<Method:>SelecteitherResectionorResectionHelmert.
Referto
chapter
<StationID:>Entertheinstrumentstation.
<InstrumentHt:>Entertheheightoftheinstrumentstation.
<FixpointJob:>Selectthefixpointjobofthecontrol/targetpoints.
5.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPMeasureTarget.
6.
SETUPMeasureTarget
7.
ALL(F1)orREC(F3).
8.
Referto"33.4.4OrientationandHeightTransfer"fordetailson
fields/keys.
Setup
33.4.4
R9|626
33.4.6 LocalResection
Description
Accessstep‐by‐step
• Thismethodcanbeusedtocalculatethetwoorthree‐dimensionallocalcoordinatesforthe
instrumentstationandtheorientationofthehorizontalcirclefromdistanceandangular
measurementstotwotargetpoints.
• ForResectionand/orResectionHelmert,referto"33.4.5Resection/ResectionHelmert".
Step
Description
1.
PressONtoaccesstheProgramsmenu.
2.
SelectandactivateSetuptomovetothefirstscreen.
3.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPStationSetup.
4.
<Method:>EnsurethatLocalResectionisselected.
<StationID:>Entertheinstrumentstation.
<InstrumentHt:>Entertheheightoftheinstrumentstation.
<StnHtFrom:>Selectthesourcefortheinstrumentstationheight.
<StationHt:>Entertheelevationoftheinstrumentstation.
5.
PressCONT(F1)toaccessSETUPMeasureTarget.
Setup
R9|627
SETUP
StationSetup
CONT(F1)
Toacceptallsettingsandcontinue.Thechosen
settingsareactivatedandthenextscreenSETUP
MeasureTargetisdisplayed.
SCALE(F4)
Todisplaythegeometriccorrectionsusedwith
themeasurements.Referto"16.4TPSCorrec‐
tions".
PPM(F5)
Todisplaytheatmosphericcorrectionsused
withthemeasurements.Referto"16.4TPS
Corrections".
SHIFTCONF(F2)
ToconfiguretheapplicationprogramSETUP.
ThescreenSETUPConfigurationisdisplayed.
Referto"33.3ConfiguringSetup".
SHIFTINDIV(F5)andSHIFTRUN(F5)
Tochangebetweensuccessivenumbering
<StationID>andindividualnumbering<Indiv
PtID>.enteringanindividualbacksightpointID
differenttothedefinedIDtemplateandthe
runningpointIDaccordingtotheIDtemplate.
Referto"15.1IDTemplates"formoreinforma‐
tiononpointIDtemplates.
Setup
R9|628
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Method:>
Choicelist
<Method:LocalResection>
<StationID:>
Userinput
ThestationIDoftheinstrumentstation.
<InstrumentHt:>
Userinput
Instrumentheight.
<StnHtFrom:>
UserEntered
or
Target1Ht
Diff
Onlyavailablewhen<Method:LocalResection>.
For<StnHtFrom:UserEntered>theheightvalueof
thestationwillbeenteredbytheuserandusedto
calculatetheheightofthemeasuredpoints.
For<StnHtFrom:Target1HtDiff>thefirstmeas‐
uredpointwillbegivenHeight=0andtheheightofthe
stationwillbecalculatedrelativetothispoint.
<StationHt:>
Output
Onlyavailablewhen<StnHtFrom:UserEntered>.
Theelevationoftheinstrumentstation.
Setup
R9|629
Localresection
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
1.
CONT(F1)toaccessSETUPMeasureTarget1.
2.
SETUPMeasureTarget1
Referto
chapter
33.4.4
Chooseatargetpointandtypeinareflectorheight.Aimcorrectlyatthe
reflector.
3.
ALL(F1)torecordthemeasurement.
4.
SETUPMeasureTarget2
33.4.4
Chooseatargetpointandtypeinareflectorheight.Aimcorrectlyatthe
reflector.
5.
ALL(F1)torecordthemeasurementandtoaccessSETUPResults.
6.
SETUPResults,StnCoordspage
7.
SET(F1)tostoretheselectedsetupdataandexittheapplicationprogram.
Setup
33.5
R9|630
33.5 SetupResults
33.5.1 LeastSquareandRobustCalculation
Description
• Thisscreenisdisplayedafteraresectionororientationandheighttransfercalculation.
• Forthecalculationstheleastsquareortherobustmethodcanbeused.Afterthestationis
set,allfollowingmeasurementswillberelatedtothisnewstationandorientation.
Access
PressCALC(F5)intheSETUPMeasureTargetscreen.
SETUP
Results,
StnCoordspage
ThescreendescribedconsistsoftheStnCoords,Sigma,StnCodeandPlotpage.Theexplana‐
tionsforthesoftkeysgivenbelowarevalidfortheStnCoordsandSigmapage.Referto"7.3.2
CreatingaNewPoint"forinformationonthekeysontheStnCodepagereferto"30.6PlotMode
‐MapViewScreenArea"forinformationonthekeysonthePlotpage.
Setup
R9|631
SET(F1)
Tosetdataselectedin<Set:>andtostoreall
setupdataandexittheapplicationprogram.
ROBST(F3)orLSQRS(F3)
Todisplaytheresultsfortherobustortheleast
squarescalculationmethod.
INFO(F4)
Todisplayadditionalinformationaboutthe
accuracyofthemeasuredtargetpointsandto
deleteinconsistentmeasurementsintheSETUP
AdditionalInformationscreen.
DONE(F5)(ApplicabletoAddPointsLater)
TotemporarilyexittheSetupprogram.The
stationsetupwillbeincompletebutcanbe
continuedandcompletedatalatertime.
SURVY(F5)(ApplicabletoMeasAllNow)
ToaccessSETUPMeasureTargetandto
measuremoretargetpoints.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFT3PAR(F2)orSHIFT4PAR(F2)
Switchesbetweena3parameterand4param‐
eterhelmertcalculation.Theresultsareimmedi‐
atelyupdated.
SHIFTOTHER(F5)
Availableiftwosolutionswerecalculated.
Changesbetweenthesesolutions.
Setup
R9|632
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<StationID:>
Userinput
StationIDofthecurrentstationsetup.
<No.ofPoints:>
Output
Numberofpointsusedincalculation.
<Set:>
Choicelist
Theselectedoptionsaresetandstoredinthesystem.
Allothervaluesaretakenfromthecurrentsystem
setup.
E,N,Ht,Ori, Availablefor<Method:Resection>and<Method:
E,N,HtorE,N, ResectionHelmert>.
Ori
Ht,Ori,
HtorOri
Availablefor<Method:Ori&HtTransfr>.
<InstrumentHt:>
Output
Thecurrentinstrumentheight.
<StnEasting:>
Output
For<Method:Ori&HtTransfr>Eastingisdisplayed
eitherfromfixpointjoborsystem,asselected.
For<Method:Resection>and<Method:Resection
Helmert>thecalculatedEastingisdisplayed.
<StnNorthing:>
Output
For<Method:Ori&HtTransfr>Northingisdisplayed
eitherfromfixpointjoborsystem,asselected.
For<Method:Resection>and<Method:Resection
Helmert>thecalculatedNorthingisdisplayed.
<StnHeight:>
Output
ThecalculatedHeightisdisplayed.
<NewAzimuth>
Output
Neworientedazimuthwithrunningangleastelescope
moves.
Setup
R9|633
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheSigmapage.
SETUP
Results,
Sigmapage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<σEasting:>
Output
Availablefor<Method:Resection>and<Method:
ResectionHelmert>.Standarddeviationofthecalcu‐
latedstationEasting.
<σNorthing:>
Output
Availablefor<Method:Resection>and<Method:
ResectionHelmert>.Standarddeviationofthecalcu‐
latedstationNorthing.
<σ Height:>
Output
StandarddeviationofthecalculatedstationHeight.
<∆Height:>
Output
Deltaheight,thedifferencebetweenoriginalandcalcu‐
latedheight.
<σHzOrient:>
Output
Standarddeviationofthecalculatedorientation.
<CalcScale:>
Output
Calculatedscalefactorfromresectionororientation
andheighttransfer.
<Calcppm:>
Output
Availablefor<UseScale:Yes>.ppmfromcalculated
scale.ppm=(scale*1000000)‐1.
<CurrentScale:>
Output
Thegeometricscalecorrectionisdisplayed.
Thecorrectiondisplayeddependsupontheoptions
choseninCONFIGURETPSCorrections,GeoPPM
page.Referto"16.4TPSCorrections"fordetails.
Setup
R9|634
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheStnCodepage.
SETUP
Results,
StnCodepage
ThefunctionalityoftheStnCodepageissimilartoMANAGENewPoint,Codepage.Referto
"7.3.2CreatingaNewPoint"formoreinformationonkeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<PointCode:>
Description
Thethematicalcodeforthepoint.
Choicelist
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.All
pointcodesfromthejobcodelistcanbeselected.The
attributesareshownasoutput,inputorchoicelist
fieldsdependingontheirdefinition.
Userinput
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
Codescanbetypedinbutnotselectedfromacodelist.
Acheckisperformedtoseeifapointcodeofthisname
alreadyexistsinthejob.Ifso,theaccordingattributes
areshown.
<CodeDesc:>
Output
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.The
descriptionofthecode.
<Attributen:>
Userinput
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
Uptoeightattributevaluesareavailable.
Setup
R9|635
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
Setup
R9|636
33.5.2 AdditionalInformation
Description
• TheSETUPAdditionalInformationscreendisplaysinformationabouttheaccuracyofthe
measuredtargetpointsandallowsexclusionofmeasurementsthatarenottobeusedinthe
calculation.
• Additionalmeasurementscanbemadeandmeasurementscanbedeleted.
Access
PressINFO(F4)intheSETUPResultsscreen.
SETUP
AdditionalInformation,
Statuspage
RECLC(F1)
Torecalculatethestationdataandupdateall
valuesaftertargetpointshavebeendeletedor
excludedfromthecalculation.Returnstothe
SETUPResultsscreen.
USE(F3)
Todecidewhetherornottouseatargetpointin
thecalculation.ChangesthevalueintheUse
column.
REMOV(F4)
Todeleteapointfromthelistofmeasuredtarget
pointsandexcludeitfromtheSetupcalculation.
MORE(F5)
Tochangebetweendisplaying∆Hz,∆Distt,
∆Height,∆Eastand∆Northinthefourth
column.
SHIFTSURVY(F5)
AccessestheSETUPMeasureTargetscreento
measuremoretargetpoints.
Setup
R9|637
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthescreen.Refer
to"30MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature"for
moreinformation.
Descriptionofcolumns
Column
Description
The indicatesthatthedeltavalueofeithermeasuredhorizontalangle,
distanceorheightexceedsthecalculationlimit.
PointID
ThepointIDofthemeasuredtargetpoints.
Use
Indicatesifandhowatargetpointisusedinthestationcalculation.
Choicesare3D,2D,1DandNO.
∆Hz
CanbedisplayedbypressingMORE(F5).
Differencebetweencalculatedandmeasuredhorizontalangleforthe
targetpoints.Ifatargetpointdoesnothavecoordinates,‐‐‐‐‐are
displayed.Differencesexceedingthedefinedlimitareindicatedbya*.
∆Dist
CanbedisplayedbypressingMORE(F5).
Differencebetweencalculatedandmeasureddistancefromthestation
tothetargetpoints.Ifatargetpointdoesnothavecoordinates,‐‐‐‐‐are
displayed.Differencesexceedingthedefinedlimitareindicatedbya*.
∆Height
CanbedisplayedbypressingMORE(F5).
Differencebetweencalculatedandmeasuredheightofthetargetpoints.
Ifatargetpointdoesnothaveaheightcoordinate,‐‐‐‐‐aredisplayed.
Differencesexceedingthedefinedlimitareindicatedbya*.
Setup
R9|638
Column
Description
∆East
CanbedisplayedbypressingMORE(F5).
Differencebetweenfixpointandmeasuredpoint,calculatedfromnew
stationcoordinates.
∆North
CanbedisplayedbypressingMORE(F5).
Differencebetweenfixpointandmeasuredpoint,calculatedfromnew
stationcoordinates.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothePlotpage.
SETUP
Results,
Plotpage
Referto"30.6PlotMode‐MapViewScreenArea"fordetailsonthekeysonthePlotpage.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Nextsteps
IF
THEN
moretargetpoints
aretobemeasured
SHIFTSURVY(F5)toaccesstheSETUPMeasureTargetscreen.
pointmeasurements RECLC(F1)torecalculatethestationdataandreturntotheSETUP
aretobeaccepted
Resultsscreen.
Setup
R9|639
33.5.3 LocalResectionCalculation
Description
• Thisscreenisdisplayedafterthelocalresectioncalculation.
• Afterthestationisset,allfollowingmeasurementswillberelatedtothisnewstationand
orientation.
Access
PressALL(F1)intheSETUPMeasureTarget2screen.
SETUP
Results,
StnCoordspage
SET(F1)
Tosetdataselectedin<Set:>andtostoreall
setupdataandexittheapplication
program.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthescreen.
Setup
R9|640
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<StationID:>
Userinput
StationIDofthecurrentstationsetup.
<No.ofPoints:>
Output
Numberofpointsusedincalculation.
<Set:>
Output
Thedisplayedoptionsaresetandstoredinthesystem.
Allothervaluesaretakenfromthecurrentsystem
setup.
<InstrumentHt:>
Output
Thecurrentinstrumentheight.
<StnEasting:>
Output
ThecalculatedEasting.
<StnNorthing:>
Output
ThecalculatedNorthing.
<StnHeight:>
Output
ThecalculatedHeight.
<NewAzimuth>
Output
Neworientedazimuthwithrunningangleastelescope
moves.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheStnCodepage.
SETUP
Results,
StnCodepage
ThefunctionalityoftheStnCodepageissimilartoMANAGENewPoint,Codepage.Referto
"7.3.2CreatingaNewPoint"formoreinformationonkeys.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<PointCode:>
Setup
Description
Thethematicalcodefortheoffsetpoint.
R9|641
Field
Option
Description
Choicelist
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.All
pointcodesfromthejobcodelistcanbeselected.The
attributesareshownasoutput,inputorchoicelist
fieldsdependingontheirdefinition.
Userinput
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
Codescanbetypedinbutnotselectedfromacodelist.
Acheckisperformedtoseeifapointcodeofthisname
alreadyexistsinthejob.Ifso,theaccordingattributes
areshown.
<CodeDesc:>
Output
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.The
descriptionofthecode.
<Attributen:>
Userinput
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
Uptoeightattributevaluesareavailable.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheStnPlotpage.
SETUP
Results,
StnPlotpage
Referto"30.6PlotMode‐MapViewScreenArea"forinformationonthekeysonthePlotpage.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Setup
R9|642
33.6 FindingaTargetPoint
Description
• TheSETUPFindTargetscreencanbeaccessed,toguidethereflectortotheselectedtarget
point.
• ThescreenisonlyavailableiftheStakeoutapplicationisavailableontheinstrument.
• Thefunctionalityofthisscreenissimilartoastakeoutroutineandisintendedtohelpfind
hiddensurveybenchmarksorreferencepoints.
Access
PressSHIFTFIND(F2)inSETUPMeasureTargetonceenoughdataisavailabletoroughly
calculatetheneworientation.
SETUP
FindTarget
Thisscreenisshownwith<StakeMode:OrthofromStn>.Forgraphics/symbolsbeing
displayedthesettingsare<Symbols:FromStation>and<Graphics:FromStation>.Referto
"34.4.1ElementsoftheGraphicalDisplayintheStakeout"forinformationonelementsofthe
graphic.
CONT(F1)
ExitsSETUPFindTargetandreturnstoSETUP
MeasureTarget.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureanddisplaydistances.Updatesall
outputfieldsinthescreen.
Setup
R9|643
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Output
ThepointIDofthetargetpointtobemeasured.
<ReflectorHt:>/
<hr:>
Output
Thedefaultreflectorheightasdefinedintheactive
configurationsetissuggested.
<GoFORWARD:>/
<FORW:>or
<GoBACWARD:>/
<BACK:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistancefromthecurrentreflectorposi‐
tiontothetargetpointalongthelinefromthestationto
thecurrentreflectorposition.Fieldis<Go
FORWARD:>whenthereflectorhastobemoved
towardstheinstrumentand<GoBACKWARD:>when
thereflectorhastobemovedawayfromtheinstru‐
ment.Shows‐‐‐‐‐beforethefirstdistancemeasure‐
mentwithDIST(F2).
<GoRIGHT:>/
<RGHT:>or
<GoLEFT:>/
<LEFT:>
Output
Horizontaldistancefromthecurrentreflectorposition
tothetargetpointorthogonaltothelinefromthe
stationtothecurrentreflectorposition.Fieldis<Go
RIGHT:>whenthetargetpointistotherightofthat
lineand<GoLEFT:>whenthereflectoristotheleftof
thatline.Shows‐‐‐‐‐beforethefirstdistancemeasure‐
mentwithDIST(F2).
<FILL:>or<CUT:>
Output
Theheightdifferencebetweenthetargetpointandthe
measuredpoint.Fieldis<CUT:>whenthemeasured
pointishigherthanthetargetpointand<FILL:>ifthe
measuredpointislowerthanthetargetpoint.Shows
‐‐‐‐‐beforethefirstdistancemeasurementwithDIST
(F2)orifthetargetpointisa2Dpoint.
Setup
R9|644
Field
Option
Description
<Height>or<Ht:>
Output
Themeasuredheightofthecurrentposition.Shows
‐‐‐‐‐beforethefirstdistancemeasurementwithDIST
(F2)orifthetargetpointisa2Dpoint.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)toreturntotheSETUPMeasureTargetscreen.
Setup
R9|645
34 Stakeout
34.1 Overview
Description
TheStakeoutapplicationprogramisusedtoplacemarksinthefieldatpredeterminedpoints.
Thesepredeterminedpointsarethepointstobestaked.Thepointstobestakedmay
• havebeenuploadedtoajobontheinstrumentusingStonex®Tools.
• alreadyexistinajobontheinstrument.
• havebeenuploadedfromanASCIIfiletoajobontheinstrumentusingMainMenu:
Convert...\ImportASCII/GSIDatatoJob.
• betypedin.
Diagram
P1
d1
d2
P0
Stakeout
P2
d3
P0
P1
P2
d1
d2
d3
Station
Currentposition
Pointtobestaked
Stakeoutelement
Stakeoutelement
Stakeoutelement
R9|646
Stakeoutmodes
Pointscanbestakedusingdifferentmodes:
• Polarmode.
• Orthogonalmode.

Pointtypes
Thepointstobestakedmustexistinajobontheactivememorydeviceorcanbetypedin.
Itispossibletostake:
• Positiononlypoints.
• Heightonlypoints.
• Pointswithfullsetsofcoordinates.
Heighttype
Heighttypeofthepointtobestaked:
Heightsource
Heightscanbetakenintoaccountfromtheverticalcomponentofacoordinatetriplet.
Codingofstakedpoints
Codescanbeattachedtostakedpoints.Referto"9Coding"forinformationoncoding.The
behaviourofthecodingfunctionalitydependsonthe
• selected<StakeoutJob:>asthejobwiththepointstobestaked.
• selected<Job:>astheactivejob.
• definitionofadisplaymaskwithinputfieldsforcodingandattributes.
Orthometric
IF<StakeoutJob:>and
<Job:>
ANDadisplaymaskfor THEN
pointcodesand
attributes
areidentical
isused
Stakeout
thepointcodeandattributes
attachedtothepointtobestaked
aresuggestedforthestakedpoint.
Theycanbechanged.
R9|647
IF<StakeoutJob:>and
<Job:>
ANDadisplaymaskfor THEN
pointcodesand
attributes
areidentical
isnotused
thestakedpointisstoredwiththe
pointcodeandattributesattached
tothepointtobestaked.
arenotidentical
isused
<PointCode:<None>>is
suggested.Itcanbechangedand
attributescanbeentered.Aftera
pointhasbeenstoredwithacode
differentto<PointCode:<None>>
thenthelastusedpointcodeis
suggestedthenexttime.
arenotidentical
isnotused
thestakedpointisstoredwith
<PointCode:<None>>.
Itmayhappenthatthecodesand/orattributesofthestakedpointandthepointtobestakeddo
notmatch.Inthiscase,ascreenopenswheretheycanbecorrected.Referto"9.6Codeand
AttributeMismatch"forinformationonsolvingacodeand/orattributemismatch.
Propertiesofstaked
points
Thepropertiesstoredwithstakedpointsare:
• Class:MEAS
• Subclass:Stakeout
• Source:Stakeout
• Instrumentsource:TPS
Stakeout
R9|648
Averagingofstaked
points
TheprinciplesforaveragingareidenticaltothoseoftheSurveyapplicationprogram.Referto
"7.3.4MeanPage"forinformationonaveraging.
Stakeout
R9|649
34.2 AccessingStakeout
Access
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\Stakeout.
OR
PressON.HighlightStakeout.CONT(F1).Referto"31.2AccessingtheProgramsMenu"for
informationontheONkey.
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
PressSTAKE(F5)fromanotherapplicationprogram,forexampleCOGO.
STAKEOUT
StakeoutBegin
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandaccessthesubsequent
screen.Thechosensettingsbecomeactive.
CONF(F2)
ToconfigureStakeoutapplicationprogram.
AccessesSTAKEOUTConfiguration.Referto
"34.3ConfiguringStakeout".
SETUP(F3)
Tosetupstation.AccessesSETUPStation
Setup.
Stakeout
R9|650
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<StakeoutJob:>
Choicelist
Thejobcontainingthepointstobestaked.Alljobs
fromMainMenu:Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
<Job:>
Choicelist
Theactivejob.AlljobsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.Pointswhichare
stakedoutarestoredinthisjob.Theoriginalpointsto
bestakedarenotcopiedtothisjob.
ThedatafromthisjobisshowninMANAGEData:Job
Name.
<Codelist:>
Choicelist
Nocodesarestoredintheselectedjob.Allcodelists
fromMainMenu:Manage...\Codelistscanbe
selected.
Output
Codeshavealreadybeenstoredintheselected<Job:>.
IfcodeshadbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelist,
thenthenameofthecodelistisdisplayed.Ifcodeshave
notbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelistbuttyped
in,thenthenameoftheactivejobisdisplayed.
<ConfigSet:>
Choicelist
Theactiveconfigurationset.Allconfigurationsets
fromMainMenu:Manage...\ConfigurationSetscan
beselected.
<Reflector:>
Choicelist
Thereflectorcurrentlysetintheselectedconfigura‐
tionset.AllreflectorsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Reflectorscanbeselected.
<Add.Constant:>
Output
Theadditiveconstantstoredwiththechosenreflector.
Stakeout
R9|651
Nextstep
IFtheStakeout
application
program
THEN
istobeaccessed
CONT(F1)acceptsthechangesandaccessesStakeoutapplication
program.Referto"34.4StakingOut".
istobeconfigured
CONF(F2).Referto"34.3ConfiguringStakeout".
Stakeout
R9|652
34.3 ConfiguringStakeout
Access
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\Stakeout.InSTAKEOUTStakeoutBeginpressCONF(F2)
toaccessSTAKEOUTConfiguration.
OR
PressON.HighlightStakeout.CONT(F1).InSTAKEOUTStakeoutBeginpressCONF(F2)
toaccessSTAKEOUTConfiguration.
OR
PressSHIFTCONF(F2)inSTAKEOUTXXStakeout.
STAKEOUT
Configuration,
Generalpage
ThisscreenconsistsoftheGeneralpage,theCheckspage,theHeightspageandtheLogfile
page.Theexplanationsforthesoftkeysgivenbelowarevalidforallpages,unlessotherwise
stated.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DMASK(F3)
AccessesCONFIGUREDefineDisplayMaskn.
Availablefor<DisplayMask:>beinghigh‐
lightedonGeneralpage.Referto"15.2Display
Settings".
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTABOUT(F5)
Todisplayinformationabouttheprogramname,
theversionnumber,thedateoftheversion,the
copyrightandthearticlenumber.
Stakeout
R9|653
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<Orientate:>
Description
Thereferencedirectiontobeusedtostakeoutpoints.
Thestakeoutelementsandthegraphicaldisplayshown
intheStakeoutapplicationprogramarebasedonthis
selection.
FromStation
Thedirectionoftheorientationisfromtheinstrument
tothepointtobestaked.
ToStation
Thedirectionoftheorientationisfromthepointtobe
stakedtotheinstrument.
FromNorth
ThedirectionoftheorientationisfromtheNorthdirec‐
tiontothepointtobestaked.
ToNorth
Thedirectionoftheorientationisfromthepointtobe
stakedtotheNorthdirection.
ToArrow
Thedirectionoftheorientationisfromthecurrent
positiontothepointtobestaked.Thegraphicaldisplay
showsanarrowpointinginthedirectionofthepointto
bestaked.
ToLastPoint Timewisethelastrecordedpoint.Ifnopointsareyet
staked,<Orientate:ToNorth>isusedforthefirst
pointtobestaked.
To
Point(Stake)
Stakeout
Apointfrom<StakeoutJob:>selectedinSTAKEOUT
StakeoutBegin.
R9|654
Field
<To:>
Option
Description
To
Point(Store)
Apointfrom<Job:>selectedinSTAKEOUTStakeout
Begin.
To
Line(Stake)
Thedirectionoftheorientationisparalleltoarefer‐
encelinefrom<StakeoutJob:>selectedinSTAKEOUT
StakeoutBegin.Openthelistboxtocreate,editor
deleteareferenceline.
To
Line(Store)
Thedirectionoftheorientationisparalleltoarefer‐
encelinefrom<Job:>selectedinSTAKEOUTStakeout
Begin.Openthelistboxtocreate,editordeletearefer‐
enceline.
Choicelist
Availablefor<Orientate:ToPoint(Stake)>,<Orien‐
tate:ToPoint(Store)>,<Orientate:ToLine(Stake)>
and<Orientate:ToLine(Store)>.Toselectthepoint
orlinetobeusedfororientation.Referto"7.2
AccessingDataManagement"forinformationon
creating,editinganddeletingaknownpoint.
<StakeMode:>
<VisualGuides:>
Stakeout
Themethodofstakingout.
Polar
Thedirectionfromtheorientationreference,thehori‐
zontaldistanceandthecut/fillisdisplayed.
Orthogonal
Thedistanceforwardsto/backwardsfromthepoint,
thedistanceright/lefttothepointandthecut/fillis
displayed.
Arrowsand/oragraphicaldisplayinSTAKEOUTXX
Stakeout.helpfindingthepointtobestaked.
R9|655
Field
Option
Description
Off
Neitherarrowsnoragraphicaldisplayareshown.
Arrows
UponpressingDIST(F2)arrowsareshown.
Graphics
Agraphicaldisplayisshown.Referto"34.4.1Elements
oftheGraphicalDisplayintheStakeout"..
Arrows&Grap UponpressingDIST(F2)arrowsareshown.Agraph‐
hics
icaldisplayisalwaysshown.
<MessageLine:>
Foreachpointwhichisselectedforstaking,angleand
distanceinformationismomentarilydisplayedinthe
messageline.
Off
Noinformationisdisplayedinthemessageline.
DistFromStn ThedeltaHzanglethattheinstrumentshouldturnto
thepointandthedistancefromtheinstrumenttothe
pointismomentarilydisplayedinthemessageline.
DistFrmLast ThedeltaHzanglethattheinstrumentshouldturnto
Pt
thepointandthedistancefromthelaststakedpointis
momentarilydisplayedinthemessageline.
<DisplayMask:>
<ClosestPoint:>
Stakeout
Choicelist
Theuserdefineddisplaymasktobeshownin
STAKEOUTXXStakeout.Alldisplaymasksofthe
activeconfigurationsetdefinedinCONFIGURE
DisplaySettingscanbeselected.
Theorderofthepointssuggestedforstakingout.
R9|656
Field
<AutoPosition:>
<UpdateAngle:>
<StorePtID:>
Option
Description
Yes
Afterstakingandstoringapoint,thenextpoint
suggestedforstakingoutisthepointclosesttothe
pointwhichwasstaked.Iftherearemanypointsin
<StakeoutJob:>,thesearchmaytakeafewseconds.
No
Afterstakingandstoringonepoint,thenextpoint
suggestedforstakingoutisthesubsequentonein
<StakeoutJob:>.
2D
Instrumentpositionshorizontallytothepointtobe
staked.
3D
Instrumentpositionshorizontallyandverticallytothe
pointtobestaked.
Off
Instrumentdoesnotpositiontothepointtobestaked.
Yes
Anglesareupdatedwithtelescopemovementaftera
distancewasmeasured.
No
Anglesandstakeoutvaluesareupdatedafteradistance
measurement.Thenallvaluesarefrozenuntilthenext
distanceistaken.When<Automation:Robotic:>and
lockedtoatargetthevaluesdonotchange.
SameasStake Themanuallyoccupiedstakedpointsarestoredwith
Pt
thesamepointID’sasthepointstobestaked.
Prefix
Stakeout
Addsthesettingfor<Prefix/Suffix:>infrontofthe
originalpointID’s.
R9|657
Field
<Prefix/Suffix:>
Option
Description
Suffix
Addsthesettingfor<Prefix/Suffix:>attheendofthe
originalpointID’s.
Userinput
Availablefor<StorePtID:Prefix>and<StorePtID:
Suffix>.Theidentifierwithuptofourcharactersis
addedinfrontoforattheendoftheIDofthemanually
occupiedstakedpoint.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheCheckspage.Refertoparagraph"STAKEOUTConfiguration,Checks
page".
Stakeout
R9|658
STAKEOUT
Configuration,
Checkspage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PosCheck:>
YesorNo
Allowsachecktobemadeonthehorizontalcoordinate
differencebetweenthestakedpointandthepointtobe
staked.Ifthedefined<PosLimit:>isexceeded,the
stakeoutcanberepeated,skippedorstored.
<PosLimit:>
Userinput
Availablefor<PosCheck:Yes>.Setsthemaximum
horizontalcoordinatedifferenceacceptedintheposi‐
tioncheck.
<HeightCheck:>
YesorNo
Allowsachecktobemadeontheverticaldifference
betweenthestakedpointandthepointtobestaked.If
thedefined<HeightLimit:>isexceeded,thestakeout
canberepeated,skippedorstored.
<HeightLimit:>
Userinput
Availablefor<HeightCheck:Yes>.Setsthemaximum
verticaldifferenceacceptedintheheightcheck.
<BeepnearPt:>
YesorNo
Theinstrumentbeepswhenthehorizontalradial
distancefromthecurrentpositiontothepointtobe
stakedisequaltoorlessthandefinedin<Distfrom
Pt:>.
<DistfromPt:>
Userinput
Availablefor<BeepnearPt:Yes>.Thehorizontal
radialdistancefromthecurrentpositiontothepointto
bestakedwhenabeepshouldbeheard.
Stakeout
R9|659
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheHeightspage.Refertoparagraph"STAKEOUTConfiguration,Heights
page".
STAKEOUT
Configuration,
Heightspage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<HeightOffset:>
Userinput
Allowsaconstantheightoffsettobeappliedtothe
heightofthepoints.
<EditHeight:>
Yes
Thefield<DHt:>forthedesignheightisdisplayedin
STAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout,Stakepageand
STAKEOUTPolarStakeout,Stakepage.Thedesign
heightistheheightofthepointtobestaked.Thevalue
for<DHt:>canbechanged.
No
Thefield<Ht:>fortheheightofthecurrentpositionis
displayedinSTAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout,Stake
pageandSTAKEOUTPolarStakeout,Stakepage.The
valuefor<Ht:>cannotbechanged.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheLogfilepage.Refertoparagraph"STAKEOUTConfiguration,Logfile
page".
Stakeout
R9|660
STAKEOUT
Configuration,
Logfilepage
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<WriteLogfile:>
YesorNo
Togeneratealogfilewhentheapplicationprogramis
exited.
Alogfileisafiletowhichdatafromanapplication
programiswrittento.Itisgeneratedusingtheselected
<FormatFile:>.
<FileName:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Thenameofthe
filetowhichthedatashouldbewritten.Alogfileis
storedinthe\DATAdirectoryoftheactivememory
device.Thedataisalwaysappendedtothefile.
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesXXLogfileswherea
nameforanewlogfilecanbecreatedandanexisting
logfilecanbeselectedordeleted.
<FormatFile:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<WriteLogfile:Yes>.Aformatfile
defineswhichandhowdataiswrittentoalogfile.
FormatfilesarecreatedusingStonex®Tools.Aformat
filemustfirstbetransferredfromtheCompactFlash
cardtotheSystemRAMbeforeitcanbeselected.Refer
to"22Tools...\TransferObjects..."forinformationon
howtotransferaformatfile.
OpeningthechoicelistaccessesXXFormatFiles
whereanexistingformatfilecanbeselectedor
deleted.
Stakeout
R9|661
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Stakeout
R9|662
34.4 StakingOut
34.4.1 ElementsoftheGraphicalDisplayintheStakeout
Description
Elementsofgraphical
display
Agraphicaldisplayprovidesaguidetofindthepointtobestakedout.Theelementsofthe
graphicaldisplayusedwithintheStakeoutapplicationprogramscreensareexplainedinthis
chapter.Someoftheelementsdependontheselectionfor<VisualGuides:>inSTAKEOUT
Configuration,Generalpage.Otherelementsarecommonlydisplayed.
TheMappageprovidesaninteractivedisplayofthedata.Referto"30.5MapMode"forinfor‐
mationonthefunctionalityandsoftkeysavailable.
Theodolite
Currentscale
Reflector
Pointtobestaked
North
Northarrow

For<VisualGuides:Off>nographicaldisplayisshownonthescreen.
Stakeout
R9|663
Graphicaldisplay
Forscale>1000mthecircleisdisplayedingrey.
FromStationorNorth
Stakeout
ToStationorNorth
Forscale0.5m
R9|664
34.4.2 ManualEntryofPointstobeStaked
Description
Manualentryofpointstobestakedcanbeusedtoinputangleanddistancevalues.

Itispossibletotypeinanglesanddistancesindependentoftheused<StakeMode:>.
Manualentryofpoints
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
1.
Setupandorienttheinstrument.
33
2.
StarttheStakeoutapplicationprogram.
3.
STAKEOUTStakeoutBegin
Checkthesettings.
4.
CONT(F1)toaccessSTAKEOUTXXStakeout.
5.
STAKEOUTXXStakeout
34.4
SHIFTMSTAK(F3)toaccessSTAKEOUTManualEntry.
6.
STAKEOUTManualEntry
Enterthevaluesofthepointtobestaked.
7.

8.
STAKE(F1)toaccessSTAKEOUTXXStakeout.
Thepointiscreatedandthecoordinatesofthepointareremembered
allowingthepointtobestakedout.
STAKEOUTXXStakeout
Stakeout
R9|665
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
Checkthereflectorheight.
9.
Continuewithstep9.fromparagraph"Stakeoutinorthogonalfrom
stationmodestep‐by‐step".
Stakeout
R9|666
34.4.3 StakingOutinOrthogonalMode
Description
Pointscanbestakedoutusingorthogonalvaluestoguidetothepointtobestaked.Valuesare
relativetothelinedefinedbystationandcurrentposition.Thestakeoutelementsareahori‐
zontaldistanceforwards/backwards,ahorizontaldistanceright/leftandacut/fill.Thevalues
arecalculatedbetweenthecurrentpositionandthepointtobestaked.Thevaluesarecalculated
eitherfromthestationtothepointorfromthepointtothestationdependingonthesettingof
<StakeMode:>.
Orthogonalfromandto
station
P1
d1d2+
P0
P2
d3+
P0
P1
P2
d1
d2
d3
Station
Currentposition
Pointtobestaked
<GoFORWARD:>or<GoBACK:>
<GoRIGHT:>or<GoLEFT:>
<CUT:>or<FILL:>

<StakeMode:OrthofromStn>isconfiguredinSTAKEOUTConfiguration,Generalpage.
Referto"34.3ConfiguringStakeout".
Access
Referto"34.2AccessingStakeout"toaccessSTAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout.
Stakeout
R9|667
STAKEOUT
OrthogonalStakeout,
Stakepage
Thepagesshownarethosefromatypicalconfigurationset.Anadditionalpageisavailablewhen
auserdefineddisplaymaskisused.
ALL(F1)
Tomeasureadistanceandstoredistanceand
angles.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureadistance.
REC(F3)
Tostoreanglesanddistance.Distancemustbe
measuredbefore.
2FACE(F4)
TotakeameasurementinFaceIandFaceII.The
pointstoredisanaverageofthetwomeasure‐
ments.
WhenusinginstrumentsfittedwithiLock,the
pointisautomaticallymeasuredinbothfaces,
theresultingpointisstoredandtheinstrument
isreturnedtothefirstface.
Thishotkeyisonlyavailablefor<EDMMode:
Standard>and<EDMMode:Fast>andinthe
SurveyandStakeoutprograms.
SURVY(F5)
ToaccessSurveyapplicationprogramto
measurepointsindependentfromtheStakeout
applicationprogram.ToreturntoStakeout
applicationprogram,pressSHIFTQUIT(F6)or
ESC.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Stakeout
R9|668
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toconfigurestakeout.Referto"34.3Config‐
uringStakeout".
SHIFTPOS2D(F3)
Topositionthetelescope(X,Y)ontothepointto
bestaked.
SHIFTPOS3D(F4)
Topositionthetelescope(X,Y,Z)ontothepoint
tobestaked.
SHIFTMSTAK(F5)
Toenterangleanddistancevaluestostakeouta
point.Referto"34.4.2ManualEntryofPointsto
beStaked".
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDofthepointtobestaked.Accesses
STAKEOUTData:JobNamewherepointsareshown
accordingtosortandfiltersettingsandstakedpoints
areindicatedby .
<ReflectorHt:>or
<hr:>
Userinput
Thedefaultreflectorheightasdefinedintheactive
configurationsetissuggested.
<GoFORWARD:>or Output
<FORW:>
Stakeout
Thehorizontaldistancealongthelinedefinedby
stationandreflectorfromthecurrentpositiontothe
pointtobestaked.ortomovetowardsthestation
dependingon<Symbols:>.
R9|669
Field
Option
Description
<GoBACK:>or
<BACK:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistanceinreversedirectionfromthe
linedefinedbystationandreflectorfromthecurrent
positiontothepointtobestaked.ortomoveaway
fromthestationdependingon<Symbols:>.
<GoRIGHT:>or
<RGHT:>
Output
Thedirectiondependson<StakeMode:>.Thehori‐
zontaldistanceorthogonaltotherightoftheline
definedbystationandreflectorfromthecurrentposi‐
tiontothepointtobestaked.tomovetotherightof
thelinedefinedin<Symbols:>,tomovetotheleftof
thelinedefinedin<Symbols:>.
<GoLEFT:>or
<LEFT:>
Output
Thedirectiondependson<StakeMode:>.Thehori‐
zontaldistancefromthecurrentpositiontothepointto
bestakedorthogonaltotheleftofthelinedefinedby
stationandreflector.tomovetotheleftoftheline
definedin<Symbols:>,tomovetotherightofthe
linedefinedin<Symbols:>.
<CUT:>
Output
Thenegativeheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
currentpositiontotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
Thevaluefor<HeightOffset:>configuredin
STAKEOUTConfiguration,Heightspageistakeninto
account.Movedown.
Stakeout
R9|670
Field
Option
Description
<FILL:>
Output
Thepositiveheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
currentpositiontotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
Thevaluefor<HeightOffset:>configuredin
STAKEOUTConfiguration,Heightspageistakeninto
account.Moveup.
<Height:>or<Ht:> Output
Availablefor<EditHeight:No>inSTAKEOUTConfig‐
uration,Heightspage.
Theheightofthecurrentpositionisdisplayedasortho‐
metricheight.Thevaluefor<HeightOffset:>config‐
uredinSTAKEOUTConfiguration,Heightspageis
takenintoaccount.
<DesignHt:>or
<DHt:>
Availablefor<EditHeight:Yes>inSTAKEOUT
Configuration,Heightspage.
Thedesignheight,whichistheheightofthepointtobe
staked,isdisplayedasorthometricheight.Thevalue
for<HeightOffset:>configuredinSTAKEOUTConfig‐
uration,Heightspageisnottakenintoaccount.
Changingthevaluefor<DHt:>changesthevalues
displayedfor<CUT:>and<FILL:>.
Userinput
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheMappage.Refertoparagraph"STAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout,Map
page".
Stakeout
R9|671
STAKEOUT
OrthogonalStakeout,
Mappage
TheMappageprovidesaninteractivedisplayofthedata.Referto"30MapViewInteractive
DisplayFeature"forinformationonthefunctionalityandsoftkeysavailable.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Stakeoutinorthogonal
fromstationmode
step‐by‐step
Thefollowingtableexplainsthemostcommonsettings.Refertothestatedchapterformore
informationonscreens.
Step
1.

Description
Referto
chapter
Setupandorienttheinstrument.
33
<Automation:Robotic>and<EDMMode:Tracking>areconfigured 16.1
inCONFIGUREEDM&iLockSettings.
2.
StarttheStakeoutapplicationprogram.
34.2
3.
STAKEOUTStakeoutBegin
34.2
Checkthesettings.
4.
CONF(F2)toaccessSTAKEOUTConfiguration,Generalpage.
5.
STAKEOUTConfiguration,Generalpage
34.3
<Orientate:FromStation>

6.
<StakeMode:Orthogonal>
Thisstep‐by‐stepinstructionusestypicalsettingsinallotherfieldson 34.3
allpagesinSTAKEOUTConfiguration.
CONT(F1)toaccessSTAKEOUTStakeoutBegin.
Stakeout
R9|672
Step
Description
7.
CONT(F1)toaccessSTAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout.
8.
STAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout,Stakepage
Referto
chapter
CheckthesuggestedpointIDandthereflectorheight.
9.
10.

DIST(F2).
Movetothepointtobestakedeitherbyfollowingtherangeinformation
inthefields<FORW:>,<BACK:>,<RGHT:>and<LEFT:>orthegraph‐
icaldisplay.
Whenthevalueisatornearlyzero,thecurrentpositionisthepointto
bestaked.
11.
Holdthereflectorsteadyoverthemarker.
12.
REC(F1)storesdistanceandangles.

13.
For<PosCheck:Yes>and/or<HeightCheck:Yes>inSTAKEOUT
34.4.5
Configuration,Checkspage,acheckismadeonthehorizontaland/or
verticalcoordinatedistancefromthestakedpointtothepointtobe
staked.Ifeitheroftheconfigureddifferencelimitsareexceeded,
STAKEOUTDifferenceLimitExceededisaccessed.
Aremorepointstobestaked?
• Ifyes,continuewithstep14.
• Ifno,continuewithstep16.
14.
STAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout,Stakepage
Stakeout
R9|673
Step
Description
Referto
chapter
Accordingtosortandfiltersettings,thesubsequentpointin<Stakeout
Job:>issuggestedforstakingout.
Stakeoutinorthogonal
tostationmode
step‐by‐step
15.
Repeatsteps8.to13.
16.
SHIFTQUIT(F6)toreturntothescreenfromwhereSTAKEOUT
StakeoutBeginwasaccessed.
Thestepsareidenticaltothoseofstakingoutinorthogonalfromstationmode.Followthe
instructionsinparagraph"Stakeoutinorthogonalfromstationmodestep‐by‐step"using
<Orientate:ToStation>and<StakeMode:Orthogonal>.Thevaluesarecalculatedfromthe
pointtothestation.
Stakeout
R9|674
34.4.4 StakingOutinPolarMode
Description
Thestakeoutelementsareadirectionfromthestation,ahorizontaldistanceandacut/fill.The
rangeinformationiscalculatedfromthecurrentpositiontothepointtobestakedinreference
tothestation.
Diagram
P1
a
b
P0
P2
c
P0
P1
P2
a
b
c
Station
Currentposition
Pointtobestaked
<∆DISTANCE:>
<∆HZ:>
<CUT:>or<FILL:>

<StakeMode:Polar>isconfiguredinSTAKEOUTConfiguration,Generalpage.Referto"34.3
ConfiguringStakeout".
Access
Referto"34.2AccessingStakeout"toaccessSTAKEOUTPolarStakeout.
STAKEOUT
PolarStakeout,
Stakepage
Thepagesshownarethosefromatypicalconfigurationset.Anadditionalpageisavailablewhen
auserdefineddisplaymaskisused.
ThekeysareidenticalwiththoseinSTAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout,Stakepage.Referto
"34.4.3StakingOutinOrthogonalMode"forinformationonthekeys.
Stakeout
R9|675
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Choicelist
ThepointIDofthepointtobestaked.Accesses
STAKEOUTData:JobNamewherepointsareshown
accordingtosortandfiltersettingsandstakedpoints
areindicatedby .
<ReflectorHt:>or
<hr:>
Userinput
Thedefaultreflectorheightasdefinedintheactive
configurationsetissuggested.
<∆HZ:>
Output
Thedifferenceofthehorizontalanglefromthepointto
bestakedtothecurrentposition.

For<Orientate:FromStation>and<Orien‐
tate:ToStation>thevalueiscalculatedand
displayedpermanently.Forotherorientation
methods,thedistancemustbemeasuredbefore
thevaluecanbedisplayed.
<∆DISTANCE:>or
<∆D:>
Output
Thedifferenceofthehorizontaldistancefromthepoint
tobestakedtothecurrentpositionalongtheline
definedbycurrentpositionandstation.
<CUT:>
Output
Thenegativeheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
currentpositiontotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
Thevaluefor<HeightOffset:>configuredin
STAKEOUTConfiguration,Heightspageistakeninto
account.Movedown.
Stakeout
R9|676
Field
Option
Description
<FILL:>
Output
Thepositiveheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
currentpositiontotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
Thevaluefor<HeightOffset:>configuredin
STAKEOUTConfiguration,Heightspageistakeninto
account.Moveup.
<Height:>or<Ht:> Output
Availablefor<EditHeight:No>inSTAKEOUTConfig‐
uration,Heightspage.
Theheightofthecurrentpositionisdisplayedasortho‐
metricheight.Thevaluefor<HeightOffset:>config‐
uredinSTAKEOUTConfiguration,Heightspageis
takenintoaccount.
<DesignHt:>or
<DHt:>
Userinput
Availablefor<EditHeight:Yes>inSTAKEOUT
Configuration,Heightspage.
Thedesignheight,whichistheheightofthepointtobe
staked,isdisplayedasorthometricheight.Thevalue
for<HeightOffset:>configuredinSTAKEOUTConfig‐
uration,Heightspageisnottakenintoaccount.
Changingthevaluefor<DHt:>changesthevalues
displayedfor<CUT:>and<FILL:>.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheMappage.Refertoparagraph"STAKEOUTOrthogonalStakeout,Map
page".
Stakeout
R9|677
STAKEOUT
PolarStakeout,
Mappage
TheMappageprovidesaninteractivedisplayofthedata.Referto"30MapViewInteractive
DisplayFeature"forinformationonthefunctionalityandsoftkeysavailable.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestothefirstpageonthisscreen.
Stakeoutinpolarmode
step‐by‐step
Thestepsareidenticaltothoseofstakingoutinorthogonalmode.Referto"34.4.3StakingOut
inOrthogonalMode".Followtheinstructionsinparagraph"Stakeoutinorthogonalfromstation
modestep‐by‐step"using<StakeMode:Polar>.Thevaluesaredisplayedas<∆HZ:>and
<∆DISTANCE:>.
Stakeout
R9|678
34.4.5 StakeoutDifferenceLimitExceeded
Description
Ifconfiguredacheckismadeonthehorizontaland/orverticalcoordinatedistancefromthe
stakedpointtothepointtobestakedwhenstoringastakedpoint.Referto"34.3Configuring
Stakeout"forinformationonconfiguringthecheckandthelimits.
Access
Thescreenshownbelowisaccessedautomaticallywhenthestakedpointisstoredifeitherof
theconfigureddifferencelimitsareexceeded.
STAKEOUT
DifferenceLimit
Exceeded
Theavailabilityofthefieldsdependsontheconfigured<StakeMode:>.
Thelimitsthathavebeenexceededareshowninboldandindicatedbya .
BACK(F1)
ToreturntoSTAKEOUTXXStakeoutwithout
storingthepoint.Stakingoutofthesamepoint
continues.
STORE(F3)
Toacceptthecoordinatedifferences,storethe
pointinformationandreturntoSTAKEOUTXX
Stakeout.
SKIP(F4)
ToreturntoSTAKEOUTXXStakeoutwithout
storingthepoint.Accordingtofilterandsort
settingsthesubsequentpointin<Stakeout
Job:>issuggestedforstakingout.
Stakeout
R9|679
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Output
ThepointIDofthepointtobestaked.
<StoreID:>
Userinput
Theuniquenumberwhichisusedtostorethestaked
point.AllowsadifferentpointIDtobetypedinif
needed.
<∆EASTING:>
Output
ThedifferenceoftheEastingcoordinatebetweenthe
thepointtobestakedandthecurrentposition.
<∆NORTHING:>
Output
ThedifferenceoftheNorthingcoordinatebetweenthe
pointtobestakedandthecurrentposition.
<∆ HZ:>
Output
Thedifferenceofthehorizontalangletothepointtobe
stakedandthecurrentposition.
<∆DISTANCE:>
Output
Thedifferenceofthehorizontaldistancetothepointto
bestakedandthecurrentposition.
<FORWARD:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistancefromthecurrentpositionto
thepointtobestakedalongthelinedefinedbystation
andreflector.
<BACK:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistancefromthecurrentpositionto
thepointtobestakedinthereversedirectionofthe
linedefinedbystationandreflector.
<RIGHT:>
Output
Horizontaldistancefromthecurrentpositiontothe
pointtobestakedorthogonaltotherightoftheline
definedbystationandreflector.
Stakeout
R9|680
Field
Option
Description
<LEFT:>
Output
Horizontaldistancefromthecurrentpositiontothe
pointtobestakedorthogonaltotheleftoftheline
definedbystationandreflector.
<CUT:>
Output
Thenegativeheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
stakedpointtotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
<FILL:>
Output
Thepositiveheightdifferencefromtheheightofthe
stakedpointtotheheightofthepointtobestaked.
<2D‐Diff:>
Output
Displaysthehorizontaldifferencefromthestaked
pointtothepointtobestaked.
<3D‐Diff:>
Output
Displaysthespatialdifferencefromthestakedpointto
thepointtobestaked.
Nextstep
IFtheexceededdifferencelimit
THEN
isnottobeaccepted
BACK(F1)tostakethesamepointagain.
istobeaccepted
STORE(F3)tostorethepointandtostakeoutthenext
point.
isnottobeacceptedbutcannotbe
improved
SKIP(F4)toskipstakingthispointandtostakeoutthe
nextpoint.
Stakeout
R9|681
35 Survey‐General
35.1 AccessingSurvey
Access
SelectMainMenu:Survey.
OR
SelectMainMenu:Programs...\Survey
OR
PressUSER.Referto"2USERKey"forinformationontheUSERkey.
OR
PressON.HighlightSurvey.CONT(F1).
Referto"31.2AccessingtheProgramsMenu"fordetailsontheONkey.
SURVEY
SurveyBegin
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandaccessthesubsequent
screen.Thechosensettingsbecomeactive.
CONF(F2)
ToconfigureSmartCodes,autopointsand
remotepointmeasurements.AccessesSURVEY
Configuration.Referto"36Survey‐Auto
Points"andto"37Survey‐RemotePoint"for
informationonthefieldsandkeys.
SETUP(F3)
Tosetupstation.AccessesSETUPStation
Setup.
Survey‐General
R9|682
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<Job:>
Choicelist
Theactivejob.AlljobsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Jobscanbeselected.
<Codelist:>
Choicelist
Nocodesarestoredintheselectedjob.Allcodelists
fromMainMenu:Manage...\Codelistscanbe
selected.
Output
Codeshavealreadybeenstoredintheselected<Job:>.
IfcodeshadbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelist,
thenthenameofthecodelistisdisplayed.Ifcodeshave
notbeencopiedfromaSystemRAMcodelistbuttyped
in,thenthenameoftheactivejobisdisplayed.
<ConfigSet:>
Choicelist
Theactiveconfigurationset.Allconfigurationsetsfrom
MainMenu:Manage...\ConfigurationSetscanbe
selected.
<Reflector:>
Choicelist
Theactivereflector.AllreflectorsfromMainMenu:
Manage...\Reflectorscanbeselected.
<Add.Constant:>
Output
Theadditiveconstantstoredwiththechosenreflector.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName,wheremeasurementscanbeperformedwith
ALL(F1)orDIST(F2)and/orREC(F3).
Survey‐General
R9|683
35.2 SurveyingPoints
Description
TheSurveyapplicationprogramisusedforpointmeasurement.Coordinatesforpointscanbe
measuredandstoredusingALL(F1),DIST(F2)andREC(F3).
Accessstep‐by‐step
ThetabledescribesthemainaccesstoSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
Accessispossiblefromotherscreenswhereindividualpointmeasurementsareneeded,for
examplefromCOGOInversewithSURVY(F5).
Step
Description
1.
Referto"35.1AccessingSurvey"toaccessSURVEYSurveyBegin.
2.
SURVEYSurveyBegin
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
SURVEY
Survey:JobName,
Surveypage
Thefieldsshownarethosefromatypicalconfigurationset.Thescreendescribedconsistsofthe
SurveypageandtheMappage.Theexplanationsforthesoftkeysgivenbelowarevalidforthe
Surveypage.Referto"30MapViewInteractiveDisplayFeature"forinformationonthekeyson
theMappage.
Thefieldsandfunctionalityofthisscreenvaryslightlywhenaccessedfromotherapplication
programswhereindividualpointmeasurementsareneeded.
Survey‐General
R9|684
ALL(F1)
Tomeasureandstoredistancesandangles.
STOP(F1)
Availableif<EDMMode:Tracking>and
DIST(F2)waspressed.Stopsthedistancemeas‐
urements.(F1)changesbacktoALL.
DIST(F2)
Tomeasureanddisplaydistances.Available
unless<EDMMode:Tracking>and/or<Log
AutoPts:Yes>,afterthetrackingorloggingis
started.
REC(F3)
Torecorddata.
If<EDMMode:Tracking>and/or<LogAuto
Pts:Yes>,recordsmeasuredpointand
continuestracking.
REMOT(F4)
Availableif<UseRemotePt:Yes>issetinthe
SURVEYConfiguration,RemotePtpage.To
accessSURVEYSurveyRemotePoint.
SETAZ(F5)
ToaccesstheSETUPSetStn&Ori‐Set
Azimuthscreentosetthehorizontalangle.
Referto"33.4.2SetAzimuth"forinformationon
theSURVEYSetStn&Ori‐SetAzimuthscreen.
TEST(F5)
ToaccesstheSURVEYEDMTest
Signal/Frequencyscreen.Availablefor<EDM
Mode:Tracking>and/or<LogAutoPts:Yes>,
afterthetrackingorloggingisstarted.
Survey‐General
R9|685
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toconfigureautopointsandremotepointmeas‐
urements.AccessesSURVEYConfiguration.
WhenSHIFTAVGE(F2)orSHIFTABS(F2)are
active,thiskeyisnotavailable.Referto"36
Survey‐AutoPoints"andto"37Survey‐Remote
Point"forinformationonthefieldsandkeys.
SHIFTAVGE(F2)
Tochecktheresidualsfortheaveragedpoint.
Availablefor<AveragingMode:Average>and
formorethanonemeasuredcoordinatetriplet
recordedforthesamepoint.Referto"7.3.4
MeanPage".
SHIFTABS(F2)
Tochecktheabsolutedifferencebetweenthe
measurements.Availablefor<AveragingMode:
AbsoluteDiffs>andformorethanonemeas‐
uredcoordinatetripletrecordedforthesame
point.Referto"7.3.4MeanPage".
SHIFT2FRec(F3)
Toaimmanuallyatthetargetandonlyrecord
theanglemeasurement(Hz/V)inFaceIand
FaceII.Thepointstoredisanaverageofthetwo
measurements.
ThishotkeyisonlyavailableintheSurvey
programfor<EDMType:Reflector(RL)>or
<EDMType:Reflctrless(IR)>if<Automation:
None>.
Survey‐General
R9|686
SHIFT2FAll(F4)
TotakeameasurementinFaceIandFaceII.The
pointstoredisanaverageofthetwomeasure‐
ments.
WhenusinginstrumentsfittedwithiLock,the
pointisautomaticallymeasuredinbothfaces,
theresultingpointisstoredandtheinstrument
isreturnedtothefirstface.
ThishotkeyisonlyavailableintheSurvey
programfor<EDMType:Reflector(RL)>or
<EDMType:Reflctrless(IR)>.
SHIFTINDIV(F5)andSHIFTRUN(F5)
Tochangebetweenenteringanindividualpoint
IDdifferenttothedefinedIDtemplateandthe
runningpointIDaccordingtotheIDtemplate.
Referto"15.1IDTemplates".
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Userinput
Theidentifierformeasuredpoints.Theconfigured
pointIDtemplateisused.TheIDcanbechanged:
• TostartanewsequenceofpointID’sovertypethe
pointID.
• ForANindividualnumberindependentoftheID
templateSHIFTINDIV(F5).SHIFTRUN(F5)
changesbacktothenextIDfromtheconfiguredID
template.Referto"15.1IDTemplates".
Survey‐General
R9|687
Field
Option
Description
<ReflectorHt:>
Userinput
Thelastusedreflectorheightissuggestedwhen
accessingtheSurveyapplicationprogram.Anindi‐
vidualreflectorheightcanbytypedin.
<Hz:>
Output
Thecurrenthorizontalangle.
<V:>
Output
Thecurrentverticalangle.
<HorizDist:>
Output
ThehorizontaldistanceafterDIST(F2)waspressed.
Nodistanceisdisplayedwhenaccessingthescreenand
afterREC(F3)orALL(F1).
<HtDiff:>
Output
Theheightdifferencebetweenstationandmeasured
pointafterDIST(F2).Displays‐‐‐‐‐whenaccessingthe
screenandafterREC(F3)orALL(F1).
<Easting:>
Output
Eastingcoordinateofthemeasuredpoint.
<Northing:>
Output
Northingcoordinateofthemeasuredpoint.
<Height:>
Output
Elevationofthemeasuredpoint.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Survey‐General
R9|688
36 Survey‐AutoPoints
36.1 Overview
Description
• Autopointsisusedtoautomaticallymeasureandstorepointsataspecificrate.Additionally,
individualautopointscanbestoredoutsidethedefinedrate.Autopointsloggedbetween
startingandstoppingloggingofautopointsformonechain.Anewchainisformedeachtime
loggingofautopointsisstarted.
• AutopointscanbecollectedintheSurveyapplicationprogram.AnAutopageisvisiblewhen
loggingofautopointsisactive.
• Uptotwooffsetpointsrelatedtooneautopointcanbelogged.Theoffsetpointscanbeboth
totheleftorrightandtheycanbecodedindependentlyofeachotherandoftheautopoints.
Referto"36.4OffsetPointsofAutoPoints".
Codingofautopoints
Codingofautopointsissimilartocodingofmeasuredpoints.Referto"9Coding"forinforma‐
tiononcoding.
Thedifferencesare:
•
•
•
•
Thematicalcoding:
Alwaysavailable.
Freecoding:
Alwaysavailable.
Quickcoding:
Notavailable.
Codesofautopointsoverwritethecodesofpointsexistingintheactivejobwiththesame
pointIDbutwithadifferentcodeastheautopoint.
• Codesofautopointscanbechangedwhennoautopointsarebeinglogged.
• Uptothreeattributescanbestoredwithacode
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|689
Propertiesofautopoints
Thepropertiesstoredwithautopointsare:
• Class:MEAS
• Subclass:TPS
• Source:Survey(Auto)orSurvey(AutoOf)
• Instrumentsource:TPS
Averagingofautopoints
AnaverageisnevercalculatedforautopointsevenifameasuredpointofclassMEASalready
existswiththesamepointID.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|690
36.2 ConfiguringAutoPoints
Access
SelectMainMenu:Survey.InSURVEYSurveyBeginpressCONF(F2)toaccessSURVEY
Configuration.
OR
InSURVEYSurvey:JobNamepressSHIFTCONF(F2)toaccessSURVEYConfiguration.
SURVEY
Configuration,
AutoPointspage
Thesettingsonthispageactivatetheloggingofautopointsanddefinethemethodoflogging.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DMASK(F3)
Availablefor<LogAutoPts:Yes>.Toconfigure
whatisviewedintheAutopageintheSurvey
applicationprogram.Refertoparagraph
"SURVEYConfigureAutoPtsDisplayMask".
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<LogAutoPts:>
Yes
Activatesloggingofautopoints.
Allotherfieldsonthescreenareactiveandcan
beeditedwiththissetting.
Survey‐AutoPoints

R9|691
Field
<LogBy:>
Option
Description
No
Deactivatesloggingofautopointsandallfieldsonthis
screen.
Time
Autopointsarestoredaccordingtoatimeinterval.
Distance
Thedifferenceindistancefromthelaststoredauto
point,whichmustbereachedbeforethenextauto
pointismeasured.Theautopointisstoredwiththe
nextavailablemeasuredposition.
HeightDiff
Theheightdifferencefromthelaststoredautopoint,
whichmustbereachedbeforethenextautopointis
measured.Theautopointisstoredwiththenextavail‐
ablemeasuredposition.
DistorHt
Beforethenextautopointismeasured,eitherthe
differenceindistanceorthedifferenceinheightmust
bereached.Theautopointisstoredwiththenext
availablemeasuredposition.
Stop&Go
Anautopointisstoredwhenthepositionofthe
reflectordoesnotmovemorethanthedistanceconfig‐
uredin<StopPosition:>withinthe<StopTime:>.
Onceapointhasbeenstored,thepositionfromthe
pointjuststoredmustchangemorethanthedistance
configuredin<StopPosition:>beforeheroutine
startsagain.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|692
Field
Option
Description
UserDecides
AnautopointisstoreduponpressingREC(F3)in
SURVEYSurvey:JobName,Autopage.Inthebegin‐
ning,thechaintowhichtheautopointsshouldbe
assignedmustbestartedwithSTART(F1).Intheend,
thechainmustbeclosedwithSTOP(F1).
<LogEvery:>
Availablewhen:
• <LogBy:Time>
• <LogBy:Distance>
• <LogBy:HeightDiff>.
For<LogBy:
Time>from
0.1sto60.0s
For<LogBy:Time>.Thetimeintervalbeforethenext
autopointislogged.
<MinDistance:>
Userinput
Availablefor<LogBy:DistorHt>.Thevalueforthe
differenceindistancebeforethenextautopointis
logged.
<MinHeight:>
Userinput
Availablefor<LogBy:DistorHt>.Thevalueforthe
heightdifferencebeforethenextautopointislogged.
<StopPosition:>
Userinput
Availablefor<LogBy:Stop&Go>.Themaximum
distancewithinwhichthepositionisconsidered
stationary.
<StopTime:>
Userinput
Availablefor<LogBy:Stop&Go>.Thetimewhilethe
positionmustbestationaryuntilanautopointis
stored.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|693
Field
Option
Description
<EDMMode:>
Tracking
Continuousdistancemeasurementwith0.3smeas‐
uringtimeand5mm+2ppmaccuracy.
Whentheloggingofautopointshasstarted,TRKis
displayedasanicon.
SynchroTrack Availableonlyfor<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>.
Thisisthemeasurementmodefortheinterpolationof
anglemeasurementsinIRtrackingmode.Indifference
tonormalIRtrackingmode,whereanglemeasure‐
mentsareonlyassignedtocertaindistancemeasure‐
ments,SynchroTrackwillperformalinearinterpola‐
tionbetweenthepreviousandfollowinganglemeas‐
urement,baseduponthetimestampoftheEDM
measurement.
Whentheloggingofautopointshasstarted,SYNCis
displayedasanicon.
Nextstep
IFthedisplaymask THEN
isnottobeconfig‐
ured
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstothescreenfromwhere
SURVEYConfiguration,AutoPointspagewasaccessed.
istobeconfigured
DMASK(F3).Refertoparagraph"SURVEYConfigureAutoPtsDisplay
Mask".
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|694
SURVEY
ConfigureAutoPts
DisplayMask
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
CLEAR(F4)
Tosetallfieldsto<XX.Line:LineSpaceFull>.
DEFLT(F5)
Availableiftheactiveconfigurationsetisa
defaultconfigurationset.Torecallthedefault
settings.
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<FixedLines:>
From0to5
DefineshowmanylinesdonotscrollinSURVEY
Survey:JobName,Autopagewhenthatdisplaymask
isused.
<1stLine:>
Output
Fixedto<1stLine:PointID(auto)>.
<2ndLine:>to
<16thLine:>
Add.Constant Outputfieldfortheadditiveconstantofthecurrently
selectedreflector.
AngleRight
Outputfieldfortheangleright.
Annotation
1‐4
Inputfieldforcommentstobestoredwiththepoint.
Attrib(free)
01‐20
Outputfieldforattributesforfreecodes.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|695
Field
Option
Description
Attrib(pt)
01‐03
Inputfieldforattributesforpointcodes.
Azimuth
Outputfieldfortheazimuth.
Code(auto)
Choicelistorinputfieldforautopointcodes.
Code(free)
Outputfieldforfreecodes.
CodeDesc
Outputfieldforthedescriptionofcodes.
CodeDesc
(free)
Outputfieldforthedescriptionoffreecodes.
CodeType
Outputfieldforthedescriptionofpointcodes.
EDMMode
OutputfielddisplayingthecurrentEDMmode.
EDMType
OutputfielddisplayingthecurrentEDMtype.
Easting
OutputfieldfortheEastingcoordinateofthemeasured
point.
Height
Outputfieldfortheheightcoordinateofthemeasured
point
HeightDiff
Outputfieldfortheheightdifferencebetweenstation
andreflector.
HorizDist
Outputfieldforthehorizontaldistancecalculatedfrom
themeasuredslopedistanceandtheverticalangle.
Hz‐Angle
Outputfieldforthehorizontalangle.
LineSpace
Full
Insertfulllinespace.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|696
Field
Option
Description
LineSpace
Half
Inserthalflinespace.
Longitudinal
Tilt
Outputfieldforthelongitudinaltiltoftheverticalaxis.
MsdAuto
Points
Outputfieldforthenumberofautopointsloggedafter
pressingSTART(F1)inSURVEYSurvey:JobName,
Autopage.Countingstartsfrom0everytimeSTART
(F1)ispressed.
Northing
OutputfieldfortheNorthcoordinateofthemeasured
point.
OffsetCross
Inputfieldforthehorizontaldistanceoffsetforthe
measuredpoint,perpendiculartothelineofsight.
OffsetHeight
Inputfieldfortheheightoffsetofthemeasuredpoint.
OffsetLength
Inputfieldforthehorizontaldistanceoffset,inthe
directionoflineofsight.
Reflector
Outputfieldforthechosenreflector.
Reflector
Height
Inputfieldforthereflectorheight.
SD‐LastRec
Outputfieldforthelastrecordeddistance.
SlopeDist
Outputfieldforthemeasuredslopedistance.
Transversal
Tilt
Outputfieldforthetransversaltiltoftheverticalaxis.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|697
Field
Option
Description
V‐Angle
Outputfieldfortheverticalangle.
Nextsteps
Step
Description
1.
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstoSURVEYConfiguration,AutoPoints
page.
2.
CONT(F1)returnstothescreenfromwhereSURVEYConfiguration,AutoPoints
pagewasaccessed.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|698
36.3 AutoPoints
Requirements
Accessstep‐by‐step
<LogAutoPts:Yes>inSURVEYConfiguration,AutoPointspage.
Step
Description
1.
Referto"35.1AccessingSurvey"toaccessSURVEYSurveyBegin.
2.
SURVEYSurveyBegin
Checkthesettings.
SURVEY
Survey:JobName,
Autopage
3.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
4.
PAGE(F6)untiltheAutopageisvisible.
TheAutopageofatypicalconfigurationsetisexplained.Beforeloggingofautopointshas
started,thepageappearsasshownbelow:
START(F1)
Tostartloggingofautopointsandoffsetpointsif
configuredor,for<LogBy:UserDecides>to
startthechaintowhichtheautopointsshould
beassigned.Thefirstautopointisstored.
<EDMMode:Tracking>becomesactive.For
<EDMType:Reflector(IR)>instrumentlocks
ontoreflector.For<EDMType:LongRange
(LO)><EDMType:Reflector(IR)>issetand
instrumentlocksontothereflector.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|699
STOP(F1)
Toendrecordingofautopointsandoffsetpoints
ifconfiguredor,for<LogBy:UserDecides>,to
endthechaintowhichtheautopointsare
assigned..
REC(F3)
AvailableforSTOP(F1).Tostoreanautopoint
atanytime.
OFST1(F4)
Toconfigurerecordingofthefirsttypeofoffset
points.Referto"36.4OffsetPointsofAuto
Points".
OFST2(F5)
Toconfigurerecordingofasecondtypeofoffset
points.Referto"36.4OffsetPointsofAuto
Points".
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
SHIFTCONF(F2)
Toconfigureautopoints.Referto"36.2Config‐
uringAutoPoints".
SHIFTQUIT(F6)
ToexittheSurveyapplicationprogram.Point
informationloggeduntilpressingSHIFTQUIT
(F6)issavedinthedatabase.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|700
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<AutoPtID:>
Userinput
Availableunless<AutoPts:Time&Date>in
CONFIGUREIDTemplates.Theidentifierforauto
points.TheconfiguredIDtemplateforautopointsis
used.TheIDcanbechanged.Tostartanewsequence
ofpointID’sovertypethepointID.
TimeandDate Availablefor<AutoPts:Time&Date>inCONFIGURE
IDTemplates.Thecurrentlocaltimeanddateisused
asidentifierforautopoints.
<ReflectorHt:>
Userinput
Thedefaultreflectorheightasdefinedintheactive
configurationsetissuggested.
<MsdAutoPts:>
Output
AvailableafterpressingSTART(F1)andbefore
pressingSTOP(F1).Thenumberofautopointsmeas‐
uredsinceSTART(F1)hasbeenpressed.
<Code(Auto):>
Thethematicalcodefortheautopoint.

• Ifapointcodeisselectedthenanyopenline/areais
closed.Theoccupiedpointisstoredwiththe
selectedcodeidependentlyofanyline/area.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|701
Field
Option
Description
• Ifalinecodeisselectedthenanyopenlineisclosed
andanewlinewiththeselectedcodeiscreated.
ThelineIDisdefinedbytheconfiguredlineID
template.Theoccupiedpointisassignedtothat
line.Thelinestaysopenuntilitisclosedmanually
oranotherlinecodeisselected.
• Ifanareacodeisselectedthenthebehaviourisas
forlines.
<CodeDesc:>
Choicelist
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.The
settingfor<ShowCodes:>inCONFIGURECoding&
Lineworkdeterminesifeitherallcodesoronlypoint
codesareavailable.Theattributesareshownas
output,inputorchoicelistfieldsdependingontheir
definition.
Userinput
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
Codescanbetypedinbutnotselectedfromacodelist.
Acheckisperformedtoseeifacodeofthisname
alreadyexistsinthejob.Ifso,theaccordingattributes
areshown.
Configureadisplaymaskwithachoicelistforcode
typestodefineifapoint,lineorareacodeistypedin.
Output
Thedescriptionofthecode.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|702
Field
Option
Description
<SlopeDist:>
Output
Themeasuredslopedistance.
WhenSTART(F1)ispressed,<EDMMode:
Tracking>issetandtheslopedistanceisconstantly
updated.
<Hz:>
Output
Thecurrenthorizontalangle.
<V:>
Output
Thecurrentverticalangle.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
autopointsaretobe START(F1).Then,for<LogBy:UserDecides>,REC(F3)wheneveran
logged
autopointistobestored.
offsetpointsaretobe OFST1(F4)orOFST2(F5).Referto"36.4OffsetPointsofAutoPoints".
configured
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|703
36.4 OffsetPointsofAutoPoints
36.4.1 Overview
Description
Offsetpoints
• canbecreatedwithautopointswhenautopointsarestoredtothedatabase.
• canbetotheleftortotherightofautopoints.
• areautomaticallycomputedwiththeloggingofautopoints,ifconfigured.
• formachainrelativetothechainofautopointstowhichtheyarerelated.Subsequently
computedchainsareindependentfromeachother.
• canbecodedindependentlyofautopoints.
• havethesametimeofwhentheywerestoredastheautopointstowhichtheyarerelated.
• havethesamecodingfunctionality,propertiesandaveragingfunctionalityasautopoints.
Referto"36.1Overview".
Uptotwooffsetpointscanberelatedtooneautopoint.
ThescreensfortheconfigurationofoffsetpointsareidenticalexceptforthetitleAutoPoints‐
Offset1andAutoPoints‐Offset2.Forsimplicity,thetitleAutoPoints‐Offsetisusedinthe
followingdescription.
Computationofoffset
points
Thecomputationofoffsetpointsdependsonthenumberofautopointsinonechain.
Oneautopoint
Nooffsetpointsarecomputedorstored.
Twoautopoints
Theconfiguredoffsetsareappliedperpendiculartothelinebetweentwoautopoints.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|704
P5
P2
P6
P3
d1
P1
d2
P4
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
d1
d2
Firstautopoint
Secondautopoint
FirstoffsetpointforP1
SecondoffsetpointforP1
FirstoffsetpointforP2
SecondoffsetpointforP2
Horizontaloffsettotheleft
Horizontaloffsettotheright
Threeormoreautopoints
Thefirstoffsetpointsarecomputedperpendiculartothelinebetweenthefirstandthesecond
autopoint.
Thelastoffsetpointiscomputedperpendiculartothelinebetweenthelastautopointandthe
onebefore.
Allotheroffsetpointsarecomputedonabearing.Thebearingishalfoftheanglebetweenthe
lastandthenextmeasuredautopoint.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|705
P8
P9
2
P6
1
P10
P2
P7
P3
d1
P1
d2
P5
P4
Survey‐AutoPoints
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
d1
d2
Firstautopoint
Secondautopoint
FirstoffsetpointforP1
SecondoffsetpointforP1
Thirdautopoint
FirstoffsetpointforP2
SecondoffsetpointforP2
Fourthautopoint
FirstoffsetpointforP5
SecondoffsetpointforP5
Horizontaloffsettotheleft
Horizontaloffsettotheright
α1 AnglebetweenP1andP5
α2 AnglebetweenP2andP8
R9|706
36.4.2 ConfiguringOffsetPoints
Accessstep‐by‐step
Step
Description
1.
Referto"35.2SurveyingPoints"toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
2.
PAGE(F6)untiltheAutopageisactive.
3.
OFST1(F4)orOFST2(F5)toaccessSURVEYAutoPoints‐Offset.
SURVEY
AutoPoints‐Offset,
Generalpage
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
OFST2(F2)andOFST1(F2)
Toswitchbetweenconfiguringoffsetpointtype
oneandtwo.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|707
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
<StoreOffset1:>and Yes
<StoreOffset2:>
Description
Activatesloggingofoffsetpoints.
Allotherfieldsinthescreenareactiveandcan
beeditedwiththissetting.

No
Deactivatesloggingofoffsetpointsandallfieldsinthis
screen.
<HorizOffset:>
Userinput
Thehorizontaloffsetbetween‐1000mand1000mat
whichtheoffsetpointiscollected.
<HeightOffset:>
Userinput
Theheightoffsetbetween‐100mand100mfromthe
relatedautopoint.
<Identifier:>
Userinput
Theidentifierwithuptofourcharactersisaddedin
frontoforattheendoftheIDoftheautopoint.ThisID
isthenusedasthepointIDfortherelatedoffsetpoint.
ThiscouldsupportanautomaticworkflowintoCAD
packagesincludingsettingsymbolsandstringinglines.
<Prefix/Suffix:>
Prefix
Addsthesettingfor<Identifier:>infrontoftheauto
pointID.
Suffix
Addsthesettingfor<Identifier:>attheendoftheauto
pointID.
Nextstep
PAGE(F6)changestotheCodepage.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|708
SURVEY
AutoPoints‐Offset,
Codepage
Thesettingfor<ThematcCodes:>inCONFIGURECoding&Lineworkdeterminestheavaila‐
bilityofthefieldsandsoftkeys.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
NEW‐A(F2)
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.
Tocreateadditionalattributesfortheselected
<PointCode:>.
NAME(F3)orVALUE(F3)
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.
Availableforattributesforwhichanattribute
namecanbetypedin.Tohighlight<Attribute
n:>orthefieldfortheattributevalue.Thename
of<Attributen:>canbeeditedandanattribute
valuecanbetypedin.
LAST(F4)
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.
Torecallthelastusedattributevaluesforthe
selectedcode.
DEFLT(F5)
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.
Torecallthedefaultattributevaluesforthe
selectedcode.
PAGE(F6)
Tochangetoanotherpageonthisscreen.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|709
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointCode:>
Choicelist
Thethematicalcodefortheoffsetpoint.
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.The
settingfor<ShowCodes:>inCONFIGURECoding&
Lineworkdeterminesifeitherallcodesoronlypoint
codesareavailable.Theattributesareshownasoutput,
inputorchoicelistfieldsdependingontheirdefinition.
<Code:>
Userinput
Thethematicalcodefortheoffsetpoint.
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
Codescanbetypedinbutnotselectedfromacodelist.
Acheckisperformedtoseeifapointcodeofthisname
alreadyexistsinthejob.Ifso,theaccordingattributes
areshown.
<CodeDesc:>
Output
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithCodelist>.The
descriptionofthecode.
<Attributen:>
Userinput
Availablefor<ThematcCodes:WithoutCodelist>.
Uptothreeattributevaluescanbestored.
Nextstep
IF
THEN
offsetpointconfigu‐
rationisfinished
CONT(F1)toreturntoSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|710
IF
THEN
asecondoffsetpoint PAGE(F6)andthenOFST2(F2)orOFST1(F2)tochangetoSURVEY
istobeconfigured
AutoPoints‐Offsetforthesecondpoint.
Exampleforoffsetpoint
ID’s

TheoffsetpointIDisacombinationoftheautopointIDandanidentifierasprefixorsuffix.
TherightmostpartoftheautopointIDisincrementedwithinthepointID.TheautopointIDis
truncatedfromtheleftifthelengthoftheautopointIDplusidentifierprefixorsuffixisgreater
than16characters.
AutopointID
Identifier
Prefix/Suffix
OffsetpointID
Auto1234
Auto1235
OS1
Prefix
OS1Auto1234
OS1Auto1235
…
Auto1234
Auto1235
OS1
Suffix
Auto1234OS1
Auto1235OS1
…
Referto"15.1IDTemplates"formoreinformationonpointID’s.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|711
36.4.3 WorkingExample
Description
Application:
Pickuppointsalongthecentreline,totherightandtotheleftofa
road.
Goal:
Pointsaretobepickedupautomaticallyevery5mwhilewalking
alongthecentreline.
Thepointstotherightandtotheleftoftheroadaretobepickedup
automaticallywiththoseofthecentreline.
TheautopointID’sareCL0001,CL0002,....
TheoffsetpointID’sareOSCL0001,OSCL0002,...fortherightside
oftheroadandCL0001OS,CL0002OS,...fortheleftside.
Theoffsettotherightandtotheleftis3m.
Theheightdifferenceis‐0.3mtotherightand0.3mtotheleft.
Diagram
a
e
d
b
c
f
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Survey‐AutoPoints
Leftsideoftheroad
Centreline
Rightsideoftheroad
CL0001
OSCL0001
CL0001OS
R9|712

Fieldprocedurestep‐by‐
step
• ThedefaultdisplaymaskforSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Autopageisused.
• <DistanceUnit:Metres(m)>inCONFIGUREUnits&Formats,Unitspage.
• AnIDtemplatefortheautopointsisconfigured.Referto"15.1.6WorkingExample"for
informationonhowtoconfigureIDtemplates.
Step
Description
1.
MainMenu:Survey.
2.
SURVEYSurveyBegin
Selectajob,areflectorandaconfigurationsetwiththesettingsmentionedabove.
3.
CONF(F2)toaccessSURVEYConfiguration.
4.
SURVEYConfiguration,AutoPointspage
<LogAutoPts:Yes>
<LogBy:Distance>
<LogEvery:5.0000>
5.
CONT(F1)toreturntoSURVEYSurveyBegin.
6.
CONT(F1)toaccessSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
7.
PAGE(F6)untiltheAutopageisactive.
8.
OFST1(F4)toconfiguretheoffsetpointsfortherightsideoftheroad.
9.
SURVEYAutoPoints‐Offset1,Generalpage
<StoreOffset1:Yes>
<HorizOffset:3.0000>
<HeightOffset:‐0.3000>
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|713
Step
Description
<Identifier:OS>
<Prefix/Suffix:Prefix>
10.
OFST2(F2)toconfiguretheoffsetpointsfortheleftsideoftheroad.
11.
SURVEYAutoPoints‐Offset2,Generalpage
<StoreOffset2:Yes>
<HorizOffset:‐3.0000>
<HeightOffset:0.3000>
<Identifier:OS>
<Prefix/Suffix:Suffix>
12.
CONT(F1)closesthescreenandreturnstoSURVEYSurvey:JobName,Autopage.
13.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName,Autopage
START(F1)startsloggingofautopointsandoffsetpoints.
14.


15.

Walkalongthecentrelineoftheroadasfaraspointsneedtobepickedup.
OFST1(F4)tochangetheoffsetortheheightdifferencebetweentheautopointson
thecentrelineandtherightsideoftheroad.
OFST2(F5)tochangetheoffsetortheheightdifferencebetweentheautopointson
thecentrelineandtheleftsideoftheroad.
STOP(F1)endsrecordingofautopointsandoffsetpoints.
ThestoppingmeasuringautopointsisindicatedintheEDMicon.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|714
Step
Description
16.
Afterfinishingthesurvey,importthedataintoaCADpackage.IftheoffsetpointID’s
orcodesfulfilltherequirementsoftheCADpackage,theoffsetpointstotherightand
totheleftoftheroadareautomaticallystrungtogether.
Survey‐AutoPoints
R9|715
37 Survey‐RemotePoint
37.1 Overview
Description
Remotepointisusedtodeterminethe3Dcoordinatesofinaccessiblepoints,forexampleon
bridges.Thehorizontaldistancetoabasepointdirectlyunderneathorabovetheremotepoint
ismeasured.Thentheinstrumentisaimedattheremotepoint.Thecoordinatesoftheremote
pointarecalculatedwiththedistancemeasuredtothebasepointandtheanglesmeasuredto
theremotepoint.
Diagram
a
P2
α
d1
P1
P0

P0
P1
P2
d1
α
a
Instrumentstation
Basepoint
Remotepoint
Horizontaldistancetothebasepoint
Verticalanglebetweenbasepointandremote
point
VerticalaxisfromP1toP2
Toensurecorrectresults,theremotepointandthereflectormustbelinedupvertically.Ifitis
notpossibletomaintainanexactlyverticalline,theacceptable<HzDistTol:>mustbechosen.
Thehorizontaldistancetotheremotepointandtothebasepointshouldcoincide.
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|716
Propertiesofremote
points
Thepropertiesstoredwithautopointsare:
• Class:MEAS
• Subclass:TPS
• Source:Survey(RemPt)
• Instrumentsource:TPS
Averagingofremote
points
AnaveragecanbecalculatedforremotepointsifameasuredpointofclassMEASalreadyexists
withthesamepointID.TheaverageflagforthepointisAUTO.
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|717
37.2 AccessingRemotePoint
RemotepointmeasurementsarepossiblefromtheSurveyapplicationprogramwhen<Use
RemotePt:Yes>issetintheSURVEYConfiguration,RemotePtpageandavaliddistance
measurementisavailable.Referto"37.3ConfiguringRemotePoint".

Unless<DisplayMask:None>inSURVEYConfiguration,RemotePtpage,thisscreen
containsanadditional,userdefineddisplaymask.
Access
REMOT(F4)inSURVEYSurvey:JobNameafteronepointismeasured.
SURVEY
SurveyRemotePoint,
RemotePtpage
STORE(F1)
Storestheremotepoint.StaysintheSURVEY
SurveyRemotePointscreen.
BASE(F4)
ReturnstoSURVEYSurvey:JobName.The
distancemeasurementiscleared.
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|718
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<PointID:>
Userinput
DisplaysthepointIDfortheremotepoint.ThepointID
inSURVEYSurveyRemotePointisalwaysidenticalto
thepointIDinSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
<∆HtBasRem:>
Output
Theelevationdifferencebetweenthebasepointand
theremotepoint.
<Hz:>
Output
Thecurrenthorizontalangle.
<V:>
Output
Thecurrentverticalangle.
<SlopeDist:>
Output
Thecurrentslopedistancetotheremotepointcalcu‐
latedfromthehorizontaldistancetothebasepointand
thecurrentverticalangle.
<HorizDist:>
Output
Thehorizontaldistancemeasuredtothebasepoint.
<Easting:>
Output
CalculatedEastingcoordinatefortheremotepoint.
<Northing:>
Output
CalculatedNorthingcoordinatefortheremotepoint.
<Height:>
Output
Calculatedheightfortheremotepoint.
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|719
Nextstep
IF
THEN
ifaremotepointisto STORE(F1).
bestored
anewbasepointisto BASE(F4)toreturntoSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
bemeasured
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|720
37.3 ConfiguringRemotePoint
Access
SelectMainMenu:Survey.InSURVEYSurveyBeginpressCONF(F2)toaccessSURVEY
Configuration.PAGE(F6)untiltheRemotePtpageisactive.
OR
InSURVEYSurvey:JobNamepressSHIFTCONF(F2)toaccessSURVEYConfiguration.
PAGE(F6)untiltheRemotePtpageisactive.
SURVEY
Configuration,
RemotePtpage
Thesettingsonthisscreenactivatetheremotepointfunction.
CONT(F1)
Toacceptchangesandreturntothescreenfrom
wherethisscreenwasaccessed.
DMASK(F3)
AccessesCONFIGUREDefineDisplayMaskn.
Availablefor<DisplayMask:>beinghigh‐
lighted.Referto"15.2DisplaySettings".
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|721
Descriptionoffields
Field
Option
Description
<UseRemotePt:>
Yes
Activatestheremotepointfunction.REMOT(F4)is
addedtothefunctionkeysinSURVEYSurvey:Job
Name.
No
Deactivatestheremotepointfunction,REMOT(F4)is
notavailableinSURVEYSurvey:JobName.
<HzDistTol:>
Userinput
Thehorizontaldistancetotheremotepointisequalto
thehorizontaldistanceofthebasepoint.Thevaluefor
<HzDistTol:>isthemaximumtoleratedlengthofthe
chordbetweenthebasepointandtheremotepoint.
<DisplayMask:>
Choicelist
Displays<None>untiladisplaymaskischosen.All
displaymasksfromMainMenu:Config...\Survey
Settings...\DisplaySettingscanbeselected.
Nextstep
CONT(F1)toreturntothescreenSURVEYConfigurationwasaccessedfrom.
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|722
37.4 WorkingExample
Description
Measuringremote
pointsstep‐by‐step
Application:
Pickuppointsalongabridge.Thepointstobemeasuredarenot
directlyaccessiblewithareflector.
Workingtechnique:
Remotepointsurveying.
Settings:
<UseRemotePt:Yes>intheSURVEYConfiguration,RemotePt
page.
Step

Description
Thereflectorheightatthebasepointisalwaysappliedinthecalculationofthebase
pointelevation.Forthecalculationoftheremotepointelevationthereflectorheight
isautomaticallysettozero.
1.
Aimatthereflectorthatisplacedatthebasepoint,whichisdirectlyunderneaththe
remotepointtobemeasured.
2.
SURVEYSurvey:JobName
DIST(F2)tomeasurethehorizontaldistancetothebasepoint.
3.
REMOT(F4).
4.
Aimattheremotepointtobemeasured.
5.
SURVEYSurveyRemotePoint,RemotePtpage
STORE(F1)tomeasureandstoretheanglemeasurementsandcalculatedcoordi‐
natesfortheremotepoint.
6.
BASE(F4)toreturntoSURVEYSurvey:JobNameandmeasureanewbasepoint.
Survey‐RemotePoint
R9|723
AppendixA MenuTree
Menutree
MAINMENU
|
|——SURVEY
|
|
|——PROGRAMS...
|
|
|——MANAGE...
|
|
|
|
|——JOBS
|
|
|
|——DATA
|
|
|
|——CODELISTS
|
|
|
|——CONFIGURATIONSETS
|
|
|
|——REFLECTORS
|
|
|——CONVERT...
|
|
|
|
|——EXPORTDATAFROMJOB
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|——EXPORTASCII
|
|
|
|
|
|——EXPORTDXF
|
|
|
|
|
|——IMPORTDATATOJOB
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|——IMPORTASCII/GSI
|
|
|
|
|
|——IMPORTDXF
|
|——CONFIG...
|
|
|
MenuTree
R9|724
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|——SURVEYSETTINGS...
|
|
|
|
|——IDTEMPLATES
|
|
|
|——DISPLAYSETTINGS
|
|
|
|——CODING&LINEWORKSETTINGS
|
|
|
|——OFFSETS
|
|
|
|——TARGETCHECK
|
|
|——INSTRUMENTSETTINGS...
|
|
|
|
|——EDM&iLockSETTINGS
|
|
|
|——SEARCHWINDOWS
|
|
|
|——AUTOMATICPRISMSEARCH
|
|
|
|——TPSCORRECTIONS
|
|
|
|——COMPENSATOR
|
|
|
|——INSTRUMENTID
|
|
|
|——TELESCOPEACCESSORIES
|
|
|——GENERALSETTINGS...
|
|
|
|
|——UNITS&FORMATS
|
|
|
|——WIZARDMODE
|
|
|
|——USERMENU
|
|
|
|——LANGUAGE
|
|
|
|——LIGHTS,DISPLAY,BEEPS,TEXT
|
|
|
|——STARTUP&POWERDOWN
|
|
MenuTree
R9|725
|
|——INTERFACES...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|——GSIOUTPUT
|
|
|
|
|
|——GEOCOMMODE
|
|
|
|
|
|——EXPORTJOB
|
|
|——TOOLS...

|
|——FORMATMEMORYDEVICE
|
|——TRANSFEROBJECTS...
|
|
|
|
|——CODELISTS
|
|
|
|——CONFIGURATIONSETS
|
|
|
|——FORMATFILES
|
|
|
|——SYSTEMRAMCONTENTS
|
|
|
|
|——UPLOADSYSTEMFILES...
|
|
|
|
|——APPLICATIONPROGRAMS
|
|
|
|——SYSTEMLANGUAGES
|
|
|
|——INSTRUMENTFIRMWARE
|
|
|——CALCULATOR
|
|——FILEVIEWER
|
|——LICENCEKEYS
|
|——CHECK&ADJUST...
|
|——COMBINED(l,t,i,c,iLock)
MenuTree
R9|726
|
|——TILTINGAXIS(a)
|
|——COMPENSATOR(l,t)
|
|——CURRENTVALUES
|
|——ENDCHECK&ADJUST
MenuTree
R9|727
AppendixB MemoryTypes
Typesofmemoryavail‐
able
CompactFlashcard
• Jobs
• Points
• Codes
• TPSrawobservations
• ASCIIoutputfiles
• Logfiles
• ASCIIfilestobeimported(CompactFlashcard)
Theinformationismanagedinthejobdatabaseandinthemeasurementdatabase.
Applicationprogramsmemory,8MB
SystemRAM,1MB
• Systemlanguage
• Codelists
• Fontfiles
• Configurationsets
• Applicationprograms
• Formatfiles
• Languagefiles
• IDtemplates
• Fontfiles
• Sortandfiltersettings
MemoryTypes
R9|728
AppendixC DirectoryStructureoftheMemoryDevice
Description
Onthememorydevice,filesarestoredincertaindirectories.
Directorystructure
|——CODE
|
|
|——CONFIG
|
|
|——CONVERT
|
|
|——DATA
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|——DBX
|
|
|
|
|——GSI
|
|
|
|
• Codelistsvariousfiles
• TPSconfigurationfiles(*.xfg)
• Formatfiles(*.frt)
• ASCIIfilesforimport/exportto/fromjob(*.*)
• DXFfilesforimport/exportto/fromjob(*.*)
• Logfilescreatedfromapplicationprograms
• Jobfiles,variousfiles
• DTMjobs,variousfiles
• GSIfiles(*.gsi)
• ASCIIfilesforexportfromjob(*.*)
DirectoryStructureoftheMemoryDevice
R9|729
|——SYSTEM
•
•
•
•
•
Applicationprogramfiles(*.a*)
Firmwarefiles(*.fw)
Languagefiles(*.s*)
Licencefile(*.key)
Systemfiles(System.ram)
DirectoryStructureoftheMemoryDevice
R9|730
Index
Symbols
°DEC ........................................................................................................360
°DMS .......................................................................................................360
A
ABS ..........................................................................................................101
Absolutecoordinatedifference
Display ............................................................................................103
Limitexceeded ............................................................................103
Absolutedifference ..........................................................................100
Access
Autopoint......................................................................................699
Configurationdevices...............................................................314
Configurationsetmanagement............................................194
Dataexport ...................................................................................206
Findtargetpoint.........................................................................643
IDtemplateconfiguration ......................................................228
MapView ........................................................................................433
Movebyjoystick ........................................................................... 32
Orientatewithcompass ............................................................ 27
Orientationandheighttransfer...........................................622
PositioningHz/V .......................................................................... 30
Quicksettings................................................................................. 24
Remotepoint................................................................................718
Setstationandazimuth...........................................................609
Setstationandbacksight........................................................617
Setupapplication .......................................................................595
Survey .............................................................................................682
Acclimatisetotheambienttemperature................................373
Activate
Codefilter......................................................................................126
Codegroup....................................................................................126
Activate,applicationprograms...................................................369
ADD.........................................................................................................546
Addpointtoline................................................................................111
ADD1 ......................................................................................................547
Additiveconstant..............................................................................203
Adjust
Circularlevelofinstrumentandtribrach .......................400
Circularlevelofprismpole ...................................................402
Adjustment
Combined(l,t,i,candiLock)................................................384
Compensator(l,t)......................................................................395
Electronic ......................................................................................371
Mechanical....................................................................................371
Tiltingaxis(a) .............................................................................390
Adjustmenterrors,viewcurrent ...............................................399
Angleright ...........................................................................................600
Angle,displayformat ......................................................................282
aNUM......................................................................................................299
R9|731
APPL........................................................................................................337
Applicationmemory ........................................................................728
Applicationprogram
Activate...........................................................................................369
COGO................................................................................................465
Delete...............................................................................................341
Description....................................................................................463
Loadable.........................................................................................463
Loadableandnon‐loadable ...................................................463
Maximumnumberopen..........................................................464
Menu ................................................................................................464
Access ......................................................................................... 58
Non‐loadable................................................................................463
Setup ................................................................................................594
Stakeout..........................................................................................646
Survey
Autopoints.............................................................................689
General.....................................................................................682
Remotepoint.........................................................................716
Upload .............................................................................................341
Applicationprogramfiles,directory ........................................730
Applicationprograms
Generalinformation..................................................................463
Applicationprogramsmemory
Format.............................................................................................337
Area ........................................................................................................... 48
Code .................................................................................................132
Create106
Delete .................................................................................................81
Edit...................................................................................................110
Icon .....................................................................................................51
Quickcoding.................................................................................166
Areacode
Filter ................................................................................................126
Areamanagement ............................................................................105
Area,displayformat ........................................................................283
Areas
Sortingandfilter ........................................................................118
Arrow,orientateto,Stakeout ......................................................654
ASCII
Exportformat ..............................................................................205
Importformat..............................................................................214
ASCIIfile
Directoryforimport/exportto/fromjob .......................729
Atmosphericppm .............................................................................269
Attribute
Addfor
Freecode ................................................................................159
Thematicalcode ..................................................................154
Description ...................................................................................132
Type .................................................................................................134
Typeinnew..................................................................................145
Attributemismatch..........................................................................180
Attributevalue
Region.............................................................................................134
R9|732
Type .................................................................................................134
Attributes
Symbol .............................................................................................. 54
Autopoints................................................................................ 689,699
Averaging.......................................................................................690
Coding .............................................................................................689
Configuration ...............................................................................691
Coordinatetype ..........................................................................690
Logging ...........................................................................................691
Offsetpoints .................................................................................704
Properties......................................................................................690
AutoPoints,access ...........................................................................699
AutomaticPrismSearch.................................................................266
Automation ..........................................................................................425
Average..................................................................................................100
Average,EDMtype ...........................................................................420
Averaging................................................................................................ 99
Autopoints....................................................................................690
Configure.......................................................................................... 68
Include/excludecoordinatetriplet ....................................102
Limit,exceeded ...........................................................................104
Mode ................................................................................................100
Define ......................................................................................... 99
Description............................................................................... 99
Offsetpoints .................................................................................704
Stakedpoints................................................................................649
AVGE .......................................................................................................101
AVGE,class .............................................................................................85
Azimuth/bearingfields..................................................................284
B
BacksightPoint,check.......................................................................34
BASE .......................................................................................................718
Battery......................................................................................................48
Icon .....................................................................................................52
Battery,status ..........................................................................407,410
Bearing ..................................................................................................284
Bearing/azimuthfields ..................................................................284
Bearing‐Bearing,intersectionmethod....................................498
Bearing‐Distance,intersectionmethod ..................................504
Beep........................................................................................................294
Hz‐Sector .......................................................................................297
Key....................................................................................................297
Screen .............................................................................................295
Warning .........................................................................................297
Bluetooth
Icon .....................................................................................................51
C
Calculator .............................................................................................347
Calculator,operatingmode ..........................................................347
CE................................................................................................................42
ChangeFace,quickset.......................................................................25
Check
R9|733
BacksightPoint ............................................................................. 34
Recordedpoint.............................................................................. 34
Check&AdjustMenu ......................................................................379
Checkandadjustinstrument .......................................................371
CHKPT ...................................................................................................... 24
Circularleveladjustmentofinstrumentandtribrach ......400
Circularleveladjustmentofprismpole..................................402
Class .......................................................................................................... 84
Classificationofpoints,hierarchy................................................ 84
ClearToSend ......................................................................................318
Code
Area ..................................................................................................132
Create ..............................................................................................144
Description....................................................................................130
Edit ...................................................................................................147
Free........................................................................................ 131,132
Line...................................................................................................132
Point.................................................................................................132
Quick................................................................................................132
Thematical.....................................................................................131
Type .................................................................................................132
Codeandattributemismatch ......................................................178
Codefilterforlinesandareas......................................................126
Codegroup...........................................................................................130
Activate/deactivate...................................................................126
Manage............................................................................................148
Codemismatch...................................................................................178
Codetype..............................................................................................144
Codelist
Description ...................................................................................135
Elements ........................................................................................135
Job.....................................................................................................136
SystemRAM .................................................................................136
Codelists ...............................................................................................130
Codelistsdirectory ...........................................................................729
Codes
Manage
Jobcodes....................................................................................74
Point,line,areacodes .......................................................141
Sort
Codelistmanagement .......................................................142
Datamanagement...............................................................127
Coding....................................................................................................150
Autopoints ...................................................................................689
COGOpoints .................................................................................466
Free
Directinput............................................................................163
Usingcodelist .......................................................................159
Offsetpoints .................................................................................704
Stakedpoints ...............................................................................647
Thematical
Withcodelist .........................................................................153
Withoutcodelist ..................................................................157
CodingSettings ..................................................................................247
COGO ......................................................................................................465
R9|734
ArcCalculations ..........................................................................471
AreaDivision................................................................................473
Distanceinput/output .............................................................475
End....................................................................................................473
Intersections.................................................................................470
Inverse ............................................................................................469
LineCalculations ........................................................................470
Modifyvalues...............................................................................590
Shift,Rotate&Scale ..................................................................472
Shift,Rotate&Scale(MatchPts) .........................................473
Traverse .........................................................................................469
COGOpoints
Coding .............................................................................................466
Properties......................................................................................466
Combinedadjustment(l,t,i,candAim).................................384
CompactFlashcard ............................................................................. 48
Icon..................................................................................................... 52
Compass,orientatewith .................................................................. 27
Compensator............................................................................... 48,273
Adjustment(l,t)..........................................................................395
Configuration ...............................................................................273
Icon..................................................................................................... 51
Indexerrors(l,t) ........................................................................376
Longitudinalerror .....................................................................371
Transversalerror .......................................................................371
COMPS...................................................................................................... 24
Computing
Offsetpoints704
Config... .....................................................................................................56
Surveysettings............................................................................225
Configuration
Autopoints ...................................................................................691
Check&Adjust............................................................................381
Codingsettings............................................................................247
Compensator................................................................................273
Generalsettings..........................................................................280
Instrumentsettings ..................................................................258
Interfaces.............................................................................322,334
MapView........................................................................................436
Offsetautopoints.......................................................................707
Offsets .............................................................................................254
Remotepoint ...............................................................................721
Setup................................................................................................598
Stakeout .........................................................................................653
Configurationfiles,directory.......................................................729
Configurationset
Default ............................................................................................193
Description ...................................................................................193
Management ................................................................................193
Management,access .................................................................194
Recalldeleteddefault...............................................................195
Turnintouserdefineddefault.............................................195
Userdefined .................................................................................193
Wizard ............................................................................................193
Convert.....................................................................................................56
Coordinate
R9|735
Geometrycalculations..............................................................465
Quality............................................................................................... 89
Coordinatetriplet................................................................................ 84
CQ............................................................................................................... 89
Create
Area ..................................................................................................106
Code .................................................................................................144
Codelist ...........................................................................................140
Device..............................................................................................317
IDtemplate ...................................................................................230
Line...................................................................................................106
Point................................................................................................... 92
Reflector.........................................................................................203
CTRL
RCSMode .......................................................................................334
RS232 ..............................................................................................336
CTRL,class ............................................................................................. 84
CTS...........................................................................................................318
CURNT....................................................................................................180
D
Data ........................................................................................................... 78
Datamanagement............................................................................... 78
Access................................................................................................ 79
Database................................................................................................728
Deactivate
Codefilter ......................................................................................126
Codegroup126
Defaultreflectors ..............................................................................200
Default,recall
Aimwindowsettings................................................................264
Autopoints ...................................................................................695
Configurationset........................................................................195
Devices ...........................................................................................315
Displaymask................................................................................242
InstrumentID ..............................................................................275
Definedisplaymask.........................................................................242
Delete
Applicationprogram ................................................................341
Code .................................................................................................142
Codegroup....................................................................................148
Codelist...........................................................................................138
Configurationset........................................................................194
Coordinatetriplet ......................................................................102
File....................................................................................................366
Formatfile
Checkandadjust .................................................................383
COGO ........................................................................................478
DataExport............................................................................208
Dataexport ............................................................................208
Setup.........................................................................................605
Stakeout ..................................................................................661
FromDataLog.............................................................................117
IDtemplate ...................................................................................236
InverseCOGOcalculation.......................................................589
Job........................................................................................................65
R9|736
Language........................................................................................343
Configuration ........................................................................293
Licencekey....................................................................................369
Line/area ......................................................................................... 81
Logfile
Checkandadjust....................................................... 383,605
COGO.........................................................................................478
Stakeout...................................................................................661
Matchedpoints............................................................................559
Point................................................................................................... 79
Detailsoninstrumenterrors .......................................................374
DEVCE .....................................................................314,322,330,332
Device.....................................................................................................313
Configure........................................................................................317
Create ..............................................................................................317
Edit ...................................................................................................319
Devices
Accessconfiguration.................................................................314
Overview........................................................................................313
Recalldeleteddefault ...............................................................315
Differencelimitexceeded,stakeout..........................................679
Directorystructureofmemorydevice ....................................729
Display ...................................................................................................294
Settings ...........................................................................................240
Displaymask .......................................................................................240
Autopoints....................................................................................695
Elements ........................................................................................242
Distance
Displayformat.............................................................................281
Input/outputinCOGO .............................................................475
Distribution
ResidualsCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale................................477
DMASK
Autopoints ...................................................................................691
General ...........................................................................................241
DTMjobs,directory .........................................................................729
DXF..........................................................................................................215
Dataexport ...................................................................................212
Exportformat ..............................................................................205
DXFExport
Configuration...............................................................................212
DXFfile
Directoryforimport/exportto/fromjob .......................729
DynamicAimwindow.....................................................................267
DynamiciLockwindow..................................................................424
E
Edit
Area..................................................................................................110
Code .................................................................................................147
Codelist...........................................................................................140
Device..............................................................................................319
IDtemplate ...................................................................................234
Interfaces.......................................................................................310
Job........................................................................................................71
Line ..................................................................................................110
R9|737
Object
Lineorarea.............................................................................. 83
Point................................................................................................... 95
EDM................................................................................................. 48,419
Average...........................................................................................420
Fast ...................................................................................................420
Icon..................................................................................................... 50
Mode ................................................................................................420
Quickset
Mode ........................................................................................... 25
Type............................................................................................. 25
Standard.........................................................................................420
SynchroTrack...............................................................................421
Tracking .........................................................................................420
Type ...................................................................................... 260,419
EDM&iLocksettings.......................................................................258
EDMMode
Average...........................................................................................261
Fast ...................................................................................................260
Standard.........................................................................................260
SynchroTrack...............................................................................261
Tracking .........................................................................................261
Electronicadjustment.....................................................................371
ElectronicDistanceMeasurementEDM..................................419
Enddate ................................................................................................111
Endtime ................................................................................................111
ENTER...................................................................................................... 42
Error
Aimzeropoint.............................................................................371
Compensator
Longitudinal ..........................................................................371
Transversal............................................................................371
Hzcollimation .............................................................................371
Lineofsight..................................................................................371
Standingaxis................................................................................371
Tiltingaxis.....................................................................................371
Verticalindex...............................................................................371
ESC .............................................................................................................42
Exceededlimit
Absolutecoordinatedifference ...........................................103
Average ..........................................................................................104
Height
Stakeout ..................................................................................659
Position
Stakeout ..................................................................................659
Stakeoutdifference ...................................................................679
Exclude
Coordinatetripletfromaveraging .....................................102
Export
Data..................................................................................................205
Format ............................................................................................205
Toanotherdevice......................................................................210
TocustomASCIIformat..........................................................207
EXPRT ............................................................................................ 72,175
R9|738
F
FaceI&II .................................................................................................. 48
Icon..................................................................................................... 51
FastEDM...............................................................................................420
Fieldofview ........................................................................................423
File
Delete...............................................................................................366
FILT
Export..............................................................................................208
Management................................................................................... 80
Filter
Activate/deactivateforcodes...............................................126
Point,lineandareacodes.......................................................126
Points,linesandareas..............................................................118
Symbol .............................................................................................. 54
Filtersetting,define ........................................................................... 80
Filtersymbol .......................................................................................118
FILTR ......................................................................................................448
Findingatargetpoint......................................................................643
Firmwarefiles,directory ...............................................................730
Firmware,currentversion............................................................413
Firmware,version.............................................................................413
Format
Export..............................................................................................205
Import .............................................................................................214
Memorydevice............................................................................337
Method............................................................................................338
SystemRAM .................................................................................338
Formatfile,exportASCII ...............................................................205
Formatfiles,directory....................................................................729
Formats.................................................................................................280
Freecode ....................................................................................131,132
Delete ..............................................................................................117
Freecoding..........................................................................................151
Recordcodes................................................................................151
Selectcodes ..................................................................................151
Withcodelist................................................................................159
Withdirectinput........................................................................163
Functions..............................................................................................419
Functions,mainmenu .......................................................................55
G
Generalsettings.................................................................................280
GeoCOMmode....................................................................................330
Geometricppm ..................................................................................270
GGO
Creation
Attributes ...............................................................................134
Grade,displayformat......................................................................282
Graphic,elementsinStakeoutapplication ............................663
GriddistanceinCOGO ....................................................................475
GROUP
Codes...............................................................................................142
Coding
R9|739
Free............................................................................................160
Thematical..............................................................................154
Jobcodes .......................................................................................... 75
GSI
Data ..................................................................................................322
Format.............................................................................................322
Output .............................................................................................322
Wordinformation ......................................................................326
GSIfiles,directory.............................................................................729
GSI16 ......................................................................................................215
GSI8 .........................................................................................................215
H
Heightoffset,stakeout ....................................................................660
Heighttype
Pointtobestaked.......................................................................647
Hzcollimationerror(c)..................................................................374
I
Icons.......................................................................................................... 48
ID ................................................................................................................ 78
IDtemplate
Accessconfiguration.................................................................228
Create ..............................................................................................230
Delete...............................................................................................236
Edit ...................................................................................................234
IDtemplates ........................................................................................225
Identificationnumber .....................................................................275
IFACE
Dataexport ...................................................................................210
Illumination.........................................................................................430
Keyboard .......................................................................................296
Screen .............................................................................................295
iLock
Measurement...............................................................................423
Quickset ...........................................................................................24
Search .............................................................................................424
Window..........................................................................................424
Import
Data..................................................................................................214
Format ............................................................................................214
IncustomASCIIformat ...........................................................219
InGSIformat................................................................................221
IMPRT .......................................................................................................72
Includecoordinatetripletinaveraging ..................................102
IncreasepointID...............................................................................230
IncreasingNE,SE,SW,NW ...........................................................284
IncrementpointID...........................................................................230
Incrementation ..................................................................................231
INDIV......................................................................................................687
Instrument
Checkandadjust ........................................................................371
Errors,details..............................................................................374
Firmwareupload .......................................................................345
Settings,configuration.............................................................258
R9|740
Source................................................................................................ 88
Turnonandturnoff.................................................................... 46
InstrumentID .....................................................................................275
Recalldefault................................................................................275
Interface
User .................................................................................................... 42
Interfaces................................................................................... 322,334
Turnonoroff...............................................................................310
Intersection
Bearing‐Bearing..........................................................................498
Bearing‐Distance ........................................................................504
COGOcalculationmethod.......................................................498
INV................................................................................................ 492,496
IR,EDMtype........................................................................................419
J
Job
Active................................................................................................. 64
Create ................................................................................................ 67
Default............................................................................................... 64
Edit ..................................................................................................... 71
Manage.............................................................................................. 65
Management................................................................................... 64
Jobcodelist...........................................................................................136
Jobfiles,directory.............................................................................729
Joystick,moveby................................................................................. 32
JSTCK ........................................................................................................ 24
K
Keyillumination................................................................................430
Keyboard ..................................................................................42,46,47
Lockingandunlocking................................................................47
Keyboard,illumination...................................................................296
Keys ...........................................................................................................42
Keys,Alphanumeric............................................................................42
Keys,Arrow............................................................................................42
Keys,Combinations ............................................................................43
Keys,Function.......................................................................................42
Knownbacksightpoint ..................................................................617
L
Language
Delete
Configuration........................................................................293
Tools .........................................................................................343
Select ...............................................................................................293
Upload.............................................................................................343
Languagefiles,directory ...............................................................730
Laserplummet...................................................................................430
Inspect ............................................................................................403
Status...............................................................................................417
Turnonoroff ..............................................................................418
Level,status.........................................................................................417
Licencefile,directory......................................................................730
Licencekey ................................................................................369,463
R9|741
Delete...............................................................................................369
Upload .............................................................................................369
Lights......................................................................................................294
Limitexceeded
Absolutecoordinatedifference............................................103
Limit,exceeded
Average...........................................................................................104
Limits,exceeded
Symbol .............................................................................................. 54
Line............................................................................................................ 48
Code .................................................................................................132
Create ..............................................................................................106
Delete................................................................................................. 81
Edit ...................................................................................................110
Icon..................................................................................................... 51
Length .............................................................................................110
Management.................................................................................105
Orientateto
Stakeout...................................................................................655
Quickcoding.................................................................................166
Linecode
Filter.................................................................................................126
Lineofsight .........................................................................................374
Lineofsighterror(c) ......................................................................374
Linestyle
Coding .............................................................................................145
Forline/areacode ....................................................................... 77
Newline .........................................................................................107
Lines
Sortingandfilter ........................................................................118
Linework ..............................................................................................182
LIST.........................................................................................................289
LO,EDMtype ......................................................................................420
Lock,keyboard......................................................................................47
LOG..........................................................................................................116
Logfile
Createname
Check&Adjust .....................................................................383
Logfile,createname
COGO ...............................................................................................478
Setup................................................................................................605
Stakeout .........................................................................................661
Logfile,directory...............................................................................729
Loggingautopoints .........................................................................691
LongrangeEDM................................................................................420
LossofRobotic...................................................................................426
M
Mainmenu ..............................................................................................55
Manage... ..................................................................................................56
Configurationset........................................................................193
Data.....................................................................................................78
Management
Areas................................................................................................105
R9|742
Codes ...............................................................................................141
Jobs ..................................................................................................... 64
Lines.................................................................................................105
Points................................................................................................. 84
Reflectors.......................................................................................200
Manualentry
Pointstobestaked ....................................................................665
Step‐by‐step..................................................................................665
MapView ...............................................................................................431
Access..............................................................................................433
Components..................................................................................441
Configure........................................................................................436
Mode
Description.............................................................................431
Map............................................................................................447
Plot.............................................................................................453
StakingoutinSurvey.........................................................458
Survey.......................................................................................456
Northarrow..................................................................................444
Pointsymbols ..............................................................................446
Pointwithfocus ..........................................................................444
Resultsinplotmode .................................................................454
Scalebar .........................................................................................444
Screenarea....................................................................................443
SelectLinesandAreas .............................................................461
Selectpoint....................................................................................449
Softkeys ..........................................................................................441
Symbol
Instrumentstation .............................................................443
Reflectors ...............................................................................443
Toolbar
Description ............................................................................445
Symbol .....................................................................................444
MATCH ..................................................................................................560
Match
Points ..............................................................................................560
Meanpage...............................................................................................99
Access..............................................................................................101
MEAS,class .............................................................................................85
Measure
Remotepoint ...............................................................................723
Setuppoints .................................................................................623
Mechanicaladjustment ..................................................................371
Memory......................................................................................... 52,407
Devicetoformat.........................................................................337
Device,directorystructure....................................................729
Status...............................................................................................410
Memorytypes.....................................................................................728
Menu
Applicationprograms
Description ............................................................................464
Applicationsprograms
Access..........................................................................................58
Userdefined ....................................................................................21
Menutree .............................................................................................724
R9|743
Mismatch
Attribute.........................................................................................180
Code .................................................................................................178
Mode,Calculator................................................................................347
MODIF ....................................................................................................496
ModifyvaluesinCOGO....................................................................590
Movebyjoystick .................................................................................. 32
N
NavigationLight ................................................................................428
Negativeoffset,COGO......................................................................490
Newversion,upload ........................................................................341
NONE,class ............................................................................................ 85
North,orientateto
Stakeout..........................................................................................654
O
Object
Delete...............................................................................................117
Description...................................................................................... 78
Offset
Stakeout,height ..........................................................................660
Typein
COGOintersection...............................................................500
COGOtraverse ......................................................................492
Offsetautopoints..............................................................................704
Averaging.......................................................................................704
Coding704
Computing.....................................................................................704
Configuration...............................................................................707
PointID...........................................................................................711
PointID,examples.....................................................................711
Properties .....................................................................................704
Offsets ....................................................................................................253
OFST1.....................................................................................................700
OFST2.....................................................................................................700
ON.................................................................................................... 42,464
Orientate
Stakeout .........................................................................................654
Orientatewithcompass....................................................................27
Orientationandheighttransfer .................................................622
Orthogonalmode,stakeout..........................................................667
Overwrite
Codeforautopoints .................................................................689
Overwrite,pointduringimport..................................................216
P
Pagesdown ............................................................................................43
Pagesup...................................................................................................43
PersonalIdentificationNumber
Instrument............................................................................ 16,300
PersonalUnblocKingcode,instrument...................................301
PIN
Instrument....................................................................................300
Point
R9|744
Addtoline .....................................................................................111
Auto..................................................................................................689
COGO................................................................................................466
Create ................................................................................................ 92
Delete................................................................................................. 79
Deletefromline ..........................................................................111
Edit ..................................................................................................... 95
Management................................................................................... 84
Orientateto
Stakeout........................................................................ 654,655
Sortingandfilter.........................................................................118
Pointcode.............................................................................................132
Filter.................................................................................................126
PointID
Increment ......................................................................................230
Pointsorting........................................................................................118
Pointsymbols,MapView................................................................446
Points
Quickcoding.................................................................................164
Pointstobestaked,manualenter..............................................665
Polarmode,stakeout.......................................................................675
PositioningHz/V ................................................................................. 30
Positiveoffset,COGO .......................................................................490
Powerdown ........................................................................................300
PPM
Atmospheric .................................................................................269
Geometric ......................................................................................270
Precisemeasurements ...................................................................372
Prediction...................................................................................267,427
Prismsearch .......................................................................................422
Prismsearchafterprediction......................................................427
Prismsystem
Truezero .......................................................................................203
Programs... ..............................................................................................55
Projectiondistortion .......................................................................270
Properties
COGOpoints .................................................................................466
Offsetpoints .................................................................................704
Setuppoints .................................................................................594
Stakedpoints ...............................................................................648
ProtectionbyPIN/PUK .......................................................... 16,300
PUK
Instrument....................................................................................301
Q
Quadrant...............................................................................................284
Quickaccesstoscreens
Configure .......................................................................................291
Quickcode............................................................................................132
Quickcoding ............................................................................... 48,151
Icon .....................................................................................................53
Line/area.......................................................................................166
Points ..............................................................................................164
Recordcodes................................................................................151
R9|745
Selectcodes...................................................................................151
QuickSettings
Access................................................................................................ 24
Functions ......................................................................................... 27
SHIFTUSER..................................................................................... 23
Quicksettings ....................................................................................... 43
R
R.................................................................................................................. 37
R.GO........................................................................................................... 37
R.INT ......................................................................................................... 37
Radio.......................................................................................................320
Default.............................................................................................320
Supported ......................................................................................320
Userdefined .................................................................................320
RANGE....................................................................................................547
Recall
ASCIIimportsettings................................................................220
Default
Aimwindowsettings .........................................................264
Attributevalues ..................................................................... 94
Autopoints.............................................................................695
Displaymask .........................................................................242
InstrumentID........................................................................275
Deleteddefault
Configurationset .................................................................195
Devices.....................................................................................315
Lastusedattributevalues ........................................................ 94
Previousresult,COGO..............................................................492
RECLC ....................................................................................................637
Recordcodes
Freecoding ...................................................................................151
Quickcoding.................................................................................151
Thematicalcoding .....................................................................150
Recordedpoint,check .......................................................................34
Redlaser,visible ...............................................................................430
Redlaser ................................................................................................294
REF,class.................................................................................................84
Referencedatum...............................................................................270
Reflector
Create..............................................................................................203
Default ............................................................................................200
Icon .....................................................................................................49
Management ................................................................................200
Search .............................................................................................422
Type .................................................................................................203
Refraction
Coefficient .....................................................................................272
Correction .....................................................................................272
Relock ....................................................................................................427
REMA ....................................................................................................547
REMOT...................................................................................................685
Remotecontrol .....................................................................................48
Remotepoint ......................................................................................716
Access..............................................................................................718
R9|746
Configuration ...............................................................................721
Use ....................................................................................................722
RequestToSend ................................................................................318
Resection ..............................................................................................626
Residual
DistributionCOGOShift,Rotate&Scale...........................477
Reticule..................................................................................................294
Reticuleillumination .......................................................................294
RETRY ....................................................................................................424
RL,EDMtype.......................................................................................419
Rotate,MapView................................................................................439
RPNmode.............................................................................................347
RS232 .....................................................................................................321
Defaultdevices ............................................................................321
Standard.........................................................................................321
Userdefined .................................................................................321
RSLT1 .....................................................................................................506
RSLT2 .....................................................................................................506
RTS ..........................................................................................................318
RUN .........................................................................................................687
S
Screen....................................................................................................... 44
Illumination ....................................................................... 295,430
Scrollbar,description ....................................................................... 45
SearchWindows................................................................................264
Selectcodes
Freecoding ...................................................................................151
Quickcoding.................................................................................151
Thematicalcoding .....................................................................150
Serialnumber.....................................................................................413
Service,tripod ....................................................................................405
Setazimuthzero................................................................................611
Setstationandazimuth .................................................................609
Setstationandbacksight...............................................................617
SETBS........................................................................................................34
SET‐D
Configurationset........................................................................195
SETUP ....................................................................................................682
Setup
Access..............................................................................................595
Additionalinformation............................................................637
Applicationprogram ................................................................594
Configuration...............................................................................598
Measuretargetpoints..............................................................623
Methods .........................................................................................607
Propertiesofpoints ..................................................................594
Resection .......................................................................................626
Setstationandazimuth...........................................................609
Setstationandbacksight........................................................617
SHIFT................................................................................................. 42,48
Icon .....................................................................................................52
SHIFTUSER ............................................................................................23
Shift,Rotate&Scale
R9|747
COGOcalculationmethod.......................................................544
COGO,matchpoints...................................................................558
Sideshot,traverseCOGOcalculation.................... 489,490,496
SkippointinStakeout .....................................................................679
SmartCodes
Assigningcodes...........................................................................174
CodeBlock.....................................................................................173
Configuration ...............................................................................169
CopyingCodeBlock...................................................................175
CreatingCodeBlock ..................................................................173
Measuringlines/areas .............................................................176
Measuringpoints........................................................................176
Softwareupload.................................................................................341
Sort
Codes
Codelistmanagement........................................................142
Datamanagement ...............................................................127
Sortsettings,define............................................................................ 80
Sorting
Points...............................................................................................118
Points,linesandareas..............................................................118
Source....................................................................................................... 87
SSHOT.....................................................................................................496
Stakedout
Symbol .............................................................................................. 54
Stakedpoints
Averaging.......................................................................................649
Coding.............................................................................................647
Properties .....................................................................................648
Stakeout
Applicationprogram ................................................................646
Configuration...............................................................................653
Differencelimitexceeded.......................................................679
Elementsofgraphicaldisplay ..............................................663
Orthogonalmode .......................................................................667
Orthogonalmodestep‐by‐step ............................................672
Polarmode....................................................................................675
Polarmodestep‐by‐step ........................................................678
Restakepoint...............................................................................679
Skippoint ......................................................................................679
Standarddeviation..............................................................................89
StandardEDM ....................................................................................420
Standardmode...................................................................................347
StandardRS232.................................................................................321
Standingaxis.......................................................................................374
Startdate ..............................................................................................110
Starttime..............................................................................................110
Startup..................................................................................................300
STAT .......................................................................................................406
Stationsetupbegin ..........................................................................595
Station,orientateto
Stakeout .........................................................................................654
Status......................................................................................................406
Reflector ...........................................................................................48
R9|748
StonexTools
Creating
Codes ........................................................................................132
Creation
Quickcodes ............................................................................152
STORD ....................................................................................................180
Subclass.................................................................................................. 86
Subdirectories,CompactFlashcard...........................................729
Summaryoferrorstobeadjustedelectronically................378
SureBeam..............................................................................................428
Survey ...................................................................................................... 55
Access..............................................................................................682
Applicationprogram
Autopoints.............................................................................689
General.....................................................................................682
Remotepoint.........................................................................716
Defaultscreen..............................................................................684
Points...............................................................................................684
Status ...............................................................................................407
Surveyremotepoint ........................................................................718
SurveySettings...................................................................................225
Symbols ................................................................................................... 54
Symbols,MapViewpoints .............................................................446
SynchroTrackEDM...........................................................................421
Systemfiles,directory.....................................................................730
Systeminformation,status ................................................ 407,413
Systemlanguage
Select ...............................................................................................293
Systemlanguage,upload ...............................................................343
SystemRAM ........................................................................................728
SystemRAMcodelist.......................................................................136
SYSTM....................................................................................................337
T
Targetpoint,find ..............................................................................643
TelescopeAccessories ....................................................................277
Text .........................................................................................................294
Thematiccoding
Recordcodes................................................................................150
Selectcodes ..................................................................................150
Withcodelist................................................................................153
Withoutcodelist .........................................................................157
Thematicalcode ................................................................................131
Thematicalcoding ............................................................................150
Tilt
Longitudinal(l)...........................................................................418
Transversal(t) ............................................................................418
Tiltingaxis ...........................................................................................374
Adjustment(a) ............................................................................390
Error(a).........................................................................................375
Timestamp..........................................................................................151
Tools..........................................................................................................56
Touchscreen..........................................................................................46
Touchscreenon,off.........................................................................295
R9|749
TPSCorrections .................................................................................268
Tracking,EDMtype..........................................................................420
Transfer
From/toCompactFlashcard .................................................339
From/tointernalmemory......................................................340
From/tosystemRAM ...............................................................340
Objects ............................................................................................339
Objects,basicprocedure .........................................................339
Traverse
COGOcalculationmethod.......................................................489
Withazimuth/bearing .............................................................491
Triplet,coordinate.............................................................................. 84
Truezeroprismsystem .................................................................203
Typeinnewattribute......................................................................145
U
Units........................................................................................................280
Unlock,keyboard ................................................................................ 47
Upload
Applicationprograms...............................................................341
Firmware .......................................................................................345
Licencekeyfile ............................................................................369
Systemfiles ...................................................................................341
Systemlanguage .........................................................................343
USER ......................................................................................................... 42
User .........................................................................................................291
Userdefinedmenu ............................................................................. 21
Userinterface ........................................................................................42
Usermenu,configuration..............................................................291
USER,description ................................................................................21
V
V‐Angle,Quickset................................................................................25
Versionsofsystemfirmware.......................................................413
Verticalindexerror(i) ...................................................................376
View
File....................................................................................................366
Points,lines,areas,freecodestoredinjob .......................80
Viewcurrentadjustmenterrors ................................................399
Volume,displayformat ..................................................................283
W
Wildcard ...............................................................................................121
Wizard .........................................................................................193,289
Wizardmode ......................................................................................289
Z
Zoom.......................................................................................................441
Softkey............................................................................................441
Window..........................................................................................445
R9|750
Stonex®R9
Originaltext
©2012Stonex®,Monza,Italy
Stonex®
www.stonexeurope.com